BE Civil

ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES

REGULATIONS 2021
B. E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
Graduates of the programme B E Civil Engineering will
I. Gain knowledge and skills in Civil engineering which will enable them to have a career and
professional accomplishment in the public or private sector organizations
II. Become consultants on complex real life Civil Engineering problems related to
Infrastructure development especially housing, construction, water supply, sewerage,transport,
spatial planning.
III. Become entrepreneurs and develop processes and technologies to meet desired infrastructure
needs of society and formulate solutions that are technically sound, Economically feasible,
and socially acceptable.
IV. Perform investigation for solving Civil Engineering problems by conducting research using
modern equipment and software tools.
V. Function in multi-disciplinary teams and advocate policies, systems, processes andequipment
to support civil engineering
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)
PO# Graduate Attribute
1 Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2 Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
Mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3 Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with
appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
4 Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge
and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data,
and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5 Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources,
and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6 The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge
to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
1
7 Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and
need for sustainable development.
8 Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
9 Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member
or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10 Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
11 Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12 Life-long Learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability
to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

On successful completion of the Civil Engineering Degree programme, the Graduates shall exhibit
the following:
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering discipline

Demonstrate in-depth knowledge of Civil Engineering discipline, with an ability to evaluate,
analyze and synthesize existing and newknowledge.
PSO2 Critical analysis ofCivil Engineering problems andinnovation

Critically analyze complex Civil Engineering problems, apply independent judgment for
synthesizing information and make innovative advances in a theoretical, practical and policy
context.
PSO3 Conceptualizationand evaluation of engineering solutions to Civil Engineering

Issues Conceptualize and solve Civil Engineering problems, evaluate potential solutions and
arrive at technically feasible, economically viable and environmentally sound solutions with
due consideration of health, safety, and socio cultural factors
PEO / PO Mapping:
POs PSOs
PEOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
I 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
II 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
III 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
IV 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
V 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
2
Mapping of Course Outcome and Programme Outcome
Course Name PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
Professional English - I 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -
Matrices and Calculus 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
SEMESTER I
Engineering Physics 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -

Engineering Chemistry 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
Problem Solving and Python Programming 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of Tamils
Problem Solving and Python Programming
2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
Laboratory
3 2.4 2.6 1 1
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
$
English Laboratory 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
Professional English - II 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -
Statistics and Numerical Methods 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Physics for Civil Engineering 3 1.75 2 2 1.2 1.4
SEMESTER II
Basic Electrical, Electronics and Instrumentation

2 1 1 1 - - -
Engineering
YEAR I
Engineering Graphics 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் / Tamils and Technology
NCC Credit Course Level 1#
Engineering Practices Laboratory 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Basic Electrical, Electronics and
1.6 1.4 0.8 1.6 1.2 1.6
Instrumentation Engineering Laboratory
Communication Laboratory / Foreign 2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
Language $
Transforms and Partial Differential Equations 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
SEMESTER III
Engineering Mechanics 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
Fluid Mechanics 3 2 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
Surveying and Levelling 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
Construction Materials and Technology 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 2
YEAR II
Water Supply and Waste Water Engineering 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2

Surveying and Levelling Laboratory 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3
Water and Waste Water Analysis Laboratory 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2
Professional Development
3
Applied Hydraulics Engineering 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
Strength of Materials 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 3
SEMESTER IV
Concrete Technology 3 1 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 2 3
Soil Mechanics 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 2 3
2 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
YEAR II
Highway and Railway Engineering 1

Environmental Sciences and Sustainability** 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
Hydraulic Engineering Laboratory 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
Materials Testing Laboratory 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 3 2 2
Soil Mechanics Laboratory 1 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 3 2 3 3
Design of Reinforced Concrete Structural
3 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
SEMESTER V
Elements
Structural Analysis I 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 1 3 3 3
Foundation Engineering 2 3 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 3 3
Professional Elective I
Professional Elective II
Professional Elective III
Mandatory Course-I&
Highway Engineering Laboratory 3 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 2
Survey Camp (2 weeks) 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
Design of Steel Structural Elements 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3
SEMESTER VI
Structural Analysis II 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 1 3 3 3
Engineering Geology 2 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
YEAR III
Professional Elective IV
Professional Elective V
Professional Elective VI
Open Elective – I*
Mandatory Course-II&
Building Drawing and Detailing Laboratory 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2
4
Estimation, Costing and Valuation
3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Engineering
SEMESTER VII
Hydrology and Irrigation Engineering 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3
Human Values and Ethics
Total Quality Management 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3
Open Elective – II**
Open Elective – III***
Open Elective – IV***
Project Work/Internship 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
YEAR IV
SEMESTER VIII
1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation
5
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES : VERTICALS
S.No.
Course Title PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1. Concrete Structures 3 3 2 3 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 3 3
2. Steel Structures 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
3. Prefabricated Structures 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
4. Prestressed Concrete
3 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 2
Structures
5. Rehabilitation/Heritage
3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
Restoration
6. Dynamics and
Earthquake Resistant 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
Structures
7. Introduction to Finite
3 3 2 2 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 2
Element Method
8. Formwork Engineering 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 2
9. Construction Equipment
2 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
And Machinery
10. Sustainable Construction
and Lean Construction 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3
11. Digitalized Construction
Laboratory 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3
12. Construction Management
and Safety 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 2 3 3 1 2 2 3
13. Advanced Construction
2 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 3 3
Techniques
14. Energy Efficient Buildings 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 3
15. Geoenvironmental
Engineering 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3
16. Ground Improvement
2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3
Techniques
17. Soil Dynamics and
Machine Foundations 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 3 3 3 3
18. Rock Mechanics 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 2 3
19. Earth and Earth
Retaining Structures 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
6
20. Pile Foundation 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 2 3
21. Tunneling Engineering 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 3
22. Total Station and GPS
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Surveying
23. Remote Sensing concepts 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3
24. Satellite Image Processing 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3
25. Cartography and GIS 3 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
26. Photogrammetry 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
27. Airborne and Terrestrial
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Laser mapping
28. Hydrographic Surveying 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
29. Airports and Harbours 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
30. Traffic Engineering and
3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 3
Management
31. Urban Planning and
3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2
Development
32. Smart cities 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3
33. Intelligent Transport
2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Systems
34. Pavement Engineering 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 2
35. Transportation Planning
2 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
Process
36. Climate Change Adaptation
2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 3
and Mitigation
37. Air and Noise Pollution
2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
Control Engineering
38. Environmental Impact
3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2
Assessment
39. Industrial Wastewater
2 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3
Management
40. Solid and Hazardous
Waste Management 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 2 3
41. Environmental Policy and
Legislations 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 2 3 2 2
42. Environment Health and
2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
Safety
7
43. Participatory Water
Resources Management 2 2 3 2 1 2 2 3 2 1 1 3 3 1 3
44. Groundwater Engineering 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
45. Water Resources Systems
3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3
Engineering
46. Watershed Conservation
2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
and Management
47. Integrated Water
2 1 2 2 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2
Resources Management
48. Urban Water Infrastructure 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 3 2 2 3 2 2
49. Water Quality and
3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3
Management
50. Ocean Wave Dynamics 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 2
51. Marine Geotechnical
3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 2 2
Engineering
52. Coastal Engineering 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
53. Off shore Structures 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 2 2
54. Port and Harbour
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
Engineering
55. Coastal Hazards and
2 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2
Mitigation
56. Coastal Zone Management
2 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 3 3
and Remote Sensing
57. Steel Concrete Composite
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 3
Structures
58. Finance For Engineers 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1
59. Earth and Rockfill Dams 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 2 3
60. Computational Fluid
3 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3
Dynamics
61. Rainwater Harvesting 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
62. Transport and Environment 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 3
63. Environmental Quality
3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Monitoring
8
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON-AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES
REGULATIONS 2021
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B. E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI FOR SEMESTERS I TO VIII
SEMESTER I
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE-
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. IP3151 Induction Programme - - - - - 0
THEORY
2. HS3152 Professional English - I HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MA3151 Matrices and Calculus BSC 3 1 0 4 4
4. PH3151 Engineering Physics BSC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CY3151 Engineering Chemistry BSC 3 0 0 3 3
6. GE3151 Problem Solving and Python
ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
7. GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of Tamils HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
PRACTICALS
8. GE3171 Problem Solving and Python
ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Programming Laboratory
9. BS3171 Physics and Chemistry
BSC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
10. GE3172 English Laboratory$ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 16 1 10 27 22
$ Skill Based Course
SEMESTER II
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE-
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS3252 Professional English - II HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
2. MA3251 Statistics and Numerical
BSC 3 1 0 4 4
Methods
3. PH3201 Physics for Civil Engineering BSC 3 0 0 3 3
4. BE3252 Basic Electrical, Electronics and
ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Instrumentation Engineering
5. GE3251 Engineering Graphics ESC 2 0 4 6 4
6. NCC Credit Course Level 1# - 2 0 0 2 2#
7. GE3252 தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் / HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
Tamils and Technology
PRACTICALS
8. GE3271 Engineering Practices Laboratory ESC 0 0 4 4 2
9. BE3272 Basic Electrical, Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
10. GE3272 Communication Laboratory /
EEC 0 0 4 4 2
Foreign Language $
TOTAL 14 1 16 31 23
# NCC Credit Course level 1 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be recorded
in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA
9
SEMESTER III
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA3351 Transforms and Partial
BSC 3 1 0 4 4
Differential Equations
2. ME3351 Engineering Mechanics ESC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CE3301 Fluid Mechanics PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CE3302 Construction Materials and PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
5. CE3303 Water Supply and Wastewater PCC 4 0 0 4 4
Engineering
6. CE3351 Surveying and Levelling PCC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
7. CE3361 Surveying and Levelling PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
8. CE3311 Water and Wastewater PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Analysis Laboratory
9. GE3361 Professional Development $ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 19 1 8 28 24
SEMESTER IV
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. CE3401 Applied Hydraulics PCC 3 1 0 4 4
Engineering
2. CE3402 Strength of Materials PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CE3403 Concrete Technology PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CE3404 Soil Mechanics PCC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CE3405 Highway and Railway PCC 3
3 0 0 3
Engineering
6. GE3451 Environmental Sciences and
BSC 2 0 0 2 2
Sustainability
7. NCC Credit Course Level 2# 3 0 0 3 3#
PRACTICALS
8. CE3411 Hydraulic Engineering PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
9. CE3412 Materials Testing Laboratory PCC 0 0 4 4 2
10. CE3413 Soil Mechanics Laboratory PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
TOTAL 17 1 10 28 23
# NCC Credit Course level 2 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA
10
SEMESTER V
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. CE3501 Design of Reinforced
Concrete Structural PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Elements
2. CE3502 Structural Analysis I PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CE3503 Foundation Engineering PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective I PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective II PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Professional Elective III PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Mandatory Course-I& MC 3 0 0 3 0
PRACTICALS
8. CE3511 Highway Engineering PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
9. CE3512 Survey Camp (2 weeks) EEC 0 0 0 0 1
TOTAL 21 0 4 25 21
& Mandatory Course-I is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MC-I)
SEMESTER VI
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. CE3601 Design of Steel Structural
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Elements
2. CE3602 Structural Analysis II PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. AG3601 Engineering Geology PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective IV PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective V PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Professional Elective VI PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Open Elective – I* OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. Mandatory Course-II& MC 3 0 0 3 0
9. NCC Credit Course
3 0 0 3 3#
Level 3#
PRACTICALS
10. CE3611 Building Drawing and
PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Detailing Laboratory
TOTAL 24 0 4 28 23
*Open Elective – I shall be chosen from the emerging technologies
& Mandatory Course-II is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MC-II)
# NCC Credit Course level 3 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be recorded
in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA
11
SEMESTER VII/VIII*
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. CE3701 Estimation, Costing and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Valuation Engineering
2. CE3702 Hydrology and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Irrigation Engineering
3. GE3791 Human Values and
HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
Ethics
4. GE3752 Total Quality
HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
5. Open Elective – II** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Open Elective – III*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Open Elective – IV*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
TOTAL 19 0 2 21 20
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered
during semester VIII
**Open Elective – II shall be chosen from the emerging technologies
***Open Elective III and IV (Shall be chosen from the list of open electives offered by other Programmes
SEMESTER VIII/VII*
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. CE3811 Project Work/Internship EEC 0 0 20 20 10
TOTAL 0 0 20 20 10
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered
during semester VIII
TOTAL CREDITS: 166
MANDATORY COURSES I
PERIODS TOTAL
S. CATE
COURSE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
CODE L T P PERIODS
1. MX3081 Introduction to Women MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Gender Studies
2. MX3082 Elements of Literature MC 3 0 0 3 0
3. MX3083 Film Appreciation MC 3 0 0 3 0
4. MX3084 Disaster Risk Reduction MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Management
12
MANDATORY COURSES II
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. MX3085 Well Being with MC 3 0 0 3 0
Traditional Practices -
Yoga, Ayurveda and
Siddha
2. MX3086 History of Science and MC 3 0 0 3 0
Technology in India
3. MX3087 Political and Economic MC 3 0 0 3 0
Thought for a Humane
Society
4. MX3088 State, Nation Building MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Politics in India
5. MX3089 Industrial Safety MC 3 0 0 3 0
13
VERTICAL II
VERTICAL V VERTICAL VIII VERTICAL IX
VERTICAL I (Construction VERTICAL III VERTICAL IV VERTICAL VI VERTICAL VII
(Transportation (Ocean (Diversified
(Structures) techniques and (Geotechnical) Geo-Informatics) (Environment) (Water Resources)
infrastructure) Engineering) Course)
Practices)
Concrete Formwork Geo- Total Station and Airports and Climate Change Participatory Water Ocean Wave Steel
Structures Engineering Environmental GPS Surveying Harbours Adaptation and Resources Dynamics Concrete
Engineering Mitigation Management Composite
Structures
Steel Construction Ground Remote Sensing Traffic Air and Noise Groundwater Marine Finance For
Structures Equipment and Improvement Concepts Engineering and Pollution Control Engineering Geotechnical Engineers
Machinery Techniques Management Engineering Engineering
Prefabricated Sustainable Soil Dynamics Satellite Image Urban Planning Environmental Water Resources Coastal Earth and
Structures Construction and Machine Processing and Impact Systems Engineering Rockfill Dams
and Lean Foundations Development Assessment Engineering
Construction
Prestressed Digitalized Rock Mechanics Cartography and Smart cities Industrial Watershed Off shore Computational
Concrete Construction GIS Wastewater Conservation and Structures Fluid
Structures Lab Management Management Dynamics
Rehabilitation/ Construction Earth and Earth Photogrammetry Intelligent Solid and Integrated Water Port and Rainwater
Heritage Management Retaining Transport Hazardous Resources Harbour Harvesting
Restoration and Safety Structures Systems Waste Management Engineering
Management
Dynamics and Advanced Pile Foundation Airborne and Pavement Environmental Urban Water Coastal Hazards Transport and
Earthquake Construction Terrestrial laser Engineering Policy and Infrastructure and Mitigation Environment
Resistant Techniques mapping Legislations
Structures
Introduction to Energy Efficient Tunneling Hydrographic Transportation Environment, Water Quality and Coastal Zone Environmental
Finite Element Buildings Engineering Surveying planning Health and Management Management quality
Method Process Safety and Remote Monitoring
Sensing
Registration of Professional Elective Courses from Verticals:
Professional Elective Courses will be registered in Semesters V and VI. These courses are listed in groups called verticals that represent a particular area of specialisation / diversified
group. Students are permitted to choose all the Professional Electives from a particular vertical or from different verticals. Further, only one Professional Elective course shall be chosen
in a semester horizontally (row-wise). However, two courses are permitted from the same row, provided one course is enrolled in Semester V and another in semester VI.
The registration of courses for B.E./B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree shall be done from Semester V to VIII. The procedure for registration of courses explained above shall be followed
for the courses of B.E/B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree also. For more details on B.E./B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree refer to the Regulations 2021, Clause 4.10. (Amendments)
14
VERTICAL I: STRUCTURES
COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

S. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CE3001 Concrete Structures PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CE3002 Steel Structures PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CE3003 Prefabricated Structures PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CE3004 Prestressed Concrete PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Structures
5. CE3005 Rehabilitation/Heritage PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Restoration
6. CE3006 Dynamics and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Earthquake Resistant
Structures
7. CE3007 Introduction to Finite PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Element Method
VERTICAL II: CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES AND PRACTICES

S. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CE3008 Formwork Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CE3009 Construction Equipment PEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Machinery
3. CE3010 Sustainable Construction PEC 3 0 0 3 3
And Lean Construction
4. CE3011 Digitalized Construction PEC 0 0 6 6 3
Lab
5. CE3012 Construction PEC 2 0 2 4 3
Management and Safety
6. CE3013 Advanced Construction PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Techniques
7. CE3014 Energy Efficient Buildings PEC 3 0 0 3 3
VERTICAL III: GEOTECHNICAL

S. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CE3015 Geoenvironmental PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
2. CE3016 Ground Improvement PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Techniques
3. CE3017 Soil Dynamics and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Machine Foundations
4. CE3018 Rock Mechanics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CE3019 Earth and Earth Retaining PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Structures
6. CE3020 Pile Foundation PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. CE3021 Tunneling Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
15
VERTICAL IV: GEO-INFORMATICS

S. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. GI3492 Total Station and GPS PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Surveying
2. CE3022 Remote Sensing Concepts PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CE3023 Satellite Image Processing PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. GI3491 Cartography and GIS PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. GI3391 Photogrammetry PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. GI3691 Airborne and Terrestrial PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Laser Mapping
7. CE3024 Hydrographic Surveying PEC 3 0 0 3 3
VERTICAL V: TRANSPORTATION INFRASTRUCTURE

S. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CE3025 Airports and Harbours PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CE3026 Traffic Engineering and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. CE3027 Urban Planning and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
4. CE3028 Smart Cities PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CE3029 Intelligent Transport PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Systems
6. CE3030 Pavement Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. CE3031 Transportation Planning PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Process
VERTICAL VI: ENVIRONMENT

S. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CE3032 Climate Change PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Adaptation and Mitigation
2. CCE331 Air and Noise Pollution PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control Engineering
3. CCE333 Environmental Impact PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Assessment
4. CCE334 Industrial Wastewater PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
5. CE3033 Solid and Hazardous PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Waste Management
6. CE3034 Environmental Policy and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Legislations
7. CCE332 Environmental Health and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Safety
16
VERTICAL VII: WATER RESOURCES
S. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CE3035 Participatory Water PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CE3036 Ground Water Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CE3037 Water Resources Systems PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
4. CE3038 Watershed Conservation PEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Management
5. CE3039 Integrated Water PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CE3040 Urban Water Infrastructure PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. CE3041 Water Quality and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
VERTICAL VIII: OCEAN ENGINEERING

S. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CE3042 Ocean Wave Dynamics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CE3043 Marine Geotechnical PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
3. CE3044 Coastal Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4 CE3045 Offshore Structures PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5 CE3046 Port and Harbour PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
6 CE3047 Coastal Hazards and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Mitigation
7 CE3048 Coastal Zone PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management and Remote
Sensing
VERTICAL IX: DIVERSIFIED COURSES

S. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CE3049 Steel Concrete PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Composite Structures
2. CE3050 Finance for Engineers PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CE3051 Earth and Rockfill Dams PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4 CE3052 Computational Fluid PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Dynamics
5 CE3053 Rainwater Harvesting PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6 CE3054 Transport and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Environment
7 CE3055 Environmental Quality PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Monitoring
17
OPEN ELECTIVES
(Students shall choose the open elective courses, such that the course contents are not
similar to any other course contents/title under other course categories)
OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

(EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES)
To be offered other than Faculty of Information and Communication Engineering
SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OCS351 Artificial Intelligence and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Machine Learning
Fundamentals
2. OCS352 IoT Concepts and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Applications
3. OCS353 Data Science Fundamentals OEC 2 0 2 4 3
4. CCS333 Augmented Reality /Virtual OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Reality
OPEN ELECTIVES – III

SL. CATE
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS351 English for Competitive OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Examinations
2. OMG352 NGOs and Sustainable OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
3. OMG353 Democracy and Good OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Governance
4. CME365 Renewable Energy OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technologies
5. OME354 Applied Design Thinking OEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. MF3003 Reverse Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. OPR351 Sustainable Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. AU3791 Electric and Hybrid Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
9. OAS352 Space Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
10. OIM351 Industrial Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
11. OIE354 Quality Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
12. OSF351 Fire Safety Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
13. OML351 Introduction to Non- OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Destructive Testing
14. OMR351 Mechatronics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15. ORA351 Foundation of Robotics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. OAE352 Fundamentals of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Aeronautical Engineering
17. OGI351 Remote Sensing Concepts OEC 3 0 0 3 3
18. OAI351 Urban Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19. OEN351 Drinking Water Supply and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Treatment
20. OEE352 Electric Vehicle Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
18
21. OEI353 Introduction to PLC OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
22. OCH351 Nano Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
23. OCH352 Functional Materials OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. OFD352 Traditional Indian Foods OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. OFD353 Introduction to Food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Processing
26. OPY352 IPR for Pharma Industry OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. OTT351 Basics of Textile Finishing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
28. OTT352 Industrial Engineering for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Garment Industry
29. OTT353 Basics of Textile Manufacture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
30. OPE351 Introduction to Petroleum OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Refining and Petrochemicals
31. CPE334 Energy Conservation and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
32. OPT351 Basics of Plastics Processing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
33. OEC351 Signals and Systems OEC 3 0 0 3 3
34. OEC352 Fundamentals of Electronic OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Devices and Circuits
35. CBM348 Foundation Skills in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Integrated Product
Development
36. CBM333 Assistive Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
37. OMA352 Operations Research OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. OMA353 Algebra and Number Theory OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OMA354 Linear Algebra OEC 3 0 0 3 3
40. OBT352 Basics of Microbial OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
41. OBT353 Basics of Biomolecules OEC 3 0 0 3 3
42. OBT354 Fundamentals of Cell and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Molecular Biology
OPEN ELECTIVES – IV

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS352 Project Report Writing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. OMA355 Advanced Numerical OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Methods
3. OMA356 Random Processes OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. OMA357 Queuing and Reliability OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Modelling
5. OMG354 Production and Operations OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Entrepreneurs
6. OMG355 Multivariate Data Analysis OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. OME352 Additive Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. CME343 New Product Development OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19
9. OME355 Industrial Design & Rapid OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Prototyping Techniques
10. MF3010 Micro and Precision OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
11. OMF354 Cost Management of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering Projects
12. AU3002 Batteries and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management System
13. AU3008 Sensors and Actuators OEC 3 0 0 3 3
14. OAS353 Space Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15. OIM352 Management Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. OIM353 Production Planning and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control
17. OIE353 Operations Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
18. OSF352 Industrial Hygiene OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19. OSF353 Chemical Process Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
20. OML352 Electrical, Electronic and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Magnetic Materials
21. OML353 Nanomaterials and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
22. OMR352 Hydraulics and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Pneumatics
23. OMR353 Sensors OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. ORA352 Concepts in Mobile OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Robots
25. MV3501 Marine Propulsion OEC 3 0 0 3 3
26. OMV351 Marine Merchant Vessels OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. OMV352 Elements of Marine OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
28. CRA332 Drone Technologies OEC 3 0 0 3 3
29. OGI352 Geographical Information OEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
30. OAI352 Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
Development
31. OEN352 Biodiversity Conservation OEC 3 0 0 3 3
32. OEE353 Introduction to Control OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Systems
33. OEI354 Introduction to Industrial OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Automation Systems
34. OCH353 Energy Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
35. OCH354 Surface Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
36. OFD354 Fundamentals of Food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
37. OFD355 Food safety and Quality OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Regulations
38. OPY353 Nutraceuticals OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OTT354 Basics of Dyeing and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Printing
40. FT3201 Fibre Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
41. OTT355 Garment Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
42. OPE353 Industrial Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
43. OPE354 Unit Operations in Petro OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chemical Industries
20
44. OPT352 Plastic Materials for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineers
45. OPT353 Properties and Testing of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Plastics
46. OEC353 VLSI Design OEC 3 0 0 3 3
47. CBM370 Wearable Devices OEC 3 0 0 3 3
48. CBM356 Medical Informatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
49. OBT355 Biotechnology for Waste OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
50. OBT356 Lifestyle Diseases OEC 3 0 0 3 3
51. OBT357 Biotechnology in Health OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Care
SUMMARY
CREDITS PER SEMESTER

Subject CREDITS
S.No.
Area I II III IV V VI VII/VIII VIII/VII TOTAL
1. HSMC 4 3 5 12
2. BSC 12 7 4 2 25
3. ESC 5 11 3 19
4. PCC 16 21 11 11 6 65
5. PEC 9 9 18
6. OEC 3 9 12
7. EEC 1 2 1 1 10 15
Total 22 23 24 23 21 23 20 10 166
8. Mandatory  
Course
(Non credit)
21
ENROLLMENT FOR B.E. / B. TECH. (HONOURS) / MINOR DEGREE (OPTIONAL)
A student can also optionally register for additional courses (18 credits) and become eligible for the
award of B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours) or Minor degree.
For B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours), a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from
semester V onwards. These courses shall be from the same vertical or a combination of different
verticals of the same programme of study only.
For minor degree, a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from semester
V onwards. All these courses have to be in a particular vertical from any one of the other
programmes, Moreover, for minor degree the student can register for courses from any one of the
following verticals also.
Complete details are available in clause 4.10 (Amendments) of Regulations 2021.
VERTICALS FOR MINOR DEGREE (In addition to all the verticals of other programmes)
VERTICAL I VERTICAL II VERTICAL III VERTICAL IV VERTICAL V

Business
Fintech and Public Environment and
Entrepreneurship Data
Block Chain Administration Sustainability
Analytics
Financial Foundations of Principles of Statistics for Sustainable
Management Entrepreneurship Public Management infrastructure
Administration Development
Fundamentals Team Building and Constitution of Datamining for Sustainable
of Investment Leadership India Business Agriculture and
Management for Intelligence Environmental
Business Management
Banking, Creativity and Public Personnel Human Sustainable Bio
Financial Innovation in Administration Resource Materials
Services and Entrepreneurship Analytics
Insurance
Introduction to Principles of Administrative Marketing and Materials for
Blockchain Marketing Theories Social Media Energy
and its Management for Web Analytics Sustainability
Applications Business
Fintech Human Resource Indian Operation and Green Technology
Personal Management for Administrative Supply Chain
Finance and Entrepreneurship System Analytics
Payments
Introduction to Financing New Public Policy Financial Environmental
Fintech Business Ventures Administration Analytics Quality Monitoring
and Analysis
- - - - Integrated Energy
Planning for
Sustainable
Development
- - - - Energy Efficiency
for Sustainable
Development
22
(Choice of courses for Minor degree is to be made from any one vertical of other
programmes or from anyone of the following verticals)
VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

PERIODS
TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG331 Financial
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG332 Fundamentals of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Investment
3. CMG333 Banking, Financial
Services and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Insurance
4. CMG334 Introduction to
Blockchain and its PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
5. CMG335 Fintech Personal
Finance and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Payments
6. CMG336 Introduction to
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Fintech
VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP
PERIODS TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG337 Foundations of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
2. CMG338 Team Building and
Leadership
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Business
3. CMG339 Creativity and
Innovation in PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
4. CMG340 Principles of
Marketing
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Business
5. CMG341 Human Resource
Management for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
6. CMG342 Financing New
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Ventures
23
VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

SL. CATE PER WEEK
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG343 Principles of Public
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
2. CMG344 Constitution of India PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CMG345 Public Personnel
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
4. CMG346 Administrative Theories PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CMG347 Indian Administrative
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
6. CMG348 Public Policy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS
SL. CATE
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG349 Statistics for
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG350 Datamining for
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Intelligence
3. CMG351 Human Resource
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analytics
4. CMG352 Marketing and Social
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Media Web Analytics
5. CMG353 Operation and Supply
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chain Analytics
6. CMG354 Financial Analytics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

SL. CATE CREDIT
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT
NO. GORY S
L T P PERIODS
Sustainable infrastructure
1. CES331 PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
2. CES332 Sustainable Agriculture
and Environmental PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. CES333 Sustainable Bio Materials PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CES334 Materials for Energy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainability
5. CES335 Green Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CES336 Environmental Quality
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Monitoring and Analysis
7. CES337 Integrated Energy
Planning for Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
8. CES338 Energy Efficiency for
Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
24
IP3151 INDUCTION PROGRAMME
This is a mandatory 2 week programme to be conducted as soon as the students enter the institution.
Normal classes start only after the induction program is over.
The induction programme has been introduced by AICTE with the following objective:
“Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of

admission, have a holistic outlook, and have a desire to work for national needs and beyond. The
graduating student must have knowledge and skills in the area of his/her study. However, he/she
must also have broad understanding of society and relationships. Character needs to be nurtured
as an essential quality by which he/she would understand and fulfill his/her responsibility as an
engineer, a citizen and a human being. Besides the above, several meta-skills and underlying values
are needed.”
“One will have to work closely with the newly joined students in making them feel comfortable, allow
them to explore their academic interests and activities, reduce competition and make them work for
excellence, promote bonding within them, build relations between teachers and students, give a
broader view of life, and build character. “
Hence, the purpose of this programme is to make the students feel comfortable in their new
environment, open them up, set a healthy daily routine, create bonding in the batch as well as
between faculty and students, develop awareness, sensitivity and understanding of the self, people
around them, society at large, and nature.
The following are the activities under the induction program in which the student would be fully
engaged throughout the day for the entire duration of the program.
(i) Physical Activity
This would involve a daily routine of physical activity with games and sports, yoga, gardening, etc.
(ii) Creative Arts
Every student would choose one skill related to the arts whether visual arts or performing arts.
Examples are painting, sculpture, pottery, music, dance etc. The student would pursue it everyday
for the duration of the program. These would allow for creative expression. It would develop a sense
of aesthetics and
also enhance creativity which would, hopefully, grow into engineering design later.
(iii) Universal Human Values
This is the anchoring activity of the Induction Programme. It gets the student to explore oneself and
allows one to experience the joy of learning, stand up to peer pressure, take decisions with courage,
be aware of relationships with colleagues and supporting stay in the hostel and department, be
sensitive to others, etc. A module in Universal Human Values provides the base. Methodology of
teaching this content is extremely important. It must not be through do's and dont's, but get students
to explore and think by engaging them in a dialogue. It is best taught through group discussions and
real life activities rather than lecturing.
Discussions would be conducted in small groups of about 20 students with a faculty
mentor each. It would be effective that the faculty mentor assigned is also the faculty advisor for the
student for the full duration of the UG programme.
(iv) Literary Activity
Literary activity would encompass reading, writing and possibly, debating, enacting a play etc.
25
(v) Proficiency Modules
This would address some lacunas that students might have, for example, English, computer
familiarity etc.
(vi) Lectures by Eminent People
Motivational lectures by eminent people from all walks of life should be arranged to give the students
exposure to people who are socially active or in public life.
(vii) Visits to Local Area
A couple of visits to the landmarks of the city, or a hospital or orphanage could be organized. This
would familiarize them with the area as well as expose them to the under privileged.
(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations
They should be told about what getting into a branch or department means what role it plays in
society, through its technology. They should also be shown the laboratories, workshops & other
facilities.
(ix) Department Specific Activities
About a week can be spent in introducing activities (games, quizzes, social interactions, small
experiments, design thinking etc.) that are relevant to the particular branch of
Engineering/Technology/Architecture that can serve as a motivation and kindle interest in building
things (become a maker) in that particular field. This can be conducted in the form of a workshop.
For example, CSE and IT students may be introduced to activities that kindle computational thinking,
and get them to build simple games. ECE students may be introduced to building simple circuits as
an extension of their knowledge in Science, and so on. Students may be asked to build stuff using
their knowledge of science.
Induction Programme is totally an activity based programme and therefore there shall be no
tests / assessments during this programme.
References:
Guide to Induction program from AICTE
HS3152 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH I LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To learn to use basic grammatic structures in suitable contexts
 To acquire lexical competence and use them appropriately in a sentence and understand
their meaning in a text
 To help learners use language effectively in professional contexts
 To develop learners’ ability to read and write complex texts, summaries, articles, blogs,
definitions, essays and user manuals.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 1

What is effective communication? (Explain using activities) Why is communication critical for
excellence during study, research and work?What are the seven C’s of effective
communication?What are key language skills?What is effective listening? What does it involve?What
is effective speaking?What does it mean to be an excellent reader? What should you be able to
do?What is effective writing? How does one develop language and communication skills?What does
26
the course focus on? How are communication and language skills going to be enhanced during this
course? What do you as a learner need to do to enhance your English language and communication
skills to get the best out of this course?
INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 8

Reading - Reading brochures (technical context), telephone messages / social media messages
relevant to technical contexts and emails. Writing - Writing emails / letters introducing oneself.
Grammar - Present Tense ( simple and progressive); Question types: Wh/ Yes or No/ and Tags.
Vocabulary - Synonyms; One word substitution; Abbreviations & Acronyms (as used in technical
contexts).
UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 9

Reading - Reading biographies, travelogues, newspaper reports, Excerpts from literature, and travel
& technical blogs. Writing - Guided writing-- Paragraph writing Short Report on an event (field trip
etc.) Grammar –Past tense (simple); Subject-Verb Agreement; and Prepositions. Vocabulary - Word
forms (prefixes& suffixes); Synonyms and Antonyms. Phrasal verbs.
UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 9

Reading – Reading advertisements, gadget reviews; user manuals. Writing - Writing definitions;
instructions; and Product /Process description. Grammar - Imperatives; Adjectives; Degrees of
comparison; Present & Past Perfect Tenses. Vocabulary - Compound Nouns, Homonyms; and
Homophones, discourse markers (connectives & sequence words).
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 9

Reading – Newspaper articles; Journal reports –and Non Verbal Communcation ( tables, pie charts
etc,. ). Writing – Note-making / Note-taking (*Study skills to be taught, not tested); Writing
recommendations; Transferring information from non verbal ( chart , graph etc, to verbal mode)
Grammar – Articles; Pronouns - Possessive & Relative pronouns. Vocabulary - Collocations; Fixed
/ Semi fixed expressions.
UNIT V EXPRESSION 9
Reading – Reading editorials; and Opinion Blogs; Writing – Essay Writing (Descriptive or narrative).
Grammar – Future Tenses, Punctuation; Negation (Statements & Questions); and Simple,
Compound & Complex Sentences. Vocabulary - Cause & Effect Expressions – Content vs Function
words.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, learners will be able
CO1: To use appropriate words in a professional context
CO2: To gain understanding of basic grammatical structures and use them in right context.
CO3: To read and infer the denotative and connotative meanings of technical texts
CO4: To read and interpret information presented in tables, charts and other graphic forms
CO5: To write definitions, descriptions, narrations and essays on various topics
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists Orient Blackswan Private Ltd. Department of English,
Anna University, (2020 edition)
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press, 2021.
Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr. KN.
Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.
REFERENCES:
1. Technical Communication – Principles And Practices By Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta
Sharma, Oxford Univ. Press, 2016, New Delhi.
2. A Course Book On Technical English By Lakshminarayanan, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt.
Ltd.
27
3. English For Technical Communication (With CD) By Aysha Viswamohan, Mcgraw Hill
Education, ISBN : 0070264244.
4. Effective Communication Skill, Kulbhusan Kumar, RS Salaria, Khanna Publishing House.
5. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal, Allied Publishing House, New Delhi,2003.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 2 3 - 3 - - -
AVg. 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
MA3151 MATRICES AND CALCULUS L T P C

3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by engineers for practical
applications.
 To familiarize the students with differential calculus.
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in many branches
of engineering.
 To make the students understand various techniques of integration.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and
their applications.
UNIT I MATRICES 9+3
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigenvalues
and Eigenvectors – Cayley - Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices by orthogonal
transformation – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation –
Nature of quadratic forms – Applications : Stretching of an elastic membrane.
UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3

Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules (sum,
product, quotient, chain rules) - Implicit differentiation - Logarithmic differentiation - Applications :
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change of
variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions of
two variables – Applications : Maxima and minima of functions of two variables and Lagrange’s
method of undetermined multipliers.
28
UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 9+3
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration : Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial
fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals - Applications : Hydrostatic force and
pressure, moments and centres of mass.
UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double and
triple integrals – Applications : Moments and centres of mass, moment of inertia.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1 Use the matrix algebra methods for solving practical problems.
CO2 Apply differential calculus tools in solving various application problems.
CO3 Able to use differential calculus ideas on several variable functions.
CO4 Apply different methods of integration in solving practical problems.
CO5 Apply multiple integral ideas in solving areas, volumes and other practical problems.
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Kreyszig.E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, New
Delhi, 2016.
2. Grewal.B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 44th Edition,
2018.
3. James Stewart, "Calculus : Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 8th Edition, New Delhi,
2015. [For Units II & IV - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7 (Tangents problems only), 2.8, 3.1 to
3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 (Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change theorem), 5.5,
7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8 ].
REFERENCES :
1. Anton. H, Bivens. I and Davis. S, " Calculus ", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016
2. Bali. N., Goyal. M. and Watkins. C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
3. Jain. R.K. and Iyengar. S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications,
New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S. and Manicavachagom Pillai. T. K.,“Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2009.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2016.
6. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia. S.C, "Engineering Mathematics " Oxford University Press, 2015.
7. Thomas. G. B., Hass. J, and Weir. M.D, "Thomas Calculus", 14th Edition, Pearson India, 2018.
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
29
PH3151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students effectively to achieve an understanding of mechanics.
 To enable the students to gain knowledge of electromagnetic waves and its applications.
 To introduce the basics of oscillations, optics and lasers.
 Equipping the students to be successfully understand the importance of quantum physics.
 To motivate the students towards the applications of quantum mechanics.
UNIT I MECHANICS 9
Multiparticle dynamics: Center of mass (CM) – CM of continuous bodies – motion of the CM – kinetic
energy of system of particles. Rotation of rigid bodies: Rotational kinematics – rotational kinetic
energy and moment of inertia - theorems of M .I –moment of inertia of continuous bodies – M.I of a
diatomic molecule - torque – rotational dynamics of rigid bodies – conservation of angular momentum
– rotational energy state of a rigid diatomic molecule - gyroscope - torsional pendulum – double
pendulum –Introduction to nonlinear oscillations.
UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

The Maxwell’s equations - wave equation; Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum, Conditions on
the wave field - properties of electromagnetic waves: speed, amplitude, phase, orientation and
waves in matter - polarization - Producing electromagnetic waves - Energy and momentum in EM
waves: Intensity, waves from localized sources, momentum and radiation pressure - Cell-phone
reception. Reflection and transmission of electromagnetic waves from a non-conducting medium-
vacuum interface for normal incidence.
UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, OPTICS AND LASERS 9

Simple harmonic motion - resonance –analogy between electrical and mechanical oscillating
systems - waves on a string - standing waves - traveling waves - Energy transfer of a wave - sound
waves - Doppler effect. Reflection and refraction of light waves - total internal reflection - interference
–Michelson interferometer –Theory of air wedge and experiment. Theory of laser - characteristics
- Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein’s coefficients - population inversion - Nd-YAG
laser, CO2 laser, semiconductor laser –Basic applications of lasers in industry.
UNIT IV BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

Photons and light waves - Electrons and matter waves –Compton effect - The Schrodinger equation
(Time dependent and time independent forms) - meaning of wave function - Normalization –Free
particle - particle in a infinite potential well: 1D,2D and 3D Boxes- Normalization, probabilities and
the correspondence principle.
UNIT V APPLIED QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

The harmonic oscillator(qualitative)- Barrier penetration and quantum tunneling(qualitative)-
Tunneling microscope - Resonant diode - Finite potential wells (qualitative)- Bloch’s theorem for
particles in a periodic potential –Basics of Kronig-Penney model and origin of energy bands.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1 Understand the importance of mechanics.
CO2 Express their knowledge in electromagnetic waves.
CO3 Demonstrate a strong foundational knowledge in oscillations, optics and lasers.
CO4 Understand the importance of quantum physics.
CO5 Comprehend and apply quantum mechanical principles towards the formation of energy bands.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.Kleppner and R.Kolenkow. An Introduction to Mechanics. McGraw Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2017.
2. E.M.Purcell and D.J.Morin, Electricity and Magnetism, Cambridge Univ.Press, 2013.
30
3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, S. Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics, McGraw-
Hill (Indian Edition), 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. R.Wolfson. Essential University Physics. Volume 1 & 2. Pearson Education (Indian Edition),
2009.
2. Paul A. Tipler, Physic – Volume 1 & 2, CBS, (Indian Edition), 2004.
3. K.Thyagarajan and A.Ghatak. Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications, Laxmi Publications,
(Indian Edition), 2019.
4. D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker. Principles of Physics, Wiley (Indian Edition), 2015.
5. N.Garcia, A.Damask and S.Schwarz. Physics for Computer Science Students. Springer-
Verlag, 2012.
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
4 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - -
5 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
CY3151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate sound understanding of water quality parameters and water treatment
techniques.
 To impart knowledge on the basic principles and preparatory methods of nanomaterials.
 To introduce the basic concepts and applications of phase rule and composites.
 To facilitate the understanding of different types of fuels, their preparation, properties and
combustion characteristics.
 To familiarize the students with the operating principles, working processes and applications
of energy conversion and storage devices.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9
Water: Sources and impurities, Water quality parameters: Definition and significance of-colour,
odour, turbidity, pH, hardness, alkalinity, TDS, COD and BOD, flouride and arsenic. Municipal water
treatment: primary treatment and disinfection (UV, Ozonation, break-point chlorination).
Desalination of brackish water: Reverse Osmosis. Boiler troubles: Scale and sludge, Boiler
corrosion, Caustic embrittlement, Priming &foaming. Treatment of boiler feed water: Internal
treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) and External treatment
– Ion exchange demineralisation and zeolite process.
UNIT II NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics: Distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials; Size-dependent
properties (optical, electrical, mechanical and magnetic); Types of nanomaterials: Definition,
properties and uses of – nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation
of nanomaterials: sol-gel, solvothermal, laser ablation, chemical vapour deposition,
electrochemical deposition and electro spinning. Applications of nanomaterials in medicine,
agriculture, energy, electronics and catalysis.
UNIT III PHASE RULE AND COMPOSITES 9
Phase rule:Introduction, definition of terms with examples. One component system - water system;
Reduced phase rule; Construction of a simple eutectic phase diagram - Thermal analysis; Two
31
component system: lead-silver system - Pattinson process.
Composites: Introduction: Definition & Need for composites; Constitution: Matrix materials
(Polymer matrix, metal matrix and ceramic matrix) and Reinforcement (fiber, particulates, flakes and
whiskers). Properties and applications of: Metal matrix composites (MMC), Ceramic matrix
composites and Polymer matrix composites. Hybrid composites - definition and examples.
UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels: Introduction: Classification of fuels; Coal and coke: Analysis of coal (proximate and
ultimate), Carbonization, Manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method). Petroleum
and Diesel: Manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process), Knocking - octane number, diesel oil
- cetane number; Power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction: Calorific value - higher and lower calorific values, Theoretical
calculation of calorific value; Ignition temperature: spontaneous ignition temperature, Explosive
range; Flue gas analysis - ORSAT Method. CO2 emission and carbon foot print.
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9

Stability of nucleus: mass defect (problems), binding energy;Nuclear energy: light water
nuclear power plant, breeder reactor. Solar energy conversion: Principle, working and applications
of solar cells; Recent developments in solar cell materials. Wind energy; Geothermal
energy;Batteries: Types of batteries, Primary battery - dry cell, Secondary battery - lead acid battery
and lithium-ion-battery; Electric vehicles-working principles; Fuel cells: H2-O2 fuel cell, microbial
fuel cell; Supercapacitors: Storage principle, types and examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able:
CO1 To infer the quality of water from quality parameter data and propose suitable treatment
methodologies to treat water.
CO2 To identify and apply basic concepts of nanoscience and nanotechnology in designing the
synthesis of nanomaterials for engineering and technology applications.
CO3 To apply the knowledge of phase rule and composites for material selection requirements.
CO4 To recommend suitable fuels for engineering processes and applications.
CO5 To recognize different forms of energy resources and apply them for suitable applications in
energy sectors.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, 17th Edition, DhanpatRai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2008.
3. S.S. Dara, “A text book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand Publishing, 12th Edition, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. B. S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B. B. Rath and James Murday, “Text book of
nanoscience and nanotechnology”, Universities Press-IIM Series in Metallurgy and Materials
Science, 2018.
2. O.G. Palanna, “Engineering Chemistry” McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2nd
Edition, 2017.
3. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi,
2014.
4. ShikhaAgarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, Second Edition, 2019.
5. O.V. Roussak and H.D. Gesser, Applied Chemistry-A Text Book for Engineers and
Technologists, Springer Science Business Media, New York, 2nd Edition, 2013.
32
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - -
2 2 - - 1 - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 1 1 - - 1 2 - - - - - - - -
5 3 1 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
GE3151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LTPC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of algorithmic problem solving.
 To learn to solve problems using Python conditionals and loops.
 To define Python functions and use function calls to solve problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries to represent complex data.
 To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I COMPUTATIONAL THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Fundamentals of Computing – Identification of Computational Problems -Algorithms, building blocks
of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo code, flow chart,
programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for developing algorithms
(iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card in a list of sorted cards,
guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA TYPES, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9

Python interpreter and interactive mode, debugging; values and types: int, float, boolean,
string, and list; variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators,
comments; Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n
variables, distance between two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS, STRINGS 9

Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained conditional
(if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return values,
parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and methods;
advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: simple sorting, histogram,
Students marks statement, Retail bill preparation.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9

Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file, Voter’s age validation, Marks range validation (0-100).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
33
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Write simple Python programs using conditionals and looping for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries etc.
CO6: Read and write data from/to files in Python programs.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT Press
2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill,2018.
COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
\CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
AVg. 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு LTPC

1 001
அலகு I மமொழி மற் றும் இலக்கியம் : 3

இந்திய தமொழிக் குடும் பங் கள் – திரொவிட தமொழிகள் – தமிழ் ஒரு தெம் தமொழி –
தமிழ் தெவ் விலக்கியங் கள் - ெங் க இலக்கியத்தின் ெமயெ் ெொர்பற் ற தன்மம – ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் பகிர்தல் அறம் – திருக்குறளில் மமலொண்மமக் கருத்துக்கள் –
தமிழ் க் கொப் பியங் கள் , தமிழகத்தில் ெமண தபௌத்த ெமயங் களின் தொக்கம் - பக்தி
இலக்கியம் , ஆழ் வொர்கள் மற் றும் நொயன்மொர்கள் – சிற் றிலக்கியங் கள் – தமிழில்
நவீன இலக்கியத்தின் வளர்ெ்சி – தமிழ் இலக்கிய வளர்ெ்சியில் பொரதியொர் மற் றும்
பொரதிதொென் ஆகிமயொரின் பங் களிப் பு.
34
அலகு II மரபு – பொறற ஓவியங் கள் முதல் நவீன ஓவியங் கள் வறர –
சிற் பக் கறல: 3
நடுகல் முதல் நவீன சிற் பங் கள் வமர – ஐம் தபொன் சிமலகள் – பழங் குடியினர்
மற் றும் அவர்கள் தயொரிக்கும் மகவிமனப் தபொருட்கள் , தபொம் மமகள் – மதர்
தெய் யும் கமல – சுடுமண் சிற் பங் கள் – நொட்டுப் புறத் ததய் வங் கள் –
குமரிமுமனயில் திருவள் ளுவர் சிமல – இமெக் கருவிகள் – மிருதங் கம் , பமற,
வீமண, யொழ் , நொதஸ்வரம் – தமிழர்களின் ெமூக தபொருளொதொர வொழ் வில்
மகொவில் களின் பங் கு.
அலகு III நொட்டுப் புறக் கறலகள் மற் றும் வீர விறளயொட்டுகள் : 3

ததருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்டம் , வில் லுப் பொட்டு, கணியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்டம் ,
மதொல் பொமவக் கூத்து, சிலம் பொட்டம் , வளரி, புலியொட்டம் , தமிழர்களின்
விமளயொட்டுகள் .
அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் திறைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் : 3

தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங் களும் , விலங் குகளும் – ததொல் கொப்பியம் மற் றும் ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் அகம் மற் றும் புறக் மகொட்பொடுகள் – தமிழர்கள் மபொற் றிய
அறக்மகொட்பொடு – ெங் ககொலத்தில் தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவும் , கல் வியும் –
ெங் ககொல நகரங் களும் துமற முகங் களும் – ெங் ககொலத்தில் ஏற் றுமதி மற் றும்
இறக்குமதி – கடல் கடந்த நொடுகளில் மெொழர்களின் தவற் றி.
அலகு V இந் திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற் றும் இந் திய பை்பொட்டிற் குத்
தமிழர்களின் பங் களிப் பு: 3
இந்திய விடுதமலப்மபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங் கு – இந்தியொவின் பிறப் பகுதிகளில்
தமிழ் ப் பண்பொட்டின் தொக்கம் – சுயமரியொமத இயக்கம் – இந்திய மருத்துவத்தில் ,
சித்த மருத்துவத்தின் பங் கு – கல் தவட்டுகள் , மகதயழுத்துப் படிகள் - தமிழ் ப்
புத்தகங் களின் அெ்சு வரலொறு.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.
35
GE3152 HERITAGE OF TAMILS LTPC
1 001
UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3
Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language - Classical
Literature in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam Literature
- Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism & Jainism in Tamil
Land - Bakthi Literature Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry - Development of Modern
literature in Tamil - Contribution of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.
UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3
Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car
making - - Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari,
Making of musical instruments - Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of
Temples in Social and Economic Life of Tamils.
UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 3

Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry, Silambattam,
Valari, Tiger dance - Sports and Games of Tamils.
UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3
Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam Literature
- Aram Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient Cities and Ports
of Sangam Age - Export and Import during Sangam Age - Overseas Conquest of Cholas.
UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND INDIAN

CULTURE 3
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle - The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the other
parts of India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems of
Medicine – Inscriptions & Manuscripts – Print History of Tamil Books.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies)
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
Book.
36
GE3171 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LT PC
0 04 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the problem solving approaches.
 To learn the basic programming constructs in Python.
 To practice various computing strategies for Python-based solutions to real world problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.
EXPERIMENTS:
Note: The examples suggested in each experiment are only indicative. The lab instructor is
expected to design other problems on similar lines. The Examination shall not be restricted
to the sample experiments listed here.
1. Identification and solving of simple real life or scientific or technical problems, and developing
flow charts for the same. (Electricity Billing, Retail shop billing, Sin series, weight of a
motorbike, Weight of a steel bar, compute Electrical Current in Three Phase AC Circuit, etc.)
2. Python programming using simple statements and expressions (exchange the values of two
variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between two points).
3. Scientific problems using Conditionals and Iterative loops. (Number series, Number Patterns,
pyramid pattern)
4. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Lists, Tuples. (Items present in a
library/Components of a car/ Materials required for construction of a building –operations of list
& tuples)
5. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Sets, Dictionaries. (Language,
components of an automobile, Elements of a civil structure, etc.- operations of Sets &
Dictionaries)
6. Implementing programs using Functions. (Factorial, largest number in a list, area of shape)
7. Implementing programs using Strings. (reverse, palindrome, character count, replacing
characters)
8. Implementing programs using written modules and Python Standard Libraries (pandas,
numpy. Matplotlib, scipy)
9. Implementing real-time/technical applications using File handling. (copy from one file to
another, word count, longest word)
10. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Exception handling. (divide by zero error,
voter’s age validity, student mark range validation)
11. Exploring Pygame tool.
12. Developing a game activity using Pygame like bouncing ball, car race etc.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Implement programs in Python using conditionals and loops for solving problems..
CO4: Deploy functions to decompose a Python program.
CO5: Process compound data using Python data structures.
CO6: Utilize Python packages in developing software applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
37
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT Press,
2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation
BS3171 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
PHYSICS LABORATORY : (Any Seven Experiments)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the proper use of various kinds of physics laboratory equipment.
 To learn how data can be collected, presented and interpreted in a clear and concise manner.
 To learn problem solving skills related to physics principles and interpretation of experimental
data.
 To determine error in experimental measurements and techniques used to minimize such
error.
 To make the student as an active participant in each part of all lab exercises.
1. Torsional pendulum - Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of
regular and irregular objects.
2. Simple harmonic oscillations of cantilever.
3. Non-uniform bending - Determination of Young’s modulus
4. Uniform bending – Determination of Young’s modulus
5. Laser- Determination of the wave length of the laser using grating
6. Air wedge - Determination of thickness of a thin sheet/wire
7. a) Optical fibre -Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle
b) Compact disc- Determination of width of the groove using laser.
8. Acoustic grating- Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves in liquids.
9. Ultrasonic interferometer – determination of the velocity of sound and compressibility of
liquids
10. Post office box -Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor.
11. Photoelectric effect
12. Michelson Interferometer.
13. Melde’s string experiment
14. Experiment with lattice dynamics kit.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
38
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
CO1 Understand the functioning of various physics laboratory equipment.
CO2 Use graphical models to analyze laboratory data.
CO3 Use mathematical models as a medium for quantitative reasoning and describing physical
reality.
CO4 Access, process and analyze scientific information.
CO5 Solve problems individually and collaboratively.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
3 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
5 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 2.4 2.6 1 1
 1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
 Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate experimental skills to test basic understanding of water quality parameters, such
as, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, DO, chloride and copper.
 To induce the students to familiarize with electroanalytical techniques such as, pH metry,
potentiometry and conductometry in the determination of impurities in aqueous solutions.
 To demonstrate the analysis of metals and alloys.
 To demonstrate the synthesis of nanoparticles
1. Preparation of Na2CO3 as a primary standard and estimation of acidity of a water sample
using the primary standard
2. Determination of types and amount of alkalinity in water sample.
- Split the first experiment into two
3. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
4. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
5. Determination of chloride content of water sample by Argentometric method.
6. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
7. Estimation of TDS of a water sample by gravimetry.
8. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
9. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
10. Conductometric titration of barium chloride against sodium sulphate (precipitation titration)
11. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
12. Estimation of sodium /potassium present in water using flame photometer.
13. Preparation of nanoparticles (TiO2/ZnO/CuO) by Sol-Gel method.
14. Estimation of Nickel in steel
15. Proximate analysis of Coal
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1 To analyse the quality of water samples with respect to their acidity, alkalinity, hardness and
DO.
CO2 To determine the amount of metal ions through volumetric and spectroscopic techniques
CO3 To analyse and determine the composition of alloys.
CO4 To learn simple method of synthesis of nanoparticles
CO5 To quantitatively analyse the impurities in solution by electroanalytical techniques’’
39
TEXT BOOKS :
1. J. Mendham, R. C. Denney, J.D. Barnes, M. Thomas and B. Sivasankar, Vogel’s Textbook
of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (2009).
PO PSO
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - - 1 - - -
3 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - -
4 2 1 2 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
5 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
GE3172 ENGLISH LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To help learners use language effectively in academic /work contexts
 To develop various listening strategies to comprehend various types of audio materials like
lectures, discussions, videos etc.
 To build on students’ English language skills by engaging them in listening, speaking and
grammar learning activities that are relevant to authentic contexts.
 To use language efficiently in expressing their opinions via various media.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 6

Listening for general information-specific details- conversation: Introduction to classmates - Audio /
video (formal & informal); Telephone conversation; Listening to voicemail & messages; Listening
and filling a form. Speaking - making telephone calls-Self Introduction; Introducing a friend; -
politeness strategies- making polite requests, making polite offers, replying to polite requests and
offers- understanding basic instructions( filling out a bank application for example).
UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 6

Listening - Listening to podcasts, anecdotes / stories / event narration; documentaries and interviews
with celebrities. Speaking - Narrating personal experiences / events-Talking about current and
temporary situations & permanent and regular situations* - describing experiences and feelings-
engaging in small talk- describing requirements and abilities.
UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS PRODUCT 6

Listening - Listen to product and process descriptions; a classroom lecture; and advertisements
about products. Speaking – Picture description- describing locations in workplaces- Giving
instruction to use the product- explaining uses and purposes- Presenting a product- describing
shapes and sizes and weights- talking about quantities(large & small)-talking about precautions.
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 6

Listening – Listening to TED Talks; Listening to lectures - and educational videos. Speaking – Small
Talk; discussing and making plans-talking about tasks-talking about progress- talking about positions
and directions of movement-talking about travel preparations- talking about transportation-
40
UNIT V EXPRESSION 6
Listening – Listening to debates/ discussions; different viewpoints on an issue; and panel
discussions. Speaking –making predictions- talking about a given topic-giving opinions-
understanding a website-describing processes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
CO1 To listen to and comprehend general as well as complex academic information
CO2 To listen to and understand different points of view in a discussion
CO3 To speak fluently and accurately in formal and informal communicative contexts
CO4 To describe products and processes and explain their uses and purposes clearly and
accurately
CO5 To express their opinions effectively in both formal and informal discussions
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
 One online / app based assessment to test listening /speaking
 End Semester ONLY listening and speaking will be conducted online.
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of listening and speaking internal
test and end semester exam.
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix
HS3252 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH II L T P C

2 0 0 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To engage learners in meaningful language activities to improve their reading and writing
skills
 To learn various reading strategies and apply in comprehending documents in professional
context.
 To help learners understand the purpose, audience, contexts of different types of writing
 To develop analytical thinking skills for problem solving in communicative contexts
 To demonstrate an understanding of job applications and interviews for internship and
placements
UNIT I MAKING COMPARISONS 6

Reading - Reading advertisements, user manuals, brochures; Writing – Professional emails, Email
etiquette - Compare and Contrast Essay; Grammar – Mixed Tenses, Prepositional phrases
41
UNIT II EXPRESSING CAUSAL RELATIONS IN SPEAKING AND WRITING 6
Reading - Reading longer technical texts– Cause and Effect Essays, and Letters / emails of
complaint, Writing - Writing responses to complaints.Grammar - Active Passive Voice
transformations, Infinitive and Gerunds
UNIT III PROBLEM SOLVING 6
Reading - Case Studies, excerpts from literary texts, news reports etc. Writing – Letter to the Editor,
Checklists, Problem solution essay / Argumentative Essay. Grammar – Errorcorrection; If conditional
sentences
UNIT IV REPORTING OF EVENTS AND RESEARCH 6
Reading –Newspaper articles;Writing – Recommendations, Transcoding, Accident Report, Survey
Report Grammar – Reported Speech,Modals Vocabulary – Conjunctions- use of prepositions
UNIT V THE ABILITY TO PUT IDEAS OR INFORMATION COGENTLY 6
Reading – Company profiles, Statement of Purpose, (SOP), an excerpt of interview with
professionals; Writing – Job / Internship application – Cover letter & Resume; Grammar –Numerical
adjectives, Relative Clauses.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 To compare and contrast products and ideas in technical texts.
CO2 To identify and report cause and effects in events, industrial processes through technical texts
CO3 To analyse problems in order to arrive at feasible solutions and communicate them in the written
format.
CO4 To present their ideas and opinions in a planned and logical manner
CO5 To draft effective resumes in the context of job search.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists (2020 edition) Orient Blackswan Private Ltd. Department
of English, Anna University.
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press 2021.
3. Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr. KN.
Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.
REFERENCES:
1. Raman. Meenakshi, Sharma. Sangeeta (2019). Professional English. Oxford university press.
New Delhi.
2. Improve Your Writing ed. V.N. Arora and Laxmi Chandra, Oxford Univ. Press, 2001, NewDelhi.
3. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal. Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003
4. Business Correspondence and Report Writing by Prof. R.C. Sharma & Krishna Mohan, Tata
McGraw Hill & Co. Ltd., 2001, New Delhi.
5. Developing Communication Skills by Krishna Mohan, Meera Bannerji- Macmillan India Ltd.
1990, Delhi.
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -
42
MA3251 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS LT P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few statistical and numerical
methods and give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems occurring in
engineering and technology.
 To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which plays
an important role in real life problems.
 To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
 To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and numerical
techniques of differentiation and integration which plays an important role in engineering and
technology disciplines.
 To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary differential
equations.
UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3

Sampling distributions - Tests for single mean, proportion and difference of means (Large and small
samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – Chi square test for goodness of fit
– Independence of attributes.
UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3

One way and two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design
– Latin square design - 22 factorial design.
UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton Raphson
method- Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss Jordan
method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power
method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.
UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL

INTEGRATION 9+3
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Single step methods: Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order differential equations - Multi step methods: Milne’s
and Adams - Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order differential equations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1 Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
CO2 Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture.
CO3 Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and apply the
numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
CO4 Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
CO5 Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.
43
REFERENCES:
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
4. Gupta S.C. and Kapoor V. K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand & Sons,
5. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probability and Statistics
", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 4th Edition, 2012.
6. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientists", 9th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2010.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
PH3201 PHYSICS FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basics of heat transfer through different materials, thermal performance of
building and various thermal applications
 To impart knowledge on the ventilation and air conditioning of buildings
 To introduce the concepts of sound insulation and lighting designs
 To give an introduction to the processing and applications of new engineering materials
 To create an awareness on natural disasters and safety measures
UNIT I THERMAL APPLICATIONS 9
Principles of heat transfer, steady state of heat flow, conduction through compound media-series
and parallel-conductivity of rubber tube and powder materials - heat transfer through fenestrations,
thermal insulation and its benefits - heat gain and heat loss estimation - factors affecting the thermal
performance of buildings, thermal measurements, thermal comfort, indices of thermal comfort,
climate and design of solar radiation, shading devices - central heating.
UNIT II VENTILATION AND REFRIGERATION 9

Requirements, principles of natural ventilation - ventilation measurements, design for natural
ventilation - Window types and packaged air conditioners - chilled water plant - fan coil systems -
water piping - cooling load - Air conditioning systems for different types of buildings - Protection
against fire to be caused by A.C.Systems.
UNIT III ACOUSTICS AND LIGHTING DESIGNS 9

Methods of sound absorptions - absorbing materials - noise and its measurements, sound insulation
and its measurements, impact of noise in multistored buildings. Visual field glare, colour - day light
calculations - day light design of windows, measurement of day-light and use of models and artificial
skies, principles of artificial lighting, supplementary artificial lighting.
44
UNIT IV NEW ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Composites - Definition and Classification - Fibre reinforced plastics (FRP) and fiber reinforced
metals (FRM) - Metallic glasses - Shape memory alloys - Ceramics - Classification - Crystalline -
Non Crystalline - Bonded ceramics, Manufacturing methods - Slip casting - Isostatic pressing - Gas
pressure bonding - Properties - thermal, mechanical, electrical and chemical ceramic fibres -
ferroelectric and ferromagnetic ceramics - High Aluminium ceramics.
UNIT V NATURAL DISASTERS 9

Seismology and Seismic waves - Earth quake ground motion - Basic concepts and estimation
techniques - site effects - Probabilistic and deterministic Seismic hazard analysis - Cyclone and flood
hazards - Fire hazards and fire protection, fire-proofing of materials, fire safety regulations and
firefighting equipment - Prevention and safety measures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of the course, the students should be able to
CO1 acquire knowledge about heat transfer through different materials, thermal performance of
building and thermal insulation.
CO2 gain knowledge on the ventilation and air conditioning of buildings
CO3 understand the concepts of sound absorption, noise insulation and lighting designs
CO4 now about the processing and applications of composites, metallic glasses, shape memory
alloys and ceramics
CO5 get an awareness on natural disasters such as earth quake, cyclone, fire and safety measures
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Marko Pinteric, Building Physics, Springer 2017.
2. D.S.Mathur. Elements of Properties of Matter. S Chand & Company, 2010.
3. Hugo Hens, Building Physics: Heat, Air and Moisture, Wiley, 2017
REFERENCES:
1. W.R.Stevens. Building Physics: Lighting. Pergamon Press, 2013..
2. Hugo Hens, Applied Building Physics, Wiley, 2016
3. K.G.Budinski and M.K.Budinski. Engineering Materials: Properties and Selection. Pearson
Education, 2016.
4. Peter A. Claisse, Civil Engineering Materials, Elsevier, 2016.
5. Patrick L. Abbott, Natural Disasters, McGraw-Hill, 2017.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 2 2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
3 3 2 2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
4 3 - 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
5 3 1 - - 1 3 - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 1.75 2 2 1.2 1.4
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
45
BE3252 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION LT PC
ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basics of electric circuits and analysis
 To impart knowledge in domestic wiring
 To impart knowledge in the basics of working principles and application of electrical
machines
 To introduce analog devices and their characteristics
 To introduce the functional elements and working of sensors and transducers.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9

DC Circuits: Circuit Components: Conductor, Resistor, Inductor, Capacitor – Ohm’s Law - Kirchhoff’s
Laws – Simple problems- Nodal Analysis, Mesh analysis with Independent sources only (Steady
state)
Introduction to AC Circuits and Parameters: Waveforms, Average value, RMS Value, Instantaneous
power, real power, reactive power and apparent power, power factor – Steady state analysis of RLC
circuits (Simple problems only), Three phase supply – star and delta connection – power in three-
phase systems
UNIT II MAGNETIC CIRCUITS AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 9

Magnetic circuits-definitions-MMF, flux, reluctance, magnetic field intensity, flux density, fringing,
self and mutual inductances-simple problems.
Domestic wiring , types of wires and cables, earthing ,protective devices- switch fuse unit- Miniature
circuit breaker-moulded case circuit breaker- earth leakage circuit breaker, safety precautions and
First Aid
UNIT III ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9

Construction and Working principle- DC Separately and Self excited Generators, EMF equation,
Types and Applications. Working Principle of DC motors, Torque Equation, Types and Applications.
Construction, Working principle and Applications of Transformer, Three phase Alternator,
Synchronous motor and Three Phase Induction Motor.
UNIT IV ANALOG ELECTRONICS 9

Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Electronic Circuits- Semiconductor Materials: Silicon
&Germanium – PN Junction Diodes, Zener Diode –Characteristics Applications – Bipolar Junction
Transistor-Biasing, JFET, SCR, MOSFET,IGBT – Types, I-V Characteristics and Applications,
Rectifier and Inverters, harmonics
UNIT V SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 9

Sensors, solenoids, pneumatic controls with electrical actuator, mechatronics, types of valves and
its applications, electro-pneumatic systems, proximity sensors, limit switches, piezoelectric, hall
effect, photo sensors,Strain gauge, LVDT, differential pressure transducer,optical and digital
transducers, Smart sensors, Thermal Imagers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Compute the electric circuit parameters for simple problems
CO2: Explain the concepts of domestics wiring and protective devices
CO3: Explain the working principle and applications of electrical machines
CO4: Analyze the characteristics of analog electronic devices
CO5: Explain the types and operating principles of sensors and transducers
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, Second Edition, 2020
46
2. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements &
Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, 2015.
3. S.K. Bhattacharya, Basic Electrical Engineering, Pearson Education, 2019
4. James A Svoboda, Richard C. Dorf, Dorf’s Introduction to Electric Circuits, Wiley,2018
REFERENCES:
1. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit theory and technology”, Routledge; 2017.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Electronic Devices’, 10th Edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
3. Albert Malvino, David Bates, ‘Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education; 7th edition, 2017
4. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Spice for Circuits and electronics”, 4th Edition., Cengage India,2019.
5. H.S. Kalsi, ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010
CO’s, PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 - - -
2 2 1 1 1 - - -
3 2 1 1 1 - - -
4 2 1 1 1 - - -
5 2 1 1 1 - - -
Avg. 2 1 1 1 - - -
GE3251 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

2 0 4 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Drawing engineering curves.
 Drawing freehand sketch of simple objects.
 Drawing orthographic projection of solids and section of solids.
 Drawing development of solids
 Drawing isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination)

Importance of graphics in engineering applications — Use of drafting instruments — BIS conventions
and specifications — Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets — Lettering and dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES 6+12

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics — Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method — Construction of cycloid — construction of
involutes of square and circle — Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces. Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 6+12

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis is
inclined to one of the principal planes and parallel to the other by rotating object method.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of Three
Dimensional objects — Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views
of objects.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software(Not for examination)
47
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 6+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of
the principal planes and perpendicular to the other — obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids — Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software(Not for examination)
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12

Principles of isometric projection — isometric scale —lsometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual
ray method.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of isometric projection of simple objects by CAD Software(Not
for examination)
TOTAL: (L=30+P=60) 90 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 Use BIS conventions and specifications for engineering drawing.
CO2 Construct the conic curves, involutes and cycloid.
CO3 Solve practical problems involving projection of lines.
CO4 Draw the orthographic, isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
CO5 Draw the development of simple solids.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhatt
rd
N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House,
53 Edition, 2019.
2. Natrajan K.V., “A Text Book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2018.
3. Parthasarathy, N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Drawing”, Oxford University Press, 2015
REFERENCES:
1. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, McGraw Hill, 2 nd Edition, 2019.
2. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Publications,
Bangalore, 27th Edition, 2017.
3. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Parthasarathy N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New
Delhi, 2015.
5. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson Education India, 2nd Edition, 2009.
6. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics", New Age International (P) Limited,
2008.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Size and lay out of drawing sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) — 2001 & SP 46 — 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 — 1986 & SP 46 —2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) — 2001: Technical drawings — Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be
permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
48
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
2 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
3 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Avg 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)
NCC Credit Course Level 1*

NX3251 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T PC
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct
2
NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4
NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security
1
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L 1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour ‘Code 3
L 2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8
SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
49
NX3252 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem
Solving 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
NX3253 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem
Solving 2
50
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
GE3252 தமிழரும் மதொழில் நுட்பமும் LTPC

1 0 01
அலகு I மநசவு மற் றும் பொறனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

ெங் க கொலத்தில் தநெவுத் ததொழில் – பொமனத் ததொழில் நுட்பம் - கருப் பு சிவப்பு
பொண்டங் கள் – பொண்டங் களில் கீறல் குறியீடுகள் .
அலகு II வடிவறமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

ெங் க கொலத்தில் வடிவமமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டுமொனங் கள் & ெங் க கொலத்தில் வீட்டுப்
தபொருட்களில் வடிவமமப் பு- ெங் க கொலத்தில் கட்டுமொன தபொருட்களும் நடுகல் லும்
– சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மமமட அமமப் பு பற் றிய விவரங் கள் - மொமல் லபுரெ்
சிற் பங் களும் , மகொவில் களும் – மெொழர் கொலத்துப் தபருங் மகொயில் கள் மற் றும் பிற
வழிபொட்டுத் தலங் கள் – நொயக்கர் கொலக் மகொயில் கள் - மொதிரி கட்டமமப் புகள்
பற் றி அறிதல் , மதுமர மீனொட்சி அம் மன் ஆலயம் மற் றும் திருமமல நொயக்கர்
மஹொல் – தெட்டிநொட்டு வீடுகள் – பிரிட்டிஷ் கொலத்தில் தென்மனயில் இந்மதொ-
ெொமரொதெனிக் கட்டிடக் கமல.
அலகு III உற் பத்தித் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3
கப் பல் கட்டும் கமல – உமலொகவியல் – இரும் புத் ததொழிற் ெொமல – இரும் மப
உருக்குதல் , எஃகு – வரலொற் றுெ் ெொன்றுகளொக தெம் பு மற் றும் தங் க நொணயங் கள் –
நொணயங் கள் அெ்ெடித்தல் – மணி உருவொக்கும் ததொழிற் ெொமலகள் – கல் மணிகள் ,
கண்ணொடி மணிகள் – சுடுமண் மணிகள் – ெங் கு மணிகள் – எலும் புத்துண்டுகள் –
ததொல் லியல் ெொன்றுகள் – சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மணிகளின் வமககள் .
அலகு IV கவளொை்றம மற் றும் நீ ர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3
அமண, ஏரி, குளங் கள் , மதகு – மெொழர்கொலக் குமுழித் தூம் பின் முக்கியத்துவம் –
கொல் நமட பரொமரிப்பு – கொல் நமடகளுக்கொக வடிவமமக்கப் பட்ட கிணறுகள் –
மவளொண்மம மற் றும் மவளொண்மமெ் ெொர்ந்த தெயல் பொடுகள் – கடல் ெொர் அறிவு –
மீன்வளம் – முத்து மற் றும் முத்துக்குளித்தல் – தபருங் கடல் குறித்த பண்மடய
அறிவு – அறிவுெொர் ெமூகம் .
அலகு V அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற் றும் கைித்தமிழ் : 3
அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ெ்சி –கணித்தமிழ் வளர்ெ்சி - தமிழ் நூல் கமள மின்பதிப் பு
தெய் தல் – தமிழ் தமன்தபொருட்கள் உருவொக்கம் – தமிழ் இமணயக் கல் விக்கழகம்
– தமிழ் மின் நூலகம் – இமணயத்தில் தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் – தெொற் குமவத் திட்டம் .
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
51
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.)
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
Book.
GE3252 TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY LTPC

1001
UNIT I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3
Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries (BRW)
– Graffiti on Potteries.
UNIT II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3

Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam Age
- Building materials and Hero stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in
Silappathikaram - Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram - Great Temples of Cholas and other
worship places - Temples of Nayaka Period - Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple)- Thirumalai
Nayakar Mahal - Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo - Saracenic architecture at Madras during British Period.
UNIT III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3

Art of Ship Building - Metallurgical studies - Iron industry - Iron smelting, steel -Copper and gold-
Coins as source of history - Minting of Coins – Beads making-industries Stone beads -Glass beads
- Terracotta beads -Shell beads/ bone beats - Archeological evidences - Gem stone types described
in Silappathikaram.
UNIT IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3
Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry -
Wells designed for cattle use - Agriculture and Agro Processing - Knowledge of Sea - Fisheries –
Pearl - Conche diving - Ancient Knowledge of Ocean - Knowledge Specific Society.
UNIT V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3

Development of Scientific Tamil - Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development
of Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries –
Sorkuvai Project.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
52
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.)
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
Book.
GE3271 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LT PC

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to provide hands on training to the students in:
 Drawing pipe line plan; laying and connecting various pipe fittings used in common household
plumbing work; Sawing; planing; making joints in wood materials used in commonhousehold
wood work.
 Wiring various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
 Welding various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machining various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assembling simple mechanical assembly of
common household equipments; Making a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
 Soldering and testing simple electronic circuits; Assembling and testing simple electronic
components on PCB.
GROUP – A (CIVIL & ELECTRICAL)
PART I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

PLUMBING WORK:
a) Connecting various basic pipe fittings like valves, taps, coupling,
unions, reducers,elbows and other components which are commonly
used in household.
b) Preparing plumbing line sketches.
c) Laying pipe connection to the suction side of a pump
d) Laying pipe connection to the delivery side of a pump.
e) Connecting pipes of different materials: Metal, plastic and flexible
pipes used inhousehold appliances.
53
WOOD WORK:
a) Sawing,
b) Planing and
c) Making joints like T-Joint, Mortise joint and Tenon joint and Dovetail joint.
Wood Work Study:
a) Studying joints in door panels and wooden furniture
b) Studying common industrial trusses using models.
PART II ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
a) Introduction to switches, fuses, indicators and lamps - Basic switch board
wiring with lamp, fan and three pin socket
b) Staircase wiring
c) Fluorescent Lamp wiring with introduction to CFL and LED types.
d) Energy meter wiring and related calculations/ calibration
e) Study of Iron Box wiring and assembly
f) Study of Fan Regulator (Resistor type and Electronic type using
Diac/Triac/quadrac)
g) Study of emergency lamp wiring/Water heater
GROUP – B (MECHANICAL AND ELECTRONICS)

PART III MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
WELDING WORK:
a) Welding of Butt Joints, Lap Joints, and Tee Joints using arc welding.
b) Practicing gas welding.
BASIC MACHINING WORK:
a) (simple)Turning.
b) (simple)Drilling.
c) (simple)Tapping.
ASSEMBLY WORK:
a) Assembling a centrifugal pump.
b) Assembling a household mixer.
c) Assembling an airconditioner.
SHEET METAL WORK:
a) Making of a square tray
FOUNDRY WORK:
a) Demonstrating basic foundry operations.
PART IV ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15
SOLDERING WORK:
a) Soldering simple electronic circuits and checking continuity.
ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY AND TESTING WORK:
a) Assembling and testing electronic components on a small PCB.
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STUDY:
a) Study an elements of smart phone..
b) Assembly and dismantle of LED TV.
c) Assembly and dismantle of computer/ laptop
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Draw pipe line plan; lay and connect various pipe fittings used in common household
plumbing work; Saw; plan; make joints in wood materials used in common household wood
work.
54
CO2 Wire various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
CO3 Weld various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machine various simple processes
like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assemble simple mechanical assembly of common
household equipments; Make a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
CO4 Solder and test simple electronic circuits; Assemble and test simple electronic components
on PCB.
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Avg 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
BE3272 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION

ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students in conducting load tests electrical machines
 To gain practical experience in experimentally obtaining the characteristics of electronic
devices and rectifiers
 To train the students to measure three phase power and displacement
List of Experiments
1. Verification of ohms and Kirchhoff’s Laws.
2. Three Phase Power Measurement
3. Load test on DC Shunt Motor.
4. Load test on Self Excited DC Generator
5. Load test on Single phase Transformer
6. Load Test on Induction Motor
7. Characteristics of PN and Zener Diodes
8. Characteristics of BJT, SCR and MOSFET
9. Design and analysis of Half wave and Full Wave rectifiers
10. Measurement of displacement of LVDT
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Use experimental methods to verify the Ohm’s law and Kirchhoff’s Law and to measure three
phase power
CO2: Analyze experimentally the load characteristics of electrical machines
CO3: Analyze the characteristics of basic electronic devices
CO4: Use LVDT to measure displacement
CO’s, PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
2 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
3 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
4 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
Avg. 1.6 1.4 0.8 1.6 1.2 1.6
55
GE3272 COMMUNICATION LABORATORY LT P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To identify varied group discussion skills and apply them to take part in effective discussions in
a professional context.
 To analyse concepts and problems and make effective presentations explaining them clearly
and precisely.
 To be able to communicate effectively through formal and informal writing.
 To be able to use appropriate language structures to write emails, reports and essays
 To give instructions and recommendations that are clear and relevant to the context
UNIT I 12
Speaking-Role Play Exercises Based on Workplace Contexts, - talking about competition-
discussing progress toward goals-talking about experiences- talking about events in life- discussing
past events-Writing: writing emails ( formal & semi-formal).
UNIT II 12
Speaking: discussing news stories-talking about frequency-talking about travel problems- discussing
travel procedures- talking about travel problems- making arrangements-describing arrangements-
discussing plans and decisions- discussing purposes and reasons- understanding common
technology terms-Writing: - writing different types of emails.
UNIT III 12
Speaking: discussing predictions-describing the climate-discussing forecasts and scenarios- talking
about purchasing-discussing advantages and disadvantages- making comparisons- discussing likes
and dislikes- discussing feelings about experiences-discussing imaginary scenarios Writing: short
essays and reports-formal/semi-formal letters.
UNIT IV 12
Speaking: discussing the natural environment-describing systems-describing position and
movement- explaining rules-( example- discussing rental arrangements)- understanding technical
instructions-Writing: writing instructions-writing a short article.
UNIT V 12
Speaking: describing things relatively-describing clothing-discussing safety issues( making
recommendations) talking about electrical devices-describing controlling actions- Writing: job
application( Cover letter + Curriculum vitae)-writing recommendations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES
CO1 Speak effectively in group discussions held in a formal/semi formal contexts.
CO2 Discuss, analyse and present concepts and problems from various perspectives to arrive at
suitable solutions
CO3 Write emails, letters and effective job applications.
CO4 Write critical reports to convey data and information with clarity and precision
CO5 Give appropriate instructions and recommendations for safe execution of tasks
Assessment Pattern
 One online / app based assessment to test speaking and writing skills
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of speaking and writing.
56
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -

MA3351 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C

3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the basic concepts of PDE for solving standard partial differential equations.
 To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems.
 To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used in
various situations.
 To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations.
 To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations
that model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete time
systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Formation of partial differential equations –Solutions of standard types of first order partial differential
equations - First order partial differential equations reducible to standard types- Lagrange’s linear
equation - Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients
of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous types.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 9+3

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series
and cosine series – Root mean square value – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.
UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier series solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution
of two dimensional equation of heat conduction (Cartesian coordinates only).
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9+3
Statement of Fourier integral theorem– Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s
identity.
UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9+3
Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Convergence of Z-transforms - – Initial and final value
theorems - Inverse Z-transform using partial fraction and convolution theorem - Formation of
difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z - transforms.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
57
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1 Understand how to solve the given standard partial differential equations.
CO2 Solve differential equations using Fourier series analysis which plays a vital role in engineering
applications.
CO3 Appreciate the physical significance of Fourier series techniques in solving one and two
dimensional heat flow problems and one dimensional wave equations.
CO4 Understand the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations would
provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering.
CO5 Use the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations by using Z
transform techniques for discrete time systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S.,“Higher Engineering Mathematics" 44thEdition, Khanna Publishers,New Delhi, 2018.
2. Kreyszig E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi, India,
2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Andrews. L.C and Shivamoggi. B, "Integral Transforms for Engineers" SPIE Press, 1999.
2. Bali. N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2015.
3. James. G., "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 4thEdition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students", Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 1998.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2018.
6. Wylie. R.C. and Barrett . L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.

01 02 03 ‘04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
ME3351 ENGINEERING MECHANICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To Learn the use scalar and vector analytical techniques for analyzing forces in Statically
determinate structures
 To introduce the equilibrium of rigid bodies
 To study and understand the distributed forces, surface, loading on beam and intensity.
 To learn the principles of friction, forces and to determine the apply the concepts of frictional
forces at the contact surfaces of various engineering systems.
 To develop basic dynamics concepts – force, momentum, work and energy;
58
UNIT I STATICS OF PARTICLES 9
Fundamental Concepts and Principles, Systems of Units, Method of Problem Solutions, Statics of
Particles -Forces in a Plane, Resultant of Forces, Resolution of a Force into Components,
Rectangular Components of a Force, Unit Vectors. Equilibrium of a Particle- Newton’s First Law of
Motion, Space and Free-Body Diagrams, Forces in Space, Equilibrium of a Particle in Space.
UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 9
Principle of Transmissibility, Equivalent Forces, Vector Product of Two Vectors, Moment of a Force
about a Point, Varignon’s Theorem, Rectangular Components of the Moment of a Force, Scalar
Product of Two Vectors, Mixed Triple Product of Three Vectors, Moment of a Force about an Axis,
Couple - Moment of a Couple, Equivalent Couples, Addition of Couples, Resolution of a Given
Force into a Force -Couple system, Further Reduction of a System of Forces, Equilibrium in Two
and Three Dimensions - Reactions at Supports and Connections.
UNIT III DISTRIBUTED FORCES 9

Centroids of lines and areas – symmetrical and unsymmetrical shapes, Determination of Centroids
by Integration , Theorems of Pappus-Guldinus, Distributed Loads on Beams, Centre of Gravity of
a Three-Dimensional Body, Centroid of a Volume, Composite Bodies , Determination of Centroids
of Volumes by Integration. Moments of Inertia of Areas and Mass - Determination of the Moment of
Inertia of an Area by Integration, Polar Moment of Inertia , Radius of Gyration of an Area , Parallel-
Axis Theorem , Moments of Inertia of Composite Areas, Moments of Inertia of a Mass - Moments
of Inertia of Thin Plates , Determination of the Moment of Inertia of a Three-Dimensional Body by
Integration.
UNIT IV FRICTION 9
The Laws of Dry Friction, Coefficients of Friction, Angles of Friction, Wedge friction, Wheel Friction,
Rolling Resistance, Ladder friction.
UNIT V DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 9
Kinematics - Rectilinear Motion and Curvilinear Motion of Particles. Kinetics- Newton’s Second Law
of Motion -Equations of Motions, Dynamic Equilibrium, Energy and Momentum Methods - Work of a
Force, Kinetic Energy of a Particle, Principle of Work and Energy, Principle of Impulse and
Momentum, Impact of bodies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1 Illustrate the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments
CO2 Analyse the rigid body in equilibrium
CO3 Evaluate the properties of distributed forces
CO4 Determine the friction and the effects by the laws of friction
CO5 Calculate dynamic forces exerted in rigid body
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Beer Ferdinand P, Russel Johnston Jr., David F Mazurek, Philip J Cornwell, SanjeevSanghi,
Vector Mechanics for Engineers: Statics and Dynamics, McGraw Higher Education.,
11thEdition, 2017.
2. Vela Murali, “Engineering Mechanics-Statics and Dynamics”, Oxford University Press, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Boresi P and Schmidt J, Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics, 1/e, Cengage
learning, 2008.
2. Hibbeller, R.C., Engineering Mechanics: Statics, and Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics,
13th edition, Prentice Hall, 2013.
3. Irving H. Shames, Krishna Mohana Rao G, Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics,
4thEdition, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
4. Meriam J L and Kraige L G, Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Engineering Mechanics:
Dynamics, 7th edition, Wiley student edition, 2013.
5. Timoshenko S, Young D H, Rao J V and SukumarPati, Engineering Mechanics, 5thEdition,
McGraw Hill Higher Education, 2013.
59
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 1
2 3 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 1
3 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
4 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
5 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
Avg 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
Low (1); Medium (2); High (3)
CE3301 FLUID MECHANICS LTPC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students about properties and behaviour of the fluids under static conditions
and to impart basic knowledge of the dynamics of fluids through the control volume
approach and to expose to the applications of the conservation laws to a) flow
measurements b) flow through pipes (both laminar and turbulent) and c) forces on pipe bends
with an exposure to the significance of boundary layer theory and its applications.
UNIT I FLUIDS PROPERTIES AND FLUID STATICS 10

Scope of fluid mechanics – Definitions of a fluid – Methods of analysis – Continuum hypothesis –
System and Control volume approach – Reynold’s transportation theorem – Fluid properties – Fluid
statics – Manometry – Forces on plane and curved surfaces – Buoyancy and floatation – Stability
of floating bodies.
UNIT II BASIC CONCEPTS OF FLUID FLOW 10

Kinematics: Classification of flows – Streamline, streak-line and path-lines – Stream function and
velocity potentials – Flow nets;
Dynamics : Application of control volume to continuity, energy and momentum – Euler’s equation of
motion along a stream line – Bernoulli’s equation – Applications to velocity and discharge
measurements – Linear momentum equation – Application to Pipe bends – Moment of momentum
equation.
UNIT III DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS AND MODEL STUDIES 7

Fundamental dimensions – Dimensional homogeneity – Rayleigh’s method and Buckingham Pi
theorem – Dimensionless parameters – Similitude and model studies – Distorted and undistorted
models.
UNIT IV INCOMPRESSIBLE VISCOUS FLOW 10

Reynolds experiment – Laminar flow in pipes and between parallel plates – Development of laminar
and turbulent flows in pipes – Darcy-Weisbach equation – Moody diagram – Major and minor losses
of flow in pipes – Total energy line – Hydraulic grade line – Siphon – Pipes in series and parallel –
Equivalent pipes.
UNIT V BOUNDARY LAYERS 8

Definition of boundary layers – Laminar and turbulent boundary layers – Displacement, momentum
and energy thickness – Momentum integral equation – Applications – Separation of boundary layer
– Drag and Lift forces.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
60
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Demonstrate the difference between solid and fluid, its properties and behaviour in static
conditions.
CO2 Apply the conservation laws applicable to fluids and its application through fluid kinematics and
dynamics.
CO3 Formulate the relationship among the parameters involved in the given fluid phenomenon and
to predict the performance of prototypes by model studies.
CO4 Estimate the losses in pipelines for both laminar and turbulent conditions and analysis of pipes
connected in series and parallel.
CO5 Explain the concept of boundary layer and its application to find the drag force excreted by the
fluid on the flat solid surface.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Modi P.N and Seth Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines Standard
Book House New Delhi. 2015.
2. Streeter, V.L. Wylie, E. B. and Bedford K.W, Fluid Mechanics. (9th Ed.) Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 1998.
REFERENCES:
1. S K Som; Gautam Biswas and S Chakraborty, Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid
Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
2. Pani B S, Fluid Mechanics: A Concise Introduction, Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd, 2016.
3. Jain A. K. Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2014.
4. Narayana Pillai N. Principles of Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, (3rd Ed.) University
Press (India) Pvt. Ltd. 2009.

Course Outcome Overall
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Correlation of
COs to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences
3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem analysis 2 2 2 3 3 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions 1 1 3 3 2 3
PO4 Investigation 1 1 2 2 2 2
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO6 Engineer and Society 2 2 2 3 3 2
PO7 Environment and Sustainability 2 2 2 2 2 2
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and Team work 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO12 Life Long Learning 2 2 2 3 3 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering 3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil Engineering
problems and innovation 2 2 3 3 3 3
Conceptualization and evaluation of
PSO3 engineering solutions to Civil
1 1 2 3 3 3
Engineering Issues
61
CE3302 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGY LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce students to various construction materials and the techniques that are
commonly used in civil engineering construction.
UNIT I STONES - BRICKS - CONCRETE BLOCKS - LIME 9
Stone as building material – Criteria for selection – Tests on stones – Bricks – Classification –
Manufacturing of clay bricks – Tests on bricks – Compressive strength – Water Absorption –
Efflorescence – Lime – Preparation of lime mortar – Concrete hollow blocks – Lightweight concrete
blocks.
UNIT II OTHER MATERIALS 9

Timber – Market forms – Plywood – Veneer – False ceiling materials – Steel – Mechanical treatment
– Aluminum – Uses – Market forms – Glass – Ceramics – Refractories – Composite Materials –
Types and applications – FRP – Fibre textiles – Geomembranes and Geotextiles for earth
reinforcement.
UNIT III CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES & SERVICE REQUIREMENTS 9
Types of Foundations – Shallow and Deep Foundations – Stone Masonry – Brick Masonry –
Plastering and Pointing – Cavity Walls – Diaphragm Walls – Formwork – Centering and Shuttering
– Shoring – Scaffolding – Underpinning – Roofing – Flooring – Joints in concrete –
Contraction/Construction/Expansion joints – Fire Protection – Thermal Insulation – Ventilation and
Air conditioning – Acoustics and Sound Insulation – Damp Proofing.
UNIT IV CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENTS 9
Selection of equipment for earthwork excavation, concreting, material handling and erection of
structures – Dewatering and pumping equipment.
UNIT V CONSTRUCTION PLANNING 9

Introduction to construction planning – Scheduling for activities – Critical path method (CPM) and
PERT network modelling and time analysis – Case illustrations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Students will be able to
CO1 Identify the good quality brick, stone and blocks for construction.
CO2 Recognize the market forms of timber, steel, aluminum and applications of various composite
materials.
CO3 Identify the best construction and service practices such as thermal insulations and air
conditioning of the building
CO4 Select various equipments for construction works conditioning of building
CO5 Understand the construction planning and scheduling techniques
TEXTBOOKS
1. Varghese.P.C, Building Materials, Second Edition PHI Learning Ltd., 2015.
2. Arora S.P and Bindra S.P Building construction, Dhanpat Rai and sons, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Varghese.P.C, Building Construction, Second Edition PHI Learning ltd., 2016.
2. Punmia ,B.C Building construction , Laxmi publication (p)ltd..,2008.
3. Peurifoy R.L., Schexnayder,C.J., Shapira A., Schmitt.R., Construction Planning Equipment and
Methods, Tata McGraw-hill, 2011.
4. Srinath L.S.,PERT and CPM -Principles and applications, Affliated East West Press 2001
62
PO/PSO Course Outcome Overall
Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
CO s to POs
PROGRAM OUTCOMES(PO)
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering
2 3 3 2 2 2
Sciences
PO2 Problem analysis 2 3 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions 2 1
PO4 Investigation 3 2 2 3 2
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 2 1
PO6 Engineer and Society 2 2 1
PO7 Environment and Sustainability 2 2 3 2
PO8 Ethics
PO9 Individual and Team work 2 1
PO10 Communication
PO11 Project Management and Finance 2 2 3 2
PO12 Life Long Learning 2 2 2 2
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES(PSO)
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering
3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil
Engineering problems and 3 3 2
innovation
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation
of engineering solutions to Civil 2 2 3 2
Engineering Issues
CE3303 WATER SUPPLY AND WASTEWATER ENGINEERING LTPC

4 004
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce students to various components and design of water supply scheme, water
treatment methods, water storage distribution system, sewage treatment and disposal and
deign of intake structures and sewerage system.
UNIT I WATER SUPPLY 12

Estimation of surface and subsurface water resources - Predicting demand for water- Impurities of
water and their significance - Physical, chemical and bacteriological analysis - Waterborne diseases
- Standards for potable water. Intake of water: Pumping and gravity schemes.
UNIT II WATER TREATMENT 12

Objectives - Unit operations and processes - Principles, functions, and design of water treatment
plant units, aerators of flash mixers, Coagulation and flocculation – Clarifloccuator - Plate and tube
settlers - Pulsator clarifier - sand filters - Disinfection - softening, removal of iron and manganese -
Defluoridation - Softening - Desalination process - Residue Management - Construction, Operation
and Maintenance aspects
UNIT III WATER STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION 12

Storage and balancing reservoirs - types, location and capacity. Distribution system: layout,
hydraulics of pipe lines, pipe fittings, valves including check and pressure reducing valves, meters,
analysis of distribution systems, leak detection, maintenance of distribution systems, pumping
stations and their operations - House service connections.
63
UNIT IV PLANNING AND DESIGN OF SEWERAGE SYSTEM 12
Characteristics and composition of sewage - Population equivalent - Sanitary sewage flow estimation
- Sewer materials - Hydraulics of flow in sanitary sewers - Sewer design - Storm drainage-Storm
runoff estimation - Sewer appurtenances - Corrosion in sewers - Prevention and control – Sewage
pumping-drainage in buildings - Plumbing systems for drainage
UNIT V SEWAGE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL 12

Objectives - Selection of Treatment Methods - Principles, Functions, - Activated Sludge Process and
Extended aeration systems - Trickling filters - Sequencing Batch Reactor(SBR) - UASB - Waste
Stabilization Ponds - Other treatment methods - Reclamation and Reuse of sewage - Recent
Advances in Sewage Treatment - Construction, Operation and Maintenance aspects. - Discharge
standards-sludge treatment -Disposal of sludge
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Understand the various components of water supply scheme and design of intake structure
and conveyance system for water transmission
CO2 Understand on the characteristics and composition of sewage, ability to estimate sewage
generation and design sewer system including sewage pumping stations
CO3 Understand the process of conventional treatment and design of water and wastewater
treatment system and gain knowledge of selection of treatment process and biological
treatment process
CO4 Ability to design and evaluate water distribution system and water supply in buildings and
understand the self-purification of streams and sludge and septage disposal methods.
CO5 Able to understand and design the various advanced treatment system and knowledge about
the recent advances in water and wastewater treatment process and reuse of sewage
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Garg, S.K. Environmental Engineering, Vol.I Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Modi, P.N., Water Supply Engineering, Vol.I Standard Book House, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Garg, S.K., Environmental Engineering Vol.II, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
4. Duggal K.N., “Elements of Environmental Engineering” S. Chand and Co. Ltd., New Delhi,
2014.
5. Punmia, B.C., Jain, A.K., and Jain.A.K.., Environmental Engineering, Vol.II, Laxmi
Publications, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Punmia B.C, Ashok Jain and Arun Jain, Water Supply Engineering, Laxmi Publications (P)
Ltd., New Delhi 2010.
2. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development,
Government of India, New Delhi, 1999.
3. Syed R. Qasimand Edward M. Motley Guang Zhu, Water Works Engineering Planning, Design
and Operation, Prentice Hall of India Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009.
4. Of Urban Development, Government of India, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Metcalf and Eddy – Waste water Engineering – Treatment and Reuse, Tata Mc. Graw – Hill
Company, New Delhi, 2010.
6. Syed R.Qasim “Waste water Treatment Plants”, CRCPress,WashingtonD.C.,2010
7. Gray N.F, “Water Technology”, Elsevier India Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi, 2006.
Overall
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 correlation of
COs to PO s
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 2 2 3 3 3 3
PO3 Design / development of solutions 3 3 3 3
PO4 Investigation 2 2 2 2
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 2 2 2
64
PO6 Engineer and Society 3 3 3 3
PO8 Ethics 1 1 2 2 2 2
PO10 Communication 2 2
PO12 Life Long Learning 3 3
discipline
2 2 2 2
problems and innovation
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of
engineering solutions to Civil 2 2 3 2
Engineering Issues
CE3351 SURVEYING AND LEVELLING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the rudiments of plane surveying and geodetic principles to Civil Engineers and
to learn the various methods of plane and geodetic surveying to solve the real world
problems. To introduce the concepts of Control Surveying. To introduce the basics of
Astronomical Surveying
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF CONVENTIONAL SURVEYING 9
Definition – Classifications – Basic principles – Equipment and accessories for ranging and chaining
– Methods of ranging – Well conditioned triangles – Chain traversing – Compass – Basic principles
– Types – Bearing – System and conversions – Sources of errors and Local attraction – Magnetic
declination – Dip – compass traversing – Plane table and its accessories – Merits and demerits –
Radiation – Intersection – Resection – Plane table traversing.
UNIT II LEVELLING 9
Level line – Horizontal line – Datum – Benchmarks – Levels and staves – Temporary and permanent
adjustments – Methods of leveling – Fly leveling – Check leveling – Procedure in leveling – Booking
– Reduction – Curvature and refraction – Reciprocal leveling – Precise leveling - Contouring.
UNIT III THEODOLITE SURVEYING 9
Horizontal and vertical angle measurements – Temporary and permanent adjustments – Heights and
distances – Tacheometric surveying – Stadia Tacheometry – Tangential Tacheometry –
Trigonometric leveling – Single Plane method – Double Plane method.
UNIT IV CONTROL SURVEYING AND ADJUSTMENT 9

Horizontal and vertical control – Methods – Triangulation – Traversing – Gale‘s table –
Trilateration – Concepts of measurements and errors – Error propagation and Linearization –
Adjustment methods - Least square methods – Angles, lengths and levelling network.
UNIT V MODERN SURVEYING 9

Total Station: Digital Theodolite, EDM, Electronic field book – Advantages – Parts and accessories
– Working principle – Observables – Errors - COGO functions – Field procedure and
applications.GPS: Advantages – System components – Signal structure – Selective availability
and antispoofing receiver components and antenna – Planning and data acquisition – Data
processing – Errors inGPS – Field procedure and applications.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
65
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Introduce the rudiments of various surveying and its principles.
CO2 Imparts knowledge in computation of levels of terrain and ground features
CO3 Imparts concepts of Theodolite Surveying for complex surveying operations
CO4 Understand the procedure for establishing horizontal and vertical control
CO5 Imparts the knowledge on modern surveying instruments
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dr. B. C. Punmia, Ashok K. Jain and Arun K Jain, Surveying Vol. I & II, Lakshmi Publications
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, Sixteenth Edition, 2016.
2. T. P. Kanetkarand S. V. Kulkarni, Surveying and Levelling, Parts 1 & 2, Pune Vidyarthi Griha
Prakashan, Pune, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. R. Subramanian, Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2012.
2. James M. Anderson and Edward M. Mikhail, Surveying, Theory and Practice, Seventh
Edition, Mc Graw Hill 2001.
3. Bannister and S. Raymond, Surveying, Seventh Edition, Longman 2004.
4. S. K. Roy, Fundamentals of Surveying, Second Edition, Prenticeˆ Hall of India2010.
5. K. R. Arora, Surveying Vol I & II, Standard Book house, Twelfth Edition 2013.
6. C. Venkatramaiah, Textbook of Surveying, Universities Press, Second Edition, 2011.
PO/PSO Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
CO s to POs
PO7 Environment andSustainability 2 2 2
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 3 2
PO10 Communication
PO12 Life Long Learning 2 2 2
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil Engineering 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3 3 3 3 3 3
engineering solutions to Civil
Engineering
CE3361 SURVEYING AND LEVELLING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 At the end of the course the student will possess knowledge about survey field techniques
66
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Chain Survey
1. Study of chains and its accessories, Aligning, Ranging, Chaining and Marking Perpendicular
offset
2. Setting out works – Foundation marking using tapes single Room and Double Room
Compass Survey
3. Compass Traversing – Measuring Bearings & arriving included angles
Levelling - Study of levels and levelling staff
4. Fly levelling using Dumpy level &Tilting level
5. Check levelling
Theodolite - Study of Theodolite
6. Measurements of horizontal angles by reiteration and repetition and vertical angles
7. Determination of elevation of an object using single plane method when base is
Accessible/inaccessible.
Tacheometry – Tangential system – Stadia system
8. Determination of Tacheometric Constants
9. Heights and distances by stadia Tacheometry
10. Heights and distances by Tangential Tacheometry
Total Station - Study of Total Station, Measuring Horizontal and vertical angles
11. Traverse using Total station and Area of Traverse
12. Determination of distance and difference in elevation between two inaccessible points
using Total station
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Impart knowledge on the usage of basic surveying instruments like chain/tape, compass and
levelling instruments
CO2 Able to use levelling instrument for surveying operations
CO3 Able to use theodolite for various surveying operations
CO4 Able to carry out necessary surveys for social infrastructures
CO5 Able to prepare planimetric maps
REFERENCES:
1. T. P. Kanetkarand S. V. Kulkarni, Surveying and Levelling, Parts 1 & 2, Pune Vidyarthi Griha
Prakashan, Pune, 24th Reprint, 2015.
2. Dr. B. C. Punmia, Ashok K. Jainand Arun K Jain, Surveying Vol. I & II, Lakshmi Publications Pvt
Ltd, New Delhi, 17th Edition, 2016.
3. James M. Anderson and Edward M. Mikhail, Surveying, Theory and Practice, Seventh Edition,
McGraw Hill 2001
4. Bannisterand S. Raymond, Surveying, Seventh Edition, Longman 2004 a. David Clark, Plane
and Geodetic Surveying for Engineers, Volume I, Constable and Company Ltd, London, CBS,
6th Edition, 2004.
5. David Clark and James Clendinning, Plane and Geodetic Surveying for Engineers, VolumeII,
Constable and Company Ltd, London, CBS, 6th Edition, 2004.
6. S. K. Roy, Fundamentals of Surveying, Second Edition, Prentice ‘Hall of India 2004
7. K. R. Arora, Surveying Vol. I & II, Standard Book house, Eleventh Edition, 2013.
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Correlation of
COs to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering 3 3 3 3 3 3
Sciences
67
PO7 Environment and Sustainability 2 3 3 3 3
PO8 Ethics 3 3 2 2 3
PO9 Individual and Team Work 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO10 Communication 3 3 3 3 3
PO11 Project Management and 3 3 3 3 3
Finance
discipline
Engineering Issues
CE3311 WATER AND WASTEWATER ANALYSIS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 This subject includes the list of experiments to be conducted for characterization of
water and municipal sewage. At the end of the course, the student is expected to be
aware of the procedure for quantifying quality parameters for water and sewage.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: ANALYSIS OF WATER SAMPLE

1. Sampling and preservation methods for water and wastewater (Demonstration only)
2. Measurement of Electrical conductivity and turbidity
3. Determination of fluoride in water by spectrophotometric method /ISE
4. Determination of iron in water (Demo)
5. Determination of Sulphate in water
6. Determination of Optimum Coagulant Dosage by Jar test apparatus
7. Determination of available Chlorine in Bleaching powder and residual chlorine in water
ANALYSIS OF WASTEWATER SAMPLE
8. Estimation of suspended, volatile and fixed solids
9. Determination of Sludge Volume Index in waste water
10. Determination of Dissolved Oxygen
11. Estimation of B.O.D.
12. Estimation of C.O.D.
13. Determination of TKN and Ammonia Nitrogen in wastewater
14. Determination of total and faecal coliform (Demonstration only)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Calibrate and standardize the equipment
CO2 Collect proper sample for analysis
CO3 To know the sample preservation methods
CO4 To perform field oriented testing of water, wastewater
CO5 To perform coliform analysis
REFERENCES:
1. APHA, "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste water", 22nd Ed.
Washington, 2012.
68
2. "Laboratory Manual for the Examination of water, wastewater soil Rump", H.H. and Krist,H.
– Second Edition, VCH, Germany, 3rd Edition, 1999.
3. "Methods of air sampling & analysis",James P.Lodge Jr(Editor) 3rd Edition, Lewis
publishers,Inc,USA,1989.

COs to POs
2 2 1 3 2 2
Sciences
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 3 3 3
1 2 2 3 2 2
discipline
Engineering problems and 2 2 2 3 2 2
innovation
of Engineering solutions to Civil 2 2 2 3 2 2
engineering issues
GE3361 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT LTPC

0 021
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To be proficient in important Microsoft Office tools: MS WORD, EXCEL, POWERPOINT.
 To be proficient in using MS WORD to create quality technical documents, by using standard
templates, widely acceptable styles and formats, variety of features to enhance the
presentability and overall utility value of content.
 To be proficient in using MS EXCEL for all data manipulation tasks including the common
statistical, logical, mathematical etc., operations, conversion, analytics, search and explore,
visualize,interlink, and utilizing many more critical features offered
 To be able to create and share quality presentations by using the features of MS PowerPoint,
including: organization of content, presentability, aesthetics, using media elements and
enhance the overall quality of presentations.
MS WORD: 10 Hours
Create and format a document
Working with tables
Working with Bullets and Lists
Working with styles, shapes, smart art, charts
Inserting objects, charts and importing objects from other office tools
69
Creating and Using document templates
Inserting equations, symbols and special characters
Working with Table of contents and References, citations
Insert and review comments
Create bookmarks, hyperlinks, endnotes footnote
Viewing document in different modes
Working with document protection and security
Inspect document for accessibility
MS EXCEL: 10 Hours
Create worksheets, insert and format data
Work with different types of data: text, currency, date, numeric etc.
Split, validate, consolidate, Convert data
Sort and filter data
Perform calculations and use functions: (Statistical, Logical, Mathematical, date, Time etc.,)
Work with Lookup and reference formulae
Create and Work with different types of charts
Use pivot tables to summarize and analyse data
Perform data analysis using own formulae and functions
Combine data from multiple worksheets using own formulae and built-in functions to generate
results
Export data and sheets to other file formats
Working with macros
Protecting data and Securing the workbook
MS POWERPOINT: 10 Hours
Select slide templates, layout and themes
Formatting slide content and using bullets and numbering
Insert and format images, smart art, tables, charts
Using Slide master, notes and handout master
Working with animation and transitions
Organize and Group slides
Import or create and use media objects: audio, video, animation
Perform slideshow recording and Record narration and create presentable videos
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion the students will be able to
CO1 Use MS Word to create quality documents, by structuring and organizing content for their day
to day technical and academic requirements
CO2 Use MS EXCEL to perform data operations and analytics, record, retrieve data as per
requirements and visualize data for ease of understanding
CO3 Use MS PowerPoint to create high quality academic presentations by including common tables,
charts, graphs, interlinking other elements, and using media objects.
CE3401 APPLIED HYDRAULICS ENGINEERING LTPC

3 104
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart basic knowledge to the students about the open channel flows with analysis of
uniform flow, gradually varied flow and rapidly varied flow and to expose them to basic
principles of working of hydraulic machineries and to design Pelton wheel, Francis and
Kaplan turbine, Centrifugal and Reciprocating pumps.
UNIT I UNIFORM FLOW 9+3

Definition and differences between pipe flow and open channel flow - Types of Flow - Properties of
open channel - Fundamental equations - Sub-critical, Super-critical and Critical flow - Velocity
70
distribution in open channel - Steady uniform flow: Chezy’s equation, Manning equation - Best
hydraulic sections for uniform flow - Computation in Uniform Flow - Specific energy and specific
force.
UNIT II VARIED FLOWS 9+3

Dynamic equations of gradually varied - Water surface flow profile classifications: Hydraulic Slope,
Hydraulic Curve - Profile determination by Numerical method: Direct step method and Standard step
method – Change in Grades.
UNIT III RAPIDLY VARIED FLOWS 8+3
Application of the momentum equation for RVF - Hydraulic jumps - Types - Energy dissipation –
Positive and Negative surges.
UNIT IV TURBINES 9+3

Turbines - Classification - Impulse turbine – Pelton wheel - Reaction turbines - Francis turbine -
Kaplan turbine - Draft tube - Cavitation - Performance of turbine - Specific speed - Runaway speed
– Minimum Speed to start the pump.
UNIT V PUMPS 9+3
Centrifugal pumps - Minimum speed to start the pump - NPSH - Cavitation’s in pumps - Operating
characteristics - Multistage pumps - Reciprocating pumps - Negative slip - Indicator diagrams and
its variations - Air vessels - Savings in work done.
TOTAL: (L: 45+ T: 15) 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the basics of open channel flow, its classification and analysis of uniform flow in
steady state conditions with specific energy concept and its application
CO2 Analyse steady gradually varied flow, water surface profiles and its length calculation using
direct and standard step methods with change in water surface profiles due to change in
grades.
CO3 Derive the relationship among the sequent depths of steady rapidly varied flow and estimating
energy loss in hydraulic jump with exposure to positive and negative surges.
CO4 Design turbines and explain the working principle
CO5 Differentiate pumps and explain the working principle with characteristic curves and design
centrifugal and reciprocating pumps.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain. A.K., Fluid Mechanics, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2010.
2. Chandramouli P N, Applied Hydraulic Engineering, Yes Dee Publisher, 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Ven Te Chow, Open Channel Hydraulics, McGraw Hill, New York, 2009.
2. Modi P.N. and Seth S.M., Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, Standard Book House, New Delhi,
19th edition, 2013.
3. Mays L. W., Water Resources Engineering, John Wiley and Sons (WSE), New York, 2019
4. Subramanya K., Flow in open channels, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2019.

CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 COs to POs
71
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 2 2
engineering solutions to Civil Engineering 2 2 3 3 3 3
Issues
CE3402 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the fundamental concepts of Stress in simple and complex states and to know the
mechanism of load transfer in beams and the induced stresses due to simple bending and
unsymmetrical bending and to determine the deformation in determinate beams and to know
the basic concepts of analysis of indeterminate beams.
UNIT I SIMPLE AND COMPOUND STRESSES 9

Stresses in simple and compound bars – Thermal stresses – Elastic constants - Thin cylindrical and
spherical shells – Biaxial state of stress – Principal stresses and principal planes – Mohr’s circle of
stresses - Torsion on circular shafts.
UNIT II BENDING OF BEAMS 9

Types of beams and transverse loadings– Shear force and bending moment for simply supported,
cantilever and over-hanging beams - Theory of simple bending – Bending stress distribution – Shear
stress distribution.
UNIT III DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9

Double Integration method – Macaulay’s method – Area moment method – Conjugate beam method
- Strain energy method for determinate beams.
UNIT IV INDETERMINATE BEAMS 9

Propped Cantilever and Fixed Beams – Fixed end moments reactions, slope and deflection for
standard cases of loading –– Continuous beams – support reactions and moments – Theorem of
three moments – Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams.
UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS 9
Unsymmetrical bending of beams - shear centerapplied - Thick cylinders - Theories of failure –
Principal stress, principal strain, shear stress, strain energy and distortion energy theories –
application problems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the concepts of stress and strain, principal stresses and principal planes.
CO2 Determine Shear force and bending moment in beams and understand concept of theory of
simple bending.
CO3 Calculate the deflection of beams by different methods and selection of method for determining
slope or deflection.
72
CO4 Analyze propped cantilever, fixed beams and continuous beams for external loadings and
support settlements.
CO5 Determine the stresses due to Unsymmetrical bending of beams, locate the shear center, and
study the various theories of failure
TEXTBOOKS
1. Rajput R.K. "Strength of Materials (Mechanics of Solids)", S.Chand & company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2018.
2. Rattan.S.S., "Strength of Materials", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2017.
3. Punmia B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain,"Theory of Structures" (SMTS) Vol -II,
Laxmi Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi 2017.
4. Basavarajiah and Mahadevapa, Strength of Materials, University press, Hyderabad, 2016
5. Vazirani.V.N, Ratwani.M.M, Duggal .S.K Analysis of Structures: Analysis, Design and Detailing
of Structures-Vol.1, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Kazimi S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2017
2. William A .Nash, “Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials”, Schaum’s Outline Series,Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing company, 2017.
3. Singh. D.K., “ Strength of Materials”, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2021
4. Egor P Popov, “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, 2nd edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., NewDelhi,
2015
5. Irwing H.Shames, James M.Pitarresi, Introduction to Solid Mechanics, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2002
6. Beer. F.P. &Johnston.E.R.“Mechanics of Materials”, Tata McGraw Hill, Sixth Edition, New Delhi
2010.
7. James M.Gere., Mechanics of Materials, Thomas Canada Ltd., Canada, 2006.
8. Egor. P.Popov, Engineering Mechanics of Solids, Prentice Hall of India, Second Edition New
Delhi 2015.

Correlation of
PO7 Environment and 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO8 Sustainability
Ethics 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil engineering discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO2 Civil Engineering Performance Evaluation
and coordination 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO3 Conceptualization of Civil Engineering
Systems 3 3 3 3 3 3
73
CE3403 CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the properties of concrete making materials.
 To have better knowledge about the chemical and mineral admixtures in concrete.
 To familiarize with the IS method of mix design as per the latest code .
 To understand the fresh and hardened properties of concrete. To know the importance
and applications of special concretes
UNIT I CONSTITUENT ATERIALS 9

Cement-Different types-Chemical composition and Properties -Tests on cement-IS
Specifications- Aggregates-Classification-Mechanical properties and tests as per BIS Grading
requirements-Water- Quality of water for use in concrete.
UNIT II CHEMICAL AND MINERAL ADMIXTURES 9
Accelerators-Retarders- Plasticisers- Super plasticizers- Water proofers - Mineral Admixtures like
Fly Ash, Silica Fume, Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag and Metakaoline -Their effects on
concrete properties
UNIT III PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE MIX 9

Principles of Mix Proportioning-Properties of concrete related to Mix Design-Physical properties
of materials required for Mix Design - Design Mix and Nominal Mix-BIS Method of Mix Design -
Mix Design Examples
UNIT IV FRESH AND HARDENED PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE 9

Workability-Tests for workability of concrete-Slump Test and Compacting factor Test-Segregation
and Bleeding-Determination of Compressive and Flexural strength as per BIS - Properties of
Hardened concrete- Stress-strain curve for concrete-Determination of Modulus of elasticity.
UNIT V SPECIAL CONCRETES 9

Light weight concretes - High strength concrete - Fibre reinforced concrete – Ferrocement - Ready
mix concrete - SIFCON - Shotcrete – Polymer concrete - High performance concrete- self
compacting concrete - Geopolymer Concrete.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Understand the requirements of cement, aggregates and water for concrete
CO2 Select suitable admixtures for enhancing the properties of concrete
CO3 Design concrete mixes as per IS method of mix design
CO4 Determine the properties of concrete at fresh and hardened state.
CO5 Know the importance of special concretes for specific requirements.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gupta.B.L., Amit Gupta, "Concrete Technology", Jain Book Agency, 2010.
2. Shetty,M.S, "Concrete Technology", S.Chand and Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2003
REFERENCES:
1. Neville, A.M; "Properties of Concrete", Pitman Publishing Limited, London,1995
2. Gambhir.M.L.Concrete Technology,Fifth Edition, McGraw Hill Education,2017.
3. Job Thomas., Concrete Technology, Cencage learning India Private Ltd, New Delhi, 2015.
4. IS10262-2019 Recommended Guidelines for Concrete Mix Design, Bureau of Indian
Standards, New Delhii.
74
CO s to POs
3 3 3 3 3 3
Sciences
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
innovation
of engineering solutions to Civil 3 3 3 3 3 3
Engineering Issues
CE3404 SOIL MECHANICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To impart knowledge to classify the soil based on index properties and to assess their
engineering properties based on the classification. To familiarize the students about the
fundamental concepts of compaction, flow through soil, stress transformation, stress
distribution, consolidation and shear strength of soils. To impart knowledge of design of both
finite and infinite slopes.
UNIT I SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND COMPACTION 9

Formation of soil - Soil description – Particle – Size shape and colour – Composition of gravel, sand,
silt, clay particles – Particle behaviour – Soil structure – Phase relationship – Index properties –
Significance – BIS classification system – Unified classification system – Compaction of soils –
Theory, Laboratory and field tests – Field Compaction methods – Factors influencing compaction of
soils.
UNIT II EFFECTIVE STRESS AND PERMEABILITY 9
Soil - water – Static pressure in water - Effective stress concepts in soils – Capillary phenomena–
Permeability interaction – Hydraulic conductivity – Darcy’s law – Determination of Hydraulic
Conductivity – Laboratory Determination (Constant head and falling head methods) and field
measurement pumping out in unconfined and confined aquifer – Factors influencing permeability of
soils – Seepage - Two dimensional flow – Laplace’s equation – Introduction to flow nets – Simple
problems. (Sheet pile and weir).
75
UNIT III STRESS DISTRIBUTION AND SETTLEMENT 9
Stress distribution in homogeneous and isotropic medium – Boussinesq theory – (Point land, Line
land and udl) Use of New marks influence chart –Components of settlement –– Immediate and
consolidation settlement – Terzaghi’s one dimensional consolidation theory – Computation of rate of
settlement. - √t and log t methods– e-log p relationship.
UNIT IV SHEAR STRENGTH 9

Shear strength of cohesive and cohesion less soils – Mohr-Coulomb failure theory – Measurement
of shear strength - Direct shear, Triaxial compression, UCC and Vane shear tests – Pore pressure
parameters – Cyclic mobility – Liquefaction.
UNIT V SLOPE STABILITY 9
Stability Analysis - Infinite slopes and finite slopes – Total stress analysis for saturated clay – Friction
circle method – Use of stability number – Method of slices – Fellenious and Bishop’s method - Slope
protection measures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Demonstrate an ability to identify various types of soils and its properties, formulate and solve
engineering Problems
CO2 Show the basic understanding of flow through soil medium and its impact of engineering
solution
CO3 Understand the basic concept of stress distribution in loaded soil medium and soil settlement
due to consolidation
CO4 Show the understanding of shear strength of soils and its impact of engineering solutions to
the loaded soil medium and also will be aware of contemporary issues on shear strength of
soils.
CO5 Demonstrate an ability to design both finite and infinite slopes, component and process as per
needs and specifications.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Murthy, V.N.S., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers Distribution Ltd.,
New Delhi. 2015
2. Gopal Ranjan and Rao, A.S.R., “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age Ltd. International
Publisher New Delhi (India) 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. McCarthy, D.F., “Essentials of Soil Mechanics and Foundations”. Prentice-Hall, 2006.
2. Coduto, D.P., “Geotechnical Engineering – Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi, 2010.
3. Das, B.M., “Principles of Geotechnical Engineering”. Brooks / Coles / Thompson Learning
Singapore, 8th Edition, 2013.
4. Punmia, B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2005.

Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
CO s to POs
2 3 3 2 3 3
Sciences
76
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 2 2 2 2 2
discipline
innovation
of Engineering solutions to Civil 2 3 3 3 2 3
engineering issues
CE3405 HIGHWAY AND RAILWAY ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To give an overview about the highway and railway engineering with respect to, planning,
design, construction and maintenance as per IRC standards, specifications and methods.
UNIT I HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 9

Classification of highways – Institutions for Highway planning, design and construction at different
levels – factors influencing highway alignment –Typical cross sections of Urban and Rural roads –
Engineering surveys for alignment- Conventional and Modern method
UNITII DESIGN OF HIGHWAY ELEMENTS 9

Cross sectional elements – Horizontal curves, super elevation, transition curves, widening of curves
– Sight distances – Vertical curves, gradients– pavement components and their role - Design practice
for flexible and rigid pavements (IRC methods only).
UNIT III HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE 9

Highway construction materials, properties, testing methods – Construction practice of flexible and
concrete pavement- Highway drainage – Evaluation and Maintenance of pavements.
UNIT IV RAILWAY PLANNING AND CONSTRUCTION 9

Elements of permanent way – Rails, Sleepers, Ballast, rail fixtures and fastenings, Selection of
gauges - Track Stress, coning of wheels, creep in rails, defects in rails – Route alignment surveys,
conventional and modern methods-Geometric design of railway, gradient, super elevation, widening
of gauge on curves (Problems)-Railway drainage- Level Crossings-Signalling.
UNIT V RAILWAY TRACK CONSTRUCTION MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION 9
Points and Crossings - Design of Turnouts, Working Principle-Track Circuiting - Construction &
Maintenance – Conventional, Modern methods and Materials, Lay outs of Railway Stations and
Yards, Rolling Stock, Tractive Power, Track Resistance - Role of Indian Railways in National
Development – Railways for Urban Transportation – LRT & MRTS Feasibility study, Planning and
construction.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Plan a highway according to the principles and standards adopted in various institutions in
India.
CO2 Design the geometric features of road network and components of pavement.
77
CO3 Test the highway materials and construction practice methods and know its properties and
able to perform pavement evaluation and management.
CO4 Understand the methods of route alignment and design elements in railway planning and
constructions.
CO5 Understand the construction techniques and maintenance of track laying and railway stations
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Khanna.S. K., Justo.C.E.G and Veeraragavan A. "Highway Engineering", Nemchand Publishers,
2014.
2. Subramanian K.P., "Highways, Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering", Scitech
Publications (India), Chennai,2010
3. Kadiyali.L.R. "Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering", Khanna Technical Publications,
6th edition Delhi, 2015.
4. C. Venkatramaiah., Transportation Engineering-Vol.2 Railways, Airports, Docks and Harbours,
Bridges and Tunnels., Universities Press (India) Private Limited, Hyderabad, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Indian Road Congress (IRC), Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements, (Third Revision),
IRC:37-2012
2. Indian Road Congress (IRC), Guidelines for the Design of Plain Jointed Rigid Pavements for
Highways, ( Third Revision), IRC:58-2012
3. Yang H. Huang, "Pavement Analysis and Design", Pearson Education Inc, Nineth Impression,
South Asia,2012
4. Ian D. Walsh, "ICE manual of highway design and management", ICE Publishers, Ist Edition,
USA,2011
5. Fred L. Mannering, Scott S. Washburn and Walter P.Kilareski, "Principles of Highway
Engineering and Traffic Analysis", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,2011
6. Garber and Hoel, "Principles of Traffic and Highway Engineering", CENGAGE Learning, New
Delhi,2010
7. O’Flaherty.C.A "Highways, Butterworth – Heinemann, Oxford,2006
8. IRC-37–2012,The Indian roads Congress, Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements,
NewDelhi
9. IRC 58-2012. The Indian Road Congress, Guideline for the Design of RigidPavements for
Highways, NewDelhi
10. Saxena Subhash, C.and Satyapal Arora, A Course in Railway Engineering, Dhanapat Rai and
Sons, Delhi, 1998.

PO/PSO Course Outcome Over all
Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
Cos to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 3 2 2 3 2
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 2 2 2 2
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 2 3 2
PO9 Individual and Team work 2 2 2
PO11 Project Management and Finance 2 3 3
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSO)
discipline
78
Critical analysis of Civil
PSO2 Engineering problems and 2 3 3 2 3 3
Innovation
PSO3 engineering solutions to Civil 2 3 2
Engineering Issues
GE3451 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND SUSTAINABILITY L T PC

2 0 0 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and emphasize
on the biodiversity of India and its conservation.
 To impart knowledge on the causes, effects and control or prevention measures of
environmental pollution and natural disasters.
 To facilitate the understanding of global and Indian scenario of renewable and nonrenewable
resources, causes of their degradation and measures to preserve them.
 To familiarize the concept of sustainable development goals and appreciate the
interdependence of economic and social aspects of sustainability, recognize and analyze
climate changes, concept of carbon credit and the challenges of environmental management.
 To inculcate and embrace sustainability practices and develop a broader understanding on
green materials, energy cycles and analyze the role of sustainable urbanization.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 6

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness. Eco-system and
Energy flow– ecological succession. Types of biodiversity: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity–
values of biodiversity, India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to
biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic
species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 6

Causes, Effects and Preventive measures of Water, Soil, Air and Noise Pollutions.
Solid, Hazardous and E-Waste management. Case studies on Occupational Health and Safety
Management system (OHASMS). Environmental protection, Environmental protection acts .
UNIT III RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY 6

Energy management and conservation, New Energy Sources: Need of new sources. Different types
new energy sources. Applications of- Hydrogen energy, Ocean energy resources, Tidal energy
conversion. Concept, origin and power plants of geothermal energy.
UNIT IV SUSTAINABILITY AND MANAGEMENT 6

Development , GDP ,Sustainability- concept, needs and challenges-economic, social and aspects of
sustainability-from unsustainability to sustainability-millennium development goals, and protocols-
Sustainable Development Goals-targets, indicators and intervention areas Climate change- Global,
Regional and local environmental issues and possible solutions-case studies. Concept of Carbon
Credit, Carbon Footprint. Environmental management in industry-A case study.
UNIT V SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 6
Zero waste and R concept, Circular economy, ISO 14000 Series, Material Life cycle assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment. Sustainable habitat: Green buildings, Green materials, Energy
efficiency, Sustainable transports. Sustainable energy: Non-conventional Sources, Energy Cycles-
carbon cycle, emission and sequestration, Green Engineering: Sustainable urbanization- Socio-
economical and technological change.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
79
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 To recognize and understand the functions of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
their conservation.
CO2 To identify the causes, effects of environmental pollution and natural disasters and contribute
to the preventive measures in the society.
CO3 To identify and apply the understanding of renewable and non-renewable resources and
contribute to the sustainable measures to preserve them for future generations.
CO4 To recognize the different goals of sustainable development and apply them for suitable
technological advancement and societal development.
CO5 To demonstrate the knowledge of sustainability practices and identify green materials, energy
cycles and the role of sustainable urbanization.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition,
New Age International Publishers ,2018.
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2016.
3. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
4. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case
Studies, Prentice Hall.
5. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and
development, Cengage learning.
6. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006.
7. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication,
London, 1998.
REFERENCES :
1. R.K. Trivedi, ‘Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards’, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media. 38 . Edition 2010.
2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, ‘Environmental Encyclopedia’, Jaico Publ., House,
Mumbai, 2001.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT. LTD, New Delhi,
2007.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, Third
Edition, 2015.
5. Erach Bharucha “Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses” Orient
Blackswan Pvt. Ltd. 2013.
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - 2 - - -
3 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
4 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
5 3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
CE3411 HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide hands on experience in calibration of flow meters, performance characteristics of
pumps and turbines.
80
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 10 of the following)
A. FLOW MEASUREMENT
1. Calibration of Rotameter
2. Flow through Orifice meter/mouthpiece,Venturimeter and Notches
3. Bernoulli’s Experiment
B. LOSSES IN PIPES
4. Determination of friction factor in pipes.
5. Determination of minor losses
C. PUMPS
6. Characteristics of Centrifugal pumps
7. Characteristics of Gear pump
8. Characteristics of Submersible pump
9. Characteristics of Reciprocating pump
D. TURBINES
10. Characteristics of Pelton wheel turbine
11. Characteristics of Francis turbine
E. DETERMINATION OF METACENTRIC HEIGHT
12. Determination of metacentric height of floating bodies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Apply Bernoulli equation for calibration of flow measuring devices.
CO2 Measure friction factor in pipes and compare with Moody diagram
CO3 Determine the performance characteristics of rotodynamic pumps.
CO4 Determine the performance characteristics of positive displacement pumps.
CO5 Determine the performance characteristics of turbines.
REFERENCES:
1. Hydraulic Laboratory Manual, Centre for Water Resources, Anna University, 2015.
2. Modi P.N. and Seth S.M., Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics. Standard Book House. New Delhi,
2017.
3. Subramanya K, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Edu. Pvt. Ltd.
2011
COs to POs
PO2 Problem Analysis 2 2 3 3 3 3
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
discipline
81
Engineering Issues
CE3412 MATERIALS TESTING LABORATORY LTPC

0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop skills to test various construction materials.
I. TESTS ON METALS
a. Tension test on steel rod
b. Torsion test on mild steel rod
c. Deflection test on metal beam
d. Double shear test on metal
e. Impact test on metal specimen (Izod and Charpy)
f. Hardness test on metals (Rockwell and Brinell Hardness Tests)
g. Compression test on helical spring
h. Deflection test on carriage spring
II. TESTS ON CEMENT
a. Determination of fineness of cement
b. Determination of consistency of cement
c. Determination of specific gravity of cement
d. Determination of initial and final setting time of cement
III. TESTS ON FINE AGGREGATE
a. Determination of specific gravity and water absorption of fine aggregate
b. Determination of grading of fine aggregate
c. Determination of water absorption for fine aggregate
IV. TESTS ON COARSE AGGREGATE

a. Determination of compacted and loose bulk density of coarse aggregate
b. Determination of impact value of coarse aggregate
c. Determination of elongation index of coarse aggregate
d. Determination of flakiness index of coarse aggregate
e. Determination of aggregate crushing value of coarse aggregate
f. Determination of specific gravity and water absorption of coarse aggregate
V. TESTS ON BRICKS
a. Determination of compressive strength of bricks
b. Determination of water absorption of bricks
c. Determination of efflorescence of bricks
VI. TESTS ON CONCRETE
a. Determination of slump of concrete
b. Determination of compressive strength of concrete
c. Determination of flowability of self-compacting concrete (Demo only)
VII. TEST ON WOOD
a. Determination of Compression test on wood
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
82
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Determine the mechanical properties of steel.
CO2 Determine the physical properties of cement
CO3 Determine the physical properties of fine and coarse aggregate.
CO4 Determine the workability and compressive strength of concrete.
CO5 Determine the strength of brick and wood.

PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
discipline
Engineering Issues
CE3413 SOIL MECHANICS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop skills to test the soils for their index and engineering properties and to
characterize the soil based on their properties.
EXERCISES:
1. DETERMINATION OF INDEX PROPERTIES
Specific gravity of soil solids
a. Grain size distribution – Sieve analysis
b. Grain size distribution - Hydrometer analysis
c. Liquid limit and Plastic limit tests
d. Shrinkage limit and Differential free swell tests
2. DETERMINATION OF INSITU DENSITY AND COMPACTION CHARACTERISTICS
a. Field density Test ( Sand replacement method)
b. Determination of moisture – density relationship using standard proctor compaction test.
3. DETERMINATION OF ENGINEERING PROPERTIES
a. Permeability determination (constant head and falling head methods)
83
b. One dimensional consolidation test (Determination of co-efficient of consolidation only)
c. Direct shear test in cohesion less soil
d. Unconfined compression test in cohesive soil
e. Laboratory vane shear test in cohesive soil
f. Tri-axial compression test in cohesion less soil (Demonstration only)
g. California Bearing Ratio Test
4. TEST ON GEOSYNTHETICS (Demonstration only)
Determination of tensile strength and interfacial friction angle.
a. Determination of apparent opening sizes and permeability.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Conduct tests to determine the index properties of soils
CO2 Determine the insitu density and compaction characteristics.
CO3 Conduct tests to determine the compressibility, permeability and shear strength of soils.
CO4 Understand the various tests on Geosynthetics.
REFERENCES:
1. Soil Engineering Laboratory Instruction Manual” published by Engineering College Co- operative
Society, Anna University, Chennai, 2010.
2. “Saibaba Reddy, E. Ramasastri, K. “Measurement of Engineering Properties of Soils”, New age
International (P) limited publishers, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Lambe T.W., “Soil Testing for Engineers”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1951. Digitized
2008.
4. IS Code of Practice (2720) Relevant Parts, as amended from time to time, Bureau of Indian
Standards, New Delhi.
5. G.Venkatappa Rao and Goutham .K. Potable, “Geosynthetics Testing – A laboratory Manual”,
Sai Master Geoenvironmental Services Pvt. Ltd., 1st Edition 2008.
6. Braja M.Das., “Soil Mechanics: Laboratory Manual”, Oxford University Press, eighth edition,
2012.
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 Correlation of
CO s to POs
PO2 Problem analysis 2 2 3 2 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions 3 3 3 2 3
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 1 1 2 1
PO6 Engineer and Society 1 1 1 1 1
PO7 Environment andSustainability 1 1 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and Team work 3 3 3 3 3
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 1 1 1 1
PO12 Life Long Learning 3 3 3 3 3
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering 3 2 2 2 2
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil Engineering 3 3 3 2 3
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3 2 3 3 3
Engineering solutions to Civil
engineering issues
84
CE3501 DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS LT PC
30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To introduce the different design philosophy for reinforced concrete and discuss the limit state
method of design of RC rectangular beams and to learn the concept in the design of RC flanged
beams and design for shear and torsion and design of RC slabs and staircase, short RC
columns, RC footing for walls, pad, sloped and combined rectangular footings.
UNIT I METHODS OF DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES 9
Concept of Elastic method, ultimate load method and limit state method – Working stress method as
detailed in IS code - Design of Singly Reinforced beam by working stress method - Limit State
philosophy as detailed in IS code - Advantages of Limit State Method over other methods - Analysis
and design of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular beams by limit State Method.
UNIT II LIMIT STATE METHOD - FLANGED BEAM, SHEAR & TORSION 9

Analysis and design of flanged beams – Use of design aids for Flexure - Behaviour of RC members
in bond and Anchorage - Design requirements as per current code - Behaviour of RC beams in shear
and torsion - Design of RC members for combined bending, shear and torsion - serviceability.
UNIT III LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF SLABS AND STAIRCASE 9

Analysis and design of cantilever, one way, two way and continuous slabs subjected to uniformly
distributed load for various boundary conditions- Types of Staircases – Design of dog-legged
Staircase –Introduction to Flat Slab.
UNIT IV LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF COLUMNS 9

Types of columns – Design of short Rectangular and circular columns for axial, uniaxial and biaxial
bending.
UNIT V LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF FOOTING 9

Design of wall footing – Design of axially and eccentrically loaded rectangular pad and sloped
footings – Design of combined rectangular footing for two columns only.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Know the various design concepts and design RC rectangular beams by working stress and
limit state methods
CO2 Understand the design of flanged beams, design for shear and torsion, and anchorage and
development length.
CO3 Design a RC slabs and staircase and draw the reinforcement detailing.
CO4 Design short columns for axial, uni-axial and bi-axial eccentric loadings
CO5 Design wall footings, isolated footings and combined rectangular footing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gambhir.M.L., "Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete Design", Prentice Hall of India Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Krishnaraju.N “ Design of Reinforced Concrete Structurres “, CBS Publishers & Distributors
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
REFERENCES:
1. Sinha, S.N., “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2017
2. Unnikrishna Pillai, S., Devdas Menon, “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., 2021
3. Punmia.B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar Jain, “Limit State Design of Reinforced
Concrete”,Laxmi Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2016
4. Shah V L Karve S R., "Limit State Theory and Design of Reinforced Concrete", Structures
Publilcations, Pune, 2013
85
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Correlation
of CO s to
POs
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3
engineering solutions to Civil 3 3 3 3 3 3
Engineering Issues
CE3502 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS I LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To introduce the students to the basic theory and concepts of classical methods of structural
analysis
UNIT I ANALYSIS OF TRUSSES 9
Determinate and indeterminate trusses - analysis of determinate trusses - method of joints - method
of sections - Deflections of pin-jointed plane frames - lack of fit - change in temperature method of
tension coefficient - Application to space trusses.
UNIT II SLOPE DEFLECTION METHOD 9

Slope deflection equations – Equilibrium conditions - Analysis of continuous beams and rigid frames
– Rigid frames with inclined members - Support settlements - symmetric frames with symmetric and
skew-symmetric loadings.
UNIT III MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD 9

Stiffness - distribution and carry over factors –- Analysis of continuous Beams- Plane rigid frames
with and without sway – Support settlement - symmetric frames with symmetric and skew-symmetric
loadings.
UNIT IV FLEXIBLITY METHOD 9

Primary structures - Compatibility conditions – Formation flexibility matrices - Analysis of
indeterminate pin- jointed plane frames, continuous beams and rigid jointed plane frames by direct
flexibility approach.
86
UNIT V STIFFNESS METHOD 9
Restrained structure –Formation of stiffness matrices - equilibrium condition - Analysis of Continuous
Beams, Pin-jointed plane frames and rigid frames by direct stiffness method.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Analyze the pin-jointed plane and space frames.
CO2 Analyse the continuous beams and rigid frames by slope defection method.
CO3 Understand the concept of moment distribution and analysis of continuous beams and rigid
frames with and without sway.
CO4 Analyse the indeterminate pin jointed plane frames continuous beams and rigid frames using
matrix flexibility method.
CO5 Understand the concept of matrix stiffness method and analysis of continuous beams, pin
jointed trusses and rigid plane frames.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Bhavikatti, S.S,Structural Analysis,Vol.1,& 2, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.New Delhi-4,
2014.
2. Punmia.B.C, Ashok Kumar Jain & Arun Kumar Jain, Theory of structures, Laxmi Publications,
New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. William Weaver, Jr and James M.Gere, Matrix analysis of framed structures, CBS Publishers &
Distributors, Second Edition, Delhi, 2004
2. Reddy .C.S, “Basic Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 2005.
3. Negi L.S. and Jangid R.S., Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing. Co. Ltd. 2004
4. Bhavikatti, S.S, Matrix Method of Structural Analysis, I. K. International Publishing House
Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi-4, 2014.
of CO s to
POs
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
3 3 3 3 3 3
Engineering Issues
87
CE3503 FOUNDATION ENGINEERING LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge to plan and execute a detail site investigation programme, to select
geotechnical design parameters and type of foundations. Also to familiarize the students for the
geotechnical design of different type of foundations and retaining walls.
UNIT I SITE INVESTIGATION AND SELECTION OF FOUNDATION 9

Scope and objectives – Methods of exploration – Auguring and boring – Wash boring and rotary
drilling – Depth and spacing of bore holes – Soil samples – Representative and undisturbed –
Sampling methods – Split spoon sampler, Thin wall sampler, Stationary piston sampler – Penetration
tests (SPT and SCPT) – Data interpretation - Strength parameters and Evaluation of Liquefaction
potential - Selection of foundation based on soil condition- Bore log report.
UNIT II BEARING CAPACITY OF SHALLOW FOUNDATION 9

Introduction – Location and depth of foundation – Codal provisions – Bearing capacity of shallow
foundation on homogeneous deposits – Terzaghi’s formula and BIS formula – Factors affecting
bearing capacity – Bearing capacity from in-situ tests (SPT, SCPT and plate load) – Allowable
bearing pressure – Seismic considerations in bearing capacity evaluation. Determination of
Settlement of foundations on granular and clay deposits – Total and differential settlement –
Allowable settlements – Codal provision – Methods of minimizing total and differential settlements.
UNIT III FOOTINGS AND RAFTS 9

Types of Isolated footing, Combined footing, Mat foundation – Contact pressure and settlement
distribution – Proportioning of foundations for conventional rigid behaviour – Minimum depth for rigid
behaviour – Applications – Floating foundation – Special foundations – Seismic force consideration
– Codal provision
UNIT IV PILE FOUNDATION 9

Types of piles and their functions – Factors influencing the selection of pile – Carrying capacity of
single pile in granular and cohesive soil – Static formula – Dynamic formulae (Engineering news and
Hileys) – Capacity from insitu tests (SPT, SCPT) – Negative skin friction – Uplift capacity- Group
capacity by different methods (Field’s rule, Converse – Labarra formula and block failure criterion) –
Settlement of pile groups – Interpretation of pile load test (routine test only), Under reamed piles –
Capacity under compression and uplift – Codal provision.
UNIT V RETAINING WALLS 9

Plastic equilibrium in soils – Active and passive states – Rankine’s theory – Cohesionless and
cohesive soil – Coulomb’s wedge theory – Condition for critical failure plane – Earth pressure on
retaining walls of simple configurations – Culmann Graphical method – Pressure on the wall due to
line load – Stability analysis of retaining walls – Codal provision.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Graduate will demonstrate an ability to plan and execute a detailed site investigation to select
geotechnical design parameters and type of foundation
CO2 Graduate will demonstrate an ability to design shallow foundations, its component or process
as per the needs and specifications.
CO3 Graduate will demonstrate an ability to design combined footings and raft foundations, its
component or process as per the needs and specifications.
CO4 Graduate will demonstrate an ability to design deep foundations, its component or process as
per the needs and specifications.
CO5 Graduate will demonstrate an ability to design retaining walls, its component or process as per
the needs and specifications.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Murthy, V.N.S., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers and
Distributers Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.
88
2. Gopal Ranjan and Rao A.S.R. “Basic and Applied soil mechanics”, New Age International (P)
Ltd, New Delhi,2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Das, B.M. “Principles of Foundation Engineering” (Eigth edition), Thompson Asia Pvt. Ltd.,
Singapore, 2017.
2. Kaniraj, S.R. “Design aids in Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill
publishing company Ltd., New Delhi, 2017.
3. Varghese, P.C.,”Foundation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi,
2012.
4. Punmia, B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi,
2017.

CO s to POs
Sciences
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil 2 3 3 3 3 3
Engineering problems and
innovation
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation 3 2 2 3 3 3
of Engineering solutions to Civil
engineering issues
CE3511 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING LABORATORY LT P C

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the principles and procedures of testing of materials used in the construction of
highways.
EXCERCISES:
I TEST ON AGGREGATES
1. Specific gravity determination of the coarse aggregate sample
2. Determination of abrasion value of the coarse aggregate sample.
3. Determination of water absorption capacity of the coarse aggregate sample.
89
II TEST ON BITUMEN
4. Specific gravity determination of the bitumen/asphalt sample.
5. Determination of consistency of the bituminous material.
6. Viscosity determination of bituminous binder.
7. Determination of softening point of the asphalt/bitumen sample
8. Determination of ductility value of the bitumen sample
9. Estimation of loss of bitumen on heating
10. Determination of optimum binder content by Marshall method
III BITUMINOUS MIXES
11. Determination of stripping value of the bituminous mix Demonstration
12. Determination of bitumen content in the bituminous mix by cold solvent extraction method
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Characterize Pavement Aggregate through relevant test.
CO2 Ascertain the Quality of Bitumen.
CO3 Determine the Optimum Binder Content Using Marshall Method.
CO4 Evaluate the Consistency and Properties of Bitumen.
CO5 Determine the Bitumen Content in the Bituminous Mixes
REFERENCES
1. Highway Materials and Pavement Testing, Nem Chandand Bros.,Roorkee, Revised Fifth
Edition, 2009
2. N.L.Arora,A Textbook of Transportation Engineering, New India Publication,1997
3. http://vlabs.iitb.ac.in/vlabsdev/labs/nitk_labs/Transportation_Engineering_Lab/index.html
4. Laboratory Manual in Highway engineering published, Duggal,Ajay K 2017

Course Outcome Over all
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)PO/PSO Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
COs to POs
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
Critical analysis of Civil Engineering
3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO2 problems and innovation
PSO3 engineering solutions to Civil 2 2 2 2 2 2
Engineering Issues
90
CE3512 SURVEY CAMP (2 weeks) LTPC
0 001
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of the survey camp is to enable the students to get practical training in the field
work. Groups of not more than six members in a group will carry out each exercise in survey
camp. At the end of the camp, each student shall have mapped and contoured the area. The
camp record shall include all original field observations, calculations and plots.
Two weeks Survey Camp will be conducted during summer vacation in the following activities:
1. Traverse – using Theodolite / Total station
2. Contouring
(i). Radial tachometric contouring - Radial Line at Every 45 Degree and Length not less than
60 Meter on each Radial Line
(ii). Block Level/ By squares of size at least 100 Meter x 100 Meter atleast 20 Meter interval
(iii). L.S & C.S - Road and canal alignment for a Length of not less than 1 Kilo Meter atleast
L.S at Every 30M and C.S at every 90 M
3. Offset of Buildings and Plotting the Location
4. Sun observation to determine azimuth (guidelines to be given to the students)
5. Use of GPS to determine latitude and longitude and locate the survey camp location
6. Traversing using GPS
7. Curve setting by deflection angle
Apart from above students may be given survey exercises in other area also based on site condition
to give good exposure on survey.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Handle the modern surveying instruments like Total station and GPS
CO2 Apply modern surveying techniques in field to establish horizontal control.
CO3 Understand the surveying techniques in field to establish vertical control
CO4 Apply different survey adjustment techniques.
CO5 Carry out different setting out works in the field
Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
CO s to POs
Issues
91
CE3601 DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To introduce the students to limit state design of structural steel members subjectedto
compressive, tensile and bending loads, including connections and to provide the students the
tools necessary for designing structural systems such as rooftrusses and gantry girders as per
provisions of current code (IS 800 - 2007) of practice.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS 9
General -Types of Steel -Properties of structural steel - I.S. rolled sections - Concept of Limit State
Design - Design of Simple and eccentric Bolted and welded connections - Types of failure and
efficiency of joint – prying action - Introduction to HSFG bolts
UNIT II DESIGN OF TENSION AND COMPRESSION MEMBERS 9
Behaviour and Design of simple and built-up members subjected to tension - Shear lag effect-
Design of lug angles - tension splice - Behaviour of short and long columns - Euler's column theory-
Design of simple and built-up compression members with lacings and battens - Design of column
bases - slab base and gusseted base
UNIT III DESIGN OF BEAMS 9
Design of laterally supported and unsupported beams - Design of built-up beams - Design of plate
girders
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES 9
Design of roof trusses – loads on trusses – purlin design using angle and channel sections – truss
design, Design of joints and end bearings–Design of gantry girder - Introduction to pre-engineered
buildings
UNIT V PLASTIC ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 9
Introduction to plastic analysis - Theory of plastic Analysis - Design of continuous beams and portal
frames using plastic design approach
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:
CO1 Recognize the design philosophy of steel structures and identify the different failure modes
of bolted and welded connections, and determine their design strengths
CO2 Select the most suitable section shape and size for tension and compression members and
beams according to specific design criteria
CO3 Apply the principles, procedures and current code requirements to the analysis and design
of steel tension members, columns, column bases and beams
CO4 Identify and compute the design loads on Industrial structures, and gantry girder
CO5 Find out ultimate load of steel beams and portal frames using plastic analysis
TEXT BOOKS
1. Duggal S.K., Design of Steel Structures, Tata McGraw Hill, Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010
2. Bhavikatti S.S, Design of Steel Structures, Ik International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2017.
REFERENCES
1. Gambhir M L, Fundamentals of Structural Steel Design, McGraw Hill Education India Pvt Limited,
2013
2. Jack C. McCormac and Stephen F Csernak, Structural Steel Design, Pearson Education Limited,
2013.
3. Sarwar Alam Raz, Structural Design in Steel, New Age International Publishers, 2014
4. Subramanian N, Design of Steel Structures, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2016
92
of CO s to
POs
PO4 Investigation 2 2
PO6 Engineer and Society 2 2
PO7 Environment and Sustainability 2 2 2
PO8 Ethics 2 2
discipline
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3 3 3
Engineering Issues
CE3602 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS II LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the method of drawing influence lines and its uses in various applications like beams,
bridges and plane trusses and to analyse arches and suspension bridges
UNIT I INFLUENCE LINES FOR DETERMINATE STRUCTURES 9

Introduction to moving loads, Concept of Influence Lines, Influence lines for reactions in statically
determinate structures –Influence lines for shear force and bending moment in beam section –
Calculation of critical stress resultants due to concentrated and distributed moving loads - Influence
lines for member forces in pin jointed plane frames.
UNIT II INFLUENCE LINES FOR INDETERMINATE BEAMS 9

Muller Breslau’s principle - Influence line for support reactions, shearing force and bending moments
for indeterminate beams - propped cantilevers, fixed beams and continuous beams.
UNIT III ARCHES 9

Arches - Eddy’s theorem - Types of arches – Analysis of three-hinged, two-hinged and fixed arches
- Parabolic and circular arches - influence lines, rib shortening– Settlement and temperature effects.
93
UNIT IV SUSPENSION BRIDGES AND SPACE TRUSSES 9
Analysis of suspension bridges – Unstiffened cables and cables with three hinged stiffening girders
– Influence lines for three hinged stiffening girders - Introduction to analysis of space trusses using
method of tension coefficients.
UNIT V APPROXIMATE ANALYSIS OF FRAMES 9

Approximate analysis for gravity loadings - substitute frame method for maximum moments in beams
and columns - Approximate analysis for horizontal loads - portal method and cantilever method -
assumptions - axial force, shearing force and bending moment diagrams.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to ;
CO1 Draw influence lines for statically determinate structures and calculate critical stress resultants.
CO2 Understand Muller Breslau principle and draw the influence lines for statically indeterminate
beams.
CO3 Analyse three hinged, two hinged and fixed arches.
CO4 Analyse the suspension bridges with stiffening girders
CO5 AnalysHYDe rigid frames by approximate methods for gravity and horizontal loads.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Bhavikatti,S.S, Structural Analysis,Vol.1 & 2, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd., NewDelhi-4, 2014.
2. Punmia.B.C, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Theory of structures, Laxmi,
Publications,2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Negi.L.S and Jangid R.S ., Structural Analysis , Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2004.
2. Reddy C.S., Basic Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., Third Edition,
2010.
3. Gambhir.M.L., Fundamentals of Structural Mechanics and Analysis, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
4. Vazrani.V.N And Ratwani,M.M, Analysis of Structures, Vol.II, Khanna Publishers,2015.

of CO s to
POs
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
3 3 3 3 3 3
Engineering Issues
94
AG3601 ENGINEERING GEOLOGY LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 This course will familiarize the students on the role and importance of geology in civil
engineering, apart from learning the techniques of surface and subsurface investigations using
geological, geophysical and geomechanical methods.
UNIT I PHYSICAL GEOLOGY AND GEOMORPHOLOGY 9

Significance of Geology in Civil Engineering; Internal structure of the Earth; Weathering: types,
engineering classification of weathered rocks and relevance to Civil Engineering; Fluvial, Marine,
Glacial and Aeolian landforms and their importance in Civil Engineering; Plate tectonics and its
relevance to earthquakes; Groundwater: types of aquifers, origin, movement and role of groundwater
in Civil Engineering constructions.
UNIT II MINERALOGY AND PETROLOGY 9
Physical and Chemical properties of common rock forming minerals: Quartz family, Feldspar family,
Mica (Muscovite, Biotite & Vermiculite), Pyroxene (Augite & Hypersthene), Amphibole (Hornblende),
Calcite, Gypsum and Clay minerals and their significance. Formation of Igneous, Metamorphic and
Sedimentary rocks; Description of important rocks: Granite, Syenite, Dolerite, Basalt, Quartzite,
Slate, Schist, Gneiss, Marble, Sandstone, Limestone, Shale and Conglomerate. Engineering
properties of rocks: field and laboratory tests.
UNIT III STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY AND ROCK MECHANICS 9

Attitudes of beds: Strike and Dip measurements and their relevance to civil engineering; Different
types of folds, faults, joints and fractures in rocks and their significance in civil engineering
constructions; Geomechanical properties of rocks: Rock Quality Designation (RQD), Rock Mass
Rating (RMR) and Geological Strength Index (GSI) and their importance in various civil engineering
projects.
UNIT IV GEOPROSPECTING 9
Geological mapping techniques; Remote Sensing: Fundamentals and its role in geological mapping;
Geophysical methods for subsurface investigations: Electrical, Seismic & Ground Penetrating Radar
(GPR); Subsurface logging and their importance in civil engineering projects.
UNIT V GEOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS AND GEOHAZARDS 9

Geological conditions necessary for designing and construction of important structures: Dams,
Reservoirs, Tunnels, Road cuttings and Coastal protection; Landslides: Causes and mitigation;
Earthquakes & Tsunamis: Causes and mitigation; Case studies for the above topics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students expected to be able to:
CO1 Knowing the internal structure of earth and its relation to earthquakes. Landforms created by
various geological agents and their importance in civil engineering.
CO2 Getting knowledge on various minerals and rocks that can be used as construction materials
and road aggregates. In addition, testing the suitability of rocks for foundation purposes.
CO3 Studying various geological structures and their impact in engineering constructions. Further,
learning the geomechanical properties of rocks and their significance in engineering projects.
CO4 Gaining knowledge on the role of geological mapping, remote sensing and geophysics for
surface and subsurface investigations. In addition, students will also gain knowledge on
borehole logging techniques and their applications in civil engineering.
CO5 Applying geological knowledge for designing and constructing major civil
engineering structures, and also mitigating various geological hazards such as
earthquakes, landslides and tsunamis.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Parbin Singh, “A Textbook of Engineering and General Geology”, S. K. Kataria and Sons, 2021.
2. Chenna Kesavulu, N. “Textbook of Engineering Geology”, Macmillan India Ltd., 2018.
95
3. Venkat Reddy, D. “Engineering Geology”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Lt, 2021.
4. Gokhale, K.V.G.K, "Principles of Engineering Geology", B.S. Publications, Hyderabad 2019.
5. Varghese, P.C., “Engineering Geology for Civil Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Learning
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Legget, “Geology and Engineering”, McGraw Hill Book company, 1998 Blyth, “Geology for
Engineers”, ELBS 1995.
2. Krynine and Judd, “Principals of Engineering Geology and Geotechnics” Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2018.
3. Bell, F.G. “Fundamentals of Engineering Geology”, B.S. Publications. Hyderabad 2011.

Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
CO s to POs
Knowledge of Engineering
PO1 2 2 2 2
Sciences
PO2 Problem analysis 2 2 3 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions 3 3 3
PO6 Individual and Team work 2 2 2 2
PO9 Ethics 2 2 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering 2 2 2 2
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil 2 2 2
innovation
PSO3 Conceptualization and 2 2 2
evaluation of engineering
solutions to Civil Engineering
Issues
CE3611 BUILDING DRAWING AND DETAILING LABORATORY LTPC

0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge and skill relevant to Building drawing and Detailing lab using computer
software
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Principles of planning and orientation
2. Buildings with load bearing walls and RCC roof (Plan , section , elevation)
3. Buildings with sloping roof
4. Buildings with Framed structures.
5. Building information modeling.
6. Reinforcement details of RCC structural elements (slab, beam and column)
7. Reinforcement details of footings (Isolated, stepped, combined footing)
96
8. Steel structures (Steel Connections detailing, beam to column connection, beam to beam
connection – bolt & Weld, Roof truss & purlin)
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. V.B.Sikka, “A course in Civil Engineering Drawing” S.K.Kataria & Sons Publishers, Seventh
Edition, 2015.
2. D.N.Ghose, ”Civil Engineering Drawing and Design” CBS Publishers & Distributors Pvt.Ltd., 2nd
Edition, 2010.
3. National Building Code of India 2016 (NBC 2016)
4. Unnikrishna Pillai and Devdas Menon, Reinforced Concrete Design (Third Edition), Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2017.
COURSE OUTCOME
CO1 Draft the plan, elevation and sectional view of the load bearing and framed buildings
CO2 Draw the structural detailing of RCC elements
CO3 Draw the structural detailing of RCC water tanks, footings and retaining walls
CO4 Draw the structural detailing of steel structures
CO5 Draft the structural detailing of Industrial structures

CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
CO s to POs
PO2 Problem analysis - 2 2 2 2 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions - - - - - -
PO4 Investigation - - 2 2 2
PO6 Engineer and Society - 3 3 3 3 3
PO7 Environment and Sustainability - - - - - -
PO8 Ethics 1 2 2 1 2 2
PO9 Individual and Team work - 3 3 3 3 3
PO10 Communication - 2 2 2 2 2
PO11 Project Management and Finance - - - - - -
Knowledge of Civil Engineering
PSO1 3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO2 2 2 2 2 2 2
PSO3 engineering solutions to Civil - 2 2 2 2 2
Engineering Issues
CE3701 ESTIMATION, COSTING AND VALUATION ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The students will acquire knowledge in estimation, tender practices, contract procedures, and
valuation and will be able to prepare estimates, call for tenders and execute works.
97
UNIT I QUANTITY ESTIMATION 9
Philosophy – Purpose – Methods of estimation – Centre line method – Long and short wall method
– Types of estimates – Approximate estimates – Detailed estimate – Estimation of quantities for
buildings, bituminous and cement concrete roads, septic tank, soak pit, retaining walls – Culverts
(additional practice in class room using computer softwares- qE Pro)
UNIT II RATE ANALYSIS AND COSTING 9
Standard Data – Observed Data – Schedule of rates – Market rates – Materials and Labour –
Standard Data for Man Hours and Machineries for common civil works – Rate Analysis for all Building
works, canals, and Roads – Cost Estimates (additional practice in class room using Computer
softwares) – (Analysis of rates for the item of work asked, the data regarding labour, rates of material
and rates of labour to be given in the Examination Question Paper)
UNIT III SPECIFICATIONS, REPORTS AND TENDERS 9

Specifications – Detailed and general specifications – Constructions – Sources – Types of
specifications – Principles for report preparation – report on estimate of residential building – Culvert
– Roads – TTT Act 2000 – Tender notices – types – tender procedures – Drafting model tenders ,
E-tendering- e NOI – e NOT -Digital signature certificates – Encrypting -Decrypting – Reverse
auctions.
UNIT IV CONTRACTS 9
Contract – Types of contracts – BOT – Types - Formation of contract – Contract conditions –
Contract for labour, material, design, construction – Drafting of contract documents based on IBRD
/ MORTH Standard bidding documents – Construction contracts – Contract problems – Arbitration
,litigation and legal requirements.
UNIT V VALUATION 9
Definitions – Various types of valuations – Valuation methods - Necessity –Year’s purchase-sinking
fund- Capitalised value – Depreciation – Escalation – Valuation of land – Buildings – Calculation of
Standard rent – Mortgage – Lease - Types of lease
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The student will be able to
CO1 Gain knowledge on types of contracts.
CO2 Understand types of specifications, principles for report preparation, tender notices types.
CO3 Rate Analysis for all Building works, canals, and Roads and Cost Estimate.
CO4 Estimate the quantities for buildings.
CO5 Evaluate valuation for building and land.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. B.N Dutta ‘Estimating and Costing in Civil Engineering’, CBS Publishers & Distributors (P) Ltd,
Twenty eighth revised edition, 2020.
2. B.S.Patil, ‘Civil Engineering Contracts and Estimates’, 7th edition, University Press, 2015
3. D.N. Banerjee, ‘Principles and Practices of Valuation’, V Edition, Eastern Law House, 2015
REFERENCES:
1. Hand Book of Consolidated Data – 8/2000, Vol.1, TNPWD
2. Tamil Nadu Transparencies in Tenders Act, 1998 and rules 2000
3. Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996
4. Standard Bid Evaluation Form, Procurement of Good or Works, The World Bank, April 1996
5. Standard Data Book for Analysis and Rates, IRC, New Delhi, 2019
98
PO/PSO
of CO s to
POs
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 2 2
PSO1 3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
Engineering Issues
CE3702 HYDROLOGY AND IRRIGATION ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the concepts of hydrological processes, hydrological extremes and groundwater
and hence to develop the habit of conservation and management of water resources.
 To expose the students to the principles of irrigation, concept of available water, storage and
diversion structures, and canal irrigation, so that they understand the necessity of irrigation
which aims at providing water at the right quantity, at the right place and at the right time.
UNIT I PRECIPITATION AND RUNOFF 9

Hydrological cycle - Types of precipitation - Rain gauges - Spatial analysis of rainfall data using
Thiessen polygon and Isohyetal methods - Interception – Evaporation: Measurement and
evaporation suppression - Infiltration: Horton’s equation , Infiltration indices - Watershed
characteristics - Runoff estimation using empirical methods – Hydrograph – Unit Hydrograph –
Instantaneous Unit Hydrograph.
UNIT II IRRIGATION PRINCIPLES AND CROP WATER REQUIREMENT 9

Need for irrigation – Physical properties of soil that influence soil moisture characteristics – Concept
of soil water potential - Concept of available water – Measurement of soil moisture content - Crops
and crop seasons in India – Duty, Delta, Base Period – Consumptive water requirement - Irrigation
efficiencies – Consumptive use of water - Irrigation scheduling - Irrigation water quality.
UNIT III FLOOD, DROUGHT, RESERVOIRS AND IRRIGATION STRUCTURES 9

Flood estimation - Frequency analysis - Flood management - Droughts: Meteorological, hydrological
and agricultural droughts - IMD method - NDVI analysis - Classification of reservoirs - Elevation–
Area-Capacity curve - Storage estimation - Life of reservoirs - Head works and its components –
Spillways - Forces acting on a gravity dam.
99
UNIT IV CANAL IRRIGATION AND METHODS OF IRRIGATION 9
Classification of canals - Design of canals – Regime theories - Canal Head works – Canal regulators
- Canal drops – Cross drainage works – Canal Outlets - Canal Escapes – Lining and maintenance
of canals - Methods of Irrigation: Surface, Subsurface and Micro irrigation.
UNIT V GROUNDWATER AND IRRIGATION WATER MANAGEMENT 9

Origin of groundwater - Classification and types - Properties of aquifers - Darcy’s law - Governing
equations – Artificial recharge - RWH in rural and urban areas - Irrigation modernization –
Rehabilitation – Command Area Development - Participatory Irrigation Management – Water Users’
Association - Economic aspects of irrigation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to:
CO1 Define and list out the key drivers of hydrological processes and their integrated behaviour
in catchments. Apply the knowledge of hydrological processes to address basin
characteristics, runoff and hydrograph.
CO2 Describe the soil-water-plant characteristics, measurement soil moisture, estimation of crop
water and hence to perform irrigation scheduling.
CO3 Explain the concept of flood, drought and reservoirs; to understand and explain the hydraulic
structures.
CO4 Draw the components of irrigation canal network, to design the canal and to familiarize with
the different irrigation methods.
CO5 Apply the concepts of groundwater for water resources management; explain the concepts
of irrigation water management from the bottom-up approach.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Subramanya .K. "Engineering Hydrology", 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2020.
2. Jayarami Reddy .P. "Hydrology", 3rd Edition, Laxmi Publications, 2016.
3. Sharma, R.K., and Sharma, T.K., “Irrigation Engineering”, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi,
2008.
4. Garg, S.K., “Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures,” Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Ven Te Chow, Maidment, D.R. and Mays, L.W. "Applied Hydrology", McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. David Keith Todd and Larry W. Mays, "Groundwater Hydrology", 3rd Third Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, 2004.
3. Raghunath .H.M., "Hydrology: Principles, Analysis, Design", New Age International Publishers,
3rd Edition, 2015.
4. Arora, K.R., “Irrigation, Water Power and Water Resources Engineering”, Standard P&D, New
Delhi, 2018.
5. Dilip Kumar Majumdar, “Irrigation Water Management: Principles and Practice”, 2nd Edition,
Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.
6. Punmia, B.C., Pande B. B. Lal, “Irrigation and Water Power Engineering”, Laxmi Publishers, 17th
Edition, New Delhi, 2021.

COs to POs
PO3 Design / development of solutions - 2 3 3 2 2
100
PO9 Ethics - - 2 2 2 1
PO10 Environment and Sustainability - 3 2 2 3 2
PO11 Project Management and Finance - 2 3 2 3 3
Discipline
PSO2 problems and innovation 2 3 3 3 2 3
Engineering issues
GE3752 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Teach the need for quality, its evolution, basic concepts, contribution of quality gurus, TQM
framework, Barriers and Benefits of TQM.
 Explain the TQM Principles for application.
 Define the basics of Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking and
FMEA.
 Describe Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply Techniques
like QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
 Illustrate and apply QMS and EMS in any organization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality –Definition of TQM-- Basic concepts of TQM - Gurus of TQM (Brief introduction)
-- TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM –Benefits of TQM.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Deming Philosophy, Quality Council, Quality statements and Strategic planning-
Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality, Feedback, Customer complaints, Service
Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention – Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment,
Team and Teamwork, Recognition & Reward and Performance Appraisal-- Continuous process
improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle, 5S and Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering,
Supplier selection, Supplier Rating and Relationship development.
UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six-sigma Process Capability- Bench
marking - Reasons to benchmark, Benchmarking process, What to Bench Mark, Understanding
Current Performance, Planning, Studying Others, Learning from the data, Using the findings, Pitfalls
and Criticisms of Benchmarking - FMEA - Intent , Documentation, Stages: Design FMEA and
Process FMEA.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9
Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures- Cost of Quality - BPR.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction-Benefits of ISO Registration-ISO 9000 Series of Standards-Sector-Specific Standards
- AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements-Implementation-Documentation-
Internal Audits-Registration-ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Introduction—ISO
14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001-Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
101
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Ability to apply TQM concepts in a selected enterprise.
CO2: Ability to apply TQM principles in a selected enterprise.
CO3: Ability to understand Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking and
FMEA.
CO4: Ability to understand Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply
QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
CO5: Ability to apply QMS and EMS in any organization.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant Urdhwareshe
and RashmiUrdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression,2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Joel.E. Ross, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”, Routledge.,2017.
2. Kiran.D.R, “Total Quality Management: Key concepts and case studies, Butterworth –
Heinemann Ltd, 2016.
3. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, Third
Edition,2003.
4. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd.,2006 .
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 2
AVg. 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3
CE3811 PROJECT WORK/INTERNSHIP L T P C

0 0 20 10
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and literature
review till the successful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing project reports
and to face reviews and viva voce examination.
STRATEGY:
The student works on a topic approved by the head of the department under the guidance of a faculty
member and prepares a comprehensive project report after completing the work to the satisfaction.
The student will be evaluated based on the report and the viva voce examination by a team of
examiners including one external examiner.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 On Completion of the project works students will be in a position to take up any challenging
practical problems and find solution by formulating proper methodology.
CO1 Identify civil engineering problems reviewing available literature.
CO2 Identify appropriate techniques to analyze complex civil engineering problems.
CO3 Apply engineering and management principles through efficient handling of Project have a
clear idea of his/her area of work and they are in a position to carry out the work in a
systematic way.
102
CO1 CO2 CO3 Cos to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 3 3 2 3
PO3 Design/development of solutions 1 1 2 1
PO4 Investigation 3 3 3
PO5 Modern Tool Usage
PO6 Individual and Teamwork 3 3 2 3
PO7 Communication 2 2 2
PO9 Ethics 2 2 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering discipline 3 3 1 3
PSO2 3 3 1 3
PSO3 engineering solutions to Civil Engineering 3 3 1 3
Issues
103
VERTICAL I: STRUCTURES
CE3001 CONCRETE STRUCTURES L T PC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To acquire hands on experience in design and preparation of structural drawings for concrete /
steel structures normally encountered in Civil Engineering practice using Computer Software
Staad Pro, E-Tabs and any Structural design and analysis Software.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND CODES 9

Geometric Parameters, Grade of concrete and steel for different elements, Exposure and cover
requirements, Fire rating, Load Combinations, Serviceability Requirements, Analysis tools. Indian &
International Codes for Reinforced concrete Design, Design loads, National Building Code 2016,
Practical building example, drawing sizes and scale.
UNIT II LOADS ACTING ON STRUCTURES 9

Introduction, Dead, Live loads, Wind loading and Calculations of - force coefficients, Wind pressure,
storey forces and base shears. Earthquake loading and Calculations of - acceleration coefficient,
Time period, Base shear.
Scheme Design, Concrete floor systems, Sizing and design of various slab systems, Beams,
Reinforced Concrete Columns - Location and Shape, Design Axial Load, sizing, Lateral Load
Systems, IS 1893- Requirements.
UNIT III MODELLING OF BASIC STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 9

Introduction to Analysis & Modelling, Modelling of Cantilever, Portal Frame, three bay Portal Frame,
3D structural models - Geometry, gravity loads, defining earthquake loads, defining wind loads,
Modelling Shear walls, Practical Structural Model of building, Structural models of Floor System,
Estimation of deflections
UNIT IV DESIGN OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 9

Design of Beams- flexural reinforcement, shear reinforcement, Design of flat slabs- Flexural
Reinforcement, shear reinforcement, Design of 2-way continuous slabs.
Design of Reinforcements in Columns, Post processing, Design and arrangement of vertical
reinforcement, horizontal reinforcement in the design of buildings.
Design of shear walls - Sizing of elements based on Constructability aspects like formwork, concrete
placement and compaction, rebar arrangement to satisfy economy and optimum utilisation.
UNIT V DETAILING OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 9
Development of Reinforcement, Typical details of- flat slabs, two-way continuous slabs, beams,
columns and shear wall, detailing and documentation.
Case Studies : Structural analysis and design of a multi-storey building with load calculation (dead,
live, wind and seismic) as per Indian standard codes using any Structural design and analysis
Software.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will able to
CO1 Plan a layout of a structure
CO2 Calculate loads using IS codes and various computational tools
CO3 Analyse the structure for various loads and load combination according to the relevant IS
codes
CO4 Design and Analysis of structures using computer software/tools
CO5 Prepare the complete structural drawings using computer software
REFERENCES:
1. Unnikrishna Pillai, S., Devdas Menon, “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., 2009.
104
2. Gambhir.M.L., "Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete Design", Prentice Hall of India Private
3. Krishnaraju.N “ Design of Reinforced Concrete Structurres “, CBS Publishers & Distributors Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi.
4. Sinha, S.N., “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2002.
5. Punmia.B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar Jain, “Limit State Design of Reinforced
Concrete”,Laxmi Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.

CO s to POs
PO2 Problem analysis - - 2 3 3 3
PO3 Design / development of solutions 3 - - 2 2 2
PO4 Investigation - 2 3 3 3 3
PO6 Individual and Team work 1 - - - - 1
PO7 Communication - - - - 2 2
PO8 Engineer and Society 3 - 3 1 1 3
PO9 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO10 Environment and Sustainability - - 2 - - 2
PO12 Life Long Learning 3 - - 2 2 2
discipline
Engineering Issues
CE3002 STEEL STRUCTURES LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To acquire hands on experience in design and preparation of structural drawings for steel
structures like industrial buildings, steel framed buildings using structural design software and
detailed drawing softwares
 To introduce the students to design of light gauge steel structures
UNIT I DESIGN ASPECTS AND LOADS ON A STEEL BUILDING 9

Inputs for the design of a steel building - Design basis report, covering Site Data, geometrical,
functional and structural requirements for its end usage - material specifications - Methods of
designing a steel building. Calculating the various loads acting on a steel building - Vertical & Lateral
loads - Effects of each loads separately and in combination – Dead, superimposed dead, live,
temperature, MEP service loads - Lateral loads due to Wind and Seismic effects.
UNIT II SELECTION OF LOAD RESISTING SYSTEM AND MODELLING OF STRUCTURE 9

Studying the layout plans of the structure - Selection of load resisting systems - Load flow in each
system - Satisfying Stability and strength of the structure - Vertical and Lateral load resisting systems
- Analysis and design of Sway and non-sway frames - Manual and Computer aided modelling,
105
analysis and design - Geometric and structural parameters of the structure - Loading the structure -
Interpretation of the results of the software – Analysis and Design of a multi-storeyed building.
UNIT III DESIGN OF VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF A STEEL BUILDING 9
Manual and Software aided design – Beams, columns, floors, bracings, purlins/girts and facades,
base plates and anchor bolts – Various loads, different conditions of supports, exposure, and
purpose of use - Design of Connections between the members – bolted and welded, moment and
shear connections
UNIT III DESIGN OF AN INDUSTRIAL BUILDING 9
Functional requirements - Serviceability Requirements - Structural Configurations - Selection of
sections as per requirements - Configuration of the elements, connectivity - Analysis and design of
different types of trusses –– Design of Gantry Girders – Design of gable frames – Design of steel
columns for combined loading - Analysis and design of industrial buildings - Study of General
assembly drawings - Fabrication processes - Fabrication, logistics & erection – Sequence of erection
- Inspection of a completed structure.
UNIT V DESIGN OF LIGHT GAUGE STEEL STRUCTURES 9
Philosophy of design of light gauge steel members, Direct Strength Method (DSM) ,Effective width
method (EWM) – Concept of buckling, local buckling and post-buckling strength - Analysis and
design of Compression members– Analysis and design of flexural members, Lateral buckling of
beams, Shear Lag, Flange Curling – Design of wall panels
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Plan the layout of the structure and calculate the loads of the steel structure.
CO2 Select a load resisting system, model the structure and interpret the results.
CO3 Design the various elements of a steel buildings
CO4 Design a typical industrial building
CO5 Design the various elements of a cold –formed steel buildings
TEXT BOOKS
2. Negi L.S. “Design of steel structures” McGraw Hill Co., New Delhi, 2014
3. Duggal S.K., Design of Steel Structures, Tata McGraw Hill, Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi,2010
REFERENCES
1. Gambhir M L, Fundamentals of Structural Steel Design, McGraw Hill Education India Pvt
Limited, 2013
2. Jack C. McCormac and Stephen F Csernak, Structural Steel Design, Pearson Education
Limited, 2013.
3. Sarwar Alam Raz, Structural Design in Steel, New Age International Publishers, 2014
4. Gaylord E H, Gaylord N C and Stallmeyer J E, “Design of Steel Structures”, 3 rd edition, McGraw
Hill Publications, 1992.
5. Salmon, Johnson & Malhas,” Steel Structures: Design and Behavior, 4th Edition, Harper Collins
College Publisher, 1996
6. Bhavikatti S.S, Design of Steel Structures, Ik International Publishing House, New Delhi,2017.
7. Wie Wen Yu, Design of Cold Formed Steel Structures, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1996
8. www.nptel.ac.in
9. http://www.steel-insdag.org/TM_Contents.asp
INDIAN STANDARD CODES
1. IS: 800 – 2007, Code of Practice for general construction in steel, BIS, New Delhi
2. SP 6 (1) – Structural steel sections
3. IS 875 (1-5) - 1987 Code of practice for Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for Buildings
and Structures, BIS
4. IS 816 :1969 - Code of practice for Metal Arc Welding for general Construction in Mild Steel,
BIS
5. IS: 808 – 1989 Dimensions For Hot Rolled Steel Beam, Column, Channel and Angle
Sections.
106
PO Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
CO s to POs
Knowledge of Engineering
PO1 3 3 3 3 3 3
Sciences
PO4 Investigation - - 2 1 1 1
PO6 Engineer and Society - - - 1 1 1
PO7 Environment and Sustainability - 1 1 2 2 1
PO8 Ethics 1 1 2 2 2 2
PO9 Individual and Team work - 1 1 2 1 1
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 - - 1 1 1
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil 2 2 3 3 3 3
innovation
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation 3 3 3 3 3 3
of engineering solutions to Civil
Engineering Issues
CE3003 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To introduce the basic concepts of prefabrication
 To acquire the knowledge of prefabrication components and systems
 To understand the design principles in prefabrication
 To perceive the types of joints and connections in structural members
 To impart knowledge about the structural stability.
Need for prefabrication -Advantages and limitations – Principles of prefabrication – Modular
coordination – Standarization– Loads and load combinations– Materials – Production –
Transportation – Erection.
UNIT II PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS AND SYSTEMS 9

Behaviour and types of structural components– roof and floor slabs – Walls panels - Shear walls -
Beams - Columns – skeletal system- portal frame system-Large panel systems- block system
UNIT III DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9

Design philosophy- Design of cross section based on efficiency of material used – Problems in
design because of joint flexibility – Allowance for joint deformation - Demountable precast concrete
systems- Design for stripping , stacking ,transportation and erection of elements
UNIT IV JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS IN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 9

Types of Joints – based on action of forces - compression joints - shear joints - tension joints - based
on function - construction joints , contraction joints, expansion joints. Design of expansion joints -
107
Dimensions and detailing - Types of sealants - Types of structural connections - Beam to Column -
Column to Column - Beam to Beam - Column to foundation.
UNIT V DESIGN FOR ABNORMAL LOADS 9

Progressive collapse – Codal provisions – Equivalent design loads for considering abnormal effects
such as earthquakes, cyclones, etc., - Importance of avoidance of progressive collapse -case study.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand concepts about principles of prefabrication, production, transportation, erection.
CO2 Acquire knowledge about panel systems, slabs, beams, shear walls and columns used in
precast construction.
CO3 Acquire knowledge about design of cross section, joint flexibility.
CO4 Acquire knowledge about joints and connection in precast construction.
CO5 Acquire knowledge about structural stability.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Bruggeling A.S. G and Huyghe G.F. "Prefabrication with Concrete", A.A. Balkema Publishers,
USA,1991.
2. Lewitt,M. " Precast Concrete- Materials, Manufacture, Properties And Usage ,CRC Press, 2019
3. Alfred Steinle, Hubert Bachmann, Mathias Tillmann, Philip Thrift . "Precast Concrete Structures",
Ernst & Sohn, Berlin, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Koncz T., "Manual of precast concrete construction", Vol. I, II and III, Bauverlag, GMBH, 1976.
2. "Handbook on Precast Concrete Buildings", Indian Concrete Institute, 2016.
3. " Precast concrete connection details", Structural Design manual, Society for the studies in the
use of precast concrete, Netherland Betor Verlag, 2009.
Correlation
PO
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 of CO s to
POs
PO3 Design / development of solutions
3 2 3 2 3 3
PO8 Ethics 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil
3 3 3 3 3 3
engineering discipline
PSO2 Civil Engineering Performance
2 2 2 2 2 2
Evaluation and coordination
PSO3 Conceptualization of Civil Engineering
2 2 2 2 2 2
Systems
108
CE3004 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To understand the methods and types of prestressing and to enable the students to design
prestressed concrete structural elements and systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION – THEORY AND BEHAVIOUR 9

Basic principles of prestressing – Classification and types – Advantages over ordinary reinforced
concrete – Materials – High strength concrete and high tensile steel – Methods of prestressing –
Freyssinet, Magnel, Lee-McCall and Gifford Udall anchorage systems – Analysis of sections of
stresses by stress concept, strength concept and load balancing concept – Losses of prestress in
post -tensioned and pre-tensioned members.
UNIT II DESIGN FOR FLEXURE AND SHEAR 9

Basic assumptions of flexural design – Permissible stresses in steel and concrete as per I.S.1343
Code – Different Types of sections - Design of sections of Type I and Type II post-tensioned and
pre-tensioned beams – Check for flexural capacity based on I.S. 1343 Code – Influence of Layout
of cables in post-tensioned beams – Location of wires in pre-tensioned beams – Design for shear
based on I.S. 1343 Code.
UNIT III DEFLECTION AND DESIGN OF ANCHORAGE ZONE 9

Factors influencing deflections – Short-term deflections of uncracked members – Prediction of long-
term deflections due to creep and shrinkage – Check for serviceability limit states. Determination of
anchorage zone stresses in post-tensioned beams by Magnel’s method, Guyon’s method and I.S.
1343 code – design of anchorage zone reinforcement – Check for transfer bond length in pre-
tensioned beams– design of anchorage zone reinforcement – Check for transfer bond length in pre-
tensioned beams.
UNIT IV COMPOSITE BEAMS AND CONTINUOUS BEAMS 9

Analysis and design of composite beams – Shrinkage strain and its importance – Differential
shrinkage - Methods of achieving continuity in continuous beams – Analysis for secondary moments
– Concordant cable and linear transformation – Calculation of stresses – Principles of design.
UNIT V MISCELANEOUS STRUCTURES 9

Role of prestressing in members subjected to Tensile forces and compressive forces – Design of
Tension members and Compression members - Design of Tanks, Pipes, Sleepers and Poles –
Partial prestressing – methods of achieving partial prestressing, merits and demerits of partial
prestressing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Design a prestressed concrete beam accounting for losses.
CO2 Design for flexure and shear.
CO3 Design the anchorage zone for post-tensioned members and estimate the deflection in
beams.
CO4 Design composite members and continuous beams.
CO5 Design water tanks, pipes, poles and sleepers.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Krishna Raju N., "Prestressed concrete", 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi,
2012
2. Pandit.G.S. and Gupta. S.P., "Prestressed Concrete", CBS Publishers and Distributers Pvt.
Ltd, 2014
REFERENCES:
1. Lin T.Y. and Ned.H.Burns, "Design of prestressed Concrete Structures", Third Edition, Wiley
India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
109
2. Rajagopalan.N, "Prestressed Concrete", Narosa Publishing House, 2017.
3. Dayaratnam.P., "Prestressed Concrete Structures", Oxford and IBH, 2017
4. Sinha.N.C. And Roy.S.K. Fundamentals of Prestressed Concrete, S.Chand and Co. Ltd., 2011

Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO s to POs
PO9 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
discipline
Issues
CE3005 REHABILITATION/HERITAGE RESTORATION LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To acquire the knowledge on quality of concrete, durability aspects, causes of deterioration,
assessment of distressed structures, repairing of structures, Restoration of Heritage
structures and demolition procedures.
UNIT I MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR STRATIGES 9
Maintenance, Repair and Rehabilitation - Facets of Maintenance - Importance of Maintenance -
Various aspects of Inspection - Assessment procedure for evaluating a damaged structure - causes
of deterioration.
UNIT II STRENGTH AND DURABILITY OF CONCRETE 9
Quality assurance for concrete – Strength and Durability of concrete - Cracks, different types,
causes-Effects due to climate, temperature, Sustained elevated Temperature, Corrosion –
UNIT III SPECIAL CONCRETES 9
Polymer concrete - Sulphur infiltrated concrete - Fibre reinforced concrete - High strength concrete-
High performance concrete - Self compacting concrete - Geopolymer concrete - Concrete made with
industrial wastes.
UNIT IV TESTING TECHNIQUES AND PROTECTION METHODS 9
Non-destructive Testing Techniques, Epoxy injection, Shoring, Underpinning, Corrosion protection
techniques – Corrosion inhibitors, Corrosion resistant steels, Coatings to reinforcement, cathodic
protection.
110
UNIT V STRENGTHENING, REPAIR, REHABILITATION AND RESTORATION OF
STRUCTURES 9
Strengthening of Structural elements, Repair of structures distressed due to corrosion, fire, leakage
and earthquake - Restoration of Heritage structures- Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Know the importance of inspection and maintenance.
CO2 Study the Impacts of cracks, corrosion and climate on structures.
CO3 Know about various special concretes
CO4 Understand the testing techniques and various protection measures
CO5 Know the Repair of structures and Restoration of Heritage structures
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shetty.M.S. Jain A K., Concrete Technology - Theory and Practice, S.Chand and Company,
Eighth Edition, 2019.
2. B.Vidivelli, Rehabilitation of Concrete Structures Standard Publishes Distribution.1st edition
2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Hand book on Seismic Retrofit of Buildings, CPWD and Indian Buildings Congress, Narosa
Publishers, 2008.
2. Hand Book on “Repair and Rehabilitation of RCC Buildings” – Director General works CPWD
,Govt of India , New Delhi – 2002
3. P.C.Varghese, Maintenance Repair and Rehabilitation & Minor works of building, Prentice Hall
India Pvt Ltd 2014.
4. Dodge Woodson, Concrete Structures, Protection, Repair and Rehabilitation,
Butterworth-Heinemann, Elsevier, New Delhi 2012
CO s to POs
Sciences
PO4 Investigation - - - - - -
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - - - - - -
PO6 Engineer and Society - - - - - -
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO10 Communication - - - - - -
PO11 Project Management and Finance - - - - - -
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering - 1 1 - - 1
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil - 1 - 1 2 1
innovation
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation - 1 2 - 2 2
of engineering solutions to Civil
Engineering Issues
111
CE3006 DYNAMICS AND EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT STRUCTURES LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To understand the behaviour of structures under dynamic, earthquake loading and design
the structures as earthquake resistant as per codal provisions.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DYNAMICS 9

Dynamics - Degree of freedom – Free and forced vibration - Idealization of structure as Single
Degree of Freedom (SDOF) and Multi degree of freedom (MDOF) system – D’Alemberts Principles
- Formulation of equation of motion for SDOF system and MDOF system –- Evaluation of natural
frequencies and modes - Effect of damping.
UNIT II SEISMOLOGY 9
Elements of Engineering Seismology – Seismic hazard - Earthquake phenomenon –
Seismotectonics – Seismic Instrumentation – Characteristics of Strong Earthquake motion –
Estimation of Earthquake Parameters – Soil Structure Interaction – Liquefaction of soil - Seismic
zone map – Response spectra.
UNIT III EARTHQUAKE EFFECTS ON STRUCTURES 9

Inertia force on structures – load transfer path – Effect of architectural features on behavior of
structures – Hysteretic Behaviour of RCC, steel and prestressed concrete - Pinching Effect –
Bouchinger Effects - Energy dissipation - P-delta effect - storey drift - Behavior of brick masonry,
stone masonry and reinforced concrete structures under past earthquakes – typical failures - Causes
of damage –- Lessons learnt from past earthquakes.
UNIT IV EARTHQUAKE LOAD ANALYSIS 9

Design spectra – Codal provision – Different methods of earthquake analysis –- Analysis of structure
by Equivalent static method – Analysis of structure by Response spectrum method – Introduction to
time-history method of analysis
UNIT V EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DESIGN 9

Philosophy of earthquake resistant design - Planning considerations and Architectural concepts -
Design and detailing as per codal provisions - Design and detailing of typical flexural member and
column member, Ductile detailing of beam-column joints and footing – Concept and principle of shear
wall - Introduction to performance based seismic design - Seismic isolation principles and methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:
CO1 Develop the equations of motion for SDOF and MDOF system and to evaluate the natural
frequencies and mode shapes.
CO2 Explain the elements of engineering seismology, characteristics of earthquake and seismic
instrumentation.
CO3 Explain the behavior of various types of structures under earthquake
CO4 Determine the forces in a structure due to earthquake
CO5 Design earthquake resistant building structures
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Mario Paz, Structural Dynamics – Theory and Computations, Fifth Edition 2nd printing, CBS
publishers, 2006.
2. Agarwal.P and Shrikhande.M. Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd. 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Clough.R.W, and Penzien.J, Dynamics of Structures, Second Edition, McGraw Hill
International Edition, 1995.
112
2. Minoru Wakabayashi, Design of Earthquake Resistant Buildings, Mc Graw – Hill Book
Company, 1986.
3. Anil K Chopra, Dynamics of structures – Theory and applications to Earthquake Engineering,
Prentice Hall Inc., 2007.
4. Moorthy.C.V.R., Earthquake Tips, NICEE, IIT Kanpur,2002.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

a. IS 4326: 2013 Earthquake Resistant Design And Construction Of Buildings – Code of Practice
b. IS 1893: 2016 Criteria For Earthquake Resistant Design Of Structures – Part 1 General
Provisions and Buildings.
IS 13920:2016 Ductile Design And Detailing Of Reinforced Concrete Structures
Subjected to Seismic Forces – Code of Practice.

CO s to POs
PO9 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
discipline
Engineering Issues
CE3007 INTRODUCTION TO FINITE ELEMENT METHOD LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To develop a thorough understanding of the finite element analysis techniques with an ability
to effectively use the tools of the analysis for solving practical problems arising in Civil
Engineering.
Historical Background – Mathematical Modeling of field problems in Engineering –Governing
Equations – Discrete and continuous models – Boundary, Initial and Eigen Value problems–
Weighted Residual Methods – Variational Formulation of Boundary Value Problems – Ritz
Technique – Basic concepts of the Finite Element Method.
113
UNIT II STIFFNESS MATRIX FORMULATION 9
Introduction to Discrete and Continua elements – Discrete Elements - Direct stiffness method -
Special characteristics of stiffness matrix - Assemblage of elements – Boundary condition & reaction
- 2D – truss element - 2D - beam element - Analysis of framed Structures - Basic steps in finite
element analysis - Differential equilibrium equations - strain displacement relation - linear constitutive
relation - Numerical methods in finite element analysis- Gauss elimination method.
UNIT III ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 9

One Dimensional Second Order Equations – Discretization – Element types- Linear and Higher order
Elements – Continua Elements - Displacement models - convergence requirements. Natural
coordinate systems - Shape function. Interpolation function. Linear and quadratic elements -
Lagrange & Serendipity elements. Strain displacement matrix - element stiffness matrix and nodal
load vector. Natural frequencies of longitudinal vibration and mode shapes.
UNIT IV TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 9

Two dimensional isoparametric elements - Four noded quadrilateral elements - triangular elements.
Computation of stiffness matrix for isoparametric elements - numerical integration (Gauss
quadrature) Convergence criteria for isoparametric elements.
UNIT V ANALYSIS OF PLATES 9

Introduction to Plate Bending Problems - displacement functions – Analysis of Thin Plate - Analysis
of Thick Plate - Analysis of Skew Plate, Finite Element Analysis of Shell, plane stress and plane
strain analysis, Example problem using any general-purpose finite element software
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 to understand the basics of finite element formulation.
CO2 to formulate the stiffness matrix for beam, truss and framed structures.
CO3 :to apply finite element formulations to solve one-dimensional problems.
CO4: to apply finite element method to solve two dimensional problems.
CO5 to apply finite element method to analyze plate bending problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rao, S.S., “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, 6th Edition, ButterworthHeinemann,2018.
2. Reddy,J.N. “Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, 4thEdition, Tata McGrawHill,2018.
REFERENCES
1. Krishnamoorthy, C. S, Finite Element Analysis - Theory and Programming, McGraw - Hill, 1995.
2. David Hutton, Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
3. G.R. Liu and S.S.Quek, Finite Element Method: A Practical Course, Butterworth-Heinemann;
1st edition (21 February 2003)
4. Chennakesava R. Alavala Finite Element Methods: Basic Concepts and Applications, Prentice
Hall Inc., 2010.
5. R. T. Chandrupatla and A. D. Belegundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, PHI
Learning Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 1997.
6. S. S. Bhavikatti, Finite Element Analysis, New Age Publishers, 2007.

CO s to POs
114
PO7 Environment and Sustainability
PO8 Ethics
PO10 Communication
3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 2
engineering solutions to Civil 2 2 2 2 2
Engineering Issues
VERTICAL II: CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES AND PRACTICES

CE3008 FORM WORK ENGINEERING LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 On completion of this course the students will be able to know the detailed planning of
formwork, design of forms and erection of form work.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FORM WORK 9
Introduction to Formwork and false work, Temporary work systems, Requirements, Construction
planning and site constraints, Selection, and Classification (Types) of Formwork, General objectives
of formwork building - Planning for safety - Development of a Basic System - Key Areas of cost
reduction - Planning examples - Overall Planning - Detailed planning - Overall programme - Detailed
programme - Costing - Planning crane arrangements - Site layout plan - Transporting plant -
Formwork beams - Scaffold frames - Framed panel formwork.
UNIT II FORMWORK MATERIALS ASSESORIES & PRESSURES 9
Formwork Materials, Accessories and consumables – Application of tools, Reconstituted wood - Steel
– Aluminum Plywood - Types and grades Standard units - Corner units – Pass units, Calculation of
labour constants - Formwork hours - Labour Requirement. Hardware and fasteners - Nails in Plywood
- Allowable withdrawal load and lateral load. Pressures on formwork - Examples - Finish - Sheathing
boards working stresses - Repetitive member stress Vertical loads for design of slab forms - Uplift on
shores - Laterals loads on slabs and walls.
UNIT III FORMWORK DESIGN 9
Concepts, Formwork Systems – components, assembly, De-shuttering, safety of work and Design
for Tall Structures, Foundation Wall, Column, Slab and Beam formworks. Design of Decks and False
works. Effects of various loads. Loading and moment of formwork, IS Code provisions.
UNIT IV FORMWORK FOR SPECIAL STRUCTURES 9
Formwork for Bridge Structures, Shells, Domes, Folded Plates, Overhead Water Tanks, Natural
Draft Cooling Tower, Nuclear Reactor, Tunnel, Lift Shaft, stairs and Formwork for Precast Concrete.
Various climbing system, Table lifting system.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9
Formwork failures: Causes of failures – Inadequate shoring inadequate bracing of members –
improper vibration – Premature stripping Errors in design – Case studies – Finish of exposed
concrete design deficiencies – Safety factors – Prevention of rotation – Stripping sequence – failure
formwork issues in multi - story building construction – vertical and horizontal elements used in the
industry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
115
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 To understand the overall and detailed planning of formwork.
CO2 To impart knowledge on formwork materials, accessories, pressures and labour requirement.
CO3 To develop the conceptual understanding of design, construction and erection of formwork.
CO4 To impart the knowledge about different types of form work used for special structures.
CO5 To understand the errors in design and judge the formwork failures through case studies.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Peurify R.L and Oberlender G.D , Formwork for Concrete Structures, , McGraw Hill Education
India ,2015
2. Jha K N, Formwork for Concrete Structures, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Austin, C.K., Formwork for Concrete, Cleaver -Hume Press Ltd., London, 1996.
2. Hurd, M.K., Formwork for Concrete, Special Publication No.4, American Concrete Institute,
Detroit, 1996
3. Michael P. Hurst, Construction Press, London and New York, 2003.
4. Christopher Souder , (2014), Temporary Structure Design, Wiley Publications, London.
5. IS 14687: 1999, False work for Concrete Structures - Guidelines, BIS.

CO s to POs
2 3 3 2 2 2
Sciences
PO3 Design / development of
3 3 2 3
solutions
PO8 Ethics
PO10 Communication
PO11 Project Management and
3 2 2 2 3 2
Finance
3 3 3 3 3 3
Engineering discipline
Engineering problems and 3 3 2
innovation
PSO3 Conceptualization and
evaluation of engineering
2 3 2
Issues
116
CE3009 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To train the students in field of construction equipment and machineries so as to have a first
hand knowledge of practical problems in carrying out engineering tasks. To develop skills in
facing and solving the field problems using construction equipment like bull dozer, concrete
mixer, cranes and scraper etc.,
STRATEGY:
The students individually undertake training in reputed civil engineering equipment companies, ready
mix concrete plants, precast/prefabricated companies for the specified duration. At the end of the
training, a report on the work done will be prepared and presented. The students will be evaluated
through a viva-voce examination by a team of internal staff.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to understand the output of construction equipment
and machineries:
CO1 To implement the textbook knowledge into practice.
CO2 To analyse the concepts of developments and implementation of new construction equipment
CO3 To analyse the concepts of developments and implementation of new construction
equipment
CO4 To develope a user friendly construction equipment and machinery model.
CO5 To analyse the cost effectiveness of using construction equipment and machinery

PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 3 2
PSO1 Knowledge of construction 3 2 2 3 2 2
equipment
PSO2 Critical analysis of construction 2 2 3 2 2 2
equipment and machineries
engineering solutions to operation
and output of construction
equipment and machineries
117
CE3010 SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION AND LEAN CONSTRUCTION LT PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about sustainable construction and to understand the concepts of
sustainable materials, energy calculations, green buildings and environmental effects.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION & MATERIALS USED IN SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION 9

Introduction and definition of Sustainability - Carbon cycle - role of construction material: concrete
and steel, etc. - CO2 contribution from cement and other construction materials - Recycled and
manufactured aggregate - Role of QC and durability - Life cycle and sustainability.
UNIT II ENERGY CALCULATIONS 9

Components of embodied energy - calculation of embodied energy for construction materials -
Energy concept and primary energy - Embodied energy via-a-vis operational energy in conditioned
building - Life Cycle energy use.
UNIT III GREEN BUILDINGS 9

Control of energy use in building – National Building Code (NBC), ECBC code, codes in neighboring
tropical countries - OTTV concepts and calculations – Features of LEED and TERI – Griha ratings -
Role of insulation and thermal properties of construction materials - influence of moisture content
and modeling -Performance ratings of green buildings - Zero energy building’
UNIT IV CORE CONCEPTS IN LEAN 9

Introduction to the Course; Lean Overview; Need for Productivity Measurement and improvement;
Productivity Measurement System (PMS).
UNIT V LEAN CONSTRUCTION TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Sampling/ Work Sampling; Survey/ Foreman delay survey; Value Stream/ Process Mapping– 5S ,
Collaborative Planning System (CPS)/ Last Planner™ System (LPS) – Big Room Approach, IT/BIM
and Lean, How to Start Practicing Lean Tools in Project Site.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the various sustainable materials used in construction.
CO2 Explain the method of estimating the amount of energy required for building.
CO3 Describe the features of LEED, TERI and GRIHA ratings of buildings.
CO4 Explain the core concepts of lean construction tools and techniques and their importance in
achieving better productivity.
CO5 Apply lean tools & techniques to achieve sustainability in construction projects.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles J Kibert, Sustainable Construction : Green Building Design & Delivery, 4th Edition , Wiley
Publishers 2016.
2. Steve Goodhew, Sustainable Construction Process, Wiley Blackwell,UK, 2016.
3. Craig A. Langston & Grace K.C. Ding, Sustainable Practices in the Built Environment,
Butterworth Heinemann Publishers, 2011.
4. Ballard, G., Tommelein, I., Koskela, L. and Howell, G., Lean construction tools and techniques,
2002.
5. Salem, O., Solomon, J., Genaidy, A. and Luegring, M., Site implementation and Assessment of
Lean Construction Techniques, Lean Construction Journal, 2005.
118
of CO s to
POs
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - 1 1 2 2 2
PO8 Ethics 1 - - 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and Team work 1 1 - 1 - 1
PO10 Communication - 1 - 1 1 1
discipline
Engineering Issues
CE3011 DIGITALIZED CONSTRUCTION LAB LTPC

0 063
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To train the students in field of digitalization of construction. Students can be trained in the latest
softwares relevant to construction industry
List of experiments:
To implement the digital knowledge in construction (use relevant softwares)
1. Introduction and understanding of Primavera project planner for construction
2. Using Primavera project planner, update the schedule of the project of a construction project.
3. Introduction and understanding of MS Project for a construction project
4. Using MS project, schedule the construction project planning
5. Introduction to BIM in construction projects
a. Development of BIM for small construction project
6. Progress the work flows in construction project using BIM
7. Development of bid management for a small firm construction industry using software.
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to understand the output ofdigitalization of
construction
CO1 To understand the importance of latest softwares in a construction industry.
CO2 To plan a construction project using Primervera
CO3 To plan a construction project using MS project
CO4 To develope a BIM information model
CO5 To analyse the bid management and its effectiveness using bid management software
119

PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2 3 2
PSO1 Knowledge of s 3 2 2 3 2 2
oftwares in construction
PSO2 Critical analysis of softwares in 2 2 3 2 2
construciton 2
PSO3 Evaluation of usage of softwares and 3 3 2 3 3 3
cost saving in construction sector
CE3012 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT AND SAFETY LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To study and understand the formulation, costing of construction projects, scheduling and
various safety concepts and its requirements applied to construction projects.
UNIT I GENERAL OVERVIEW AND PROJECT ORGANIZATION 6

Introduction - Interdisciplinary nature of modern construction projects – execution of project –
evaluation of bits – resource management.
UNIT II ESTIMATION OF PROJECT COST & ECONOMICS 6

Estimating quantities – description of items – estimation of project cost – running account bills –
decision making in construction projects – depreciation of construction equipment – case study.
UNIT III PLANNING AND SCHEDULING 6

Introduction – project scheduling – uncertainties in duration of activities using PERT – Project
monitoring and control system – resource levelling and allocation – crashing of network.
UNIT IV SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION 6

Basic terminology in safety - types of injuries - safety pyramid - Accident patterns - Planning for
safety budget, safety culture - Introduction to OSHA regulations - Site safety programs - Job hazard
analysis, accident investigation & accident indices-violation, penalty.
UNIT V SAFE OPERATING PROCEDURES 6

Safety during alteration, demolition works – Earthwork, steel construction, temporary structures,
masonry & concrete construction, cutting & welding - Construction equipment, materials handling-
disposal & hand tools - Other hazards – fire, confined spaces, electrical safety.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
120
LAB
Ex 1 Introduction to various construction management software
Ex 2 Planning and creating new project
Ex 3 Scheduling and constraints using PRIMAVERA
Ex 4 Project cost management using PRIMAVERA
Ex 5 Construction project safety management using BIM
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Perform formulations of projects.
CO2 Analyze project costing.
CO3 Identify and estimate the activity in the construction.
CO4 Develop the knowledge on accidents and their causes.
CO5 Plan, assess, analyze and manage the construction project sites.
REFERENCES:
1. Barcus, S.W. and Wilkinson.J.W., Hand Book of Management Consulting Services, McGraw Hill,
New York, 1986.
2. Joy P.K., Total Project Management - The Indian Context, New Delhi, Macmillan India Ltd., 1992
3. Albert Lester, Project Management, Planning and Control, 7th Edition, Butterworth- Heinemann,
USA , 2017.
4. Patrick X.W. Zou ,Riza YosiaSunindijo, Strategic Safety Management in Construction and
Engineering John Wiley & Sons, Ltd 2015.

CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
CO s to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 2 2 - 2 2 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions - - 3 - 2 2
PO4 Investigation - - - 2 - 2
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3 3 - 3
PO6 Engineer and Society 2 2 - - - 2
PO7 Environment and Sustainability - - 1 2 - 1
PO8 Ethics 2 2 - - - 2
PO9 Individual and Team work 2 2 - - 2 2
PO10 Communication 3 3 - - - 3
PO12 Life Long Learning 1 1 - 2 - 1
Knowledge of Construction
PSO1 Engineering & Management 2 2 3 - 2 2
discipline
Critical analysis of Construction
PSO2 management problems and 2 2 3 - 2 2
innovation
PSO3 engineering solutions to 3 3 2 - 2 3
Construction Issues
121
CE3013 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To study and understand the latest construction techniques applied to engineering
construction for sub structure, super structure, special structures, rehabilitation and
strengthening techniques and demolition techniques.
UNIT I SUB STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION 9

Construction Methodology - Box jacking - Pipe jacking - Under water construction of diaphragm walls
and basement - Tunneling techniques - Piling techniques - Driving well and caisson - sinking
cofferdam - cable anchoring and grouting - Driving diaphragm walls, Sheet piles - Laying operations
for built up offshore system - Shoring for deep cutting - Large reservoir construction - well points -
Dewatering for underground open excavation.
UNIT II SUPER STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION FOR BUILDINGS 9
Vacuum dewatering of concrete flooring – Concrete paving technology – Techniques of construction
for continuous concreting operation in tall buildings of various shapes and varying sections – Erection
techniques of tall structures, Large span structures – launching techniques for heavy decks – in-situ
prestressing in high rise structures, Post tensioning of slab- aerial transporting – Handling and
erecting lightweight components on tall structures.
UNIT III CONSTRUCTION OF SPECIAL STRUCTURES 9
Erection of lattice towers - Rigging of transmission line structures – Construction sequence in cooling
towers, Silos, chimney, sky scrapers - Bow string bridges, Cable stayed bridges – Launching and
pushing of box decks – Construction of jetties and break water structures – Construction sequence
and methods in domes – Support structure for heavy equipment and machinery in heavy industries
– Erection of articulated structures and space decks.
UNIT IV REHABILITATION AND STRENGTHENING TECHNIQUES 9
Seismic retrofitting - Strengthening of beams - Strengthening of columns - Strengthening of slab -
Strengthening of masonry wall, Protection methods of structures, Mud jacking and grouting for
foundation – Micro piling and underpinning for strengthening floor and shallow profile - Sub grade
water proofing, Soil Stabilization techniques.
UNIT V DEMOLITION 9
Demolition Techniques, Demolition by Machines, Demolition by Explosives, Advanced techniques
using Robotic Machines, Demolition Sequence, Dismantling Techniques, Safety precaution in
Demolition and Dismantling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the modern construction techniques used in the sub structure construction.
CO2 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the principles and concepts relevant to super
structure construction for buildings
CO3 Understand the concepts used in the construction of special structures
CO4 Knowledge on Various strengthening and repair methods for different cases.
CO5 Identify the suitable demolition technique for demolishing a building.
REFERENCES:
1. Jerry Irvine, Advanced Construction Techniques, CA Rocket, 1984
2. Patrick Powers. J., Construction Dewatering: New Methods and Applications, John Wiley &
Sons, 1992.
3. Peter H.Emmons, “Concrete repair and maintenance illustrated”, Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd.,
2001.Press, 2008.
4. Robertwade Brown, Practical foundation engineering hand book, McGraw Hill Publications,
1995.
5. Sankar, S.K. and Saraswati, S., Construction Technology, Oxford University, New Delhi, 2008.
122
CO s to POs
PO2 Problem analysis 2 - 3 3 3 3
PO3 Design / development of solutions 1 - 3 3 3 3
PO8 Ethics - - 1 1 1 1
discipline
Engineering Issues
CE3014 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To provide an understanding of the concept of energy consumption in buildings and design an
energy efficient building
Climate adapted and climate rejecting buildings – Heat Transfer – Measuring Conduction – Thermal
Storage – Measurement of Radiation – The Greenhouse Effect – Convection – Measuring latent and
sensible heat – Psychrometry Chart – Thermal Comfort – Microclimate, Site Planning and
Development – Temperature – Humidity – Wind – Optimum Site Locations – Sun Path Diagrams –
Sun Protection – Types of Shading Devices – Design responses to energy conservation strategies.
UNIT II PASSIVE SOLAR HEATING AND COOLING 9

General Principles of passive Solar Heating – Key Design Elements – Sunspace – Direct gain –
Trombe Walls, Water Walls – Convective Air loops – Concepts – Case Studies – General Principles
of Passive Cooling – Ventilation – Principles – Case studies – Courtyards – Roof Ponds– Cool Pools
– Predicting ventilation in buildings – Window Ventilation Calculations – Room Organization Strategies
for Cross and Stack Ventilation – Radiation – Evaporation and dehumidification – Wind Catchers –
Mass Effect – Zoning – Load Control – Air Filtration and odor removal.
UNIT III DAYLIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL LIGHTING 9

Materials, components and details – Insulation – Optical materials – Radiant Barriers – Glazing
materials – Glazing Spectral Response – Day lighting – Sources and concepts –Building Design
Strategies – Case Studies – Daylight apertures – Light Shelves – Codal requirements – Day lighting
design – Electric Lighting – Light Distribution – Electric Lighting control for day lighted buildings –
Switching controls – Coefficient of utilization – Electric Task Lighting – Electric Light Zones – Power
Adjustment Factors.
123
UNIT IV HEAT CONTROL AND VENTILATION 9
Hourly Solar radiation – Heat insulation – Terminology – Requirements – Heat transmission through
building sections – Thermal performance of Building sections – Orientation of buildings – Building
characteristics for various climates – Thermal Design of buildings – Influence of Design Parameters –
Mechanical controls – Examples. Ventilation – Requirements – Minimum standards for ventilation –
Ventilation Design – Energy Conservation in Ventilating systems – Design for Natural Ventilation –
Calculation of probable indoor wind speed.
UNIT V DESIGN FOR CLIMATIC ZONES 9
Energy efficiency – An Overview of Design Concepts and Architectural Interventions – Embodied
Energy – Low Embodied Energy Materials – Passive Downdraft Evaporative Cooling – Design of
Energy Efficient Buildings for Various Zones – Cold and cloudy – Cold and sunny – Composite – Hot
and dry – Moderate – Warm and humid – Case studies of residences, office buildings and other
buildings in each zones – Commonly used software packages in energy efficient building analysis and
design - Energy Audit – Certification.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Explain environmental energy supplieson buildings
CO2 Explain the passives ol arheating,cooling system
CO3 Discuss the various aspects of day-lighting and electrical lighting in abuilding
CO4 Predict and design building ventilation and heat control for indoor comfort
CO5 Design a building for climatic zone and apply simulation programs of buildings to perform
energy alculations
REFERENCES
1. Energy Conservation Building Code, cau of Energy Efficiency, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Handbook on Functional Requirements of Buildings Part 1 to 4 SP : 41 ( S and T) 1995
3. Residential Energy: Cost Savings and Comfort for Existing Buildings by John Krigger and Chris
Dorsi, Published by Saturn Resource Management, 2013.
4. Brown, G.Z. and DeKay, M., Sun, Wind and Light - Architectural Design Strategies, John Wiley
and Sons Inc,3rd Edition, 2014
5. Majumdar, M (Ed), Energy - Efficient Buildings in India, Tata Energy Research Institute, Ministry
of Non-Conventional Energy Sources, 2009.
Course Outcome
Overall
PO2 Problemanalysis - - - 3 3 2
PO3 Design/developmentofsolutions 2 2 2 3 3 3
PO4 Investigation - - - - 1 2
PO5 ModernTool Usage - - - - 2 1
PO6 Individualand Teamwork 1 - - - 1
PO7 Communication - - - 1 1 1
PO8 Engineerand Society 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO9 Ethics 2 2 2
PO10 EnvironmentandSustainability 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO11 ProjectManagementandFinance - - - - - -
PO12 LifeLongLearning 3 - - - - 3
PSO1 Knowledge of ConstructionEngineering & 3 3 3 3 2 3
Managementdiscipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Construction management 2 2 2 3 3 3
engineering solutions to Construction Issues
124
VERTICAL III: GEOTECHNICAL
CE3015 GEOENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The student acquires the knowledge on the Geotechnical engineering problems associated
with soil contamination, safe disposal of waste and remediate the contaminated soils by
different techniques hereby protecting environment.
UNIT I SOIL – WASTE INTERACTION 9

Role of Geo-environmental Engineering – sources, generation and classification of wastes – causes
and consequences of soil pollution – case studies in soil failure -factors influencing soilpollutant
interaction – modification of index, chemical and engineering properties – physical and physio-
chemical mechanisms.
UNIT II CONTAMINANT TRANSPORT AND SITE CHARACTERISATION 9

Transport of contaminant in subsurface – advection, diffusion, dispersion – chemical process –
biological process, sorption, desorption, precipitation, dissolution, oxidation, complexation, ion
exchange, Volatization, biodegradation – characterization of contaminated sites – soil and rock data
– hydrological and chemical data – analysis and evaluation.
UNIT III WASTE CONTAINMENT AND REMEDIATION OF CONTAMINATED SITES 9

In-situ containment – vertical and horizontal barrier – surface cover – ground water pumping system
on subsurface drain – soil remediation – Soil Vapour extraction, soil waste stabilization, solidification
of soils, electrokinetic remediation, soil heating, vitrification, bio remediation, Phyto-remediation –
ground water remediation – pump and treat , In-situ flushing, permeable reacting barrier, In-situ air
sparging.
UNIT IV LANDFILLS AND SURFACE IMPOUNDMENTS 9

system – Source and characteristics of waste - site selection for landfills – components of landfills –
liner soil, geomembrane, geosynthetic clay, geo-composite liner system – leachate collection – final
cover design – monitoring landfill - Environmental laws and regulations.
UNIT V STABILISATION OF WASTE 9

Evaluation of waste materials – flyash, municipal sludge, plastics, scrap tire, blast furnace slag,
construction waste, wood waste and their physical, chemical and biological characteristics – potential
reuse – utilization of waste and soil stabilization.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to;
CO1 Understand the various causes and consequences of waste interaction with soil and their
modification.
CO2 Understand the various mechanism of transport of contaminants into the subsurface and
characterization of contaminated sites and their risk analysis.
CO3 Understand on how to decontaminate the site so as to reuse the site for human settlement
CO4 Understand how to safely dispose the waste through different containment process.
CO5 Expose on how to convert the waste into a resource material through soil waste stabilization
techniques with or without chemical stabilization.
REFERENCES:
1. Daniel B.E, Geotechnical Practice for waste disposal, Chapman & Hall, London, 1993.
2. Hari D. Sharma and Krishna R.Reddy, Geo-Environmental Engineering – John Wiley and Sons,
INC, USA, 2004.
3. Westlake, K., Landfill Waste pollution and Control, Albion Publishing Ltd., England, 1995.
4. Wentz, C.A., Hazardous Waste Management, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1989.
5. Proceedings of the International symposium of Environmental Geotechnology (Vol.I and II),
Environmental Publishing Company, 1986 and 1989.
125
6. Ott, W.R., Environmental Indices, Theory and Practice, Ann Arbor, 1978.
7. Fried, J.J., Ground Water Pollution, Elsevier, 1975.
8. ASTM Special Tech. Publication 874, Hydraulic Barrier in Soil and Rock, 1985.
9. Lagrega, M.d., Buckingham, P.L., and Evans, J.C., Hazardous Waste Management, McGraw
Hill, Inc. Singapore, 1994.
Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
COs to POs
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Geotechnical
Engineering discipline 2 2 2 3 1 2
PSO2 Critical analysis of Geotechnical
Engineering problems and innovation 2 2 2 2 2 2
Of engineering solutions to
3 3 2 3 2 3
geotechnical engineering issues
CE3016 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Students will be exposed to various problems associated with soil deposits and methods to
evaluate them. The different techniques will be taught to them to improve the characteristics of
difficult soils as well as design techniques required to implement various ground improvement
methods.
UNIT I HYDRAULIC MODIFICATIONS 9

Scope and necessity of ground improvement in Geotechnical engineering basic concepts. Drainage
– Ground Water lowering by well points, deep wells, vacuum and electro-osmotic methods.
Stabilization by thermal and freezing techniques - Applications.
UNIT II MECHANICAL MODIFICATIONS 9

Insitu compaction of granular and cohesive soils, Shallow and Deep compaction methods – Sand
piles – Concept, design, factors influencing compaction. Blasting and dynamic consolidation design
and relative merits of various methods – Soil liquefaction mitigation methods.
126
UNIT III PHYSICAL MODIFICATION 9
Preloading with sand drains, fabric drains, wick drains – theories of sand drain - Stone column with
and without encased, lime stone – functions – methods of installation – design, estimation of load
carrying capacity and settlement. Root piles and soil nailing – methods of installation – Design and
Applications.
UNIT IV MODIFICATION BY INCLUSIONS 9
Reinforcement – Principles and basic mechanism of reinforced earth, simple design: Synthetic and
natural fiber based Geotextiles and their applications. Filtration, drainage, separation, erosion
control.
UNIT V CHEMICAL MODIFICATION 9
Grouting – Types of grout – Suspension and solution grouts – Basic requirements of grout. Grouting
equipment – injection methods – jet grouting – grout monitoring – Electro – Chemical stabilization –
Stabilization with cement, lime - Stabilization of expansive clays.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 identify and evaluate the deficiencies in the deposits of the given project area and improve its
characteristics by hydraulic modifications
CO2 improve the ground characteristics by mechanical modifications using various method and
design the system
CO3 improve the ground characteristics by physical modifications using various method and design
the system
CO4 improve the characteristics of soils by various reinforcement techniques and design
CO5 Analyse the ground and decide the suitable chemical method for improving its characteristics
REFERENCES:
1. Pappala, A.J.,Huang,J., Han, J., and Hoyos, L.R., Ground Improvement and Geosynthetics;
Geotechnical special publication No.207, Geo Institute, ASCE, 2010
2. Cox, B.R., and Grifiths S.C., Practical Recommendation for Evaluation and mitigation of Soil
Liquefaction in Arkansas, (Project Report), 2010.
3. Day, R.W., Foundation Engineering Handbook, McGraw – Hill Companies, Inc. 2006.
4. Rowe, R.K., Geotechnical and Geo-environmental Engineering Handbook, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2001.
5. Das, B.M., Principles of Foundation Engineering, Fourth Edition, PWS Publishing, 1999.
6. Moseley, M.P., Ground Treatment, Blackie Academic and Professionals, 1998.
7. Koerner, R.M., Designing with Geosynthetics, Third Edition, Prentice Hall 1997.
8. Hehn, R.W., Practical Guide to Grouting of Underground Structures, ASCE, 1996.
9. Jewell, R.A., Soil Reinforcement with Geotextiles, CIRIA, London, 1996.
10. Koerner, R.M. and Welsh, J.P., Construction and Geotechnical Engineering using Synthetic
Fabrics, John Wiley, 1990.
11. Han,J., Principles and Practice of Ground Improvement, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey,
Canada 2015.
12. Jones, J.E.P., Earth Reinforcement and Soil Structure, Butterworths, 1985.
13. Manfred R. Hausmann, Engineering Principles of Ground Modifications, McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company, New York
Correlation of
3 2 2 2 2 2
Sciences
127
PO8 Ethics 3 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3
Innovation
of engineering solutions to 2 3 3 3 3 3
CE3017 SOIL DYNAMICS AND MACHINE FOUNDATIONS L T PC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To design different types of machine foundations based on the dynamic properties of soils
and to get an exposure on vibration isolation techniques.
UNIT I THEORY OF VIBRATION 9
Introduction – Nature of dynamic loads – Basic definitions – Simple harmonic motion – Fundamentals
of vibration – Single degree and multi degree of freedom systems – Free vibrations of spring – Mass
systems – Forced vibrations – Resonance – Viscous damping – Principles of vibrations measuring
systems – Effect of transient and pulsating loads.
UNIT II DYNAMIC SOIL PROPERTIES 9
Dynamic stress-strain characteristics – Principles of measuring dynamic properties – Laboratory
techniques – Field tests – Block vibration test – Factors affecting dynamic properties – Typical
values. Mechanism of liquefaction – Influencing factors – Evaluation of liquefaction potential –
Analysis from SPT test – Dynamic bearing capacity – Dynamic earth pressure.
UNIT III MACHINE FOUNDATIONS 9
Introduction – Types of machine foundations – General requirements for design of machine
foundations – Design approach for machine foundation – Vibration analysis – Elastic Half-Space
theory – Mass-spring-dashpot model – Permissible amplitudes – Permissible bearing pressures.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF MACHINE FOUNDATION 9
Evaluation of design parameters – Types of Machines and foundations – General requirements –
their importance – Analysis and design of block type and framed type machine foundations – Modes
of vibration of a rigid foundation – Foundations for reciprocating machines, impact machines, Two –
Cylinder vertical compressor, Double-acting steam hammer –Codalrecommendations - Emprical
approach – Barken’s method – Bulb of pressure concept – Pauw’s analogy – Vibration table studies.
UNIT V VIBRATION ISOLATION 9

Vibration isolation – Types of isolation – Transmissibility – Passive and active isolation – Methods of
isolation – Use of springs and damping materials – Properties of isolating materials – Vibration
control of existing machine foundation.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
128
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to;
CO1 Acquire knowledge to apply theories of vibration to solve dynamic soil problems.
CO2 Evaluate the dynamic properties of soil using laboratory and field tests.
CO3 Acquire basic knowledge about machine foundations and design various types of machine
foundation.
CO4 To know and capable of selecting the types of vibration isolation materials.
CO5 To apply vibration isolation techniques for various field problems.
REFERENCES:
1. KameswaraRao, N.S.V., Dynamics soil tests and applications, Wheeler Publishing, New Delhi,
2000.
2. Prakash, S and Puri, V.K., Foundations for machines, McGraw Hill, 1987.
3. Moore, P.J.,Analysis and Design of Foundations for Vibrations, Oxford and IBH, 1985.
4. Vaidyanathan, C.V., and Srinivasalu, P., Handbook of Machine Foundations, McGraw Hill, 1995.
5. Arya, S., O’Nelt; S., Design of Structures and Foundations for Vibrating Machines, Prentice Hall,
1981.
6. Major, A., Vibration Analysis and Design of Foundations for Machines and Turbines, Vol. I. II
and III Budapest, 1964.
7. Barkan, D.D., Dynamics of Basis of Foundation, McGraw Hill, 1974.
8. Swami Saran, Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundation, Galgotia publications Pvt. Ltd. New
Delhi 2010.
9. Das B.M., Principles of Soil Dynamics, McGraw Hill, 1992.
10. Krammer S.L., Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering, Prentice Hall, International series,
Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt Ltd, 2004.
11. KameswaraRao, Vibration Analysis and Foundation Dynamics, Wheeler Publishing, New Delhi,
1998.
Correlation
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 of COs to
POs
PO8 Ethics 1 2 3 3 3 3
PSO1 Knowledge of Geotechnical 2 2 3 3 3 3
PSO2 Critical analysis of Geotechnical 2 2 3 3 3 3
Innovation
engineering solutions to geotechnical
engineering issues
129
CE3018 ROCK MECHANICS LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Students are expected to classify, understand stress-strain characteristics, failure criteria,
and influence of in-situ stress in the stability of various structures and various technique to
improve the in-situ strength of rocks.
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF ROCKS 9

Types of Rocks - Index properties and classification of rock masses, competent and incompetent
rock - value of RMR and ratings in field estimations.
UNIT II STRENGTH CRITERIA OF ROCKS 9

Behaviour of rock under hydrostatic compression and deviatric loading - Modes of rock failure planes
of weakness and joint characteristics - joint testing, Mohr - Coulomb failure criterion and tension cut-
off. Hoek and Brown Strength criteria for rocks with discontinuity sets.
UNIT III INSITU STRESSES IN ROCKS 9

In-situ stresses and their measurements, Hydraulic fracturing, flat jack, over coring and under coring
methods - stress around underground excavations – Design aspects of openings in rocks.
UNIT IV SLOPE STABILITY AND BEARING CAPACITY OF ROCKS 9

Rock slopes - role of discontinuities in slop failure, slope analysis and factor of safety - remedial
measures for critical slopes – Bearing capacity of foundations on rocks.
UNIT V ROCK STABILIZATION 9

Stabilization of rocks-rock support and rock reinforcement-active and passive supports-ground
response curve-support reaction curve-reinforcement of fractured and joined rocks-Shotcreting-
bolting-anchoring-installation methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Classify the Rock mass and rate the quality of rock for tunnelling and foundations works and
suggest the safer length of tunnelling and stand-up time.
CO2 Apply the knowledge of engineering and understand the stress – strain characteristics and
failure criteria of rock and apply them to arrive at the shear strength parameters of rocks to be
used for the design of structures resting on rock and also for the design of underground
excavation in rocks.
CO3 Apply the knowledge of engineering and assess the influence of in-situ stress in the stability of
various underground excavations and also acquire the knowledge of design of opening in
rocks.
CO4 Apply the knowledge on rock mechanics and analyze the stability of rock slopes and arrive at
the bearing capacity of shallow and deep foundations resting on rocks considering the
presence of joints. design the foundations resting on rocks. Able to carry-out suitable
foundation for the structure resting on rock.
CO5 Improve the in-situ strength of rocks by various methods such as rock reinforcement and
rock support. Able to select suitable support system considering the interaction between rock
and support. Also capable of executing the same in the field.
REFERENCES:
1. Goodman, R.E., Introduction to rock mechanics, John Willey and Sons, 1989.
2. Hudson, A. and Harrison, P., Engineering Rock mechanics – An introduction to the principles,
Pergamon publications, 1997.
3. Hoek, E and Bray, J., Rock slope Engineering, Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, U.K. 1981.
4. Hoek, E and Brown, E.T., Underground Excavations in Rock, Institute of Mining and Metallurgy,
U.K. 1981.
130
5. Obvert, L. and Duvall, W., Rock Mechanics and the Design of structures in Rock, John Wiley,
1967.
6. Bazant, Z.P., Mechanics of Geomaterials Rocks, Concrete and Soil, John Wiley and Sons,
Chichester, 1985.Wittke, W., Rock Mechanics. Theory and Applications with case Histories,
Springerverlag, Berlin, 1990.
7. Waltham, T, Foundations of Engineering Geology, Second Edition, Spon Press, Taylor &
Francis Group, London and New York, 2002.
8. Ramamurthy T., “Engineering in Rocks for Slopes Foundations and Tunnels”, PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2007.

Correlation
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 of COs to
POs
PO8 Ethics 3 1 1 1 3 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
engineering solutions to geotechnical 2 2 3 3 3 3
engineering issues
CE3019 EARTH AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 At the end of this course, students are expected to analyse and design rigid, flexible earth
retaining structures, slurry supported trenches and deep cuts.
UNIT I EARTH PRESSURE THEORIES 9
Introduction – State of stress in retained soil mass – Earth pressure theories – Classical and
graphical techniques (Culmann’s method) – Active and passive cases – Earth pressure due to
external loads.
UNIT II COMPACTION, DRAINAGE AND STABILITY OF RETAINING STRUCTURES 9
Retaining structure – Selection of soil parameters - Lateral pressure due to compaction, strain
softening, wall flexibility, drainage arrangements and its influence. – Stability analysis of retaining
structure both for regular and earthquake forces.
131
UNIT III SHEET PILE WALLS 9
Types of sheet piles - Analysis and design of cantilever and anchored sheet pile walls – free earth
support method – fixed earth support method. Design of anchor systems - isolated and continuous.
UNIT IV SUPPORTED EXCAVATIONS 9
Lateral pressure on sheeting in braced excavation, stability against piping and bottom heaving. Earth
pressure around tunnel lining, shaft and silos – Soil anchors – Soil pinning –Basic design concepts.
UNIT V SLURRY SUPPORTED EXACAVATION 9

Slurry supported trenches-basic principles-slurry characteristics-specifications-diaphragm walls-
bored pile walls-contiguous pile wall-secant piles-stability analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Analyse the earth pressure acting on retaining structures by applying classical theories
considering all influencing parameters and suggest the earth pressure to be considered for the
design of retaining structures.
CO2 Apply the knowledge of engineering and earth pressure to analyse and design rigid retaining
structures considering effect of compaction, wall flexibility, pore water pressure and earth
quake forces.
CO3 Apply the knowledge of engineering and earth pressure to analyse and design flexible earth
retaining walls and also acquire the knowledge of design of anchors
CO4 Apply the knowledge on lateral earth pressure behind and around excavation to analyse and
design braced excavations, slurry supported excavations and underground utilities.
CO5 To understand the role of slurry in supporting excavations and to perform stability analysis by
considering the actual shape of slurry support
REFERENCES:
1. Clayton, C.R.I., Militisky, J. and Woods, R.I., Earth pressure and Earth-Retaining structures,
Second Edition, Survey University Press, 1993.
2. Das, B.M., Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, Fourth Edition, The PWS series in Civil
Engineering, 1998.
3. Militisky, J. and Woods, R., Earth and Earth retaining structures, Routledge,1992.
4. Winterkorn, H.F. and Fang, H.Y., Foundation Engineering Handbook, GalgotiaBooksource,
2000.
5. Rowe, R.K., Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering Handbook, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2001.
6. Koerner, R.M. Designing with Geosynthetics, Third Edition, Prentice Hall, 1997.
7. Day, R.W., Geotechnical and Foundation Engineering: Design and Construction, McGraw Hill,
1999.
8. Mandal, J.N., Reinforced Soil and Geotextiles, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
1993.
9. McCarthy, D.F., Essentials of Soil Mechanics and Foundations: Basic Geotechnics, Sixth Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2002.
10. Hajnal, I., Marton, J. and Regele, Z., Construction of diaphragm walls, A Wiley – Interscience
Publication, 1984.
11. Petros P. Xanthakos., Slurry walls as structural systems, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York, 1994.
12. Bramhead, E.N., The Stability of Slopes, Blacky Academic and Professionals Publications,
Glasgow, 1986.
13. Muni Budhu, Soil Mechanics and Foundation, John Wiley and Sons, INC 2007.
132
of COs to
POs
3 2 2 3 3 3
Sciences
PO8 Ethics 3 1 1 1 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
Engineering problems and 3
innovation 3 2 2 3 3
of engineering solutions to 3 2 2 3 3 3
CE3020 PILE FOUNDATION LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The student will be exposed to the design of piles, pile groups and caissons with respect to
vertical and lateral loads for various field conditions.
UNIT I PILE CLASSIFICATIONS AND LOAD TRANSFER PRINCIPLE 9

Necessity of pile foundation – classification of piles – Factors governing choice of type of pile – Load
transfer mechanism – piling equipments and methods – effect of pile installation on soil condition –
pile raft system – basic interactive analysis - criteria for pile socketing.
UNIT II AXIAL LOAD CAPACITY OF PILES AND PILE GROUPS 9

Allowable load of piles and pile groups – Static and dynamic methods – for cohesive and
cohesionless soil – negative skin friction – group efficiency – pile driving formulae - limitation – Wave
equation application – evaluation of axial load capacity from field test results - Settlement of piles
and pile group.
UNIT III LATERAL AND UPLIFT LOAD CAPACITIES OF PILES 9

Piles under Lateral loads – Broms method, elastic, p-y curve analyses – Batter piles – response to
moment – piles under uplift loads – under reamed piles – Drilled shaft – Lateral and pull out capacity
from load test.
133
UNIT IV STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF PILE AND PILE GROUPS 9
Structural design of pile – structural capacity – pile and pile cap connection – pile cap design –
shape, depth, assessment and amount of steel – truss and bending theory- Reinforcement details
of pile and pile caps –– pile subjected to vibration.
UNIT V CAISSONS 9
Necessity of caisson – type and shape - Stability of caissons – principles of analysis and design –
tilting of caisson – construction - seismic influences.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain the importance of pile foundation and various functions and responsibilities of
geotechnical engineer and contractor, in addition to the piling equipments.
CO2 Determine the vertical load carrying capacity of pile and pile group- keeping the settlement of
pile as an important criteria based on field practices and codal provisions.
CO3 Apart from vertically loaded piles, the structures are exposed to the peculiar pile subjected to
lateral and uplift load with reference to codal provision and case studies.
CO4 Understand the design of pile and pile caps, considering the wind and seismic loads.
CO5 Explain the importance of caisson foundation and checking the stability of caissons based on
codal provisions.
REFERENCES:
1. Das, B.M., Principles of Foundation Engineering, Design and Construction, Fourth Edition,
PWS Publishing, 1999.
2. Poulos, H.G., Davis, E.H., Pile foundation analysis and design, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1980.
3. Tomlinson, M.J. Foundation engineering, ELBS, Longman Group, U.K. Ltd., England 1995.
4. Michael Tomlinson and John Woodward, Pile design and construction practice, Taylor &
Francis Group, London & New York, 2008.
5. Cernica, J.N. Geotechnical Engineering Foundation Design, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 1995.
6. Bowles, J.E., Foundation Analysis and Design, Fifth Edition, McGraw Hill, New York, 1996.
7. Donald, P., Coduto, Foundation Design Principles and Practices, Prentice Hall, Inc. Englewood
Cliffs, New Jersey, 1996.
8. Varghese P.C.,” Foundation Engineering”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2005.
9. Reese,L.C., Isenhower,W.M. and Wang,S.T. Analysis and Design of Shallow and Deep
Foundations, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2005.
10. Varghese P.C.,” Design of Reinforced Concrete Foundations”, PHI Learning Private Limited,
New Delhi, 2009.
11. Reese, L. C. and Van Impe, W. F., Single Piles and Pile Groups Under Lateral Loading, Taylor
and Francis, London, 2011.

Correlation of
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences
1 2 2 1 2 2
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
134
3 2 3 2 3 3
innovation
engineering issues
CE3021 TUNNELING ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Students mainly focused in visualizing and critically analyzing the behavior of underground
structures with reference to various supporting systems under different loading conditions due
to induced earth pressure on the underground structures.
 To give idea about the equipment used in underground excavations
UNIT I TUNNELS AND UNDERGROUND SPACE APPLICATION 9
History-caves-tunnels for transport-water,power supply-storage of LPG –nuclear waste disposal-
defence facilities-submerged tunnels-underground library,museums.
UNIT II EXCAVATION TECHNIQUES 9
Types and purpose of tunnels-choice of excavation methods-soft ground tunneling-hardrock
tunneling-tunnel drilling-blasting-impact hammers-problems encountered and remedial measures.
UNIT III PLANNING AND GEOMETRIC DESIGN OF TUNNELS 9
Topographical –geological survey-rock sampling-testing-determination of location size shape and
alignment-subsidence problem on soft ground –tunneling design in hard rock.
UNIT IV CONSTRUCTION OF TUNNEL 9
Advanced drilling techniques –TBM-cuttability assessment-shield tunneling-advantages-types of
shield tunneling-factors affecting selection of shield-twin tunnel-NATM.
UNIT V DESIGN OF TUNNEL SUPPORTING SYSTEMS AND VENTILATION 9

Classification of supports-active –passive-permanent-temporary-excavation support-steel supports-
lining-grouting-ground freezing-environment in underground-various methods of ventilation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1 To Understand need of utilization of underground space for various applications.
CO2 To study various methods of excavations and tunneling methods.
CO3 Planning and design process of tunnels.
CO4 To identify the suitable method of tunneling.
CO5 To study various types of support system and its merit and demerits.
REFERENCES:
1. Underground infrastructure planning design construction-R.K.Goel, Bhavani singh, Jian
Zhao, Butterworth heinemunn publishers.
2. Practical tunnel construction, Hemphill G.B 2012 Johnwileyand Son.
3. Introduction to tunnel construction, David chapran, Nicole metse and Alfred stark,Spor press.
135
of COs to
POs
PO9 Ethics 1 1
PO10 Environment and Sustainability 1 1
PO11 Project Management and Finance 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
Engineering problems and innovation
engineering solutions to geotechnical
engineering issues
VERTICAL IV: GEO-INFORMATICS
GI3492 TOTAL STATION AND GPS SURVEYING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To understand the working of Total Station and GPS and solve the surveying problems.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF TOTAL STATION AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

Methods of Measuring Distance, Basic Principles of Total Station, Historical Development,
Classifications, applications and comparison with conventional surveying - Applications of
Electromagnetic waves, Propagation properties, wave propagation at lower and higher frequencies –
Refractive index (RI) – factors affecting RI -Computation of group for light and near infrared waves at
standard and ambient conditions – Computation of RI for microwaves at ambient condition –
Reference refractive index -Real-time application of first velocity correction. Measurement of
atmospheric parameters - Mean refractive index – Second velocity correction -Total atmospheric
correction - Use of temperature -pressure, transducers.
UNIT II ELECTRO-OPTICAL AND MICROWAVE 9

Electro - optical system: Measuring principle, Working principle, Sources of Error, Infrared and Laser
Total Station instruments.
Microwave system: Measuring principle, working principle, Sources of Error, Microwave Total Station
instruments. Comparison between Electro-optical and Microwave system. Care and maintenance of
Total Station instruments.
COGO functions: Area, Inverse / MLM, REM, Resection, offsets and stakeout - Land survey
applications.
136
UNIT III SATELLITE SYSTEM 9
Basic concepts of GPS – Historical perspective and development – applications -Geoid and Ellipsoid
– satellite orbital motion – Keplerian motion – Kepler’s Law – Perturbing forces -Geodetic satellite –
Doppler effect – Positioning concept – GNSS and IRNSS – SBAS: GAGAN and WAAS Different
segments - space, control and user segments – satellite configuration – GPS signal structure – Orbit
determination and representation – Anti Spoofing and Selective Availability -Task of control segment
– GPS receivers.
UNIT IV GPS DATA PROCESSING 9
GPS observables – code and carrier phase observation – linear combination and derived observables
– concept of parameter estimation – downloading the data – RINEX Format–Differential data
processing – software modules - solutions of cycle slips, ambiguities - Multi path and other
observational errors – satellite geometry and accuracy measures – Continuously Operating
Reference System (CORS)– long base line processing - use of different processing software’s: Open
Source, Scientific and Commercial.
UNIT V SURVEYING METHODS AND APPLICATIONS 9
Total Station: Traversing and Trilateration measurement and adjustment –Planimetric map and
Contour map and Topography Mapping.
GNSS: Concepts of rapid, static, semi-Kinematic, pure Kinematic and RTK methods. Observation by
Radiation, Lee frog and Trilateration measurement and processing -Topography mapping using PPK
and RTK methods
Total Station and GNSS applications
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Learn about the fundamental concept of Total station.
CO2 Provide knowledge about electromagnetic waves and its usage in Total station and GNSS.
CO3 Gain Knowledge on basic concepts of GNSS
CO4 Understand the measuring and working principle of electro optical and Microwave Total
station and GPS
CO5 Gain knowledge about Total station and GNSS data processing and Mapping.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rueger, J.M. Electronic Distance Measurement, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 4th Edition,1996.
2. SatheeshGopi, rasathishkumar, N.madhu, ― Advanced Surveying , Total Station GPS and
Remote Sensing ― Pearson education , 2nd Edition,2017. isbn: 978-81317 00679.
3. Gunter Seeber , Satellite Geodesy, Walter De Gruyter, Berlin, 2nd Edition, 2003
REFERENCES:
1. R.Subramanian, Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2012.
2. Laurila, S.H. Electronic Surveying in Practice, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 1983
3. Guocheng Xu, GPS Theory, Algorithms and Applications, Springer - Verlag, Berlin, 3rdEdition,
2016.
4. Alfred Leick, GPS satellite surveying, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 4th Edition, 2015.

PO Graduate Attribute Course Outcome Average
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 2 3 2 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 2
2 2 2 3 3
Problems
PO6 The Engineer and Society 2 3 2 3 3 3
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
137
PO9 Individual and Team Work 1 1 1 1 2 1
PO10 Communication
PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO12 Life-long Learning 2 2 2 2 2 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics 3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3 3 3 3 3 3
innovations
Design solutions
CE3022 REMOTE SENSING CONCEPTS LTPC

30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concepts of remote sensing processes and its components.
 To expose the various remote sensing platforms and sensors and to introduce the elements
of data interpretation
UNIT I REMOTE SENSING AND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION 9
Definition – components of RS – History of Remote Sensing – Merits and demerits of data
collation between conventional and remote sensing methods - Electromagnetic Spectrum –
Radiation principles - Wave theory, Planck‘s law, Wien’s Displacement Law, Stefan’s Boltzmann
law, Kirchoff‘s law – Radiation sources: active & passive - Radiation Quantities
UNIT II EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH MATERIAL 9

Standard atmospheric profile – main atmospheric regions and its characteristics – interaction
of radiation with atmosphere – Scattering, absorption and refraction – Atmospheric windows -
Energy balance equation – Specular and diffuse reflectors – Spectral reflectance &
emittance – Spectroradiometer – Spectral Signature concepts – Typical spectral reflectance
curves for vegetation, soil and water – solid surface scattering in microwave region.
UNIT III ORBITS AND PLATFORMS 9
Motions of planets and satellites – Newton‘s law of gravitation - Gravitational field and potential -
Escape velocity - Kepler‘s law of planetary motion - Orbit elements and types – Orbital
perturbations and maneuvers – Types of remote sensing platforms - Ground based, Airborne
platforms and Space borne platforms – Classification of satellites – Sun synchronous and
Geosynchronous satellites – Legrange Orbit.
UNIT IV SENSING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification of remote sensors – Resolution concept : spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal
resolutions - Scanners - Along and across track scanners – Optical-infrared sensors – Thermal
sensors – microwave sensors – Calibration of sensors - High Resolution Sensors - LIDAR , UAV
– Orbital and sensor characteristics of live Indian earth observation satellites
UNIT V DATA PRODUCTS AND INTERPRETATION 9
Photographic and digital products – Types, levels and open source satellite data products –-
selection and procurement of data– Visual interpretation: basic elements and interpretation keys
-Digital interpretation – Concepts of Image rectification, Image enhancement and Image
classification
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
138
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 understand the concepts and laws related to remote sensing
CO2 understand the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with atmoshphere and earth material
CO3 acquire knowledge about satellite orbits and different types of satellites
CO4 understand the different types of remote sensors
CO5 gain knowledge about the concepts of interpretation of satellite imagery
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas M.Lillesand, Ralph W. Kiefer and Jonathan W. Chipman, Remote Sensing and
Image interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York,2015.
2. George Joseph and C Jeganathan, Fundamentals of Remote Sensing,Third Edition
Universities Press (India) Private limited, Hyderabad, 2018
REFERENCES:
1. Janza, F.Z., Blue H.M. and Johnson,J.E. Manual of Remote Sensing. Vol.I, AmericanSociety of
Photogrametry, Virginia, USA, 2002.
2. Verbyla, David, Satellite Remote Sensing of Natural Resources. CRC Press, 1995
3. Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing. Longman, RLBS, 1988.
4. Introduction to Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing , Charles Elachi and Jacob Van Zyl,
2006 Edition II, Wiley Publication.
5. Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Oxford University Press, 2011
CO s to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
3 3 2 2 2 2
Sciences
2 2 2
solutions
PO4 Investigations 3 3 3
PO5 Use of Modern Technology 3 3 3
PO8 Ethics 3 3
PSO1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics
3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics
3 3 3
innovations
engineering solutions to
2 2 3 3 3 3
Geoinformatics engineering issues.
139
CE3023 SATELLITE IMAGE PROCESSING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To make the undergraduate Engineering Students understand the concepts, principles,
processing of Satellite data in order to extract useful information from them.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF IMAGE PROCESSING 9

Information Systems - Encoding and decoding - acquisition, storage and retrieval –data products -
satellite data formats - Digital Image Processing Systems - Hardware and software design
consideration Scanner, digitizer - photo write systems.
UNIT II SENSORS MODEL AND PRE PROCESSING 9
Image Fundamentals – Sensor models – spectral response – Spatial response –
IFOV,GIFOV& GSI – Simplified Sensor Models – Sampling & quantization concepts – Image
Representation& geometry and Radiometry – Colour concepts – Sources of Image
degradation and Correction procedures- Atmospheric, Radiometric, Geometric Corrections-
Image Geometry Restoration- Interpolation methods and resampling techniques.
UNIT III IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9

Image Characteristics - Histograms - Scattergrams – Univariate and multi variate statistics-
enhancement in spatial domain – global, local & colour Transformations – PC analysis, edge
detections, merging - filters - convolution – LPF, HPF , HBF, directional box, cascade –
Morphological and adaptive filters – Zero crossing filters – scale space transforms – power
spectrum – texture analysis – frequency transformations - Fourier, wavelet and curvelet
transformations.
UNIT IV IMAGE CLASSIFICATION 9

Spectral discrimination - pattern recognition concepts - Baye‘s approach - Signature and training
sets – Separability test –Supervised Classification – Minimum distance to mean, Parallelepiped,
MLC – Unsupervised classifiers – ISODATA,K-means-Support Vector Machine – Segmentation
(Spatial, Spectral) – Tree classifiers - Accuracy assessment – Error matrix – Kappa statistics –
ERGAS, RMS.
UNIT V ADVANCED CLASSIFIERS 9

Fuzzy set classification – sub- pixel classifier – hybrid classifiers, Texture based classification
– Object based classifiers – Artificial Neural nets – Hebbian leaning – Expert system, types
and examples – Knowledge systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand about Remote sensing and Image processing systems
CO2 Acquire knowledge about the source of error in satellite image and also to remove the
error from satellite image.
CO3 Select appropriate image Enhancement techniques based on image characteristics
CO4 Classify the satellite image using various method and also evaluate the accuracy of
classification.
CO5 Apply the advanced image classification methods and conduct lifelong researchin the field of
image processing.
TEXTBOOKS :
1. John, R. Jensen, Introductory Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 4th
Edition, 2015.
2. Robert, A. Schowengergt, Techniques for Image Processing and classification in Remote
Sensing, Academic Press, 2012.
140
REFERENCES:
1. Robert, G. Reeves,- Manual of Remote Sensing Vol. I & II - American Society of
Photogrammetry, Falls, Church, USA, 1983.
2. Richards, Remote sensing digital Image Analysis - An Introduction 5th Edition ,2012,Springer
-Verlag 1993.
3. Digital Image Processing by Rafael C. Gonzalez,Richard Eugene Woods- Pearson/ Prentice
Hall,2008
4. Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing by Annadurai Pearson Education (2006)
5. Digital Image Processing: PIKS Scientific Inside by William K. Pratt 4th Edition,Wiley
Interscience,2007.

Correlatio nof
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
COs to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
3 3 3 3 3 3
Sciences
PO4 Investigations 3 3 3 3
PO5 Usage of Modern Technology 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2
PO10 Communication 2 2 2 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics
3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
innovations
engineering solutions to 3 3 3 3 3 3
GI3491 CARTOGRAPHY AND GIS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce concepts of Cartography and GIS
 To expose the process of map making and production
 To introduce GIS data structures, data input and data presentation
UNIT I ELEMENTS OF CARTOGRAPHY 9

Definition of Cartography – Maps – Functions – Uses and Types of Maps – Map Scales and Contents
– Map Projections – Shape, Distance, Area and Direction Properties – Perspective and mathematical
Projections – Indian Maps and Projections – Map Co-ordinate System – UTM and UPS References.
141
UNIT II MAP DESIGN AND PRODUCTION 9
Elements of a Map – Map Layout Principles – Map Design Fundamentals – Symbols and
Conventional Signs – Graded and Ungraded Symbols – Color Theory – Colours and Patterns in
Symbolization – Map Lettering – Map Production – Map Printing – Colours and Visualization – Map
Reproduction – Map Generalization – Geometric Transformations – Bilinear and Affine
Transformations.
UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9

Introduction to GIS – Definitions – History of GIS – Components of a GIS – Hardware, Software, Data,
People, Methods – Introduction to data quality – Types of data – Spatial, Attribute data – types of
attributes – scales/levels of measurements – spatial data models – Raster Data Structures – Raster
Data Compression – Vector Data Structures – Raster Vs Vector Models – TIN and GRID data models.
UNIT IV DATA INPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9

Scanner – Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Georeferencing– Vector Data Input –
Digitizer– Datum Projection and Reprojection – Coordinate Transformation – Topology - Adjacency,
Connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency – Non topological file formats – Attribute
Data Linking – Linking External Databases – GPS Data Integration – Raster to Vector and Vector to
Raster Conversion.
UNIT V DATA QUALITY AND OUTPUT 9

Assessment of Data Quality - Basic Aspects - Completeness, Logical Consistency, Positional
Accuracy, Temporal Accuracy, Thematic Accuracy and Lineage – Metadata – GIS Standards –
Interoperability – OGC - Spatial Data Infrastructure – Data Output – Map Compilation – Chart /
Graphs.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Be familiar with appropriate map projection and co-ordinate system for production of Maps
and shall able to compile and design maps for their required purpose.
CO2 Be familiar with co-ordinate and Datum transformations
CO3 Understand the basic concepts and components of GIS, the techniques used for storage of
spatial data and data compression
CO4 Understand the concepts of spatial data quality and data standard
CO5 Understand the concept of spatial data inputs
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Arthur H. Robinson et al, “Elements of Cartography”, 7th Edition, Wiley, 2002.
2. Kang – Tsung Chang, "Introduction to Geographic Information Systems", McGraw Hill
Publishing, Fourth Edition, 2017.
3. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction to Geographical
Information Systems, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. John Campbell, "Introductory Cartography", Wm. C.BrownPublishers,3rd Edition,2004
2. Chor Pang LO, Albert K. W. Yeung, “Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems”,
Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, November 2016. ISBN: 9789332581883
Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex
1 1 1 1 1 1
Problems
142
PO8 Ethics
PO9 Individual and Team Work
PO10 Communication
PO12 Life-long Learning
PSO1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 3 2
Engineering problems and innovations
2 3 2 2 3 2
Design solutions
GI3391 PHOTOGRAMMETRY LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To introduce basics and concepts of optics, aerial photography acquisition and mapping from
aerial photographs.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND PROPERTIES OF PHOTOGRAPHY 9

History - Definition, Applications – Types of Photographs, Classification – Photographic overlaps –
Camera: metric vs. non-metric, Digital Aerial cameras – Multiple frame and Line cameras – Linear
array scanner – Flight Planning – Crab & Drift– Computation of flight plan - Photogrammetry project
Planning.
UNIT II GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES OF AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS 9

Photo coordinate measurement – Vertical photographs -geometry, scale, Coordinate system,
Relief displacement – Stereoscopes – Stereoscopic parallax – parallax equations -Geometry,
Scale, Coordinate system – Relief displacement –- Photo Interpretation.
UNIT III STEREOPLOTTERS & ORIENTATION 9

Projection system, Viewing, Measuring and Tracing system Stereo plotters–Classification: Analog,
semi analytical, Analytical and Digital systems – Interior orientation - Relative orientation – Absolute
orientation - Collinearity condition and Coplanarity condition - Orientation: Two-dimensional
coordinate transformations –Three-dimensional conformal coordinate transformation
UNIT IV AEROTRIANGULATION, TERRAIN MODELING, ORTHOPHOTO 9

model – Strip and blocks of photographs – Aerotriangulation: strip adjustment, independent model
triangulation, Bundle block Adjustment and GPS Aerotriangulation (INS and GNSS integration) -
feature collection – DTM generation and Contour mapping – ortho rectification - mono plotting –
stereo plotting
UNIT V DIGITAL PHOTOGRAMMETRY 9

Photogrammetric Scanner – Digital Photogrammetry WorkStation – Work Station Basic system
function – Storage System – Stereoscopic Viewing and Measuring System – Image properties -
Image matching: template matching, feature based matching - DEM and DSM - Satellite
photogrammetry principles
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
143
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand and appreciate the importance of photography as means of mapping, functional
and physical elements of photography.
CO2 Understand the need of the photogrammetric mapping and the relevance of accuracy
standards and means to achieve them for precise large-scale maps with scientific methods.
CO3 Evaluate the standards of map based on the state-of-the-art tool and techniques and assess
the production standards for photogrammetric map making.
CO4 Acquire knowledge on the current development, issues methods and solutions in map making
and evaluate methods of production.
CO5 Analyze critically and evaluate methods by applying the knowledge gained and to be a part
of innovation and integration of mapping technology.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Paul. R Wolf., Bon A. De Witt, Elements of Photogrammetry with Application in GIS McGraw Hill
International Book Co., 4thEdition, 2014.
2. E. M. Mikhail, J. S. Bethel, J. C. McGlone, Introduction to Modern Photogrammetry, Wiley
Publisher, 2001.
REFERENCES:
1. Gollfried Konecny, Geoinformation: Remote Sensing, Photogrammetry and Geographical
Information Systems, CRC Press, 2nd Edition, 2014.
2. Karl Kraus, Photogrammetry: Geometry from Images and Laser Scans, Walter de Gruyter GmbH
& Co.2nd Edition, 2007.
3. Manual of Photogrammetry – American society of Photogrammetry & amp; R. S by Albert. D,
1980.
4. Digital Photogrammetry – A practical course by Wilfried Linder, 3rd edition, Springer, 2009.
5. Digital Photogrammetry by – Y. Egels& amp; Michel Kasser, Taylor & amp; Francis group,
2003.
Course Outcome
Average
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 2 3 2 3 3 3
Problems
PO8 Ethics 2 3 2 3 2 3
PO 9 Individual and Team Work 1 3 3 3 2 2
PO12 Life-long Learning 2 3 1 3 2 2
Design solutions
144
GI3691 AIRBORNE AND TERRESTRIAL LASER MAPPING LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To introduce the concepts of Space Borne, Air Borne, Terrestrial and Bathymetric LASER
Scanners for Topographic and Bathymetric Mapping
UNIT I SPACE BORNE RADAR AND LIDAR ALTIMETER 9

Principle and Properties of LASER- Production of Laser – Components of LASER – LiDAR – Types
of LiDAR:Range Finder, DIAL and Doppler LiDAR - Platforms: Terrestrial, Airborne and Space borne
LiDAR – Space Borne LiDAR Missions – Space Borne Radar Altimeter for mapping Sea Surface
Topography , Moon Topography - Merits of ALS in comparison to Levelling, echo sounding, GPS
leveling, Photogrammetry and Interferometry
UNIT II AIRBORNE LASER SCANNERS 9

Airborne Topographic Laser Scanner – Ranging Principle – Pulse Laser and Continuous Wave Laser
–First Return and Last Return – Ellipsoidal and Geoidal Height - Typical parameters of Airborne
Laser Scanner (ALS) – Specifications of Commercial ALS –- Components of ALS - GPS, IMU,
LASER Scanner, Imaging Device, Hardware and Software - Various Scanning Mechanisms:
Oscillating Mirror, Rotating Polygon, Nutating Mirror, Fibre Optic
UNIT III DATA ACQUISITION AND PRE-PROCESSING 9

Laser Classification – Class I to Class IV Laser – Eye Safety - Synchronization of GPS, IMU and
ALS Data -Reflectivity of terrain objects –- Flight Planning – Determination of various data acquisition
parameters – Swath Width, Point Density, No. of Strips, Area Covered, Point Spacing - Data
Processing – Determination of optimal flight trajectory- Quality Assurance
UNIT IV POST PROCESSING of LiDAR Data 9

Post Processing – Geo location of Laser Foot Prints – Various Co-ordinate Transformations involved
Filtering - Ground Point filtering – Digital Surface Model and Digital Elevation Model - LIDAR data
file formats – LAS File format and other proprietary file formats – Post Processing Software: Open
Source and COTS Software – Quality Control Measures – Error Budget - Overview of LIDAR
Applications in various domains - 3D city models – Corridor Mapping Applications – Forestry
Applications.
UNIT V TERRESTRIAL LASER SCANNERS 9

Terrestrial Laser Scanners (TLS) – Working Principle – Static TLS – Dynamic TLS –- Commercial
TLS Specifications – Mobile Mapping Lasers :Vehicle Mounted TLS, Back Pack Wearable Laser
Scanners – Asset Management Studies – Highways and Railway Asset Management – Indoor
Mapping : Laser Scanning of interior of buildings/monuments – Immersive Applications - BIM Model
– Applications in Tunnel Surveying, Forest Inventory, Open Cast Mine Surveying
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the components of laser and various platforms of laser scanning
CO2 Summarize the components of Airborne Laser Scanner and concept of ranging principles
CO3 Analyse the flight planning parameters and pre-processing of acquired data
CO4 Post process the data to derive DSM and DEM and its applications
CO5 Understand the components of TLS and its applications
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Jie Shan, Charles K. Toth, “Topographic Laser Ranging and Scanning – Principles and
Processing”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press Publication, March 2018. ISBN: 9781498772273.
REFERENCES:
1. George Vosselman and Hans-Gerd Maas, Airborne and Terrestrial Laser Scanning,
WhittlesPublishing, 2010
145
2. Matti Maltamo, Erik Næsset, JariVauhkonen, Forestry Applications of Airborne Laser
Scanning-Concepts and Case Studies, Springer, Dordrecht , 2016,Reprint Edition. ISBN 978-94-
017-8662-1
3. Michael Renslow, Manual of Airborne Topographic LiDAR, The American Society for
Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing, 2013

PO Graduate Attribute Course Outcome
Average
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 2 2 3
3 3
Problems
PO6 The Engineer and Society 3 3
PO8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO10 Communication
PO12 Life-long Learning 3 3 3
PSO2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
3 3
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3 3 3
Design solutions
CE3024 HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEYING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To provide the necessary knowledge and practical instrument operational and data processing
skills needed for them to confidently accomplish a bathymetric survey in the real world
 To develop students’ critical and creative thinking, as well as cooperative attitudes & behaviour
of working with others.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION, TIDES AND DATUMS 9

Overview of hydrographic surveying concepts- bathymetric and nautical charts- Basic tidal theory-
tidal observations and predictions - common types of recording tide gauges - different vertical datums
- Indian tides.
UNIT II SOUNDINGS 9
Overview of depth data types- Working principle of echo sounders - characteristics and nature of
underwater acoustic signals – transducers - error sources and calibrations- Advanced
instrumentation.
UNIT III NAVIGATION AND POSITION FIXING 9

Horizontal positioning methods and requirements - concept of line and surface of position -
positioning and navigation using satellite positioning systems - differential GPS and Real-time
kinematic (RTK)
146
UNIT IV PLANNING AND DATA PROCESSING 9
General considerations for planning of an inshore hydrographic survey - ground and track control -
practical soundings in inshore and coastal surveys - data processing and chart compilation -
hydrographic software packages for data collection - processing and plotting.
UNIT V MARINE ENVIRONMENTAL MEASUREMENTS 9

Methods of measuring and recording of currents - composition of the sea bed - and solids in
suspension - Case Studies (The role of the hydrographic surveyor on different marine projects)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Learn the fundamentals of hydrographic surveying
CO2 Identify the appropriate techniques for different types of survey
CO3 Understand the various options available during the Navigation
CO4 Analyze the data collected from a survey and assess its quality against the project
requirements
CO5 Discuss the different roles for a hydrographic surveyor on marine projects
TEXTBOOK:
1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, (2002), Hydrographic Surveying, Document No. EM 1110-2-1003.
REFERENCES
1. de Jong, C. D., Lachapelle, G., Skone, S. & Elema, I. A. (2002), Hydrography, Delft University
Press, The Netherlands.
2. Ingham, A. E. (1992), Hydrography for the Surveyor and Engineer, 3rd Edition revised by Abbott
V. J., Blackwell Science.
3. International Hydrographic Organisation (1998), IHO Standards for Hydrographic Surveying (S-
44), IHB Monaco.
4. Loweth, R. P. (1997), Manual of Offshore Surveying for Geoscientists and Engineers Chapman
& Hall.
5. Pugh, D. (2004), Changing Sea Levels – Effects of Tides, Weather and Climate, Cambridge
University Press.
6. Sonnenberg, G. J. (1988), Radar and Electronic Navigation, Butterworths.
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Correlatio n of
Cos to POs
PO2 Problem Analysis 2 3 2 2
PO3 Design / development of Solutions 3 3 3 3
PO4 Investigations 3 3 3 3
PO5 Usage of Modern Technology 3 3 3 3
PO7 Communication 3 3 3 3
PO9 Ethics 3 3
PSO1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics 3 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
innovations
engineering solutions to
147
VERTICAL V: TRANSPORTATION INFRASTRUCTURE
CE3025 AIRPORTS AND HARBOURS LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To introduce the students about airport planning, design, construction and planning design
principles of seaport
UNIT I AIRPORT PLANNING 7

Air transport characteristics - airport classification – ICAO - airport planning: Site selection typical
Airport Layouts, Case Studies, parking and Circulation Area
UNIT II AIRPORT COMPONENTS 9

Airport Classification, Planning of Airfield Components – Runway, Taxiway, Apron, Hangar-
Passenger Terminals- Geometric design of runway and taxiways-Runway pavement Design-
Difference between Highway and airport pavements- Introduction to various design methods- Airport
drainage.
UNIT III AIRPORT DESIGN 10

Runway Design: Orientation, Wind Rose Diagram, Problems on basic and Actual Length, Geometric
Design – Elements of Runway Design – Airport Zones – Passenger Facilities and Services – Runway
and Taxiway Markings- Air Traffic Control Tower- Instrumental Landing.
UNIT IV SEAPORTS COMPONENTS AND CONSTRUCTION 10

Definition of Basic Terms: Harbor, Port, Satellite Port, Docks- Dry and Floating Dock, Waves and
Tides – Planning and Design of Harbors: Harbour Layout and Terminal Facilities – Coastal
Structures: Piers, Break waters, Wharves, Jetties, Quays, Spring Fenders, Dolphins Floating
Landing Stage – Navigational Aids-Inland Water Transport.
UNIT V SEAPORT REGULATIONS AND EIA 9

Wave action on Coastal Structures and Shore Protection and Reclamation – Coastal Regulation
Zone, 2011-EIA – methods of impact analysis and its process
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Gain an insight on the planning and site selection of Airport Planning and design.
CO2 Knowledge on Design of various Airport components
CO3 Analyze and design the elements for orientation of runways and passenger facility systems.
CO4 Understand the various features in Harbours and Ports, their construction, coastal protection
works
CO5 Knowledge on various Environmental Regulations and Acts
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Khanna.S.K. Arora.M.G and Jain.S.S, Airport Planning and Design, Nemachand and Bros,
Roorkee,1994
2. Robert Honjeff and Francis X.Mckelvey, "Planning and Design of Airports", McGraw Hill, New
York,1996 2. Richard De Neufille and Amedeo Odoni, "Airport Systems Planning and Design",
McGraw Hill, New York,2003
3. Subramanian K.P., Highways, Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering,Scitech Publications
(India), Chennai, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. Venkatramaiah. C., Transportation Engineering-Vol.2 Railways, Airports, Docks and Harbours,
Bridges and Tunnels.,Universities Press (India) Private Limited, Hyderabad, 2015.
2. Mundrey J S, Railway Track Engineering, McGraw Hill Education ( India) Private Ltd, New
Delhi, 2013.
148
COs to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 3 3 3 3
PO3 Design / development of 3 3 3 3
solutions
PO10 Communication
discipline
innovation
Engineering Issues
CE3026 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To give an overview of Traffic engineering, various surveys to be conducted, traffic
Regulation, management and traffic safety
UNIT I TRAFFIC SURVEYS AND ANALYSES 8

Traffic characteristics: Human, vehicular, and Pavement Characteristics, Problems- presentation of
traffic volume data, Annual Average Daily Traffic, Average Daily Traffic, Design hourly traffic volume;
Speed- spot speed, presentation of spot speed data, speed and delay studies, methods of
conducting spot-speed studies and Speed and Delay studies; Problems Origin and Destination –
methods of conducting the survey and presentation of data; parking surveys, presentation of data
and analyses, determination of parking demand; Accident studies and analyses; Different problems.
UNIT II TRAFFIC FLOW AND ROADWAY CAPACITY 8

Traffic Flow Characteristics – Basic traffic manoeuvres, Traffic stream flow characteristics, Speed-
Flow- Density Relations; Passenger Car Units – Mixed traffic flow and related issues – Concept of
PCU value- Factors affecting PCU values- Recommended PCU values for different conditions;
Capacity and Level of Service – Factors affecting practical capacity – Design Service Volumes
UNIT III COST – EFFECTIVE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES 10

Traffic System Management: Regulatory Techniques- one way street, Reversible Street, Reversible
lane, Turning moment restrictions, closing streets; Traffic Control Devices – Traffic Signs – Road
Markings, Traffic Signals, Miscellaneous traffic control devices; Traffic Segregation – Vehicle
149
segregation, Pedestrian segregation, Traffic signals design; Bus Priority Techniques – Priority
manoeuvres – With-flow bus lane and contra-flow bus lane; Self- Enforcing Techniques- Demand
Management Techniques (TDM) Road pricing, parking control, Tolls, Staggering of
office/educational institution hours.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF ROAD INTERSECTIONS 10
Importance and Classification; Intersections at-grade – uncontrolled, channelised; Rotary
intersections (problems)- Signalised intersections (problems)- Grade Separated Intersections –
merits and demerits, types, pattern of intersections with different types of interchanges- Capacity,
Concept diagrams.
UNIT V DESIGN OF PARKING AND PEDESTRIAN FACILITIES AND CYCLE TRACKS 9

Parking: Need for parking studies and its ill effects- Parking Standards for different land uses,
different types of parking - Conceptual plans for different types of parking; Pedestrians: Importance,
Barriers, Behaviour, Pedestrian facilities – Principles of planning, Level of Service (LoS), Design
standards.; Cycle Tracks: Principles of design, Design criteria, Design standards for Rural
Expressways.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Apply the knowledge of science and engineering fundamentals in conducting traffic surveys,
analyze the problems and relating it with standards
CO2 Understand the principles of traffic flow characteristics and their relationships
CO3 Understand various traffic management measures in addressing the demand Pricing and ITS
applications.
CO4 Designing various types of control and regulatory measures to meet an efficient traffic
network.
CO5 Understand various type of facilities and plan for Non Motorised Transport
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kadiyali. L.R. Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2019.
2. Khanna .K and Justo C.E.G. and Veeraragavan, A Highway Engineering, Nem Chand Bros.,
Roorkee, Revised 10th Edition, 2014.
3. Srinivasa Kumar, “Introduction to Traffic Engineering”, Universities Press, 2018
4. Partha Chakroborty and Animesh Das Principles of Transportation Engineering, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
5. Papacosta.P.S and Prevedouros.P.D, “ Transportation Engineering and Planning, third
edition, 2015
REFERENCES
1. Indian Roads Congress (IRC) Specifications: Guidelines and special publications on Traffic
Planning and Management.
2. Khanna S. K, and others, Highway Engineering, Nam Chand & Bros, Roorkee, 2014, Pages
177 – 308.
3. C. JotinKhisty, Kent Lall, Transportation Engineering: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 1998
4. Taylor MAP and Young W, Traffic Analysis – New Technology and New Solutions, Hargreen
Publishing Company , 1998.
5. Salter. R.I and Hounsell N.B, Highway Traffic Analysis and design, Macmillan Press
Ltd.1996.
6. Roger P.Roess, William R.Mcshane and Elena S.Prassas, Traffic Engineering-Second
Edition, Prentice Hall Publishers,, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey 1998
150
COs to POs
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (PO)
PO8 Ethics 1 2 2 2 3 2
PO11 Project Management and
3 3 2 3 2 3
Finance
3 3 2 2 2 2
discipline
3 2 2 3 2 2
Engineering Issues
CE3027 URBAN PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable students to have the knowledge on planning process and to introduce to the
students about the regulations and laws related to Urban Planning.
Definition of Human settlement, Urban area, Town, City, Metropolitan City, Megalopolis,
Urbanisation, Urbanism, Suburbanisation, Urban sprawl, Peri-urban areas, Central Business District
(CBD), Urban Agglomeration, Census definition of urban settlements, Classification of urban areas
–Positive and negative impacts of urbanisation, - Atal Mission for Rejuvenation and Urban
Transformation (AMRUT)
UNIT II PLANNING PROCESS AND THEORIES 10

Principles of Planning –Stages in Planning Process – Goals, Objectives, Delineation of Planning
Areas, Draft Plans, Evaluation, Final Plan. Planning Theories - Garden City Concept, Geddesian
Triad by Patrick Geddes, Modernism Concept by Le-Corbusier, Radbun Concept, Neighbourhoods,
Theories of Ekistics, Bid-rent Theory by William Alonso, Green Belt Concept
UNIT III DEVELOPMENT PLANS, PLAN FORMULATION AND EVALUATION 10

Types of plans – Regional Plan, Master Plan, Structure Plan, Detailed Development Plan, New
Town/ Satellite town- Development Plan, urban nodes, Smart City Plan -Scope and Content of
Regional Plan (RP), Master Plan (MP), and the Detailed Development Plan (DDP), Methodologies
for the preparation of the RP, MP, and the DDP – Case Studies.
151
UNIT IV PLAN IMPLEMENTATION 10
Planning Standards, Project Formulation and evaluation; Project Report preparation and
presentation; Legal, Financial and Institutional constraints – Problems due to multiple laws, rules
and institutions; Financing of Urban Development Projects; Urban planning agencies and their
functions in the plan formulation and implementation. –
UNIT V URBAN AND REGIONAL PLANNING LEGISLATIONS, REGULATIONS AND

DESIGNS 8
Town and Country Planning, Local Bodies and Land Acquisition Acts, Development and Building
Rules, Site analyses, Layouts and Buildings Design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the basic issues and meaning of terminologies in urban planning
CO2 Understand the different types of theories of urban planning and city development.
CO3 Understand the different types of plan, their strategies and their preparation process.
CO4 Comprehend the planning standards, evaluate the constraints and the financial mechanism
CO5 Knowledge on various town and country planning acts and their functions.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Goel, S.L Urban Development and Management, Deep and Deep publications, New Delhi 2002
2. George Chadwick, A Systems view of planning, Pergamon press, Oxford 1978
3. Singh V.B, Revitalised Urban Administration in India, Kalpaz publication, Delhi, 2001
4. Edwin S.Mills and Charles M.Becker, Studies in Urban development, A World Bank publication,
1986
REFERENCES
1. Tamil Nadu Town and Country Planning Act 1971, and Rules made thereunder, Government of
Tamil Nadu, Chennai
2. Thooyavan, K.R., Human Settlements – A Planning Guide to Beginners, M.A Publications,
Chennai, 2005
3. Chennai City Municipal Corporation Act, 1919 and Tamil Nadu District Municipalities Act, 1920
4. The Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and
Resettlement Act, 2013
5. The Tamil Nadu Combined Development and Building Rules, 2019
6. Urban & Regional Development Plans Formulation & Implementation (URDPFI) Guidelines, Vol
I & II, Jan 2015, Govt of India, Ministry of Urban Development
7. http:/.moud.gov.in
COs to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
PO2 Problem analysis 2 2
PO8 Ethics 2 2 2 2
3 3 2 2 1 2
discipline
152
2 3 2 1 1 2
Engineering Issues
CE3028 SMART CITIES LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To help the leaners to understand the concepts of smart city and to introduce the students
about application of technologies in smart cities
Urbanisation, need of focused development, role of Authorities, Smart city, Opportunity and
Challenges- Smart infrastructures for city- Smart Cities Mission
UNIT II SMART PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE 12
Infrastructure development in Smart Cities - Physical Infrastructure, Land Use - Compact/mixed-use
development, Transit oriented development (TOD); Smart City Management-Transportation Unified
governance structure (UMTA). Smart public transportation, Smart parking, Intelligent traffic
management, Detour management; Low emission vehicles, Electric Mobility - Environmental
projects etc
UNIT III SUSTAINABILITY AND SMART PLANNING 10

Relationship Between Sustainability and Smart planning - Place making project guidelines-
Surveillance, Smart Street Lighting, Intelligent Emergency Services, Intelligent Disaster Forecasting
and Management, GIS-based Spatial Decision Support Systems, Smart Communication Services;
UNIT IV APPLICATION OF TECHNOLOGIES IN SMART CITIES 8

Role of Technologies in Smart Cities - Integrated Command and Control Center (ICCC), Data
Analytics, Data driven strategies implementation in smart cities
UNIT V SMART CITIES PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Need for project management, Philosophy and concepts; Project phasing and stages; Project
organizational structuring: Planning and Scheduling: Project cost analysis; Procurement and
Contracting: PPP: Project Monitoring and Evaluation: Risk Management; Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the basics of Urbanisation and the role of smart cities.
CO2 Gain knowledge on implementation of smart physical infrastructure.
CO3 Understand the role of smart planning for sustainable development.
CO4 Comprehend the knowledge of Technologies in Smart City planning
CO5 Reviewing the case studies of smart city projects.
REFERENCES
1. P Sharma , “Sustainable Smart cities in India, Challenges and Future Perspectives”, Springer
Link, 2017
2. Sameer Sharma,“Smart Cities Unbounded- Ideas and Practice of Smart Cities in India”,
Bloomsbury India, 2018.
3. Binti Singh, ManojParmar, “Smart City in India Urban Laboratory, Paradigm or Trajectory?
Routledge India,2019
4. https://smartcities.gov.in/guidelines#block-habikon-content
5. https://smartnet.niua.org/learn/library
153
COs to POs
PO8 Ethics 1 2 3 2 2 2
Critical analysis of Civil Engineering problems 3 3 2 2 3 3
PSO2 and innovation
Conceptualization and evaluation of 2 3 3 2 3 3
PSO3 engineering solutions to Civil Engineering
Issues
CE3029 INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the fundamentals of ITS.
 To study the ITS functional areas
 To have an overview of ITS implementation in developing countries
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ITS 7

Fundamentals of ITS: Definition of ITS, Challenges in ITS Development-Purpose of ITS Deployment-
Benefits of ITS- Overview of application of ITS in Transportation Planning
UNIT II DATA COLLECTION THROUGH ITS 9

Sensors & its application in traffic data collection - Elements of Vehicle Location and Route
Navigation and Guidance concepts; ITS Data collection techniques – vehicle Detectors, Automatic
Vehicle Location (AVL), Automatic Vehicle Identification (AVI), GIS, RFID, video data collection,
Internet of Things (IOT)
UNIT III ITS IN TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT 10

ITS User Needs and Services and Functional areas –Introduction, Advanced Traffic Management
systems (ATMS), Advanced Traveler Information systems (ATIS), Advanced Vehicle Control
systems (AVCS), Advanced Public Transportation systems (APTS), Advanced Rural Transportation
systems (ARTS)- Autonomous Vehicles- Autonomous Intersections
154
UNIT IV ITS IN TRANSPORTATION PLANNING 10
ITS and safety, ITS and security- Traffic and incident management systems; ITS and sustainable
mobility, travel demand management, electronic toll collection, ITS and road-pricing.; Transportation
network operations – public transportation applications- Weight –in Motion
UNIT V ITS APPLICATION IN LOGISTICS 9

Commercial vehicle operations and intermodal freight-Fleet Management- IT application in freight
logistics-E commerce
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the fundamentals of ITS and its benefits.
CO2 Gain knowledge on data collection using sensors and its applications.
CO3 Acquainted with the knowledge of ITS in Traffic Management
CO4 Application of ITS in Transportation Planning
CO5 Able to gain knowledge on application of ITS in Logistics
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. Srinivasa Kumar,”Intelligent Transportation Systems”, Universities Press P Ltd,
Telangana, 2022.
REFERENCES:
1. Intelligent Transport Systems, Intelligent Transportation Primer, Washington, US,2001.
2. Henry F.Korth, and Abraham Siberschatz, Data Base System Concepts, McGraw Hill,1992.
3. TurbanE.,”Decision Support and Export Systems Management Support Systems", Maxwell
Macmillan,1998.
4. Sitausu S. Mittra, "Decision Support Systems–Tools and Techniques", John Wiley, New
York,1986.
5. Cycle W.Halsapple and Andrew B.Winston, "Decision Support Systems–Theory and
Application‟, Springer Verlog, New York, 1987
6. ITS Hand Book 2000: Recommendations for World Road Association (PIARC) by Kan Paul
Chen, John Miles.

COs to POs
PO8 Ethics 1 2 1 1 2 2
2 2 3 3 3 3
discipline
2 2 2 3 2 2
EngineeringIssues
155
CE3030 PAVEMENT ENGINEERING L T PC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Student gains knowledge on various IRC guidelines for designing rigid and flexible pavements.
Further, the student will be in a position to assess quality and serviceability conditions of roads.
UNIT I PAVEMENT MATERIALS AND SUBGRADE ANALYSIS 8
Introduction – Pavement as layered structure – Pavement types -rigid and flexible-Subgrade
analysis- Stress and deflections in pavements- Pavement Materials and Testing- Modified Binders.
UNIT II DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS 10

Flexible pavement design – Advantages and disadvantages -Factors influencing design of flexible
pavement, Empirical – Mechanistic empirical and theoretical methods – Design procedure as per
IRC guidelines – Design and specification of rural roads.
UNIT III DESIGN OF RIGID PAVEMENTS 9

Cement concrete pavements Factors influencing CC pavements – Modified Westergaard approach
– Design procedure as per IRC guidelines – Concrete roads and their scope in India.
UNIT IV PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION, EVALUATION AND MAINTENANCE 10

Construction Techniques practice of flexible and concrete pavement Pavement Evaluation - Causes
of distress in rigid and flexible pavements – Evaluation based on Surface Appearance, Cracks,
Patches and Pot Holes, Undulations, Raveling, Roughness, Skid Resistance. Structural Evaluation
by Deflection Measurements - Pavement Serviceability index, - Pavement maintenance (IRC
Recommendations only).
UNIT V STABILIZATION OF PAVEMENTS 8

Stabilization with special reference to highway pavements – Choice of stabilizers – Testing and field
control - Stabilization for rural roads in India – Use of Geosynthetics in roads.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Get knowledge about types of rigid and flexible pavements.
CO2 Able to design of rigid pavements
CO3 Able to design of flexible pavements.
CO4 Determine the causes of distress in rigid and flexible pavements.
CO5 Understand stabilization of pavements, testing and field control.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Khanna, S.K. and Justo C.E.G.and Veeraragavan, A, “Highway Engineering”, New Chand and
Brothers, Revised 10th Edition,2014.
2. Kadiyali, L.R., “Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering”, Khannatech. Publications,
New Delhi,2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Yoder, R.J. and Witchak M.W. “Principles of Pavement Design”, John Wiley2000.
2. Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements, IRC-37–2012, The Indian roads Congress,
NewDelhi.
3. Guideline for the Design of Rigid Pavements for Highways, IRC 58-2018, The Indian Road
Congress, NewDelhi.
Cos to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
156
PO8 Ethics 3 3 3 3
discipline
engineering solutions to Civil Engineering 1 1 2 2 2
Issues
CE3031 TRANSPORTATION PLANNING PROCESS LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge in the rudiments and stages in Transportation Planning Process
UNIT I TRANSPORTATION PLANNING PROCESS 8
Importance of transportation planning, Integration of Land Use and Transport; Systems Approach to
Transport Planning; Four Steps in the Transport Planning Process; Travel Demand Modelling
Approach; Traffic Analyses Zones – internal and external; Various Transportation Surveys for the
collection of data – methodology, analyses of data and presentation of results.
UNIT II TRIP GENERATION STAGE 9
Definition and importance; Trip Production and Attraction, Types of trips; Factors governing trip
generation: population related data, land and building use, socio-economic, Trip generation models:
Types, Assumptions made, Multiple Linear Regression, category analysis- merits and de-merits of
the model, verification, calibration and validation of the model.
UNIT III TRIP DISTRIBUTION STAGE 10
Definition and objective; Data collection, analyses and presentation of trip matrix table, Desire Line
Diagram, Development of Gravity, growth factor methods for Trip Distribution, Calibration of gravity
model and its validation.
UNIT IV MODAL SPLIT STAGE 9
Factors influencing mode choice - Household characteristics; Zonal Characteristics; Network
characteristics - Modal split: pre distribution or post distribution - Mode wise trip matrix and modal
split analyses- Overview of Probit and Logit model
UNIT V TRAFFIC ASSIGNMENT STAGE 9

Meaning and objective; General principles; Assignment Techniques- all-or-nothing assignments,
multiple route assignment, capacity restraint, diversion curves, Trip assignment route selection;
Mode-wise trip matrices; element of transportation network, nodes and links, speed flow curves,
minimum path trees
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the principles of the transportation planning process and methods of data
collection.
CO2 Acquainted with the trip production, trip attraction models and calibration.
CO3 Acquainted with the trip production, trip attraction models and calibration.
157
CO4 Able to understand trip distribution models and its application.
CO5 Gain knowledge on the mode choice behaviour and mode split models.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kadiyali. L.R., Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2019.
2. C.S. Papacostas and P.D. Prevedouros, Transportation Engineering and Planning, Prentice
Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
3. Michael J.Bruton, Introduction to Transportation Planning, Hutchinson, London, 1995.
REFERENCES
1. J D Ortuzar and L G Willumnsen. Modeling Transport. John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2011.
2. John W. Dickey, Metropolitan Transportation Planning, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1990.
3. C. JotinKhisty, Kent Lall, Transportation Engineering: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 1998
4. Juan de Dios Ort zar and Luis G. Willumsen, Modelling Transport, John Wiley & Sons 2001
5. Chennai Comprehensive Traffic Study, Chennai Metropolitan Development Authority, 2007.
6. James H.Banks, Introduction to Transportation Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt
Ltd, 2010

of COs to
POs
1 2 2 2 2
Sciences
PO8 Ethics 2 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 1 2
PSO2 Engineering problems and 2 1 1 2 2
innovation
Conceptualization and
PSO3 evaluation of engineering
3 1 2 2 2
Issues
158
VERTICAL VI: ENVIRONMENT
CE3032 CLIMATE CHANGE ADAPTATION AND MITIGATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge on the global warming, the impact of climate change on society and
the adaptation and mitigation measures to the students
Atmosphere – weather and Climate - climate parameters – Temperature, Rainfall, Humidity, Wind
– Global ocean circulation – El Nino and its effect - Carbon cycle
UNIT II ELEMENTS RELATED TO CLIMATE CHANGE 7

Greenh ouse gases - Total carbon dioxide emissions by energy sector – industrial, commercial,
transportation, residential – Impacts – air quality, hydrology, green space - Causes of global and
regional climate change – Changes in patterns of temperature, precipitation and sea level rise –
Greenhouse effect
UNIT III IMPACTS OF CLIMATE CHANGE 10

Effects of Climate Changes on living things – health effects, malnutrition, human migration,
socioeconomic impacts- tourism, industry and business, vulnerability assessment- infrastructure,
population and sector – Agriculture, forestry, human health, coastal areas
UNIT IV MITIGATING CLIMATE CHANGE 9

IPCC Technical Guidelines for Assessing Climate Change Impact and Adaptation -Identifying
adaption options – designing and implementing adaption measures – surface albedo environment-
reflective roofing and reflective paving – enhancement of evapotranspiration - tree planting
programme – green roofing strategies – energy conservation in buildings – energy efficiencies –
carbon sequestration.
UNIT V ALTERNATE FUELS AND RENEWABLE ENERGY 10

Energy source – coal, natural gas – wind energy, hydropower, solar energy, nuclear energy,
geothermal energy – biofuels – Energy policies for a cool future - Energy Audit.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
The students completing the course will have
CO1 an insight into carbon cycle, physical basis of the natural greenhouse effect, including the
meaning of the term radiative forcing, climate change, global warming and measures to
adapt and to mitigate the impacts of climate change
CO2 understanding on the growing scientific consensus established through the IPCC as well as the
complexities and uncertainties
CO3 ability to plan climate change mitigation and adaptation projects including the use of
alternate fuels and renewable energy
CO4 Gain in-depth knowledge on climate models
CO5 Post process the model outputs for climate impact assessment, know about adaptation
strategies
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Ruddiman W.F, freeman W.H. and Company, “Earth‟s Climate Past and Future”, 2001
2. Velma. I. Grover “Global Warming and Climate” Change. Vol I an II. Science Publishers,
2005.
3. Dash Sushil Kumar, “Climate Change – An Indian Perspective”, Cambridge University
Press India Pvt. Ltd, 2007
159
EFERENCES:
1. IPCC Fourth Assessment Report, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK, 2007
2. Thomas E, Lovejoy and Lee Hannah “Climate Change and Biodiversity”, TERI
Publishers, 2005
3. Jan C. van Dam, Impacts of “Climate Change and Climate Variability on Hydrological
Regimes”, Cambridge University Press, 2003.

COs to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 2 2 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions 2 2
PO7 Environment and sustainability 3 3
PO8 Ethics
2 2
discipline
2 2
PSO3 engineering solutions to Civil 3 3
Engineering Issues
CCE331 AIR AND NOISE POLLUTION CONTROL ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge on the sources, effects and control techniques of air pollutants and
noise pollution.
UNIT I GENERAL 9
Atmosphere as a place of disposal of pollutants – Air Pollution – Definition - Air Pollution and
Global Climate - Units of measurements of pollutants - Air quality criteria - emission standards -
National ambient air quality standards - Air pollution indices - Air quality management in India.
UNIT II SOURCES, CLASSIFICATION AND EFFECTS 9
Sources and classification of air pollutants - Man made - Natural sources - Type of air pollutants
- Pollution due to automobiles - Analysis of air pollutants - Chemical, Instrumental and biological
methods.Air pollution and its effects on human beings, plants and animals - Economic effects of air
pollution - Effect of air pollution on meteorological conditions - Changes on the Meso scale, Micro
scale and Macro scale.
160
UNIT III SAMPLING, METEOROLOGY AND AIR QUALITY MODELLING 9
Sampling and measurement of particulate and gaseous pollutants - Ambient air sampling - Stack
sampling. Environmental factors - Meteorology - temperature lapse rate and stability – Adiabatic
lapse rate - Wind Rose - Inversion – Wind velocity and turbulence - Plume behavior - Dispersion
of air pollutants- Air Quality Modeling.
UNIT IV AIR POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES 9
Control - Source correction methods - Control equipments - Particulate control methods – Bag house
filter - Settling chamber - cyclone separators - inertial devices - Electrostatic precipitator - scrubbers
- Control of gaseous emissions - Absorption - Absorption equipments - adsorption and combustion
devices (Theory and working of equipments only).
UNIT V NOISE POLLUTION AND ITS CONTROL 9

Sources of noise – Units and Measurements of Noise - Characterization of Noise from
Construction, Mining, Transportation and Industrial Activities, Airport Noise – General Control
Measures – Effects of noise pollution – auditory effects, non-auditory effects. Noise Menace–
Prevention and Control of Noise Pollution – Control of noise at source, control of transmission,
protection of exposed person - Control of other types of Noise Sound Absorbent
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand various types and sources of air pollution and its effects
CO2 Know the dispersion of air pollutants and their modeling
CO3 Know about the principles and design of control of particulate pollutants
CO4 Understand the principles and design of control of gaseous pollutant
CO5 Know the sources, effects and control of vehicular, indoor air and noise pollution
TEXTBOOKS:
1. C. S. Rao, “Environmental Pollution Control Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2006.
2. M. N. Rao, H. V. N. Rao, Air pollution, Tata McGraw Hill Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2017
3. Dr. Y. Anjaneyulu, “Air Pollution and Control Technologies”, Allied publishers Pvt. Ltd., 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Noel De Nevers, "Air pollution control Engineering", McGraw Hill International Edition,
McGraw Hill Inc, New Delhi, 2000.
2. Air Pollution act, India, 1987
3. Peterson and E.Gross Jr., “Hand Book of Noise Measurement”, 7th Edition, 1974
4. Mukherjee, "Environmental Pollution and Health Hazards", causes and effects, 1986
5. Antony Milne, “Noise Pollution: Impact and Counter Measures”, David & Charles PLC, 1979.
6. Kenneth wark, Cecil F.Warner, “Air Pollution its Origin and Control”, Harper and Row
Publishers, New York, 1998.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 2 2
2 2 3 2 2 1 2 2
3 2 3 3 1 2 2 2 2
4 2 3 3 1 2 2 2 2
5 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
Avg. 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

161
CCE333 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To expose the students to the need, methodology, documentation and usefulness of
environmental impact assessment and to develop the skill to prepare environmental
management plan.
 To provide knowledge related to the broad field of environmental risk assessment, important
processes that control contaminant transport and tools that can be used in predicting and
managing human health risks.
Historical development of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). Environmental Clearance- EIA
in project cycle. legal and regulatory aspects in India – types and limitations of EIA –EIA process
screening – scoping - terms of reference in EIA- setting – analysis – mitigation. Cross sectoral
issues –public hearing in EIA- EIA consultant accreditation.
UNIT II IMPACT INDENTIFICATION AND PREDICTION 10

Matrices – networks – checklists – cost benefit analysis – analysis of alternatives – expert systems
in EIA. prediction tools for EIA – mathematical modelling for impact prediction – assessment of
impacts – air – water – soil – noise – biological –– cumulative impact assessment
UNIT III SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT ASSESSMENT 8

Socio-economic impact assessment - relationship between social impacts and change in
community and institutional arrangements. factors and methodologies- individual and family level
impacts. communities in transition-rehabilitation
UNIT IV EIA DOCUMENTATION AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9

Environmental management plan - preparation, implementation and review – mitigation and
rehabilitation plans – policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes – post project
audit – documentation of EIA findings – ethical and quality aspects of environmental impact
assessment

Mining, power plants, cement plants, highways, petroleum refining industry, storage & handling of
hazardous chemicals, common hazardous waste facilities, CETPs, CMSWMF, building and
construction projects
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Apply the principle of limit state design for concrete pipe design
CO2 Do structural design of Water tanks
CO3 Design the water treatment plant Structures.
CO4 Design the components of wastewater treatment plant structures.
CO5 Apply the knowledge of structural design to various environmental engineering structures.
REFERENCES:
1. Canter, L.W., "Environmental Impact Assessment", McGraw Hill, New York. 1996
2. Lawrence, D.P., "Environmental Impact Assessment – Practical solutions to recurrent problems",
Wiley-Interscience, New Jersey. 2003
3. World Bank –Source book on EIA
4. Cutter, S.L., "Environmental Risk and Hazards", Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.
5. Kolluru Rao, Bartell Steven, Pitblado R and Stricoff “Risk Assessment and Management
Handbook”, McGraw Hill Inc., New York,1996.
6. K. V. Raghavan and A A. Khan, "Methodologies in Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment",
Manual by CLRI, 1990.
7. Sam Mannan, Lees' Loss Prevention in the Process Industries, Hazard Identification,
Assessment and Control, 4th Edition, Butterworth Heineman, 2012.
162
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 2
2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 2
3 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 2
4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
5 3 2 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
CCE334 INDUSTRIAL WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on the concept and application of Industrial pollution prevention,
cleaner technologies, industrial wastewater treatment and residue management.
 Understand principles of various processes applicable to industrial wastewater treatment
 Identify the best applicable technologies for wastewater treatment from the perspective of
yield production.
Industrial scenario in India– Industrial activity and Environment - Uses of Water by industry – Sources
and types of industrial wastewater – Nature and Origin of Pollutants - Industrial wastewater and
environmental impacts – Regulatory requirements for treatment of industrial wastewater – Industrial
waste survey – Industrial wastewater monitoring and sampling – generation rates, characterization
and variables –Toxicity of industrial effluents and Bioassay tests – Major issues on water quality
management.
UNIT II INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION PREVENTION &WASTE MINIMISATION 8
Prevention vis a vis Control of Industrial Pollution – Benefits and Barriers – Waste management
Hierarchy - Source reduction techniques – Periodic Waste Minimisation Assessments – Evaluation
of Pollution Prevention Options – Cost benefit analysis – Pay-back period – Implementing &
Promoting Pollution Prevention Programs in Industries.
UNIT III INDUSTRIAL WASTEWATER TREATMENT 10
Flow and Load Equalisation – Solids Separation – Removal of Fats, Oil & Grease- Neutralisation-
Removal of Inorganic Constituents – Precipitation, Heavy metal removal, Nitrogen &
Phosphorousremoval, Ion exchange, Adsorption, Membrane Filtration, Electro dialysis &
Evaporation –Removal of Organic Constituents – Biological treatment Processes, Chemical
OxidationProcesses, Advanced Oxidation processes – Treatability Studies.
UNIT IV WASTEWATER REUSE AND RESIDUAL MANAGEMENT 9
Individual and Common Effluent Treatment Plants – Joint treatment of industrial and domestic
wastewater - Zero effluent discharge systems - Quality requirements for Wastewater reuse Industrial
reuse , Present status and issues - Disposal on water and land – Residuals of industrialwastewater
treatment – Quantification and characteristics of Sludge – Thickening, digestion,conditioning,
dewatering and disposal of sludge – Management of ROrejects.
Industrial manufacturing process description, wastewater characteristics, source reduction
optionsand waste treatment flow sheet for Textiles – Tanneries – Pulp and paper – metal finishing –
Sugar and Distilleries
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
163
COURSE OUTCOMES: After completion of this course, the students is expected to be able to,
CO1 Explain the source and types of industrial wastewater and their environmental impacts and
choose the regulatory laws pertaining to environmental protection
CO2 Identify industrial wastewater pollution and implement pollution prevention, waste
minimization in industries
CO3 Apply knowledge and skills to design industrial wastewater treatment schemes
CO4 Audit and analyze environmental performance of industries to internal, external client,
regulatory bodies and design water reuse management techniques
CO5 Conduct research to develop effective management systems for industrial wastewater
that are technically sound, economically feasible and socially acceptable
REFERENCES:
1. "Industrial wastewater management, T reatment & disposal, Water Environment" Federation
Alexandria Virginia, Third Edition, 2008.
2. Lawrance K. Wang, Yung Tse Hung, Howard H.Lo and Constantine Yapijakis “handlook of
Industrial and Hazardous waste Treatment”, Second Edition, 2004.
3. Metcalf & Eddy, Inc., George Tchobanoglous, Franklin L. Burton and H. David Stensel,
Wastewater engineering, treatment and reuse, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2017
4. Nelson Leonard Nemerow, “ industrial waste Treatment”, Elsevier, 2007.
5. Wesley Eckenfelder W., “ Industrial Water Pollution Control”, Second Edition, Mc Graw Hill,
2000.
6. Paul L. Bishop, Pollution Prevention: - Fundamentals and Practice‟, Mc-Graw Hill
International, Boston, 2000.
7. Waste water Treatment for pollution control and reuse by Soli. J. Arceivala, Shyam. R.
Asolekar, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 1 2 3
2 3 2 2 3 3 2 2
3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3
4 2 3 2 2 3 3
5 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 3 3
Avg. 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
CE3033 SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To impart knowledge and skills relevant to minimization, storage, collection, transport,
recycling, processing and disposal of solid and hazardous wastes including the related
regulations, engineering principles, design criteria, methods and equipment.
UNIT I WASTE CLASSIFICATION AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 9

Sources and types of solid and hazardous wastes - need for solid and hazardous waste management
– salient features of latest Indian legislations on management and handling of solid wastes,
hazardous wastes, biomedical wastes, electronic wastes, construction and demolition wastes,
plastics and discarded lead acid batteries – elements of integrated waste management and roles of
stakeholders - seven elements and seven step approach to integrated solid waste management
planning.
164
UNIT II WASTE CHARACTERIZATION SOURCE REDUCTION AND RECYCLING 9
Waste sampling and characterization plan - waste generation rates and variation – physical
composition, chemical and biological properties – hazardous characteristics – ignitability, corrosivity
and TCLP tests –source reduction, segregation and onsite storage of wastes – waste exchange -
extended producer responsibility - recycling of plastics, C&D wastes and E wastes.
UNIT III WASTE COLLECTION TRANSPORT AND MATERIAL RECOVERY 9

Door to door collection of segregated solid wastes - analysis of hauled container and stationery
container collection systems - compatibility, storage, labeling and handling of hazardous wastes –
principles and design of transfer and transport facilities - hazardous waste transport and manifests -
mechanical processing and material separation technologies – Size reduction – size separation -
density separation - magenetic separation – compaction – principles and design of material recovery
facilities – physico chemical treatment of hazardous wastes - solidification and stabilization – case
studies on waste collection and material recovery
UNIT IV BIOLOGICAL AND THERMAL PROCESSING OF WASTES 9

Biological and thermos-chemical conversion technologies – composting – biomethanation –
incineration – pyrolysis- plasma arc gasification –principles and design of biological and thermal
treatment facilities - MSW processes to energy with high-value products and specialty By-products
- operation of facilities and environmental controls - treatment of biomedical wastes – case studies
and emerging waste processing technologies.
UNIT V WASTE DISPOSAL 9

Sanitary and secure landfills - components and configuration– site selection - liner and cover
systems - geo synthetic clay liners and geo membranes - design of sanitary landfills and secure
landfills- leachate collection, treatment and landfill gas management – landfill construction and
operational controls - landfill closure and environmental monitoring – landfill bioreactors –
rehabilitation of open dumps and biomining of dumpsites-remediation of contaminated sites- Case
studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain the various functional elements of solid and hazardous waste management including
the associated legal, health, safety, and cultural issues as well as responsibilities of different
stakeholders
CO2 Apply the knowledge of science and engineering fundamentals to characterize different types
of solid and hazardous wastes, assess the factors affecting variation and assess performance
of waste treatment and disposal systems
CO3 Design of systems and processes to meet specified needs of waste minimization, storage,
collection, transport, recycling, processing and disposal.
CO4 Select appropriate methods for processing and disposal of solid and hazardous wastes, taking
into account the impact of the solutions in a sustainability context
CO5 Conduct research pertinent to solid and hazardous waste management and communicate
effectively to different stakeholders as well as engage in independent lifelong learning
REFERENCES:
1. George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Theisen and Samuel A, Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste
Management, Mc-Graw Hill India, First edition, 2015.
2. CPHEEO, “Manual on Municipal Solid waste management,Vol I, II and III, Central Public Health
and Environmental Engineering Organisation , Government of India, New Delhi, 2016.
3. William A. Worrell, P. Aarne Vesilind, Christian Ludwig, Solid Waste Engineering – A Global
erspective, 3rd Edition, Cengage Learning, 2017.
4. Michael D. LaGrega, Philip L Buckingham, Jeffrey C. E vans and "Environmental Resources
Management, Hazardous waste Management", Mc-Graw Hill International edition, New
York,2010.
5. John Pitchtel,Waste Management Practices, CRC Press,Taylor and Francis Group,2014.
6. Gary C. Young, Municipal Solid Waste to Energy Conversion Processes: Economic, Technical,
and Renewable Comparisons, Wiley, 2010
165
7. Cherry P M, Solid and Hazardous Waste Management, CBS publishers and distributors Pvt
Ltd, 2018.
8. Rao M.N, Razia Sultana, Sri Harsha Kota, solid and hazardous waste management – Science
and Engineering , Butterworth-Heinemann, 2016

COs to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 3 3
3 3
solutions
PO7 Environment and sustainability 2 2 2
PO8 Ethics 2 2
3 2 3 3 3
discipline
innovation
Conceptualization and evaluation
PSO3 of engineering solutions to Civil 3 3 3
Engineering Issues
CE3034 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY AND LEGISLATIONS LTP C

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The course will analyze the legislative and judicial responses to environmental problems and
the administrative system of environment related laws such as air, water, land, and
hazardous substances etc. Environment advocacy and approaches for using litigation in
environment protection will receive special attention
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL LEGISLATIONS AND INTERNATIONAL

SCENARIO 9
Significance of Environmental Law -International Environmental Law -Development of International
Environmental Law -Source and General principals of International Environmental Law –General
rights and obligations of States -General Issues of the international law related to environmental
protection -Stockholm Declaration-Rio Declaration on Environment and Development-Basel
Convention on the Control of Trans boundary Movement of Hazardous Wastes and their disposal-
Convention of Biological Diversity-U.N Frame Work Convention on Climate Change-Montreal
Protocol on Substances that deplete Ozone Layer-Kyoto Protocol.
166
UNIT II INDIAN CONSTITUTIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 9
Indian Constitution and Environmental Protection -Constitutional provisions concerning Environment
Articles 14,15,(2) (b) 19 (e),21,31,32,38,39,42,47, 48-A,49,51,51-A: Indian Environmental Policy
2006 Administrative machinery for pollution control Common Law & Criminal Law Nuisance,
Negligence, Strict liability and Absolute liability, Provisions of IPC relating to environmental problems
(public nuisance u/s 268 and others (Sections 269,270,277,284,285,286,425 to 440) Section 133 of
Cr.P.C.
UNIT III REMEDIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 9

Common Law Remedies/Remedies under Law of Tort – Penal Remedies – Indian Penal Code and
Code of Criminal Procedure – Remedies under Constitutional Law – Writs – Public Interest Litigation
- Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 – The National Green Tribunal Act 2010
UNIT IV MAJOR INDIAN LEGISLATIONS 9

Water Act (1974) Air Act (1981) Environmental Protection Act (1986) Major Notifications, The
Municipal solid Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules 2000-Bio Medical Wastes (Management
and Handling) Rules 1998- Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling Rules 1989-
Environment Impact Assessment Notifications- Coastal Regulation Zone Notification- Public Hearing
Notifications
UNIT V ENVIRONMENT AND DEVELOPMENT CASE LAWS 9

Meaning and concept of development - Its impact on environment; conflict between environment and
development, Concept of Sustainable Development., Polluter Pay Principle, Precautionary Principle,
Public Trust Doctrine. Landmark Judgments - Olium gas leakage case, Rural Litigation and
Entitlement Kendra, Dehradun, (1985) Supp SCC 487) Vellore Citizen Welfare Forum v. Union of
India, (1996) 5SCC 647) Ganga Pollution case (1988) I SCC) S. Jagannath v. UOI (1997) SCC867)
Vellore Citizens welfare forum case M.C. Mehta V. Kamalnath (1997) I SCC 388)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand origins and sources of environmental laws, and understand how and by whom
environmental laws are made and interpreted
CO2 Understand the key principles of, and actors within, environmental laws
CO3 Understand the National Environmental Policy and Various Legislations enacted in line with
Policy
CO4 Critically analyze environmental laws within various contexts and to evaluate laws against
procedural and substantive criteria.
CO5 Understand and the Legal system operating in India and will be in a position to prepare
compliance reports for getting environmental clearance.
REFERENCES
1. Leelakrishnan P., Environmental Law in India, Butterworths,1998
2. Leelakrishnan P., Environmental Case Book, Lexis Nexis, 2000
3. Shanthakumar S. , Environmental Law – An Introduction, Butterworths,2004
4. Shyam Diwan and Armin Rosencranz, Enviromental Law and Policy in India, Oxford, 2001
Cos to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
167
PO8 Ethics 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3
discipline
2 2
PSO3 engineering solutions to Civil Engineering 2 2
Issues
CCE332 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To educate overview of EHS in industries and related Indian regulations, types of Health
hazards, effect, assessment and control methods and EHS Management System
Need for developing Environment, Health and Safety systems in work places- International
initiatives, National Policy and Legislations on EHS in India - Regulations and Codes of Practice -
Role of trade union safety representatives - Ergonomics.
UNIT II OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE 10

Definition of occupational health and hygiene - Categories of health hazards – Exposure pathways
and human responses–Exposure Assessment-occupational exposure limits - Hierarchy of control
measures - Role of personal protective equipment and the selection criteria
UNIT III WORKPLACE SAFETY AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 11

Features of Satisfactory and Safe design of work premises – good housekeeping - lighting and color,
Ventilation and Heat Control, Noise, Chemical and Radiation Safety – Electrical Safety – Fire Safety
– Safety at Construction sites, ETP – Machine guarding – Process Safety, Working at different levels
UNIT IV HAZARDS AND RISK MANAGEMENT 8

Safety appraisal – Job Safety Analysis-Control techniques – plant safety inspection – Accident
investigation - Analysis and Reporting – Hazard and Risk Management Techniques –Onsite and
Offsite emergency Plans. Employee Participation- Education and Training- Case Studies
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 7

Concept of Environmental Health and Safety Management – Elements of Environmental Health and
Safety Management Policy and implementation and review – ISO 45001-Strucure and Clauses-Case
Studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students are expected to be able to understand:
CO1 Need for EHS in industries and related Indian regulations
CO2 Various types of Health hazards, effect, assessment and control methods
CO3 Various safety systems in working environments
CO4 The methodology for preparation of Emergency Plans and Accident investigation
CO5 EHS Management System and its elements
168
REFERENCES
1. Industrial Health and Safety Acts and Amendments, by Ministry of Labour and Employment,
Government of India
2. Fundamentals of Industrial Safety and Health by Dr.K.U.Mistry, Siddharth Prakashan, 2012
3. The Facility Manager's Guide to Environmental Health and Safety by Brian Gallant,
Government Inst Publ., 2007.
4. Effective Environmental, Health, and Safety Management Using the Team Approach by Bill
Taylor, Culinary and Hospitality Industry Publications Services, 2005.
5. Environmental and Health and Safety Management by Nicholas P.Cheremisinoff and
Madelyn L. Graffia, William Andrew Inc. NY, 1995
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2
2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2
3 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 3
4 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
5 1 2 1 1 1
Avg. 2 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
VERTICAL VII: WATER RESOURCES
CE3035 PARTICIPATORY WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT LTPC

30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to understand the regional and global experiences of participatory
ideology in irrigation water management
 To help students acquire knowledge on paradigms shifts and reorientations with regard to
stakeholder participation in water management in general and in irrigation management in
particular.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF SOCIOLOGY AND PARTICIPATORY APPROACH 6

Basic Sociological concepts and Definitions - Objectives – Perspectives- Social stratification –
Sociological understanding - Irrigation as a Sociotechnical Process - paradigm shift and
Participatory approach
UNIT II UNDERSTANDING FARMERS PARTICIPATION 12

Need of farmers participation –Benefits of farmers participation – Comparisons of cost and benefit
Water User Association –- Membership - Kinds of participation – National and International
Experiences -Activities on Water towards Organization and Structure - Context of participation-
factors in the environment.
UNIT III ROLE OF STAKEHOLDERS AND THE UNDERLYING ISSUES 12

Multiple use of water – Issues in sectoral Water Allocation - Domestic, Irrigation, Industrial sectors
- Woman as a water user –Constraints and Opportunities. Role of Community Organisers –
Constraints in Organising farmers Organisation.
UNIT IV IMPROVING AGENCY RELATIONS AND INSTITUTIONAL REFORMS 10

Supporting farmer organization and participation -Decision Making- Leadership and responsibilities
– Development strategy – Channels for implementation –– Equity and Equality-
AgencyIncentives- Technical co-operation – Special roles – Agency Roles- Institutional Reforms
169
UNIT V POLICY CONSIDERATIONS AND EMERGING CHALLENGES 5
Water Policy-Irrigation Governance-Building from Below-Non-political Associations-Bureaucratic
Reorientation- Policy options and Alternatives and Sustainability.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Capture to fundamental concepts and terms which are to be applied and understood all
through the study.
CO2 Acquire a clear insight into the subject matter of participatory ideology with its rudiments
under the light of both national and international illustrative cases.
CO3 Comprehend the roles of different players as stakeholders with the ground reality of the
underlying issues in farm community.
CO4 Articulate as how reforms can help build up institutional and irrigation agencies with the
support obtained from the existing farm network in irrigation Management
CO5 Gain an overarching understanding of recommendation for improved irrigationmanagement
with a vision to transform the existing governance and policies with the novel approach of
sustainability.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Desai A.R., Rural sociology in India, Popular Prakashan, Bombay, 1969.
2. Michael C.M., Putting people first, Sociology variables in Rural Development, Oxford University
press, London 1985.
3. Uphoff. N., Improving International Irrigation management with Farmer Participation –
Getting the process Right – Studies in water Policy and management, New West - View
press, Boulder and London, 1986.
4. Chambers R., Managing canal irrigation, Oxford IBM publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.
5. Korten F.F and Robert Y. Siy, Jr. Transforming a Bureaucracy – The experience of the
Philippines National Irrigation Administration, Ateneo De Manila University Press, Manila,
1989.
REFERENCES:
1. Sivasubramanium K., Water Management SIMRES Publication, Chennai 2009.
2. http://irapindia.org/IMTInIndia-Pa
3. http://mowr.gov.in/writereaddata/mainlinkFile/File421.pdf

POs/PSOs Course Outcome Overall
Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
COs to POs
PO3 Design / development of solutions 3 3 3
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering 3 3 3 3
discipline
170
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil Engineering 1 1 1
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3 3 2 3
Engineering Issues
CE3036 GROUNDWATER ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The objective of this course is enable the student to understand the principles of Groundwater
governing Equations, Characteristics of different aquifers and techniques of groundwater
model development and management.
UNIT I HYDROGEOLOGICAL PARAMETERS 9

Introduction – Water bearing Properties of Rock – Type of aquifers - Aquifer properties –
permeability, specific yield, transmissivity and storage coefficient – Methods of Estimation – GEC
norms - Steady state flow - Darcy’s Law - Groundwater Velocity –- Dupuit Forchheimer assumption
– Steady Radial Flow into a Well
UNIT II WELL HYDRAULICS 9

Unsteady state flow - Theis method - Jacob method – Chow’s method – Law of Times – Theis
Recovery – Bailer method – Slug method - tests - Image well theory – Partial penetrations of wells -
Well losses – Specific Capacity and Safe yield - Collector well and Infiltration gallery
UNIT III GROUNDWATER MANAGEMENT 9

Need for Management Model – Database for Groundwater Management – Groundwater balance
study – Introduction to Mathematical model – Model Conceptualization – Initial and Boundary
Condition – Calibration – Validation – Future Prediction – Sensitivity Analysis – Uncertainty –
Development of a model
UNIT IV GROUNDWATER QUALITY 9

Ground water chemistry - Origin, movement and quality - Water quality standards – Drinking water
Industrial water – Irrigation water - Groundwater Pollution and legislation - Environmental Regulatory
requirements
UNIT V GROUNDWATER CONSERVATION 9

Artificial recharge techniques – Reclaimed wastewater recharge – Soil aquifer treatment (SAT) –
Aquifer Storage and Recovery (ASR) Seawater Intrusion and Remediation – Ground water Basin
management and Conjunctive use – Protection zone delineation, Contamination source inventory
and remediation schemes
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to:
CO1 Define the groundwater system basic, types of aquifers, aquifer parameters, movement and
its potential for confined and unconfined aquifers
CO2 Apply the knowledge of groundwater flow in steady and unsteady flow characteristics of well
hydraulics
CO3 Explain the concept of groundwater model development and data base management for
groundwater management
CO4 Describe the importance of artificial recharge and groundwater quality concepts
CO5 Apply the creative and innovative technique on conservation of groundwater
171
TEXTBOOKS
1. Raghunath H.M., "Ground Water Hydrology", New Age International (P) Limited, New
Delhi,2010.
2. Todd D.K., "Ground Water Hydrology", John Wiley and Sons, New York,2000.
REFERENCES
1. Fitts R Charles, "Groundwater Science". Elsevier, Academic Press,2002.
2. Ramakrishnan, S, Ground Water, K.J. Graph arts, Chennai, 1998.
3. Chahar BR, Groundwater hydrology, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2015.
4. RastogiA.K. , Numerical Groundwater Hydrology,2011

PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Correlation
of COs to
POs
PO3 Design / developmentof solutions 3 3 3 2 2 3
PO7 Environment and Sustainability - - 3 3 3 3
PO8 Ethics - - - - 3 3
2 2 3 3 3 3
Discipline
Engineering issues
CE3037 WATER RESOURCES SYSTEMS ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To introduce the student to the concept of Mathematical approaches for managing the water
resources system and apply to operate a water resource system optimally.
UNITI SYSTEM APPROACH 9

Definition, classification, and characteristics of systems - Philosophy of modelling – Goals and
Objectives – Basics of system analysis concept – steps in systems engineering.
UNITII LINEARPROGRAMMING 9
Introduction to Operation research - Linear programming Problem Formulation-graphical solution
Simplex method –Sensitivity analysis - application to operation of single purpose reservoir
172
UNITIII DYNAMICPROGRAMMING 9
Bellman’s optimality criteria, problem formulation and solutions – Water Allocation for three state
(user), Forward and Backward Recursion techniques in Dynamic Programming - Shortest pipe line
route problem - Application to reservoirs capacity expansion
UNITIV SIMULATION 9
Basic principles and concepts – Monte Carlo techniques – Model development – Inputs and outputs
– Single and multipurpose reservoir simulation models – Deterministic simulation – Rule Curve
development for reservoir
UNITV ADVANCEDOPTIMIZATIONTECHNIQUES 9
Integer and parametric linear programming – Goal programming types – Applications to reservoir
release optimization – application of evolutionary algorithms like Genetic algorithm, Particle swarm,
Simulated Annealing to reservoir release optimization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to:
CO1 Define the economic aspects and analysis of water resources systems for comprehensive and
integrated planning of a water resources project.
CO2 Apply the concept of linear programming for optimisation of water resources problems.
CO3 Explain the concept of dynamic programming and apply in water resource system.
CO4 Develop the simulation model based on deterministic and stochastic simulation for reservoir
operating policy
CO5 Apply advance optimisation techniques like goal programming, heuristic algorithm in the field
of water resources planning and management.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Vedula, S., and Majumdar, P.P. Water Resources Systems – Modeling Techniques and
Analysis Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, Fifth reprint,2010.
2. Bhave PR, Water Resources Systems, Narosa Publishers,2011
REFERENCES:
1. Gupta, P.K., and Man Mohan, “Problems in Operations Research”, (Methods and Solutions),
Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi,1995.
2. Chaturvedi, M.C., “Water Resources Systems Planning and Management”, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi,1997.
3. Taha, H.A., “Operations Research”, McMillan Publication Co., New York,1995.
4. Hiller, F.S., and Liebermann, G.J., “Operations Research”, CBS Publications and Distributions,
New Delhi,1992.

PO/PSO
COs to POs
- - 2 3 3 3
solutions
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - - 2 3 3 3
PO6 Engineer and Society - 3 2 3 3 3
PO7 Environment and Sustainability - - - 2 - 2
PO8 Ethics - - - - 2 2
PO10 Communication 2 - - - - 2
PO11 Project Managementand Finance - 2 3 2 3 3
173
PSO1 Discipline 2 2 1 3 3 3
Engineering issues
CE3038 WATERSHED CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT LT PC

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the technical and sociological understanding of a watershed.
 To provide a comprehensive discourse on the engineering practices of watershed
management for realizing the higher benefits.
UNIT I WATERSHED CONCEPTS 9

Watershed – Definition, Need and Elements – Principles - Influencing Factors: Geology – Soil –
Morphological Characteristics - Toposheet - Delineation – Codification – Prioritization – Watershed
Atlas.
UNIT II SOIL CONSERVATION MEASURES 9

Types of Erosion – Water and Wind Erosion: Causes, Factors, Effects and Management – Soil
Conservation Measures: Agronomical and Mechanical – Design of Terraces and Bunds - Estimation
of Soil Loss – USLE Equation - Sedimentation.
UNIT III WATER HARVESTING AND CONSERVATION 9

Yield from a Catchment - Traditional Water Harvesting Techniques – Micro-Catchments - Design of
Small Water Harvesting Structures: Farm Ponds, Percolation Tanks, Check dams, Grassed
Waterways.
UNIT IV GIS FOR WATERSHED MANAGEMENT 9

Applications of Remote Sensing and Geographical Information System - Role of Decision Support
System – Conceptual Models and Case Studies.
UNIT V WATERSHED MANAGEMENT 9

Project Proposal Formulation - Watershed Development Plan – Entry Point Activities – Watershed
Economics - Agroforestry – Grassland Management – Wasteland Management – Watershed
Approach in Government Programmes – People’s Participation – Evaluation of Watershed
Management Programmes – Integrated Watershed Management – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME :
 On Completion of the course the student is expected to
CO1 Recognize and Interpret the morphological features of a watershed.
CO2 State, design and sketch the soil conservation structures.
CO3 Describe the micro catchment and apply the concepts to design the small water harvesting
structures.
CO4 Illustrate the application of modern tools and technology in the management of watershed.
CO5 Classify the management activities and to develop an integrated watershed development
plan.
174
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Ghanashyam Das, Hydrology and Soil Conservation Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Private
Limited, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2009.
2. Suresh, R. Soil and Water Conservation Engineering, Standard Publishers and Distributors
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2020.
REFERENCES:
1. Glenn O Schwab. etal, Soil and Water Conservation engineering, Wiley India Private Limited,
2009.
2. Heathcote, I. W. Integrated Watershed Management: Principles and Practice. John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., New York, Second Edition 2009.
3. John G. Lyon, GIS for Water Resources and Watershed Management, CRC Press, 2002.
4. Vijay P. Singh, Donald K. Frevert, Watershed Models, CRC Press, 2005.
5. Vir Singh, Raj, Watershed Planning and Management, Bio- Green Publisher, 2016.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

POs/PSOs Correlation
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
of COs to
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 3 3 3 - - 2
POs
PO2 Problem analysis - 2 2 - 2 2
PO3 Design / development of solutions - 2 2 - 2 2
PO4 Investigation 1 2 2 - 2 2
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 1 1 3 - 1
PO6 Engineer and Society - 2 2 - 2 2
PO7 Environment and Sustainability 1 2 2 - 2 2
PO8 Ethics - 1 1 - 3 1
Discipline 1 2 2 1 2 2
of engineering solutions to Civil 1 2 2 2 2 2
Engineering issues
CE3039 INTEGRATED WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT LT PC

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 Students will be introduced to the concepts and principles of IWRM, which is inclusive of the
economics, public-private partnership, water & health, water & food security and legal &
regulatory settings.
UNIT I CONTEXT FOR IWRM 9
Water as a global issue: Key challenges – Definition of IWRM within the broader context of
development – Key elements of IWRM - Principles – Paradigm shift in water management -
Complexity of the IWRM process – UN World Water Assessment - SDGs.
UNIT II WATER ECONOMICS 9
Economic view of water issues: Economic characteristics of water good and services – Non-market
monetary valuation – Water economic instruments – Private sector involvement in water resources
management: PPP objectives, PPP models, PPP processes, PPP experiences through case
studies.
175
UNIT III LEGAL ANDREGULATORYSETTINGS 9
Basic notion of law and governance: Principles of International and National law in the area of water
management - Understanding UN law on non-navigable uses of International water courses -
International law for groundwater management – World Water Forums – Global Water Partnerships
- Development of IWRM in line with legal and regulatory framework: Case Studies.
UNIT IV WATER AND HEALTH WITHIN THE IWRMCONTEXT 9

Links between water and health: Options to include water management interventions for health –
Health protection and promotion in the context of IWRM – Global burden of Diseases - Health impact
assessment of water resources development projects – Case studies.
UNIT V AGRICULTURE IN THE CONCEPT OF IWRM 9

Water for food production: ‘blue’ versus ‘green’ water debate – Water foot print - Virtual water trade
for achieving global water and food security - Climate Smart Agriculture - Current water pricing
policy– Scope to relook pricing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Describe the context and principles of IWRM; Compare the conventional and integrated ways
of water management.
CO2 Select the best economic option among the alternatives; illustrate the pros and cons of PPP
through case studies.
CO3 Apply law and governance in the context of IWRM.
CO4 Discuss the linkages between water-health; develop a HIA framework.
CO5 Analyse how the virtual water concept pave way to alternate policy options.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Cech Thomas V., Principles of water resources: history, development, management and
policy. John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York. Fourth Edition 2018.
2. Mollinga.P. etal “Integrated Water Resources Management”, Water in South Asia Volume I,
Sage Publications, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Technical Advisory Committee, Dublin principles for water as reflected in comparative
assessment of institutional and legal arrangements for Integrated Water Resources
Management, Technical Advisory Committee Background Paper No: 3. Global water
partnership, Stockholm, Sweden. 1999.
2. Technical Advisory Committee, Integrated Water Resources management, Technical Advisory
Committee Background Paper No: 4. Global water partnership, Stockholm, Sweden. 2002.
3. Technical Advisory Committee, Effective Water Governance”. Technical Advisory Committee
Background Paper No: 7. Global water partnership, Stockholm, Sweden, 2003.
4. Tony Allan, Virtual Water: Tackling the Threat to Our Planet’s Most Precious Resource, I. B.
Taurus, 2011.
5. Convention on the Law of the Non-navigational Uses of International Watercourses.
https://legal.un.org/ilc/texts/instruments/english/conventions/8_3_1997.pdf

POs/PSOs Course Outcome Overall
Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
COs to POs
PO2 Problem analysis - 2 - 2 2 1
PO3 Design / development of solutions - 2 2 2 2 2
176
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - 2 - - 1 1
PO8 Ethics - 2 2 2 2 2
discipline 3 2 2 2 2 2
Engineering Issues
CE3040 URBAN WATER INFRASTRUCTURE L T PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge and skills relevant to water management in the context of urbanization
and relate engineering principles to water supply, storm water and wastewater management,
along with related regulations and best management practices from around the world.
UNIT I URBAN ECOSYSTEM 9

Cities as Ecological system – hybrid ecosystem – Resilience in urban ecosystem. Human
components of Ecosystem – Urban pattern and Ecosystem function. Population and Community
dynamics, functions of Urban Ecosystem.
UNIT II URBANHYDROLOGY 9
The urban hydrological cycle – Function – Human induced changes in urban watershed –
Hydrological calculation – Runoff – Infiltration – hydrograph.
UNIT III URBAN STORM WATERMANAGEMENT 9
Design of Drainage System – Roadway Drainage Analysis – Types of inlet – inlet design – Design
of storm drain - Storm water management regulations - structural storm management systems –
Newer trends in storm water management (Green infrastructure) – installation – operation and
maintenance.
UNIT IV WATER CONSERVATION AND REUSE 9
Trends in supply and demand – indoor conservation – outdoor conservation – water reuse –
Rainwater harvesting – public education.
UNIT V WATER GOVERNANCE 9
Challenges in water sector - Institutional setting, Supply Management, Demand Management, Waste
water management – Private sector participation, urban service delivery, customer satisfaction,
financial resource management – case studies of best practices in cities across the world.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain various functional elements of urban ecosystem.
CO2 Calculate urban runoff, compute supply and demand of water, draw hydrograph
CO3 Compare advantages of Newer techniques of green infrastructure and illustrate benefits
177
CO4 Assess the Operation and Maintenance needs of urban water systems
CO5 Propose best management practices for Indian context
TEXT BOOKS:
1. AnandChiplunkar, K Seetharam and CheonKheong (ed) (2012), "Good Practices in urban
water management" ADB, National University Singapore.
2. Marina Alberti (2008), "Advances in Urban Ecology", SpringeR
3. Mohammad Karamouz, Ali Moridi, Sara Nazif (2010), Urban Water Engineering and
Management, 1st Edition, CRC Press
4. Monzur A. Imteaz , (2019), Urban Water Resources, CRC Press
REFERENCES:
1. HormozPazwash (2016), "Urban storm water management", CRC Press
2. Larry W. Mays, (2004), Urban Stormwater Management Tools, McGraw-Hill Companies
3. J Parkinson, O Mark (2005) Urban Stormwater Management in Developing Countries, IWA
Publishing
of COs to
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 3 3 3 2 2 POs
3
PO4 Investigation - - - 3 3 3
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - - 2 - - 2
PO6 Engineer and Society - - - 2 2 2
PO7 Environment and Sustainability 2 - - 2 2 2
PO8 Ethics 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO11 Project Management and Finance - - - 2 2 2
PO12 Life Long Learning - - - 2 2 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering discipline - 3 3 3 3 3
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil Engineering problems
and innovation - - - 2 2 2
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation of engineering
solutions to Civil Engineering Issues - - 2 - 2 2
CE3041 WATER QUALITY AND MANAGEMENT L TPC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the fundamentals of mathematical models and their importance in water
quality modelling, and to impart the skills to use water quality modelling software for surface
and groundwater qualitymodelling.
UNIT I MODELLING INSIGHTS 9
Engineers and Mathematical models-Water quality models – historical development - different
types of models-- steps in model development - importance of model building.- calibration and
verification of models- finite element, finite difference and finite volume methods.
178
UNIT II POLLUTION TRANSPORT 9
Transport phenomena – advection, diffusion, dispersion- contamination transport in surface and
subsurface water - Simple transport models –steady state and time variable solutions- conservation
of mass, momentum and energy balance, governing equation for contaminant fate and transport
UNIT III SURFACE WATER QUALITY MODELLING 9
Water quality modeling of streams, lakes and estuaries – water quality– model sensitivity –
assessing model performance; Models for dissolved oxygen, pathogens and COD, BOD-Streeter
Phelp’s model for point and distributed sources – modified streeter Phelp’s equations.
UNIT IV GROUNDWATER QUALITY MODELLING 9

Groundwater flow and mass transport of solutes – groundwater quality modelling using numerical
methods – Parameters, Input-output stresses, Initial and Boundary conditions- degradation of
organic compounds in subsurface – Model calibration : steady state and unsteady state – sensitivity
analysis – Model validation –seawater intrusion – basic concepts and modelling.
UNIT V WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT MODELS 9
Exposure to surface water and groundwater quality modelling software’s – MIKE 21, WASP,
QUAL2E and MODFLOW – demonstration – case studies – Modeling multilayer groundwater flow
system – Artificial recharge feasibility through modeling – Groundwater contamination, restoration
and management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 On completion of the course, the students are able to
CO1 Know about the principles of water quality modelling.
CO2 Understand the pollutant transport phenomena in surface and groundwater.
CO3 Apply the knowledge of surface water quality modelling to predict the water quality of rivers,
lakes and estuary.
CO4 Predict the groundwater contamination transport.
CO5 Predict water quality of surface and sub surface water using numerical solution.
REFERENCES:
1. Steven C. Chapra, “Surface Water Quality Modelling”, Tata McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., New
Delhi2018.
2. “Water Quality Modelling for Rivers and Streams” Authors: Benedini, Marcello, Tsakiris, George,
Springer Netherlands2017.
3. “Hydrodynamics and Water Quality: Modelling Rivers, Lakes, and Estuaries”, Zhen-Gang Ji,
John Wiley & Sons,2018.
4. “Modelling Groundwater Flow and Contaminant Transport By Jacob Bear, A. H.-D. Cheng,
Springer Science & Business Media,2010.
5. “Mathematical Modelling of Groundwater Pollution” Ne-Zheng Sun, Alexander Sun, Springer
New York, 2012

Correlation
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
of Cos to Pos
PO9 Ethics 2 2 2
179
PSO1 Knowledge of Environmental Management 3 3
discipline
PSO2 Environmental Performance Evaluation and 3 2 3
coordination
PSO3 Conceptualization of Environmental 2 3 3
Management Systems
VERTICAL VIII : OCEAN ENGINEERING
CE3042 OCEAN WAVE DYNAMICS LT PC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To make the students be aware of ocean wave classification, the mass, momentum and wave
energy transformations and wave kinematics that are happening in nature and enable them
in the prediction and analysis of the wave data.
UNIT I CONSERVATION EQUATIONS OF FLUID FLOW 9

Basic equations – Conservation of mass, moment and Energy - Continuity Equation, Euler's
Equation, Newtonian Fluids, Navier-Stokes Equation.
UNIT II WAVE THEORIES 9

Linear wave theory : Governing Equation, Boundary Conditions and solutions, Dispersion relation,
Constancy of wave period. Introduction to non-linear wave theories - Stokes, Cnoidal and Solitary
wave theory.
UNIT III WAVE KINEMATICS 9

Wave celerity, water particle velocities, accelerations, displacements and pressures. Integral
properties of waves: Mass flux, Energy and energy flux, Group speed, Momentum and momentum
flux.
UNIT IV WAVE TRANSFORMATIONS 9

Shoaling, bottom friction and damping, refraction, reflection and diffraction. Wave Breaking: Type of
breaking, Surf similarity parameter. Keulegan-Carpenter number, Ursell Parameter, Scattering
parameter, Reynolds Number
UNIT V WAVE ANALYSIS 9

Short term wave analysis- Short term wave Height Distribution – Wave period Distribution - Time
and Frequency domain Analysis of Wave Records - Long term wave analysis – Gumbel Distribution
– Weibull Distribution - Statistics analysis of grouped wave data.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the concept of mass, momentum and wave energy transformations
CO2 Classify the linear and nonlinear wave theories including the Stokes theory, solitary and
cnoidal wave theories.
CO3 Explain the wave kinematics and its properties.
CO4 Understand the principles of wave transformation.
CO5 Analyze of the long term and short term waves
180
REFERENCES:
1. Sarpkaya, T. and Isaacson, M., Mechanics of Wave Forces on Offshore Structures, Van
Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, 1981
2. Dean, R.G. and Dalrymple, R.A., Water wave mechanics for Engineers and Scientists,
Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1994
3. Ippen, A.T., Estuary and Coastline Hydrodynamics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, inc., New
York, 1978
4. Coastal Engineering Manual Volume I and II, Coastal Engineering Research Centre, Dept, of
the Army, US Army Corps of Engineers, Washington DC, 2006
5. Sorenson, R.M., Basic Coastal Engineering, A Wiley-Interscience Publication, New York,
1978.

Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
COs to POs
PO9 Ethics 2 2
PO10 Environment and Sustainability 2 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Ocean Technology 2 2 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO2 Environmental Performance Evaluation 3 3 3 3 3 3
and coordination
Ocean Technology solutions
CE3043 MARINE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Students mainly focused in understanding the physical and engineering properties of marine
soil deposits and select suitable marine foundation as per project requirements.
UNIT I MARINE SOIL DEPOSITS 9
Marine environment, Physical and engineering properties of marine soils - Specific problems related
to marine soil deposits.
UNIT II SITE INVESTIGATION IN THE CASE OF MARINE SOIL DEPOSITS 9

Challenges of site investigation in marine environment, Different site investigation techniques,
sampling techniques, Geophysical methods, Recent advancements in site investigation and sampling
used for marine soil deposits.
181
UNIT III BEHAVIOR OF SOILS SUBJECTED TO REPEATED LOADING 9
Effect of wave loading on foundations of marine structures, Behavior of marine deposits under cyclic
loading, Cyclic behavior of soils based on fundamental theory of mechanics, Approximate engineering
methods
UNIT IV FOUNDATIONS IN MARINE SOIL DEPOSITS 9
Different offshore and nearshore foundations, Gravity platforms, Jack-up rigs, pile foundations.
cassions, spudcans.
UNIT V MARINE FOUNDATIONS SUBJECTED TO WAVE LOADING 9

Cyclic behavior of soils, empirical models, elastic-plastic models, FEM analysis of marine foundations
subjected to wave loading.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 On completion of the course, the student is expected to be ableto
CO1 Understand the physical and engineering properties of marine soil deposits
CO2 explain the effect of wave loading on physical and engineering properties of marine soil
deposits
CO3 execute investigation program for marine soil deposits
CO4 design suitable marine foundation as per project requirement
CO5 develop numerical model and design marine foundation subjected to wave loading
REFERENCES:
1. H. G. Poulos. “Marine Geotechnics”, Unwin Hyman Ltd, London, UK, 1988
2. D. V. Reddy and M. Arockiasamy, “Offshore Structures”, Volume: 1, R.E. Kreiger Pub and Co.,
1991
3. D. Thomson and D. J. Beasley, “Handbook of Marine Geotechnical Engineering”, US Navy,
2012

PO PO PO
CO’s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PS01 PS02 PO12
10 11 12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 3 2
CO2 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 2
CO5 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 2 3
CE3044 COASTAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the students the knowledge of coastal environment and to determine the
characteristics of waves.
 To provide the students the knowledge of wave transformation, sediment transport, coastal
protection measures and coastal structure design.
UNIT I COASTAL ENVIRONMENT 9
Beaches - Coastal features - Coastal Zonation - EEZ -Inshore and Offshore Areas - Mean
Sea level - Basics of Tides and Waves - Coastal Morphology.
UNIT II WAVES DYNAMICS 9

Basics of waves - Classification - Wave Theory - Physical Characteristics of different types of
waves - Linear Wave Theory - Wave celerity - Velocities -Accelerations - Displacements - Wave
dynamics in shallow and deep water conditions.
182
UNIT III NEARSHORE WAVE TRANSFORMATION 9
Shoaling, refraction, diffraction and breaking– Interaction currents and waves- near shore currents-
wave run-up and overtopping
UNIT IV SEDIMENT DYNAMICS AND TRANSPORT 9
Introduction to sediments, Sediment Analysis, types and sizes of sediments, sedimentation
processes, sediment Supply & movement - Cross-shore sediment transport - Long shore sediment
transport - Shoreline Changes - Shoreline Evolution - Erosion & Accretion.
UNIT V SHORE PROTECTION 9
Design of shore defense structures; Hard Engineering measures - Sea walls, Revetments,
Bulkheads, Dikes, Groynes, Breakwaters; Soft Engineering measures – Artificial Reefs, Beach
nourishment, Dune regeneration, Salt marsh Creation, Bioshields - Case studies
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
On successfully completing this course unit, students will be able to:
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of coastal environment.
CO2 Calculate sea state parameters (wave height, wave period, water levels) in shallow and deep
water conditions.
CO3 Understand the principles of near-shore wave transformation.
CO4 Analysis the sediment and its transport processes.
CO5 Evaluate measures to protect beaches from erosion due to waves and currents.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kamphuis, J.W., Introduction to coastal engineering and management, 2000
2. Dean, R.G. and Dalrymple, R.A., Water wave mechanics for Engineers and Scientists, Prentice-
Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1994.
3 Mani J.S, “Coastal Engineering book”, PHI Publishing Company, 2nd Edition, 2021.
REFERENCES:
1. Ippen, A.T., Estuary and Coastline Hydrodynamics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York,
1978.
2. Sorenson, R.M., Basic Coastal Engineering, A Wiley-Interscience Publication, NewYork, 1978.
3. Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI, Coastal Engineering Research Centre, Dept. of the Army,
US Army Corps of Engineers, Washington DC,2006.
COs to POs
PO3 Design/development of solutions 3 2 3 3 3
PO9 Ethics
discipline
PSO2 Critical analysis of Civil Engineering 3 3 3 3 3
PSO3 Conceptualization and evaluation 2 3 2
of Engineering solutions to
Civilengineering issues
183
CE3045 OFFSHORE STRUCTURES LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Students mainly focused in understanding the offshore environment, types, suitability, and
design concepts of offshore structures as per the appropriate requirements.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OFFSHORE ENVIRONMENT 9

Ocean winds-characterization of wind regime-wind velocity profile, Ocean waves-wave parameters-
Introduction to Airy’s wave theory and its applications-brief about time and frequency domain
analysis, brief introduction about ocean currents-tides, seaquakes, Ice environment, Ice-sea
interactions.
UNIT II TYPES OF OFFSHORE STRUCTURES 9

Offshore Structures-need for offshore structures.Types of Offshore Structures -components -
materials used-design parameters-suitable environment conditions –construction practices –
drawbacks - EIA for Offshore structures.
UNIT III FORCES ON OFFSHORE STRUCTURES 9

Introduction-Permanent loads-operating loads. Environmental forces-wind force-wave force-current
force-seaquake force-Ice force. Force due to tides - Marine growth - Use of API RP 2A guidelines.
UNIT IV SUBMARINE PIPELINES AND RISERS 9
Pipeline elements-types of pipelines-laying method-materials. Pipe wall thickness verification.
Pipeline stability. Design using DNV 81 code.
UNIT V ACCIDENTAL LOADS AND CORROSION 9
Fire, Blast and Collision- Behaviour of steel at elevated temperature- Fire rating for Hydrocarbon fire,
Blast Mitigation-Blast walls- Collision of boats and energy absorption - Corrosion- Corrosion
mechanism- Types of corrosion- Offshore structure corrosion zones- Biological corrosion-
Preventive measures of corrosion- Online corrosion monitoring- Corrosion fatigue
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
• On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Understand the offshore environment and technical terms associated with it.
CO2 Explain the types and choose suitable offshore structures according to environmental
conditions
CO3 Investigate various types of forces acting on the offshore structures
CO4 Adapt appropriate codes to design the submarine pipelines
CO5 Discuss about the accidental loads and corrosion on offshore structures
REFERENCES:
1. Graff, W. J., Introduction to Offshore Structures, Gulf Publ. Co.1981.
2. Dawson, T. H., Offshore Structural Engineering, Prentice Hall, 1983.
3. B.C Gerwick, Jr. Construction of Marine and Offshore Structures, CRC Press, Florida, 2000.
4. Clauss, G, Lehmann, E &Ostergaard, C, Offshore Structures, Vol. 1 & 2, Springer-Verlag,
1992.
5. Reddy, D. V and Arockiasamy, M., Offshore Structures Vol.1 & 2, Kreiger Publ. Co.1991.
6. Morgan, N., Marine Technology Reference Book, Butterworths, 1990.
7. McClelland, B and Reifel, M. D., Planning and Design of fixed Offshore Platforms, Van
Nostrand, 1986.
8. DNV-RP-B101-Corrosion Protection of Floating Protection and Storage Units, 2007.
9. API RP 2A. Planning, Designing and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms, API. 2000.
184
PO PO PO
CO’s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PS01 PS02 PSO3
10 11 12
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 2
CE3046 PORT AND HARBOUR ENGINEERING LT PC

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 The purpose of this course is to impart the concepts of port and harbour planning, design,
implementation and maintenance.
Ports and harbors: Classification of ports & harbours – Port and harbor planning and layout –
Meteorological, hydrographic and oceanographic data requirements and measurements for port
and harbor design.
UNIT II PORT AND HARBOURLAYOUT OPERATIONS 9
Port and harbour layout for vessels navigation and cargo handling- port buildings, navigation
channels –shore infrastructure and utilities, land reclamation – Dredging -equipment, navigation
improvement, pipelines and cables.
UNIT III DESIGN OF PORT 9
Types and classification of ports and harbours in India, Natural ports and manmade ports, major
ports, minor ports; Design of port infrastructures with regards to cargo handling , cargo storage
and integrated transport of goods.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF HARBOUR 9
Design harbour Infrastructures - design of break water - shore attached and offshore breakwaters
design - harbour basin design, approach channel design, turning basin design, with regards to cargo
and passenger terminals
UNIT V CONSTRUCTION ASPECTS AND SMART PORT 9
Planning and construction, expansion of existing jetties and renovation of port –Inland Port
Infrastructure - Smart Port : Levels of transformation into a smart port, Artificial Intelligence and
Machine Learning, Smart application for ports.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1 Understand the classification of port and harbor and study about the data requirement and
measurements for port and harbour structures.
CO2 Discuss the layout operations for vessel navigation and cargo handling.
CO3 Explain the design guidelines for port structure.
CO4 Explain the design guidelines for harbour structure.
CO5 Describe the construction, maintenance and renovation aspects of ports and understand the
concept of Smart Port and Smart application for ports
TEXTBOOKS
1. Bruun, Per. Port engineering: vol. 1. Harbor planning, breakwaters, and marine terminals.1989.
2. A. D. Quinn, “Design and Construction of Port and Marine Structures”, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, 2nd Edition, 1972.
3. C. A. Thoresen, “Port Design- Guidelines and recommendations”, Tapir Publications, Edition 1,
1988.
185
4. J. W. Gaythwaite, Van Nostrand , “Design of Marine Facilities for the Berthing, Mooring and
Repair of Vessels” 1990
5. Muir Wood, A.M., and Fleming. C.A., “Coastal Hydraulics Sea and Inland Port Structures”, 1st
Edition, Hallstead Press, 2002.
COs to POs
PO3 Design/development of solutions 3 3 3
PO9 Ethics 2 2
PO12 Life Long Learning
2 3 3 2 3
discipline
2 3 3 2 2
Engineering solutions to Civil engineering 2 2 2 1 2
issues
CE3047 COASTAL HAZARDS AND MITIGATION LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide students understanding of the materials and processes associated with the major
natural hazards: floods, earthquakes, tsunamis, landslides and other coastal hazards
 To be able to mitigate these hazards based on case studies and respond in the event of a
disaster by appropriate strategies.
Introduction to Environmental and Human induced hazards - Natural vs. Man-made hazard - Hazard
and disaster, vulnerability, resilience - coping mechanisms
UNIT II COASTAL HAZARDS 9
Coastal hazards- Tsunami, Cyclones, Earthquakes, Storm surges, Coastal erosion, Floods, Sea
Level Rise–Technological Hazards – causes – impacts – responses – mitigation strategies - early
warning systems
UNIT III LAW AND POLICY 9
Disaster management law and policy in India – changing pattern of disaster management in India –
response and recovery framework - enabling institutions– institutional coordination
UNIT IV ADAPTATION AND MITIGATION 10
Coastal Hazards Adaptation Strategy - Adaptation indigenous knowledge - Sectoral adaptations -
Disaster risk response frameworks - Mapping and planning for disaster -Community based disaster
Mitigation Measures – Indigenous knowledge for disaster Mitigation - NDMA guidelines
186
Case studies of tsunami (2004 Indian Ocean tsunami), Earthquake (Latur), cyclones (Gaja,2018
Tamlnadu), other cyclones, coastal erosion, oil spills, chemical disasters, nuclear disasters –
vulnerability of coastal megacities - lessons from building back better.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Highlight the concepts of hazards and their related physical process
CO2 Remember the concepts of natural and manmade hazards.
CO3 Summarize the adaptation strategy and mitigation measure to coastal hazards
CO4 Explain the various laws and policies involved in - institutional coordination of India.
CO5 Manage the hazards based on case studies and respond in the event of a disaster by
appropriate strategies.
REFERENCES
1. Bryant, E., “Natural Hazards”, Cambridge University Press, New York, 2006.
2. Rajib Shaw and RR Krishnamurthy, “Disaster Management: Global Challenges Local Solutions”
University Press, 2009
3. National Disaster Management Agency – Guidelines issued by NDMA such as for earthquakes,
tsunamis, cyclones, chemical disasters etc. www.ndma.gov.in
4. National Disaster Management Division, Ministry of Home Affairs, GoI. http://www.ndmindia.nic.in/
Regularly issued guidelines and training materials especially for disaster management policy,
reconstruction of buildings etc
5. United Nations office for Disaster Risk Reduction www.unisdr.org various publications and
guidelines that are constantly updated
6. Asia Disaster Preparedness Centre. Publications specific to disaster preparedness and response
in Asia. www.adpc.net
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Correlation
of COs to
POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 2 2
PO9 Ethics 2 2 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Civi Engineering
discipline 3 3 3 3
problems and innovation 3 2 2 3 2
Engineering solutions to Civil 3 2 2 2
engineering issues
187
CE3048 COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT AND REMOTE SENSING LTPC
30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To be able to “see” the features and components of the coastal zone.
 To assess the various living and non-living resources
 To understand the need for coastal zone management and to develop an ICM plan.
 To provide the coastal and oceanographic applications of satellite remote sensing.
UNIT I COASTAL ZONE 9
Coastal Zone – Beach Profile – Surf Zone – Off Shore – Coastal Waters – Coastal sediments -
Estuaries– Wetlands and Lagoons – Coastal dunes – Coastal Geomorphology.
UNIT II COASTAL RESOURCES 9
Types and functions of coastal and marine resources – Renewable and Non-Renewable resources
– Living marine resources and Nonliving marine resources – Marine minerals-Placer deposits –
Hydrocarbon deposits – Polymetallic nodules.
UNIT III COASTAL ECOSYSTEM 9

Marine ecosystem: Mangroves – Seagrass – Seaweeds - Coral reef – Large marine ecosystem -
Climate effects on living marine resources- Biological monitoring of marine ecosystem- Human
impacts on marine ecosystem.
UNIT IV COASTAL REGULATIONS 9

Introduction- What is ICM- Developing an ICM framework- Principles-Goals-defining boundaries –
Coastal Regulation Zones (CRZ) for main land and Islands –Environmental Law and policy.
UNIT V REMOTE SENSING IN COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT 9

Sensors and Platforms used for coastal application –Mapping of Coral Reefs, Macroalgae, Mangrove
and Wetlands – Coastal Landuse / Land Cover Mapping – Coastal Regulation Zone Mapping – Case
studies.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the science and basic of Coastal zone.
CO2 Assess the living marine resources and non-living marine resources.
CO3 Learn about importance of different ecosystem available in coastal and marine environment.
CO4 Understand the coastal regulations for mainland and islands.
CO5 Acquire knowledge about various satellites and sensors used for marine and coastal
environment.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Richard Sylvester, “Coastal Engineering, Volume I And II”, Elseiner Scientific Publishing Co.,
1999
2. NCSCM straigies and guide line for National implementation of Integrated Coastal zone
management, 2013
3. Ramesh R and Purvaja R , E-learning module on ICZM for UNESCO-HE,TheNetheralands,2006
4. Dwivedi,S.N., Natarajan,R And Ramachandran,S., “Coastal Zone Management In Tamilnadu”,
Madras, 1991
5. David R. Green, Stephen D. King; Coastal and Marine Geo-Information Systems: Applying the
Technology to the Environment, Springer, 2003
6. Ramamohana Rao P, Suneetha P, “Coastal Zone Management Using Remote Sensing and
GIS”, Paperback – Import, 2014.
188
COs to POs
PO9 Ethics 3 3
2 3 3 3 3 3
discipline
3 3 3 3
Engineering solutions to Civil 3 3 3 3
engineering issues
VERTICAL IX: DIVERSIFIED COURSES
CE3049 STEEL CONCRETE COMPOSITE STRUCTURES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To develop an understanding of the effect composite action and assess governing limit states
for composite elements.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITE ACTION 9
Introduction to steel - concrete composite construction – codes – composite design – shear
connectors – types of shear connectors – degrees of shear connections – partial and full shear
connections.
UNIT II DESIGN OF COMPOSITE BEAM 9

Introduce composite beams, including shear studs – Determine the location of a beam’s neutral
axis/axes depending on the level of composite action. Calculate shear stud strength and understand
strength modifiers - deflection of composite beams.
UNIT III DESIGN OF COMPOSITE COLUMN 9

Types of Composite columns – design of encased columns – design of in-filled columns – axial, uni-
axial and bi-axially loaded columns.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF COMPOSITE SLAB 9

Introduction – Composite slabs – profiled sheeting – sheeting parallel to span – sheeting
perpendicular to span.
189
Case studies on steel concrete composite construction in buildings - seismic behaviour of composite
structures
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the effect of composite action has on structural component behaviour.
CO2 Describe and assess governing limit states for composite beam.
CO3 Describe and assess governing limit states for composite slab.
CO4 Describe and assess governing limit states for composite column.
CO5 Study and evaluate the case studies related to steel concrete composite constructions of
buildings.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Johnson R.P., “Composite Structures of Steel and Concrete Beams, Slabs, Columns and
Frames for Buildings”, Vol.I, Fourth Edition, Blackwell Scientific Publications, 2018.
2. Oehlers D.J. and Bradford M.A., “Composite Steel and Concrete Structural Members,
Fundamental behaviour”, Revised Edition, Pergamon press, Oxford, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Owens.G.W and Knowles.P, ”Steel Designers Manual”, Seventh Edition, Steel Concrete
Institute(UK), Oxford Blackwell Scientific Publications, 2011.
2. Teaching resource for, “Structural Steel Design,” Volume 2 of 3, Institute for Steel
Development and Growth (INSDAG), 2002.
3. Narayanan R, “Composite steel structures – Advances, design and construction”, Elsevier,
Applied science, UK, 1987.
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
CO s to POs
PO1 Knowledge of Engineering Sciences 3 3 3 3 - 3
PO3 Design / development of solutions 3 3 3 3 - 3
PO5 Modern Tool Usage - 2 2 2 - 2
PO6 Individual and Team work - - - - 2 2
PO9 Ethics 3 2 2 2 2 2
Knowledge of Construction
PSO1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Engineering & Management discipline
Critical analysis of Construction
PSO2 management problems and 3 3 3 3 3 3
innovation
PSO3 engineering solutions to Construction 3 3 3 3 3 3
Issues
190
CE3050 FINANCE FOR ENGINEERS LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To study the concepts of Finance such as fundamentals of management of accounting,Time
value of money, comparing alternatives proposals, evaluating alternative investments and
management of funds.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING 9

Basics of accounting - Management accounting, Financial accounting principles- basic concepts,
Financial statements – accounting ratios - funds flow statement – cash flow statement.
UNIT II TIME VALUE OF MONEY 9

Time Value of Money – Present Value – Future Value – Single amount - Annuity – Cost of Capital –
Cost of Debt, Preference, Equity – Proportions- Cost of Capital Calculation – Financial Institutions
Considerations.
UNIT III COMPARING ALTERNATIVES PROPOSALS 9

Comparing alternatives- NPV – BCR – IRR – ARR – Urgency – Pay Back Period and Break Even
Analysis – Assessment of Various Methods – Indian Practice of Investment Appraisal – International
Practice of Appraisal
UNIT IV EVALUATING ALTERNATIVE INVESTMENTS 9
Real Estate - Investment Property, Equipment Replace Analysis, Depreciation – Tax before and after
depreciation – GST– Input Tax Credit (ITC) – Assessment and Administration of GST – Inflation -
Practical knowledge of risk and tax management.
.
UNIT V FUNDS MANAGEMENT 9
Project Finance – Sources of finance - Long-term and short -term finance, Working Capital
Management, Inventory valuation, Mortgage Financing - International financial management- foreign
currency management - Applications of valuation concepts to real-world cases & examples.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Describe the basic principles of accounting
CO2 Assess the value of money
CO3 Evaluate alternate proposals
CO4 Evaluate alternative investments
CO5 Select best source of finance for a project
REFERENCES:
1. Prasanna Chandra, Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation Review,
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 2006.
2. Blank, L.T., and Tarquin,a.J Engineering Economy,4th Edn. Mc-Graw Hill Book Co., 1988
3. Collier C and GlaGola C Engineering Economics & Cost Analysis, 3nd Edn. Addison Wesley
Education Publishers.,1998.
4. Patel, B M Project management- strategic Financial Planning, Evaluation and Control, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2000
5. Steinand noer, H.M. Engineering Economic principles, 2nd Edn. McGraw Hill Book, 1996
COs to POs
PO3 Design / development of solutions - - 1 1 1 1
191
PO6 Individual and Team work - - 1 1 1 1
PO7 Communication - - 1 1 1 1
PO9 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO10 Environment and Sustainability - - 1 1 1 1
discipline
Engineering Issues
CE3051 EARTH AND ROCK FILL DAMS LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Students are expected to learn reasons for failure and damages of embankments and slopes,
various methods of analysis of slopes and remedial techniques to protect the slopes.
UNIT I DESIGN CONSIDERATION 9
Design consideration, Factors influencing design, Types of earth and rock fill dams, Design details,
Provisions to control pore pressure.
UNIT II SLOPE STABILITY AND SEEPAGE ANALYSIS 8

Stability of infinite and finite slopes, Method of Slices, Bishop’s method, Flow nets, Stability conditions
during construction, Full reservoir and drawdown - cut off walls – Trenches – Importance of drainage
and filters.
UNIT III HYDRAULIC FRACTURING 9
Introduction, Conditions and mechanisms for hydraulic fracturing, Failure criterion for hydraulic
fracturing – cubic specimen with a crack – core with a transverse crack – core with a vertical crack,
strike–dip of easiest crack spreading; factors affecting hydraulic fracturing, self-healing of a core
crack.
UNIT IV FAILURE AND DAMAGES 9
Failure and damages, Nature and importance of failures in embankment and foundation - Piping,
Differential settlement, Foundation slides, Earthquake damage, creep and anisotropic effects,
Reservoir wave action, Dispersive piping.
UNIT V SLOPE PROTECTION MEASURES 10
Special design problems, Slope protection, Filter design, Foundation treatment, Earth dams on
pervious soil foundation, Application of Geosynthetic materials in filtration. Treatment of rock
foundation, Construction Techniques, Quality control and performance measurement
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of thecourse, thestudent isexpected tobeableto
CO1 Assess the causes of failure and damage of embankments and slopes.
CO2 Apply the knowledge of engineering and analyse the stability of slopes for
various seepage conditions and apply the concept in the design of earth and rock fill dams.
CO3 Apply the knowledge of engineering and assess the stability of dam against hydraulic fracturing
and suggest suitable remedial measure.
CO4 Understand the nature of failures and damages in earth and rock fill dams and apply the
concept in field to avoid distress.
192
CO5 Recommend suitable remedial measures to protect the slopes and implement quality control
and monitor its performance
REFERENCES:
1. Rowe, R.K., Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering Handbook, Kulwer Academic
Publishers, 2001.
2. Anderson, M.G., and Richards, K.S., Slope Stability, John Wiley, 1987.
3. Sherard, J.L., Woodward, R.J., Gizienski, R.J. and Clevenger, W.A., Earth and Earth rock dam,
John Wiley, 1963.
4. Chowdhury, D.F., Slope analysis, Prentice Hall, 1988.
5. McCarthy, D.F., Essentials of Soil Mechanics and Foundations: Basic Geotechnics, Sixth
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002.
6. Bramhead, E.N., The Stability of Slopes, Blacky Academic and Professionals Publications,
Glasgow, 1986.
7. Chandhar, R.J., Engineering Developments and Applications, Thomas Telford, 1991
8. Koerner, R.M. Designing with Geosynthetics, Third Edition, Prentice Hall, 1997.
9. Jun-Jie Wang, Hydraulic Fracturing in Earth-rock Fill Dams, John Wiley & Sons, 2014.

Correlation of
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
COs to POs
PO8 Ethics 3 1 1 1 3 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
engineering issues
CE3052 COMPUTATIONAL FLUIDDYNAMICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for
 Applying the fundamentals of CFD, and developing case specific governing equations,
 Performing finite difference and finite volume based analysis for steady and transient diffusion
problems,
 Implementing various mathematical schemes under finite volume method for convention diffusion.
193
 Solving complex problems in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer with the support of high speed
computers.
 Applying the various discretization methods, solution procedure and the concept of turbulence
modelling.
UNIT I GOVERNING EQUATIONS ANDBOUNDARY CONDITIONS 9

Basics of computational fluid dynamics – Governing equations– Continuity, Momentum and Energy
equations – Chemical species transport –Physical boundary conditions – Time-averaged equations
for Turbulent Flow – Turbulent–Kinetic Energy Equations – Mathematical behavior of PDEs on CFD -
Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations.
UNIT II FINITE DIFFERENCE AND FINITE VOLUME METHODS FOR DIFFUSION 9

Derivation of finite difference equations– General Methods for first and second order accuracy – Finite
volume formulation for steady and transient diffusion problems –Example problems– Use of Finite
Difference and Finite Volume methods
UNIT III FINITE VOLUME METHOD FORCONVECTIONDIFFUSION 9

Steady one-dimensional convection and diffusion – Central, upwind differencing schemes, properties
of discretization schemes, Hybrid, Power-law, QUICK Schemes, Conservativeness, Boundedness,
Transportiveness.
UNIT IV FLOWFIELD ANALYSIS 9
Stream function and vorticity, Representation of the pressure gradient term, Staggered grid –
Momentum equations, Pressure and Velocity corrections – Pressure Correction equation, SIMPLE
algorithm and its variants – PISO Algorithms.
UNIT V TURBULENCE MODELS ANDMESHGENERATION 9
Turbulence models, mixing length model, Two equation (k-Є) models – High and low Reynolds
number models, Mesh Generation and refinement Techniques-software tools.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Apply the fundamentals of CFD and develop case specific governingequations
CO2 Perform finite difference and finite volume based analysis for steady and transient diffusion
problems
CO3 Implement various mathematical schemes under finite volume method for convention diffusion
CO4 Solve complex problems in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer with the support of high
speedcomputers
CO5 Apply the various discretization methods, solution procedure and the concept of turbulence
modelling
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Versteeg, H.K. and Malalasekera, W. “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The
finite volume Method”, Pearson Education,2014
2. Ghoshdastidar, P.S., “Computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
REFERENCES:
1. John. F. Wendt, “Computational Fluid Dynamics – An Introduction”, Springer,2013.
2. K.Muralidhar&T.Sundararajan, Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer, Narora Publishing
House,1994.
3. Suhas V, Patankar, “Numerical Heat transfer and Fluid flow”, Taylor & Francis,2009.
4. Uriel Frisch, Turbulence, Cambridge University Press,1999.
5. YogeshJaluria& Kenneth E. Torrance, “Computational Heat Transfer”, CRC press,2002.
194
Course Outcome Overall Correlation
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 of COs to POs
PO8 Ethics 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 2 2 2 2 2
discipline
Engineering Issues
CE3053 RAINWATER HARVESTING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge and skills relevant to water conservation and management towards
achieving the sustainability in water resources and relate the engineering principles and
practices in estimation of runoff, storage, recharge into the ground and maintain the system
through the best management practices followed around the world.
UNIT I BASICS OF RWH 8

Water and its sources - Need for water conservation – Types of water demand - Conservation Methods
- Global and Indian perspectives - National mission and goals towards rainwater harvesting – National
water policy - Legislation on rainwater harvesting in India and Tamil Nadu.
UNIT II HYDROLOGY AND GROUND WATER 10

Hydrological cycle – Precipitation - Rainfall measurement - Rain-gauges – Hyetograph - Infiltration -
Runoff estimation – Rooftop runoff estimation. Ground water - Aquifer Properties – Darcy law and well
hydraulics - Steady flow.
UNIT III METHODS OF RAINWATER HARVESTING 7

Rainwater harvesting potential of an area - Traditional harvesting practices – Rooftop harvesting -
Methods of RWH structures – Site selection for rainwater harvesting - Surface runoff Harvesting -
Ground water recharge - Artificial recharge.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF RAINWATER HARVESTING STRUCTURES 10

Design Considerations - Components of Rainwater harvesting system - Simple roof water collection
system - Design of Storage structure - Design of Recharge structures – Recharge pit - Recharge
trench - Recharge well - Gully plug - Contour bund - Percolation tank - Check dam - Recharge shaft -
Efficiency of RWH system
195
UNIT V MANAGEMENT OF RWH AND CASE STUDIES 10
Difficulties in RWH - At catchment level - At household level - Evaluation of RWH systems –
Maintenance of RWH structures - Modernisation of RWH system - Case studies on best practice of
RWH in urban - Success stories of Contemporary practices of RWH in India.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the need and importance of water conservation through global and Indian practices
of rainwater harvesting
CO2 Understand and apply the concepts of hydrology and groundwater in the estimation of runoff
and recharge potentials
CO3 Understand the various types of rainwater harvesting methods and apply it on the field
CO4 Design the various RWH structures to harvest the rainwater in surface and subsurface
CO5 Explain the difficulties of RWH, evaluation methods and maintenance through various case
studies.
TEXT BOOKS
1. H.M Raghunath “Ground Water” 3rd Edition, New Age International 2007.
2. Jayarami Reddy.P, (2005) “A Text book of Hydrology” Firewall media Publication.
3. Ramakrishnan S, (2010), “Ground Water”, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt Ltd
REFERENCES:
1. Proceedings of UNHABITAT Blue water series “Rainwater harvesting and utilization”, Book 2
beneficiaries and capacity builders.
2. Rain water Harvesting Techniques to Augment Ground Water: Ministry of Water Resources
Central Ground Water Board Faridabad,2003.
3. Rainwater Harvesting: Indian Railway Institute of Civil Engineering Pune, October 2015.
4. A Manual on “Rainwater Harvesting and Conservation”: Government of India, Consultancy
Service Organization Central Public Works Department, New Delhi.
5. “A Water Harvesting Manual for Urban Areas” issued by Centre for Science and Environment.
6. Traditional Water Harvesting Systems of India” C.P.R. Environmental Education Centre, Chennai,
India (2004).
7. Empowering Village Communities for A Sustainable Water Future - A Resource Book for Jaldoots,
2019, Prepared by Central Ground Water Board, Dept. of Water Resources, River Development
and Ganga Rejuvenation, Ministry of Jal Shakti, Govt. of India and MARVI – Managing Aquifer
Recharge and Sustaining Ground water Use through Village-level Intervention.
8. Handbook on rainwater harvesting storage options, Ministry of Water & Environment, Uganda

Correlation
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 of COs to POs
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 2 2 2
discipline
196
Engineering Issues
CE3054 TRANSPORT AND ENVIRONMENT LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The objective of this course is to create an awareness / overview of the impact of
Transportation Projects on the environment and society.
Environmental Inventory, Environmental Assessment, Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA),
Environmental Impact of Transportation Projects, Need for EIA, EIA Guidelines for Transportation
Project, Historical Development.
UNIT II METHODOLOGIES 8
Elements of EIA – Screening and Scoping – Methods of Impact Analysis – Applications – Appropriate
methodology.
UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT, PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 10

Prediction and Assessment of Impact of Transportation Project at various stages on water, air, noise,
land acquisition and resettlement, Socio economic impact, indigenous people, aesthetics, health and
safety, energy studies, traffic impact studies, IRC guidelines.
UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MITIGATION AND MANAGEMENT PLAN 10

Mitigation of the impact on Natural and Man-made Environment, Health, Water, Land, Noise, Air,
Public participation, Environmental Management Plan, Energy Conservation, Methods to reduce
Global Warming.
UNIT V EIA CASE STUDIES 9

EIA Case Studies on Highway, Railway - EIA Case Studies on Transit Oriented Development (TOD),
Compact Cities, Non-Motorised Transport (NMT)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of Environmental Impact of Assessment
CO2 Apply various methods of analyzing environmental Impact Analysis.
CO3 Gain knowledge on Stage Wise Assessment and Prediction of impact of transportation projects
CO4 Adopt environmental management plan and their impact on earth.
CO5 Reviewing various case studies on environmental impact assessment of transport projects.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Canter, L.R., Environmental Impact Assessment, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
2. Indian Road Congress (IRC), Environmental Impact of Highway Projects, IRC, Delhi, 1998.
3. EIA Guidance Manual- Highway- MOEF & Govt of India, 2010
4. P. Meenakshi, Elements of Environmental Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2006
5. Thirumurthy A.M., Introduction to Environmental Science and Management, Shroff Publishers,
Bombay, 2005.
197
REFERENCES:
1. John G.Rau and David, C.Hooten, Environmental Impact Analysis Handbook, McGraw Hill
Book Company, 1995
2. James H.Banks, Introduction to Transportation Engineering, McGraw Hill Book Company,
2000
3. World Bank, A Handbook on Roads and Environment, Vol.I and II, Washington DC, 1997
4. Priya Ranjan Trivedi, International Encyclopedia of Ecology and Environment – EIA, Indian
Institute of Ecology and Environment, New Delhi, 1998
5. Manual on Norms & Standards for Environmental Clearance of large construction projects,
MOEF & Govt of India

COs to POs
PROGRAMOUTCOMES(PO)
PO8 Ethics 3 3 3 3
Critical analysis of Civil Engineering problems
PSO2 and innovation 2 1 2 3 2
Conceptualization and evaluation of engineering
2 3 2 3 3
PSO3 solutions to Civil Engineering Issues
CE3055 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MONITORING LTPC

30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To educate the students on the sample collection and various instrumental methods of
monitoring the quality of air, water and solid waste.
UNIT I MONITORING AND CHARACRATERIZATION OF ENVIRONMENT 9

General approach to environmental analysis, Choice of Lab.Vs. Field analysis, Environmental
monitoring-current and future status, Lab. Standards, Data quality objectives, statistics in
environmental monitoring, Accuracy and precision, detection limit, types of errors, Automated Data
acquisition and processing-sensors and transducers , Monitoring Network and real time monitoring
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLING 9

Location, planning, sampling equipment’s for water, solids and air, sample storage for physical and
chemical contaminants ,types of sampling, representative samples, sample preparation techniques-
Solvent Extraction, SPE, Head space, Purge and trap and SPME
198
UNIT III WATER ANALYSIS 9
Techniques for analysis of major ions-UV-visible Spectrophotometer, Flame photometer, AAS, ICP
( AES and MS), Trace organic pollutants(PCB, dioxins, pecticides) GC and HPLC (Columns Detectors
and Application)
UNIT IV ATMOSPHEREIC ANALYSIS 9

Ambient air and flue gas, Gaseous pollutants-Determination of time weighted average
concentration(Absorption trains, solid adsorbents and differential tubes), Direct reading
instruments(fluorescence ,chemiluminescent,IR and Electrochemical sensors, GC-MS for trace
organics, Particulate sampling methods- High volume sampler, personal sampler, PM 10 and 2.5,
Metals Direct(XRF) and dissolution methods(AAS/AES)
UNIT V ANALYSIS OF SOIL AND WASTE 9

Problem in analysis of soil and Waste -sampling, pretreatment -extraction and clean up, New
extraction techniques, Automated soxhlet and solvent extraction,microwave digestion and
sonication,SCF(CO2), Analysis for trace pollutants, Analysis of leachate.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the basics of environmental monitoring
CO2 Able to select appropriate sampling protocol for chemical analysis
CO3 Understand various methods of analysis of pollutants in water
CO4 Select correct method for toxic pollutants estimation in air
CO5 Familiar with analysis of land and wastes
REFERENCES:
1. Reeve, R.N., “Introduction to Environmental Analysis”, Analytical Techniques in the Sciences, John
Wiley & Sons, Chichester, UK, 2002.
2. Barcelo, D.(editor), “Environmental analysis. Techniques, Applications and Quality Assurance”,
Elsevier, The Netherlands, 1996
3. Paul R. Loconto Trace Environmental Quantitative Analysis: Principles, Techniques, and
Applications, Marcel Dekker; 2nd Edition , 2005,
4. Janick Artiola, Ian Pepper and Mark Brusseau, ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND
CHARACTERIZATION , Academic Press,2004.

of COs to POs
PO1 Knowledgeof EngineeringSciences 3 3 3 2 3 3
PO2 Problemanalysis 2 2 3 1 3 2
PO3 Design/development of solutions 2 2 2
PO5 ModernTool Usage 3 2 3 3 3 3
PO6 Individualand Teamwork 3 3 3
PO8 EngineerandSociety 2 2
PO9 Ethics
PO11 ProjectManagement and Finance 2 2
PO12 LifeLongLearning 2 2 2
PSO1 Knowledge of Environmental Management 2 2 2 2 2
discipline
PSO2 EnvironmentalPerformance 2 2 2
Evaluation and coordination
PSO3 Conceptualization of Environmental 2 2 2
Management Systems
199
MANDATORY COURSES I
MX3081 INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN AND GENDER STUDIES LTPC

3 000
COURSE OUTLINE
UNIT I CONCEPTS
Sex vs. Gender, masculinity, femininity, socialization, patriarchy, public/ private, essentialism,
binaryism, power, hegemony, hierarchy, stereotype, gender roles, gender relation, deconstruction,
resistance, sexual division of labour.
UNIT II FEMINIST THEORY

Liberal, Marxist, Socialist, Radical, Psychoanalytic, postmodernist, ecofeminist.
UNIT III WOMEN’S MOVEMENTS: GLOBAL, NATIONAL AND LOCAL

Rise of Feminism in Europe and America.
Women’s Movement in India.
UNIT IV GENDER AND LANGUAGE

Linguistic Forms and Gender.
Gender and narratives.
UNIT V GENDER AND REPRESENTATION

Advertising and popular visual media.
Gender and Representation in Alternative Media.

Gender and social media.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
MX3082 ELEMENTS OF LITERATURE LTPC

3 000
OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students aware about the finer sensibilities of human existence through an art
form. The students will learn to appreciate different forms of literature as suitable modes of
expressing human experience.
1. COURSE CONTENTS
Introduction to Elements of Literature
1. Relevance of literature
a) Enhances Reading, thinking, discussing and writing skills.
b) Develops finer sensibility for better human relationship.
c) Increases understanding of the problem of humanity without bias.
d) Providing space to reconcile and get a cathartic effect.
2. Elements of fiction
a) Fiction, fact and literary truth.
b) Fictional modes and patterns.
c) Plot character and perspective.
3. Elements of poetry
a) Emotions and imaginations.
b) Figurative language.
200
c) (Simile, metaphor, conceit, symbol, pun and irony).
d) Personification and animation.
e) Rhetoric and trend.
4. Elements of drama
a) Drama as representational art.
b) Content mode and elements.
c) Theatrical performance.
d) Drama as narration, mediation and persuasion.
e) Features of tragedy, comedy and satire.
3. READINGS:
1. An Introduction to the Study of English Literature, W.H. Hudson, Atlantic, 2007.
2. An Introduction to Literary Studies, Mario Klarer, Routledge, 2013.
3. The Experience of Poetry, Graham Mode, Open college of Arts with Open Unv Press,
1991.
4. The Elements of Fiction: A Survey, Ulf Wolf (ed), Wolfstuff, 2114.
5. The Elements of Drama, J.L.Styan, Literary Licensing, 2011.
3.1 Textbook:
3.2 *Reference Books:: To be decided by the teacher and student, on the basis of individual
student so as to enable him or her to write the term paper.
4. OTHER SESSION:
4.1*Tutorials:
4.2*Laboratory:
4.3*Project: The students will write a term paper to show their understanding of a particular
piece of literature
5. *ASSESSMENT:
5.1 HA:
5.2 Quizzes-HA:
5.3 Periodical Examination: one
5.4 Project/Lab: one (under the guidance of the teachers the students will take a volume of
poetry, fiction or drama and write a term paper to show their understanding of it in a given
context; sociological, psychological, historical, autobiographical etc.
5.5 Final Exam:
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
 Students will be able to understand the relevance of literature in human life and appreciate
its aspects in developing finer sensibilities.
MX3083 FILM APPRECIATION LTPC

3 000
In this course on film appreciation, the students will be introduced broadly to the development of film
as an art and entertainment form. It will also discuss the language of cinema as it evolved over a
century. The students will be taught as to how to read a film and appreciate the various nuances of
a film as a text. The students will be guided to study film joyfully.
Theme - A: The Component of Films
A-1: The material and equipment
A-2: The story, screenplay and script
A-3: The actors, crew members, and the director
A-4: The process of film making… structure of a film
201
Theme - B: Evolution of Film Language
B-1: Film language, form, movement etc.
B-2: Early cinema… silent film (Particularly French)
B-3: The emergence of feature films: Birth of a Nation
B-4: Talkies
Theme - C: Film Theories and Criticism/Appreciation
C-1: Realist theory; Auteurists
C-2: Psychoanalytic, Ideological, Feminists
C-3: How to read films?
C-4: Film Criticism / Appreciation
Theme – D: Development of Films
D-1: Representative Soviet films
D-2: Representative Japanese films
D-3: Representative Italian films
D-4: Representative Hollywood film and the studio system
Theme - E: Indian Films
E-1: The early era
E-2: The important films made by the directors
E-3: The regional films
E-4: The documentaries in India
READING:
A Reader containing important articles on films will be prepared and given to the students. The
students must read them and present in the class and have discussion on these.
MX3084 DISASTER RISK REDUCTION AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

300 0
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To impart knowledge on concepts related to disaster, disaster risk reduction, disaster
management
 To acquaint with the skills for planning and organizing disaster response
UNIT I HAZRADS, VULNERABILITY AND DISASTER RISKS 9

Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Types of Disasters: Natural, Human
induced, Climate change induced –Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc – Technological
disasters- Structural collapse, Industrial accidents, oil spills -Causes, Impacts including social,
Economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Disaster vulnerability profile of India
and Tamil Nadu - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters, pandemics, Complex emergencies, -
-, Inter relations between Disasters and Sustainable development Goals
UNIT II DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction, Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety,
prevention, mitigation and preparedness community Based DRR, Structural- nonstructural
measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj Institutions / Urban Local
Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stakeholders- Early Warning System – Advisories
from Appropriate Agencies.- Relevance of indigenous Knowledge, appropriate technology and Local
resources.
UNIT III DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Components of Disaster Management – Preparedness of rescue and relief, mitigation, rehabilitation
and reconstruction- Disaster Risk Management and post disaster management – Compensation and
Insurance- Disaster Management Act (2005) and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmers
202
and legislation - Institutional Processes and Framework at State and Central Level- (NDMA –SDMA-
DDMA-NRDF- Civic Volunteers)
UNIT IV TOOLS AND TECHNOLOGY FOR DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Early warning systems -Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation, Shelter, Health,
Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and Preparedness, – Role of
GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk Assessment, Response and
Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment. - Elements of Climate Resilient
Development –Standard operation Procedure for disaster response – Financial planning for disaster
Management
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: CASE STUDIES 9

Discussion on selected case studies to analyse the potential impacts and actions in the contest of
disasters-Landslide Hazard Zonation: Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.- Field work-Mock drill -
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Taimpo (2016), Disaster Management and Preparedness, CRC Publications
2 Singh R (2017), Disaster Management Guidelines for earthquakes, Landslides, Avalanches and
tsunami, Horizon Press Publications
3 Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-13:
978-9380386423
4 Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt.
Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act, Government of India, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy, 2009.
3. Shaw R (2016), Community based Disaster risk reduction, Oxford University Press
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1: To impart knowledge on the concepts of Disaster, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk reduction
(DRR)
CO2: To enhance understanding on Hazards, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Assessment
prevention and risk reduction
CO3: To develop disaster response skills by adopting relevant tools and technology
CO4: Enhance awareness of institutional processes for Disaster response in the country and
CO5: Develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential Disaster response
in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
CO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - 1
4 3 3 2 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
5 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - 1
AVG 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
203
MANDATORY COURSES II
MX3085 WELL-BEING WITH TRADITIONAL PRACTICES-YOGA, AYURVEDA

AND SIDDHA LT PC
3 0 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enjoy life happily with fun filled new style activities that help to maintain health also
 To adapt a few lifestyle changes that will prevent many health disorders
 To be cool and handbill every emotion very smoothly in every walk of life
 To learn to eat cost effective but healthy foods that are rich in essential nutrients
 To develop immunity naturally that will improve resistance against many health disorders
UNIT I HEALTH AND ITS IMPORTANCE 2+4

Health: Definition - Importance of maintaining health - More importance on prevention than
treatment
Ten types of health one has to maintain - Physical health - Mental health - Social health - Financial
health - Emotional health - Spiritual health - Intellectual health - Relationship health - Environmental
health - Occupational/Professional heath.
Present health status - The life expectancy-present status - mortality rate - dreadful diseases -
Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) the leading cause of death - 60% - heart disease – cancer –
diabetes - chronic pulmonary diseases - risk factors – tobacco – alcohol - unhealthy diet - lack of
physical activities.
Types of diseases and disorders - Lifestyle disorders – Obesity – Diabetes - Cardiovascular

diseases – Cancer – Strokes – COPD - Arthritis - Mental health issues.
Causes of the above diseases / disorders - Importance of prevention of illness - Takes care
of health - Improves quality of life - Reduces absenteeism - Increase satisfaction - Saves time
Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health - Healthy Eating habits (Balanced diet according
to age) Physical Activities (Stretching exercise, aerobics, resisting exercise) - Maintaining BMI-
Importance and actions to be taken
UNIT II DIET 4+6

Role of diet in maintaining health - energy one needs to keep active throughout the day - nutrients
one needs for growth and repair - helps one to stay strong and healthy - helps to prevent diet-related
illness, such as some cancers - keeps active and - helps one to maintain a healthy weight - helps to
reduce risk of developing lifestyle disorders like diabetes – arthritis – hypertension – PCOD –
infertility – ADHD – sleeplessness -helps to reduce the risk of heart diseases - keeps the teeth and
bones strong.
Balanced Diet and its 7 Components - Carbohydrates – Proteins – Fats – Vitamins – Minerals -
Fibre and Water.
Food additives and their merits & demerits - Effects of food additives - Types of food additives -
Food additives and processed foods - Food additives and their reactions
Definition of BMI and maintaining it with diet

Importance - Consequences of not maintaining BMI - different steps to maintain optimal BM
Common cooking mistakes

Different cooking methods, merits and demerits of each method
204
UNIT III ROLE OF AYURVEDA & SIDDHA SYSTEMS IN MAINTAINING HEALTH 4+4
AYUSH systems and their role in maintaining health - preventive aspect of AYUSH - AYUSH as
a soft therapy.
Secrets of traditional healthy living - Traditional Diet and Nutrition - Regimen of Personal and
Social Hygiene - Daily routine (Dinacharya) - Seasonal regimens (Ritucharya) - basic sanitation and
healthy living environment - Sadvritta (good conduct) - for conducive social life.
Principles of Siddha & Ayurveda systems - Macrocosm and Microcosm theory - Pancheekarana
Theory / (Five Element Theory) 96 fundamental Principles - Uyir Thathukkal (Tri-Dosha Theory) -
Udal Thathukkal
Prevention of illness with our traditional system of medicine

Primary Prevention - To decrease the number of new cases of a disorder or illness - Health
promotion/education, and - Specific protective measures - Secondary Prevention - To lower the rate
of established cases of a disorder or illness in the population (prevalence) - Tertiary Prevention - To
decrease the amount of disability associated with an existing disorder.
UNIT IV MENTAL WELLNESS 3+4

Emotional health - Definition and types - Three key elements: the subjective experience - the
physiological response - the behavioral response - Importance of maintaining emotional health -
Role of emotions in daily life -Short term and long term effects of emotional disturbances - Leading
a healthy life with emotions - Practices for emotional health - Recognize how thoughts influence
emotions - Cultivate positive thoughts - Practice self-compassion - Expressing a full range of
emotions.
Stress management - Stress definition - Stress in daily life - How stress affects one’s life - Identifying
the cause of stress - Symptoms of stress - Managing stress (habits, tools, training, professional help)
- Complications of stress mismanagement.
Sleep - Sleep and its importance for mental wellness - Sleep and digestion.
Immunity - Types and importance - Ways to develop immunity
UNIT V YOGA 2+12

Definition and importance of yoga - Types of yoga - How to Choose the Right Kind for individuals
according to their age - The Eight Limbs of Yoga - Simple yogasanas for cure and prevention of
health disorders - What yoga can bring to our life.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nutrition and Dietetics - Ashley Martin, Published by White Word Publications,
New York, NY 10001, USA
2. Yoga for Beginners_ 35 Simple Yoga Poses to Calm Your Mind and Strengthen Your Body,
by Cory Martin, Copyright © 2015 by Althea Press, Berkeley, California
REFERENCES:
1. WHAT WE KNOW ABOUT EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE How It Affects Learning, Work,
Relationships, and Our Mental Health, by Moshe Zeidner, Gerald Matthews, and Richard D.
Roberts
A Bradford Book, The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, London, England
2. The Mindful Self-Compassion Workbook, Kristin Neff, Ph.D Christopher Germer, Ph.D, Published
by
The Guilford Press A Division of Guilford Publications, Inc.370 Seventh Avenue, Suite 1200, New
York, NY 10001
1. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC4799645/
2. Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health
205
https://www.niddk.nih.gov/health-information/diet-nutrition/changing-habits-better-
health#:~:text=Make%20your%20new%20healthy%20habit,t%20have%20time%20to%20c
ook.
3. Read more: https://www.legit.ng/1163909-classes-food-examples-functions.html
4. https://www.yaclass.in/p/science-state-board/class-9/nutrition-and-health-5926
5. Benefits of healthy eating https://www.cdc.gov/nutrition/resources-publications/benefits-
of-healthy-eating.html
6. Food additives https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/conditionsandtreatments/food-
additives
7. BMI https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/nutritionsource/healthy-weight/
https://www.who.int/europe/news-room/fact-sheets/item/a-healthy-lifestyle---who-
recommendations
8. Yoga https://www.healthifyme.com/blog/types-of-yoga/
https://yogamedicine.com/guide-types-yoga-styles/
Ayurveda : https://vikaspedia.in/health/ayush/ayurveda-1/concept-of-healthy-living-in-
ayurveda
9. Siddha : http://www.tkdl.res.in/tkdl/langdefault/Siddha/Sid_Siddha_Concepts.asp
10. CAM : https://www.hindawi.com/journals/ecam/2013/376327/
11. Preventive herbs : https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3847409/
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing the course, the students will be able to:
 Learn the importance of different components of health
 Gain confidence to lead a healthy life
 Learn new techniques to prevent lifestyle health disorders
 Understand the importance of diet and workouts in maintaining health
MX3086 HISTORY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA LT PC

3 0 00
UNIT-I CONCEPTS AND PERSPECTIVES

Meaning of History
Objectivity, Determinism, Relativism, Causation, Generalization in History; Moral judgment in history
Extent of subjectivity, contrast with physical sciences, interpretation and speculation, causation
verses evidence, concept of historical inevitability, Historical Positivism.
Science and Technology-Meaning, Scope and Importance, Interaction of science, technology &
society, Sources of history on science and technology in India.
UNIT-II HISTORIOGRAPHY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA

Introduction to the works of D.D. Kosambi, Dharmpal, Debiprasad Chattopadhyay, Rehman, S. Irfan
Habib, Deepak Kumar, Dhruv Raina, and others.
UNIT-III SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN ANCIENT INDIA

Technology in pre-historic period
Beginning of agriculture and its impact on technology
Science and Technology during Vedic and Later Vedic times
Science and technology from 1st century AD to C-1200.
UNIT-IV SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN MEDIEVAL INDIA

Legacy of technology in Medieval India, Interactions with Arabs
Development in medical knowledge, interaction between Unani and Ayurveda and alchemy
Astronomy and Mathematics: interaction with Arabic Sciences
Science and Technology on the eve of British conquest
206
UNIT-V SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN COLONIAL INDIA
Science and the Empire
Indian response to Western Science
Growth of techno-scientific institutions
UNIT-VI SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN A POST-INDEPENDENT INDIA

Science, Technology and Development discourse
Shaping of the Science and Technology Policy
Developments in the field of Science and Technology
Science and technology in globalizing India
Social implications of new technologies like the Information Technology and Biotechnology
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
MX3087 POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC THOUGHT FOR A HUMANE SOCIETY LT PC

3 0 00
Pre-Requisite: None. (Desirable: Universal Human Values 1, Universal Human Values 2)
OBJECTIVES:
 This course will begin with a short overview of human needs and desires and how different
political-economic systems try to fullfill them. In the process, we will end with a critique of
different systems and their implementations in the past, with possible future directions.
COURSE TOPICS:
Considerations for humane society, holistic thought, human being’s desires, harmony in self,
harmony in relationships, society, and nature, societal systems. (9 lectures, 1 hour each)
(Refs: A Nagaraj, M K Gandhi, JC Kumarappa)
Capitalism – Free markets, demand-supply, perfect competition, laissez-faire, monopolies,

imperialism. Liberal democracy. (5 lectures)
(Refs: Adam smith, J S Mill)
Fascism and totalitarianism. World war I and II. Cold war. (2 lectures)
Communism – Mode of production, theory of labour, surplus value, class struggle, dialectical
materialism, historical materialism, Russian and Chinese models.
(Refs: Marx, Lenin, Mao, M N Roy) (5 lectures)
Welfare state. Relation with human desires. Empowered human beings, satisfaction. (3 lectures)
Gandhian thought. Swaraj, Decentralized economy & polity, Community. Control over one’s lives.
Relationship with nature. (6 lectures)
(Refs: M K Gandhi, Schumacher, Kumarappa)
Essential elements of Indian civilization. (3 lectures)
(Refs: Pt Sundarlal, R C Mazumdar, Dharampal)
Technology as driver of society, Role of education in shaping of society. Future directions. (4

lectures) (Refs: Nandkishore Acharya, David Dixon, Levis Mumford)
Conclusion (2 lectures)
207
Total lectures: 39
Preferred Textbooks: See Reference Books
Reference Books: Authors mentioned along with topics above. Detailed reading list will be
provided.
GRADING:
Mid sems 30
End sem 20
Home Assign 10
Term paper 40
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 The students will get an understanding of how societies are shaped by philosophy, political
and economic system, how they relate to fulfilling human goals & desires with some case
studies of how different attempts have been made in the past and how they have fared.
MX3088 STATE, NATION BUILDING AND POLITICS IN INDIA LT PC

3 0 00
OBJECTIVE:
The objective of the course is to provide an understanding of the state, how it works through its main
organs, primacy of politics and political process, the concept of sovereignty and its changing
contours in a globalized world. In the light of this, an attempt will be made to acquaint the students
with the main development and legacies of national movement and constitutional development in
India, reasons for adopting a Parliamentary-federal system, the broad philosophy of the Constitution
of India and the changing nature of Indian Political System. Challenges/ problems and issues
concerning national integration and nation-building will also be discussed in the contemporary
context with the aim of developing a future vision for a better India.
TOPICS:
Understanding the need and role of State and politics.
Development of Nation-State, sovereignty, sovereignty in a globalized world.
Organs of State – Executive, Legislature, Judiciary. Separation of powers, forms of government-

unitary-federal, Presidential-Parliamentary,
The idea of India.
1857 and the national awakening.
1885 Indian National Congress and development of national movement – its

legacies. Constitution making and the Constitution of India.
Goals, objective and philosophy.
Why a federal system?
National integration and nation-building.
Challenges of nation-building – State against democracy (Kothari)

New social movements.
The changing nature of Indian Political System, the future scenario.
What can we do?
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
It is expected that this course will make students aware of the theoretical aspect of the state, its
organs, its operationalization aspect, the background and philosophy behind the founding of the
present political system, broad streams and challenges of national integration and nation-building in
208
India. It will equip the students with the real understanding of our political system/ process in correct
perspective and make them sit up and think for devising ways for better participation in the system
with a view to making the governance and delivery system better for the common man who is often
left unheard and unattended in our democratic setup besides generating a lot of dissatisfaction and
difficulties for the system.
SUGGESTED READING:
i. Sunil Khilnani, The Idea of India. Penguin India Ltd., New Delhi.
ii. Madhav Khosla, The Indian Constitution, Oxford University Press. New Delhi, 2012.
iii. Brij Kishore Sharma, Introduction to the Indian Constitution, PHI, New Delhi, latest edition.
iv. Sumantra Bose, Transforming India: Challenges to the World’s Largest Democracy,
Picador India, 2013.
v. Atul Kohli, Democracy and Discontent: India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge, U. K., 1991.
vi. M. P. Singh and Rekha Saxena, Indian Politics: Contemporary Issues and Concerns, PHI,
New Delhi, 2008, latest edition.
vii. Rajni Kothari, Rethinking Democracy, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 2005.
MX3089 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY LT PC

3 0 00
OBJECTIVES
 To Understand the Introduction and basic Terminologies safety.
 To enable the students to learn about the Important Statutory Regulations and standards.
 To enable students to Conduct and participate the various Safety activities in the Industry.
 To have knowledge about Workplace Exposures and Hazards.
 To assess the various Hazards and consequences through various Risk Assessment
Techniques.
UNIT I SAFETY TERMINOLOGIES
Hazard-Types of Hazard- Risk-Hierarchy of Hazards Control Measures-Lead indicators- lag
Indicators-Flammability- Toxicity Time-weighted Average (TWA) - Threshold LimitValue (TLV) -
Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL)- Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)- acute and
chronic Effects- Routes of Chemical Entry-Personnel Protective Equipment- Health and Safety
Policy-Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS
UNIT II STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

Indian Factories Act-1948- Health- Safety- Hazardous materials and Welfare- ISO 45001:2018
occupational health and safety (OH&S) - Occupational Safety and Health Audit IS14489:1998-
Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis- code of practice IS 15656:2006
UNIT III SAFETY ACTIVITIES

Toolbox Talk- Role of safety Committee- Responsibilities of Safety Officers and Safety
Representatives- Safety Training and Safety Incentives- Mock Drills- On-site Emergency Action
Plan- Off-site Emergency Action Plan- Safety poster and Display- Human Error Assessment
UNIT IV WORKPLACE HEALTH AND SAFETY

Noise hazard- Particulate matter- musculoskeletal disorder improper sitting poster and lifting
Ergonomics RULE & REBA- Unsafe act & Unsafe Condition- Electrical Hazards- Crane Safety- Toxic
gas Release
UNIT V HAZARD IDENTIFICATION TECHNIQUES

Job Safety Analysis-Preliminary Hazard Analysis-Failure mode and Effects Analysis- Hazard and
Operability- Fault Tree Analysis- Event Tree Analysis Qualitative and Quantitative Risk Assessment-
Checklist Analysis- Root cause analysis- What-If Analysis- and Hazard Identification and Risk
Assessment
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
209
COURSE OUTCOMES
on completion of this course the student will be able:
 Understand the basic concept of safety.
 Obtain knowledge of Statutory Regulations and standards.
 Know about the safety Activities of the Working Place.
 Analyze on the impact of Occupational Exposures and their Remedies
 Obtain knowledge of Risk Assessment Techniques.
TEXTBOOKS
1. R.K. Jain and Prof. Sunil S. Rao Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management
Systems KHANNA PUBLISHER
2. L. M. Deshmukh Industrial Safety Management: Hazard Identification and Risk Control
McGraw-Hill Education
REFERENCES
1. Frank Lees (2012) ‘Lees’ Loss Prevention in Process Industries.Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, UK, 4th Edition.
2. John Ridley & John Channing (2008)Safety at Work: Routledge, 7th Edition.
3. Dan Petersen (2003) Techniques of Safety Management: A System Approach.
4. Alan Waring.(1996).Safety management system: Chapman &Hall,England
5. Society of Safety Engineers, USA
ONLINE RESOURCES
ISO 45001:2018 occupational health and safety (OH&S) International Organization for
Standardization https://www.iso.org/standard/63787.html
Indian Standard code of practice on occupational safety and health audit
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.14489.1998.pdf
Indian Standard code of practice on Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis IS 15656:2006
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.15656.2006.pdf

Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Understand the
CO1 basic concept of 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
safety.
Obtain knowledge
CO2 of Statutory
2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Regulations and
standards.
Know about the
CO3 safety Activities of 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
the Working Place.
Analyze on the
CO4 impact of
Occupational 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Exposures and
their Remedies
Obtain knowledge
CO5 of Risk
3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Assessment
Techniques.
Industrial safety 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
210
OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II
OCS351 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING FUNDAMENTALS

LTPC
202 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of this course are to:
 Understand the importance, principles, and search methods of AI
 Provide knowledge on predicate logic and Prolog.
 Introduce machine learning fundamentals
 Study of supervised learning algorithms.
 Study about unsupervised learning algorithms.
UNIT I INTELLIGENT AGENT AND UNINFORMED SEARCH 6

Introduction - Foundations of AI - History of AI - The state of the art - Risks and Benefits of AI -
Intelligent Agents - Nature of Environment - Structure of Agent - Problem Solving Agents -
Formulating Problems - Uninformed Search - Breadth First Search - Dijkstra's algorithm or uniform-
cost search - Depth First Search - Depth Limited Search
UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING WITH SEARCH TECHNIQUES 6

Informed Search - Greedy Best First - A* algorithm - Adversarial Game and Search - Game theory
- Optimal decisions in game - Min Max Search algorithm - Alpha-beta pruning - Constraint
Satisfaction Problems (CSP) - Examples - Map Coloring - Job Scheduling - Backtracking Search
for CSP
UNIT III LEARNING 6

Machine Learning: Definitions – Classification - Regression - approaches of machine learning
models - Types of learning - Probability - Basics - Linear Algebra – Hypothesis space and inductive
bias, Evaluation. Training and test sets, cross validation, Concept of over fitting, under fitting, Bias
and Variance - Regression: Linear Regression - Logistic Regression
UNIT IV SUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Neural Network: Introduction, Perceptron Networks – Adaline - Back propagation networks -
Decision Tree: Entropy – Information gain - Gini Impurity - classification algorithm - Rule based
Classification - Naïve Bayesian classification - Support Vector Machines (SVM)
UNIT V UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Unsupervised Learning – Principle Component Analysis - Neural Network: Fixed Weight
Competitive Nets - Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps – Clustering: Definition - Types of
Clustering – Hierarchical clustering algorithms – k-means algorithm
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
Programs for Problem solving with Search
1. Implement breadth first search
2. Implement depth first search
3. Analysis of breadth first and depth first search in terms of time and space
4. Implement and compare Greedy and A* algorithms.
Supervised learning
5. Implement the non-parametric locally weighted regression algorithm in order to fit data points.
Select appropriate data set for your experiment and draw graphs
6. Write a program to demonstrate the working of the decision tree based algorithm.
7. Build an artificial neural network by implementing the back propagation algorithm and test the
same using appropriate data sets.
8. Write a program to implement the naïve Bayesian classifier.
211
Unsupervised learning
9. Implementing neural network using self-organizing maps
10. Implementing k-Means algorithm to cluster a set of data.
11. Implementing hierarchical clustering algorithm.
Note:
 Installation of gnu-prolog, Study of Prolog (gnu-prolog).
 The programs can be implemented in using C++/JAVA/ Python or appropriate tools can be used
by designing good user interface
 Data sets can be taken from standard repositories
(https://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/datasets.html) or constructed by the students.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the foundations of AI and the structure of Intelligent Agents
CO2: Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
CO3: Study of learning methods
CO4: Solving problem using Supervised learning
CO5: Solving problem using Unsupervised learning
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK
1. S. Russell and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, Fourth
Edition, 2021
2. S.N.Sivanandam and S.N.Deepa, Principles of soft computing-Wiley India.3 rd ed,
REFERENCES
1. Machine Learning. Tom Mitchell. First Edition, McGraw- Hill, 1997.
2. I. Bratko, “Prolog: Programming for Artificial Intelligence‖, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc., 2011.
3. C. Muller & Sarah Alpaydin, Ethem. Introduction to machine learning. MIT press, 2020.
OCS352 IOT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To apprise students with basic knowledge of IoT that paves a platform to understand physical
and logical design of IOT
 To teach a student how to analyse requirements of various communication models and
protocols for cost-effective design of IoT applications on different IoT platforms.
 To introduce the technologies behind Internet of Things(IoT).
 To explain the students how to code for an IoT application using Arduino/Raspberry Pi open
platform.
 To apply the concept of Internet of Things in real world scenario.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 5
Evolution of Internet of Things – Enabling Technologies – IoT Architectures: oneM2M, IoT World
Forum (IoTWF) and Alternative IoT Models – Simplified IoT Architecture and Core IoT Functional
Stack – Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT
UNIT II COMPONENTS IN INTERNET OF THINGS 5
Functional Blocks of an IoT Ecosystem – Sensors, Actuators, and Smart Objects – Control Units -
Communication modules (Bluetooth, Zigbee,Wifi, GPS, GSM Modules)
UNIT III PROTOCOLS AND TECHNOLOGIES BEHIND IOT 6
IOT Protocols - IPv6, 6LoWPAN, MQTT, CoAP - RFID, Wireless Sensor Networks, BigData
Analytics, Cloud Computing, Embedded Systems.
212
UNIT IV OPEN PLATFORMS AND PROGRAMMING 7
IOT deployment for Raspberry Pi /Arduino platform-Architecture –Programming – Interfacing –
Accessing GPIO Pins – Sending and Receiving Signals Using GPIO Pins – Connecting to the Cloud.
UNIT V IOT APPLICATIONS 7
Business models for the internet of things, Smart city, Smart mobility and transport, Industrial IoT,
Smart health, Environment monitoring and surveillance – Home Automation – Smart Agriculture
30 PERIODS

1. Introduction to Arduino platform and programming
2. Interfacing Arduino to Zigbee module
3. Interfacing Arduino to GSM module
4. Interfacing Arduino to Bluetooth Module
5 Introduction to Raspberry PI platform and python programming
6. Interfacing sensors to Raspberry PI
7. Communicate between Arduino and Raspberry PI using any wireless medium
8. Setup a cloud platform to log the data
9. Log Data using Raspberry PI and upload to the cloud platform
10.Design an IOT based system
TOTAL PERIODS:60
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1:Explain the concept of IoT.
CO2:Understand the communication models and various protocols for IoT.
CO3:Design portable IoT using Arduino/Raspberry Pi /open platform
CO4:Apply data analytics and use cloud offerings related to IoT.
CO5:Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Robert Barton, Patrick Grossetete, David Hanes, Jerome Henry, Gonzalo Salgueiro, “IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of Things”,
CISCO Press, 2017
2. Samuel Greengard, The Internet of Things, The MIT Press, 2015
REFERENCES
1. Perry Lea, “Internet of things for architects”, Packt, 2018
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012
3. IOT (Internet of Things) Programming: A Simple and Fast Way of Learning, IOT Kindle Edition.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the Internet of
Things”, Springer, 2011.
5. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities
Press, 2015
6. https://www.arduino.cc/
https://www.ibm.com/smarterplanet/us/en/?ca=v_smarterplanet
OCS353 DATA SCIENCE FUNDAMENTALS LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● Familiarize students with the data science process.
● Understand the data manipulation functions in Numpy and Pandas.
● Explore different types of machine learning approaches.
● Understand and practice visualization techniques using tools.
● Learn to handle large volumes of data with case studies.
213
Data Science: Benefits and uses – facets of data - Data Science Process: Overview – Defining
research goals – Retrieving data – data preparation - Exploratory Data analysis – build the model –
presenting findings and building applications - Data Mining - Data Warehousing – Basic statistical
descriptions of Data
UNIT II DATA MANIPULATION 9

Python Shell - Jupyter Notebook - IPython Magic Commands - NumPy Arrays-Universal Functions
– Aggregations – Computation on Arrays – Fancy Indexing – Sorting arrays – Structured data – Data
manipulation with Pandas – Data Indexing and Selection – Handling missing data – Hierarchical
indexing – Combining datasets – Aggregation and Grouping – String operations – Working with time
series – High performance
UNIT III MACHINE LEARNING 5

The modeling process - Types of machine learning - Supervised learning - Unsupervised learning -
Semi-supervised learning- Classification, regression - Clustering – Outliers and Outlier Analysis
UNIT IV DATA VISUALIZATION 5

Importing Matplotlib – Simple line plots – Simple scatter plots – visualizing errors – density and
contour plots – Histograms – legends – colors – subplots – text and annotation – customization –
three dimensional plotting - Geographic Data with Basemap - Visualization with Seaborn
UNIT V HANDLING LARGE DATA 5

Problems - techniques for handling large volumes of data - programming tips for dealing with large
data sets- Case studies: Predicting malicious URLs, Building a recommender system - Tools and
techniques needed - Research question - Data preparation - Model building – Presentation and
automation.
30 PERIODS
LAB EXERCISES
1. Download, install and explore the features of Python for data analytics.
2. Working with Numpy arrays
3. Working with Pandas data frames
4. Basic plots using Matplotlib
5. Statistical and Probability measures
a) Frequency distributions
b) Mean, Mode, Standard Deviation
c) Variability
d) Normal curves
e) Correlation and scatter plots
f) Correlation coefficient
g) Regression
6. Use the standard benchmark data set for performing the following:
a) Univariate Analysis: Frequency, Mean, Median, Mode, Variance, Standard Deviation,
Skewness and Kurtosis.
b) Bivariate Analysis: Linear and logistic regression modelling.
7. Apply supervised learning algorithms and unsupervised learning algorithms on any data set.
8. Apply and explore various plotting functions on any data set.
Note: Example data sets like: UCI, Iris, Pima Indians Diabetes etc.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Gain knowledge on data science process.
CO2: Perform data manipulation functions using Numpy and Pandas.
214
CO3 Understand different types of machine learning approaches.
CO4: Perform data visualization using tools.
CO5: Handle large volumes of data in practical scenarios.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. David Cielen, Arno D. B. Meysman, and Mohamed Ali, “Introducing Data Science”,
Manning Publications, 2016.
2. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. Robert S. Witte and John S. Witte, “Statistics”, Eleventh Edition, Wiley Publications, 2017.
2. Allen B. Downey, “Think Stats: Exploratory Data Analysis in Python”, Green Tea Press,
2014.
CCS333 AUGMENTED REALITY/VIRTUAL REALITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamental aspects and principles of AR/VR technologies.
 To know the internals of the hardware and software components involved in the
development of AR/VR enabled applications.
 To learn about the graphical processing units and their architectures.
 To gain knowledge about AR/VR application development.
 To know the technologies involved in the development of AR/VR based applications.
Introduction to Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality – Definition – Introduction to Trajectories and
Hybrid Space-Three I’s of Virtual Reality – Virtual Reality Vs 3D Computer Graphics – Benefits of
Virtual Reality – Components of VR System – Introduction to AR-AR Technologies-Input Devices –
3D Position Trackers – Types of Trackers – Navigation and Manipulation Interfaces – Gesture
Interfaces – Types of Gesture Input Devices – Output Devices – Graphics Display – Human Visual
System – Personal Graphics Displays – Large Volume Displays – Sound Displays – Human Auditory
System.
UNIT II VR MODELING 6
Modeling – Geometric Modeling – Virtual Object Shape – Object Visual Appearance – Kinematics
Modeling – Transformation Matrices – Object Position – Transformation Invariants –Object
Hierarchies – Viewing the 3D World – Physical Modeling – Collision Detection – Surface Deformation
– Force Computation – Force Smoothing and Mapping – Behavior Modeling – Model Management.
UNIT III VR PROGRAMMING 6

VR Programming – Toolkits and Scene Graphs – World ToolKit – Java 3D – Comparison of World
ToolKit and Java 3D
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 6
Human Factors in VR – Methodology and Terminology – VR Health and Safety Issues – VR and
Society-Medical Applications of VR – Education, Arts and Entertainment – Military VR Applications
– Emerging Applications of VR – VR Applications in Manufacturing – Applications of VR in Robotics
– Information Visualization – VR in Business – VR in Entertainment – VR in Education.
UNIT V AUGMENTED REALITY 5

Introduction to Augmented Reality-Computer vision for AR-Interaction-Modelling and Annotation-
Navigation-Wearable devices
30 PERIODS
215
1. Study of tools like Unity, Maya, 3DS MAX, AR toolkit, Vuforia and Blender.
2. Use the primitive objects and apply various projection types by handling camera.
3. Download objects from asset store and apply various lighting and shading effects.
4. Model three dimensional objects using various modelling techniques and apply textures over
them.
5. Create three dimensional realistic scenes and develop simple virtual reality enabled mobile
applications which have limited interactivity.
6. Add audio and text special effects to the developed application.
7. Develop VR enabled applications using motion trackers and sensors incorporating full haptic
interactivity.
8. Develop AR enabled applications with interactivity like E learning environment, Virtual
walkthroughs and visualization of historic places.
9. Develop AR enabled simple applications like human anatomy visualization, DNA/RNA
structure visualization and surgery simulation.
10. Develop simple MR enabled gaming applications.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of AR and VR
CO2: Understand the tools and technologies related to AR/VR
CO3: Know the working principle of AR/VR related Sensor devices
CO4: Design of various models using modeling techniques
CO5: Develop AR/VR applications in different domains
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Charles Palmer, John Williamson, “Virtual Reality Blueprints: Create compelling VR
experiences for mobile”, Packt Publisher, 2018
2. Dieter Schmalstieg, Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality: Principles & Practice”, Addison
Wesley, 2016
3. John Vince, “Introduction to Virtual Reality”, Springer-Verlag, 2004.
4. William R. Sherman, Alan B. Craig: Understanding Virtual Reality – Interface, Application,
Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 - 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 1 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
AVg. 3.00 2.60 2.40 2.00 3.00 - - - 2.80 2.20 1.80 2.60 2.80 1.80 2.20
OPEN ELCTIVE III
OHS351 ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMINATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course Description:
Students aspiring to take up competitive exams of which the English language is a vital component
will find this course useful. Designed for students in the higher semesters, the course will help
students to familiarise themselves with those aspects of English that are tested in these
examinations.
216
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students in the language components essential to face competitive examinations
both at the national (UPSC, Banking, Railway, Defence) and the international level (GRE,
TOEFL, IELTS).
 To enhance an awareness of the specific patterns in language testing and the respective skills
to tackle verbal reasoning and verbal ability tests.
 To inculcate effective practices in language-learning in order to improve accuracy in usage of
grammar and coherence in writing.
 To improve students’ confidence to express their ideas and opinions in formal contexts
 To create awareness of accuracy and precision in communication
UNIT I 9
Orientation on different formats of competitive exams - Vocabulary – Verbal ability – Verbal
reasoning - Exploring the world of words – Essential words – Meaning and their usage – Synonyms-
antonyms – Word substitution – Word analogy – Idioms and phrases – Commonly confused words
– Spellings – Word expansion – New words in use.
UNIT II 9
Grammar – Sentence improvement –Sentence completion – Rearranging phrases into sentences –
Error identification –Tenses – Prepositions – Adjectives – Adverbs – Subject-verb agreement – Voice
– Reported speech – Articles – Clauses – Speech patterns.
UNIT III 9
Reading - Specific information and detail – Identifying main and supporting ideas – Speed reading
techniques – Improving global reading skills – Linking ideas – Summarising – Understanding
argument – Identifying opinion/attitude and making inferences - Critical reading.
UNIT IV 9
Writing – Pre-writing techniques – Mindmap - Describing pictures and facts - Paragraph structure –
organising points – Rhetoric writing – Improving an answer – Drafting, writing and developing an
argument – Focus on cohesion – Using cohesive devices –Analytic writing – Structure and types of
essay – Mind maps – Structure of drafts, letters, memos, emails – Statements of Purpose –
Structure, Content and Style.
UNIT V 9
Listening and Speaking – Contextual listening – Listening to instructions – Listening for specific
information – Identifying detail, main ideas – Following signpost words – Stress, rhythm and
intonation - Speaking to respond and elicit ideas – Guided speaking – Opening phrases – Interactive
communication – Dysfluency -Sentence stress – Speaking on a topic – Giving opinions – Giving an
oral presentation – Telling a story or a personal anecdote – Talking about oneself - Utterance –
Speech acts- Brainstorming ideas – Group discussion.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Learning Outcomes:
CO1 expand their vocabulary and gain practical techniques to read and comprehend a wide range
of texts with the emphasis required
CO2 identify errors with precision and write with clarity and coherence
CO3 understand the importance of task fulfilment and the usage of task-appropriate vocabulary
CO4 communicate effectively in group discussions, presentations and interviews
CO5 write topic based essays with precision and accuracy
Teaching Methods:
Instructional methods will involve discussions, taking mock tests on various question papers –
Objective, multiple-choice and descriptive. Peer evaluation, self-check on improvement and peer
feedback - Practice sessions on speaking assessments, interview and discussion – Using
multimedia.
217
Evaluative Pattern:
Internal Tests – 50%
End Semester Exam - 50%
TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.P.Bhatnagar - General English for Competitive Examinations. Macmillan India Limited,
2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Educational Testing Service - The Official Guide to the GRE Revised General Test, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. The Official Guide to the TOEFL Test, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. R Rajagopalan- General English for Competitive Examinations, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Private Limited, 2008.
Websites
http://www.examenglish.com/, http://www.ets.org/ , http://www.bankxams.com/
http://civilservicesmentor.com/, http://www.educationobserver.com
http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
AVg. 2 2.6 2.6 2 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2 3 2.4 3 - - -
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

OMG352 NGOS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand the importance of sustainable development
 To acquire a reasonable knowledge on the legal frameworks pertaining to pollution control and
environmental management
 To comprehend the role of NGOs in attaining sustainable development
UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 9
Introduction to sustainable development goals, Global responsibility of environmental concern,
Importance of environmental preservation, Environmental threats, Pollution and its types, Effects of
Pollution, Pollution control, Treatment of wastes
UNIT II ROLE OF NGOS 9

Role of NGO’s in national development, NGO’s and participatory management, Challenges and
limitations of NGO’s, Community Development programmes, Role of NGO’s in Community
Development programmes, Participation of NGO’s in environment management, Corporate Social
responsibility, NGO’s and corporate social responsibility
UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Issues and Challenges of Sustainable Development, Bioenergy, Sustainable Livelihoods and Rural
Poor in Sustainable Development, Protecting ecosystem services for sustainable development, Non-
218
renewable sources of energy and its effect, Renewable sources of energy for sustainability, Nuclear
resources and Legal Regulation of Hazardous Substances, Sustainable Development: Programme
and Policies, Sustainability assessment and Indicators
UNIT IV NGO’S FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9
Civil Society Initiatives in Environment Management, Civil Society Initiatives for Sustainable
Development, Global Initiatives in Protecting Global Environment, World Summit on Sustainable
Development (Johannesburg Summit 2002), Ecological economics, Environmental sustainability,
Social inclusion, Health for all, education for all, Food security and Water security, NGOs and
Sustainable Development strategies
UNIT V LEGAL FRAMEWORKS 9

Need for a Legal framework and its enforcement, Legal measures to control pollution, Environmental
Legislations in India, Mechanism to implement Environmental Laws in India, Legal Protection of
Forests Act 1927, Legal Protection of Wild Life, Role of NGO’s in implementing environmental laws,
Challenges in the implementation of environmental legislation
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
Upon completion of this course, the student will :
CO1 Have a thorough grounding on the issues and challenges being faced in attaining sustainable
development
CO2 have a knowledge on the role of NGOs towards sustainable developemnt
CO3 present strategies for NGOs in attaining sustainable development
CO4 recognize the importance of providing energy, food security and health equity to all members
of the society without damaging the environment
CO5 understand the environmental legislations
REFERENCES
1. Kulsange, S and Kamble, R. (2019). Environmental NGO’s: Sustainability Stewardship, Lap
Lambert Academic Publishing, India, ISBN-13: 978-6200442444.
2. Dodds, F. (2007). NGO diplomacy: The influence of nongovernmental organizations in
international environmental negotiations. Mit Press, Cambridge, ISBN-13: 978-0262524766.
3. Ghosh, S. (Ed.). (2019). Indian environmental law: Key concepts and principles. Orient
BlackSwan, India, ISBN-13: 978-9352875795.
4. Alan Fowler and Chiku Malunga (2010) NGO Management: The Earthscan Companion,
Routledge, ISBN-13 : 978-1849711197.
OMG353 DEMOCRACY AND GOOD GOVERNANCE L T P C

3 0 0 3
UNIT I (9)
Structure and Process of Governance: Indian Model of Democracy, Parliament, Party Politics and
Electoral Behaviour, Federalism, the Supreme Court and Judicial Activism, Units of Local
Governance
UNIT II (9)
Regulatory Institutions – SEBI, TRAI, Competition Commission of India,
UNIT III (9)

Lobbying Institutions: Chambers of Commerce and Industries, Trade Unions, Farmers
Associations, etc.
UNIT IV (9)
Contemporary Political Economy of Development in India: Policy Debates over Models of
Development in India, Recent trends of Liberalisation of Indian Economy in different sectors, E‐
governance
219
UNIT V (9)
Dynamics of Civil Society: New Social Movements, Role of NGO’s, Understanding the political
significance of Media and Popular Culture.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Atul Kohli (ed.): The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
2. Corbridge, Stuart and John Harris: Reinventing India: Liberalisation, Hindu Nationalism and
Popular Democracy, Oxford University Press, 2000.
3. J.Dreze and A.Sen, India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity, Clarendon, 1995.
4. Saima Saeed: Screening the Public Sphere: Media and Democracy in India,2013
5. Himat Singh: Green Revolution Reconsidered: The Rural World of Punjab, OUP, 2001.
6. Jagdish Bhagwati: India in Transition: Freeing The Economy, 1993.
7. Smitu Kothari: Social Movements and the Redefinition of Democracy, Boulder, Westview, 1993.
CME365 RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES L T PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To know the Indian and global energy scenario
 To learn the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
 To educate the various wind energy technologies.
 To explore the various bio-energy technologies.
 To study the ocean and geothermal technologies.
UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9
Indian energy scenario in various sectors – domestic, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
transportation and others – Present conventional energy status – Present renewable energy status-
Potential of various renewable energy sources-Global energy status-Per capita energy consumption
- Future energy plans
UNIT II SOLAR ENERGY 9

Solar radiation – Measurements of solar radiation and sunshine – Solar spectrum - Solar thermal
collectors – Flat plate and concentrating collectors – Solar thermal applications – Solar thermal
energy storage – Fundamentals of solar photo voltaic conversion – Solar cells – Solar PV Systems
– Solar PV applications.
UNIT III WIND ENERGY 9

Wind data and energy estimation – Betz limit - Site selection for windfarms – characteristics - Wind
resource assessment - Horizontal axis wind turbine – components - Vertical axis wind turbine – Wind
turbine generators and its performance – Hybrid systems – Environmental issues - Applications.
UNIT IV BIO-ENERGY 9
Bio resources – Biomass direct combustion – thermochemical conversion - biochemical conversion-
mechanical conversion - Biomass gasifier - Types of biomass gasifiers - Cogeneration –-
Carbonisation – Pyrolysis - Biogas plants – Digesters –Biodiesel production – Ethanol production -
Applications.
UNIT V OCEAN AND GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9

Small hydro - Tidal energy – Wave energy – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Limitations –
Geothermal energy – Geothermal energy sources - Types of geothermal power plants – Applications
- Environmental impact.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Discuss the Indian and global energy scenario.
CO2 Describe the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
220
CO3 Explain the various wind energy technologies.
CO4 Explore the various bio-energy technologies.
CO5 Discuss the ocean and geothermal technologies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals and Applications of Renewable Energy | Indian Edition, by Mehmet Kanoglu,
Yunus A. Cengel, John M. Cimbala, cGraw Hill; First edition (10 December 2020), ISBN-10 :
9390385636
2. Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, by Kothari, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited; 2nd edition (1 January 2011), ISBN-10 : 8120344707
REFERENCES:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press,
U.K., 2012.
2. Rai.G.D., “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Sukhatme.S.P., “Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
4. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Alpha Science
Intl Ltd, 2015.
5. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2
4 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2
5 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2
OME354 APPLIED DESIGN THINKING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Introduce tools & techniques of design thinking for innovative product
 development Illustrate customer-centric product innovation using on simple
 use cases Demonstrate development of Minimum usable Prototypes
 Outline principles of solution concepts & their evaluation
 Describe system thinking principles as applied to complex systems
UNIT I DESIGN THINKING PRINCIPLES 9

Exploring Human-centered Design - Understanding the Innovation process, discovering areas of
opportunity, Interviewing & empathy-building techniques, Mitigate validation risk with FIR [Forge
Innovation rubric] - Case studies
UNIT II ENDUSER-CENTRIC INNOVATION 9

Importance of customer-centric innovation - Problem Validation and Customer Discovery -
Understanding problem significance and problem incidence - Customer Validation. Target user,
User persona & user stories. Activity: Customer development process - Customer interviews and
field visit
221
UNIT III APPLIED DESIGN THINKING TOOLS 9
Concept of Minimum Usable Prototype [MUP] - MUP challenge brief - Designing & Crafting
the value proposition - Designing and Testing Value Proposition; Design a compelling value
proposition; Process, tools and techniques of Value Proposition Design
UNIT IV CONCEPT GENERATION 9

Solution Exploration, Concepts Generation and MUP design- Conceptualize the solution concept;
explore, iterate and learn; build the right prototype; Assess capability, usability and feasibility.
Systematic concept generation; evaluation of technology alternatives and the solution concepts
UNIT V SYSTEM THINKING 9

System Thinking, Understanding Systems, Examples and Understandings, Complex Systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
CO1 Define & test various hypotheses to mitigate the inherent risks in product innovations.
CO2 Design the solution concept based on the proposed value by exploring alternate solutions to
achieve value-price fit.
CO3 Develop skills in empathizing, critical thinking, analyzing, storytelling & pitching
CO4 Apply system thinking in a real-world scenario
TEXT BOOKS
1. Steve Blank, (2013), The four steps to epiphany: Successful strategies for products that win,
Wiley.
2. Alexander Osterwalder, Yves Pigneur, Gregory Bernarda, Alan Smith, Trish Papadakos, (2014),
Value
3. Proposition Design: How to Create Products and Services Customers Want, Wiley
4. Donella H. Meadows, (2015), “Thinking in Systems -A Primer”, Sustainability Institute.
5. Tim Brown,(2012) “Change by Design: How Design Thinking Transforms Organizations and
Inspires Innovation”, Harper Business.
REFERENCES
1. https://www.ideou.com/pages/design-thinking#process
2. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/valuation-risk-versus-validation-risk-in-product-innovations-
49f253ca86 24
3. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/product-innovation-rubric-adf5ebdfd356
4. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/evaluating-product-innovations-e8178e58b86e
5. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/user-guide-for-product-innovation-rubric-857181b253dd
6. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/star tup-failure-is-like-true-lie-7812cdfe9b85
MF3003 REVERSE ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The main learning objective of this course is to prepare students for:
 Applying the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development
 Applying the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Applying the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
 Analysing the various legal aspect and applications of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
 Understand about 3D scanning hardware & software operations and procedure to generate 3D
model
222
UNIT I INTRODUCTION & GEOMETRIC FORM 9
Definition – Uses – The Generic Process – Phases – Computer Aided Reverse Engineering - Surface
and Solid Model Reconstruction – Dimensional Measurement – Prototyping.
UNIT II MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS AND PROCESS IDENTIFICATION 9

.Alloy Structure Equivalency – Phase Formation and Identification – Mechanical Strength – Hardness
–Part Failure Analysis – Fatigue – Creep and Stress Rupture – Environmentally Induced Failure
Material Specification - Composition Determination - Microstructure Analysis - Manufacturing
Process Verification.
UNIT III DATA PROCESSING 9

Statistical Analysis – Data Analysis – Reliability and the Theory of Interference – Weibull Analysis –
Data Conformity and Acceptance – Data Report – Performance Criteria – Methodology of
Performance Evaluation – System Compatibility.
UNIT IV 3D SCANNING AND MODELLING 9

Introduction, working principle and operations of 3D scanners: Laser, White Light, Blue Light -
Applications- Software for scanning and modelling: Types- Applications- Preparation techniques for
Scanning objects- Scanning and Measuring strategies - Calibration of 3D Scanner- Step by step
procedure: 3D scanning - Geometric modelling – 3D inspection- Case studies.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Reverse Engineering in the Automotive Industry; Aerospace Industry; Medical Device Industry. Case
studies and Solving Industrial projects in Reverse Engineering.Legality: Patent – Copyrights –Trade
Secret – Third-Party Materials.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Apply the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
CO2 Apply the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
CO3 Apply the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
CO4 Apply the concept and principles of data processing, part performance and system
compatibility in reverse engineering of product design and development.
CO5 Analyze the various legal aspect
CO6 Applications of reverse engineering in product design and development.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Messler, Reverse Engineering: Mechanisms, Structures, Systems & Materials, 1st
Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
2. Wego Wang, Reverse Engineering Technology of Reinvention, CRC Press, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Scott J. Lawrence , Principles of Reverse Engineering, Kindle Edition, 2022
2. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, Product Design: Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New
Product Development, Prentice Hall, 2001
3. Kathryn, A. Ingle, “Reverse Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
4. Linda Wills, “Reverse Engineering”, Kluver Academic Publishers, 1996
5. Vinesh Raj and Kiran Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective”, Springer-
Verlag London Limited 2008.
223
OPR351 SUSTAINABLE MANUFACTURING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To be acquainted with sustainability in manufacturing and its evaluation.
 To provide knowledge in environment and social sustainability.
 To provide the student with the knowledge of strategy to achieve sustainability.
 To familiarize with trends in sustainable operations.
 To create awareness in current sustainable practices in manufacturing industry.
UNIT I ECONOMIC SUSTAINABILITY 9

Industrial Revolution-Economic sustainability: globalization and international issues Sustainability
status - Emerging issues- Innovative products- Reconfiguration manufacturing enterprises -
Competitive manufacturing strategies - Performance evaluation- Management for sustainability -
Assessments of economic sustainability
UNIT II SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY 9

Social sustainability – Introduction-Work management -Human rights - Societal commitment -
Customers -Business practices -Modelling and assessing social sustainability. Environmental issues
pertaining to the manufacturing sector: Pollution - Use of resources -Pressure to reduce costs -
Environmental management: Processes that minimize negative environmental impacts -
environmental legislation and energy costs - need to reduce the carbon footprint of manufacturing
Operations-Modelling and assessing environmental sustainability
UNIT III SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 9

Sustainability awareness - Measuring Industry Awareness-Drivers and barriers -Availability of
sustainability indicators -Analysis of sustainability practicing -Modeling and assessment of
sustainable practicing -Sustainability awareness -Sustainability drivers and barriers - Availability of
sustainability indicators- Designing questionnaires- Optimizing Sustainability Indexes-Elements –
Cost and time model.
UNIT IV MANUFACTURING STRATEGY FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Concepts of competitive strategy and manufacturing strategies and development of a strategic
improvement programme - Manufacturing strategy in business success strategy formation and
formulation - Structured strategy formulation - Sustainable manufacturing system design options -
Approaches to strategy formulation - Realization of new strategies/system designs.
UNIT V TRENDS IN SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONS 9

Principles of sustainable operations - Life cycle assessment manufacturing and service activities -
influence of product design on operations - Process analysis – Capacity management - Quality
management -Inventory management - Just-In-Time systems - Resource efficient design -
Consumerism and sustainable well-being.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Discuss the importance of economic sustainability.
CO2: Describe the importance of sustainable practices.
CO3: Identify drivers and barriers for the given conditions.
CO4: Formulate strategy in sustainable manufacturing.
CO5: Plan for sustainable operation of industry with environmental, cost consciousness.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Garbie, “Sustainability in Manufacturing Enterprises Concepts, Analyses and
Assessments for Industry 4.0”, Springer International Publishing., United States, 2016, ISBN-13:
978-3319293042.
2. Davim J.P., “Sustainable Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons., United States, 2010,ISBN: 978-1-
848-21212-1.
224
REFERENCES:
1. Jovane F, Ęmper, W.E. and Williams, D.J., “The ManuFuture Road: Towards
Competitive and Sustainable High-Adding-Value Manufacturing”, Springer,2009, United States,
ISBN 978-3-540-77011-4.
2. Kutz M., “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, John Wiley & Sons., United States,
2007, ISBN: 978-0-471-72636-4.
3. Seliger G., “Sustainable Manufacturing: Shaping Global Value Creation”, Springer,
United States, 2012, ISBN 978-3-642-27289-9.

COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 - 2 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 - - - - - 2 3 - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 - 3 - - - 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO/PO &
3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
AU3791 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to prepare the students to know about the general aspects of
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles (EHV), including architectures, modelling, sizing, and sub
system design and hybrid vehicle control.
UNIT I DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Need for Electric vehicle- Comparative study of diesel, petrol, hybrid and electric Vehicles.
Advantages and Limitations of hybrid and electric Vehicles. - Design requirement for electric
vehicles- Range, maximum velocity, acceleration, power requirement, mass of the vehicle. Various
Resistance- Transmission efficiency- Electric vehicle chassis and Body Design, Electric Vehicle
Recharging and Refuelling Systems.
UNIT II ENERGY SOURCES 9

Battery Parameters- - Different types of batteries – Lead Acid- Nickel Metal Hydride - Lithium ion-
Sodium based- Metal Air. Battery Modelling - Equivalent circuits, Battery charging- Quick Charging
devices. Fuel Cell- Fuel cell Characteristics- Fuel cell types-Half reactions of fuel cell. Ultra
capacitors. Battery Management System.
UNIT III MOTORS AND DRIVES 9

Types of Motors- DC motors- AC motors, PMSM motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors
working principle, construction and characteristics.
UNIT IV POWER CONVERTERS AND CONTROLLERS 9

Solid state Switching elements and characteristics – BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, SCR and TRIAC - Power
Converters – rectifiers, inverters and converters - Motor Drives - DC, AC motor, PMSM motors,
BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors – four quadrant operations –operating modes
UNIT V HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Main components and working principles of a hybrid and electric vehicles, Different configurations
of hybrid and electric vehicles. Power Split devices for Hybrid Vehicles - Operation modes - Control
225
Strategies for Hybrid Vehicle - Economy of hybrid Vehicles - Case study on specification of electric
and hybrid vehicles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 Understand the operation and architecture of electric and hybrid vehicles
CO2 Identify various energy source options like battery and fuel cell
CO3 Select suitable electric motor for applications in hybrid and electric vehicles.
CO4 Explain the role of power electronics in hybrid and electric vehicles
CO5 Analyze the energy and design requirement for hybrid and electric vehicles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Iqbal Husain, “ Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,2003
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, “ Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRCPress,2005.
REFERENCES:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley &
Sons,2003
2. Lino Guzzella, “ Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2005
3. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication,2005.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
2 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
4 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
5 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
Avg. 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
OAS352 SPACE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Use the standard atmosphere tables and equations.
 Find lift and drag coefficient data from NACA plots.
 Apply the concept of static stability to flight vehicles.
 Describe the concepts of stress, strain, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, yield strength.
 Demonstrate a basic knowledge of dynamics relevant to orbital mechanics.
UNIT I STANDARD ATMOSPHERE 6

History of aviation – standard atmosphere - pressure, temperature and density altitude.
UNIT II AERODYNAMICS 10
Aerodynamic forces – Lift generation Viscosity and its implications - Shear stress in a velocity profile
- Lagrangian and Eulerian flow field - Concept of a streamline – Aircraft terminology and geometry -
Aircraft types - Lift and drag coefficients using NACA data.
UNIT III PERFORMANCE AND PROPULSION 9

Viscous and pressure drag - flow separation - aerodynamic drag - thrust calculations -thrust/power
available and thrust/power required.
226
UNIT IV AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND STRUCTURAL THEORY 10
Degrees of freedom of aircraft motions - stable, unstable and neutral stability - concept of static
stability - Hooke’s Law- brittle and ductile materials - moment of inertia - section
modulus.
UNIT V SPACE APPLICATIONS 10

History of space research - spacecraft trajectories and basic orbital manoeuvres - six orbital
elements - Kepler’s laws of orbits - Newtons law of gravitation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Illustrate the history of aviation & developments over the years
CO2 Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
CO3 Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
CO4 Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
CO5 Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D. Anderson, Introduction to Flight, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill Education, New York,2015.
2. E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John Wiley,
NJ, 2021.
3. Stephen. A. Brandt, " Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective " American
Institute of Aeronautics & Astronautics,1997.
REFERENCE:
1. Kermode, A.C., “Mechanics of Flight”, Himalayan Book, 1997.
OIM351 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce fundamental concepts of industrial management
 To understand the approaches to the study of Management
 To learn about Decision Making, Organizing and leadership
 To analyze the Managerial Role and functions
 To know about the Supply Chain Management’
Technology Management - Definition - Functions - Evolution of Modern Management - Scientific
Management Development of Management Thought. Approaches to the study of Management,
Forms of Organization -Individual Ownership - Partnership - Joint Stock Companies - Co-operative
Enterprises - Public Sector Undertakings, Corporate Frame Work- Share Holders - Board of
Directors - Committees - Chief Executive Line and Functional Managers,-Financial-Legal-Trade
Union
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT 9
Planning - Nature and Purpose - Objectives - Strategies – Policies and Planning Premises - Decision
Making - Organizing - Nature and Process - Premises - Departmentalization - Line and staff -
Decentralization -Organizational culture, Staffing - selection and training .Placement - Performance
appraisal - Career Strategy – Organizational Development. Leading - Managing human factor -
Leadership .Communication, Controlling - Process of Controlling - Controlling techniques,
productivity and operations management - Preventive control, Industrial Safety.
UNIT III ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9
Definition - Organization - Managerial Role and functions -Organizational approaches, Individual
behaviour - causes - Environmental Effect - Behaviour and Performance, Perception - Organizational
Implications. Personality - Contributing factors - Dimension – Need Theories - Process Theories -
Job Satisfaction, Learning and Behaviour-Learning Curves, Work Design and approaches.
227
UNIT IV GROUP DYNAMICS 9
Group Behaviour - Groups - Contributing factors - Group Norms, Communication - Process - Barriers
to communication - Effective communication, leadership - formal and informal characteristics –
Managerial Grid - Leadership styles - Group Decision Making - Leadership Role in Group Decision,
Group Conflicts - Types -Causes - Conflict Resolution -Inter group relations and conflict,
Organization centralization and decentralization - Formal and informal - Organizational Structures
Organizational Change and Development -Change Process – Resistance to Change - Culture and
Ethics.
UNIT V MODERN CONCEPTS 9
Management by Objectives (MBO) - Management by Exception (MBE),Strategic Management -
Planning for Future direction - SWOT Analysis -Evolving development strategies, information
technology in management Decisions support system-Management Games Business Process Re-
engineering(BPR) –Enterprises Resource Planning (ERP) - Supply Chain Management (SCM) -
Activity Based Management (AM) - Global Perspective - Principles and Steps Advantages and
disadvantage
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of industrial management
CO2: Identify the group conflicts and its causes.
CO3: Perform swot analysis
CO4 : Analyze the learning curves
CO5 : Understand the placement and performance appraisal
REFERENCES:
Maynard H.B, “Industrial Engineering Hand book”, McGraw-Hill, sixth 2008
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3
4 2 2 3 3 3 3
5 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2.2 2.3 3 1.8 2 2.6
OIE354 QUALITY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Developing a clear knowledge in the basics of various quality concepts.
 Facilitating the students in understanding the application of control charts and its techniques.
 Developing thespecialcontrolproceduresforserviceandprocessorientedindustries.
 Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
 Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.
Quality Dimensions–Quality definitions–Inspection-Quality control–Quality Assurance–Quality
planning-Quality costs–Economics of quality– Quality loss function
UNIT II CONTROLCHARTS 9
Chance and assignable causes of process variation, statistical basis of the control chart, control
charts for variables- X , R and S charts, attribute control charts - p, np, c and u- Construction and
application.
228
UNIT III SPECIAL CONTROL PROCEDURES 9
Warning and modified control limits, control chart for individual measurements, multi-vari chart,
Xchart with a linear trend, chart for moving averages and ranges, cumulative-sum and exponentially
weighted moving average control charts.
UNIT IV STATISTICALPROCESSCONTROL 9
Process stability, process capability analysis using a Histogram or probability plots and control
chart.Gauge capability studies,setting specification limits.
UNITV ACCEPTANCESAMPLING 9
The acceptance sampling fundamental, OC curve, sampling plans for attributes, simple, double,
multiple and sequential, sampling plans for variables,MIL-STD-105DandMIL-STD-414E&IS2500
standards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to:
CO1: Control the quality of processes using control charts for variables in manufacturing industries.
CO2: Control the occurrence of defective product and the defects in manufacturing companies.
CO3: Control the occurrence of defects in services.
CO4: Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
CO5: Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 1
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
4 3 2 3 1 1
5 2 3 3 3 1
AVg. 2.6 2.7 2.7 3 3 1 2.7 1 2.7 1 2 1
OSF351 FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To enable the students to acquire knowledge of Fire and Safety Studies
 To learn about the effect of fire on materials used for construction, the method of test for non-
combustibility & fire resistance
 To learn about fire area, fire stopped areas and different types of fire-resistant doors
 To learn about the method of fire protection of structural members and their repair due to fire
damage.
 To develop safety professionals for both technical and management through systematic and
quality-based study programmes
UNIT I INHERENT SAFETY CONCEPTS 9

Compartment fire-factors controlling fire severity, ventilation controlled and fuel controlled fires;
Spread of fire in rooms, within building and between buildings. Effect of temperature on the properties
of structural materials- concrete, steel, masonry and wood; Behavior of non-structural materials on
fire- plastics, glass, textile fibres and other house hold materials.
229
UNIT II PLANT LOCATIONS 9
Compartment temperature-time response at pre-flashover and post flashover periods; Equivalence
of fire severity of compartment fire and furnace fire; Fire resistance test on structural elements-
standard heating condition, Indian standard test method, performance criteria.
UNIT III WORKING CONDITIONS 9
Fire separation between building- principle of calculation of safe distance. Design principles of fire
resistant walls and ceilings; Fire resistant screens- solid screens and water curtains; Local barriers;
Fire stopped areas-in roof, in fire areas and in connecting structures; Fire doors- Low combustible,
Non-combustible and Spark-proof doors; method of suspension of fire doors; Air-tight sealing of
doors;
UNIT IV FIRE SEVERITY AND REPAIR TECHNIQUES 9
Fabricated fire proof boards-calcium silicate, Gypsum, Vermiculite, and Perlite boards; Fire
protection of structural elements - Wooden, Steel and RCC.. Reparability of fire damaged structures-
Assessment of damage to concrete, steel, masonry and timber structures, Repair techniques- repair
methods to reinforced concrete Columns, beams and slabs, Repair to steel structural members,
Repair to masonry structures.
UNIT V WORKING AT HEIGHTS 9
Safe Access - Requirement for Safe Work Platforms- Stairways - Gangways and Ramps-Fall
Prevention & Fall Protection - Safety Belts - Safety nets - Fall Arrestors- Working on Fragile Roofs -
Work Permit Systems-Accident Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the effect of fire on materials used for construction
CO2: Understand the method of test for non-combustibility and fire resistance; and will be able to
select different structural elements and their dimensions for a particular fire resistance rating
of a building.
CO3: To understand the design concept of fire walls, fire screens, local barriers and fire doors and
able to select them appropriately to prevent fire spread.
CO4: To decide the method of fire protection to RCC, steel, and wooden structural elements and
their repair methods if damaged due to fire.
CO5: Describe the safety techniques and improve the analytical and intelligence to take the right
decision at right time.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Roytman, M. Y,”Principles of fire safety standards for building construction”. Amerind Publishing
Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,1975
2. John A. Purkiss,”Fire safety engineering design of structures” (2nd edn.), Butterworth Heinemann,
Oxford, UK,2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Smith, E.E. and Harmathy, T.Z. (Editors),”Design of buildings for fire safety”. ASTM Special
Publication 685, American Society for Testing and Materials, Boston, U.S.A,1979.
2. Butcher, E. G. and Parnell, A. C, ”Designing of fire safety”. JohnWiley and Sons Ltd., New York,
U.S.A.1983.
3. Jain, V.K,”Fire safety in buildings” (2nd edn.). New Age International(P) Ltd., New Delhi,2010. 4.
Hazop&Hazan,”Identifying and Assessing Process Industry Hazards”, Fourth Edition ,1999
4. Frank R. Spellman, Nancy E. Whiting,”The Handbook of Safety Engineering: Principles and
Applications”, 2009
230
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 - 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 1 - 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - - - - -
4 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -
5 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - -
AVg. 1.3 - 1.75 - - 1 1.3 1 1 - 1 - - -
OML351 INTRODUCTION TO NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the basic importance of NDT in quality assurance.
 Imbibing the basic principles of various NDT techniques, its applications, limitations, codes
and standards.
 Equipping themselves to locate a flaw in various materials, products.
 Applying apply the testing methods for inspecting materials in accordance with industry
specifications and standards.
 Acquiring the knowledge on the selection of the suitable NDT technique for a given
application
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NDT & VISUAL TESTING 9

Concepts of Non-destructive testing-relative merits and limitations-NDT Versus mechanical testing,
Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting, material attributes, environmental factors, visual
perception, direct and indirect methods – mirrors, magnifiers, boroscopes and fibroscopes – light
sources and special lighting.
UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT & MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING 9

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: principle, applications, advantages and limitations, dyes, developers
and cleaners, Methods & Interpretation.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: Principles, applications, magnetization methods, magnetic particles,
Testing Procedure, demagnetization, advantages and limitations, – Interpretation and evaluation of
test indications.
UNIT III EDDY CURRENT TESTING & THERMOGRAPHY 9

Eddy Current Testing: Generation of eddy currents– properties– eddy current sensing elements,
probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, applications, advantages, limitations – Factors
affecting sensing elements and coil impedance, calibration, Interpretation/Evaluation.
Thermography- Principle, Contact & Non-Contact inspection methods, Active & Passive methods,
Liquid Crystal – Concept, example, advantages & limitations. Electromagnetic spectrum, infrared
thermography- approaches, IR detectors, Instrumentation and methods, applications.
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING & AET 9

Ultrasonic Testing: Types of ultrasonic waves, characteristics, attenuation, couplants, probes,
EMAT. Inspection methods-pulse echo, transmission and phased array techniques, types of
scanning and displays, angle beam inspection of welds, time of flight diffraction (TOFD) technique,
Thickness determination by ultrasonic method, Study of A, B and C scan presentations, calibration.
231
Acoustic Emission Technique – Introduction, Types of AE signal, AE wave propagation, Source
location, Kaiser effect, AE transducers, Principle, AE parameters, AE instrumentation, Advantages
& Limitations, Interpretation of Results, Applications.
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY TESTING 9

Sources-X-rays and Gamma rays and their characteristics-absorption, scattering. Filters and
screens, Imaging modalities-film radiography and digital radiography (Computed, Direct, Real Time,
CT scan). Problems in shadow formation, exposure factors, inverse square law, exposure charts,
Penetrameters, safety in radiography.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1 Realize the importance of NDT in various engineering fields.
CO2 Have a basic knowledge of surface NDE techniques which enables to carry out various
inspection in accordance with the established procedures.
CO3 Calibrate the instrument and inspect for in-service damage in the components by means of
Eddy current testing as well as Thermography testing.
CO4 Differentiate various techniques of UT and AET and select appropriate NDT methods for better
evaluation.
CO5 Interpret the results of Radiography testing and also have the ability to analyse the influence of
various parameters on the testing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T. Jayakumar and M. Thavasimuthu, Practical Non Destructive Testing, Alpha
Science International Limited, 3rd edition, 2002.
2. J. Prasad and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata McGraw-
Hill Education, 2nd edition, 2011.
3. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbook, V-17, "Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control", American
Society of Metals, USA, 2001.
2. Barry Hull and Vernon John,"Nondestructive Testing", Macmillan, 1989.
3. Chuck Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive Evaluation”, Mc Graw Hill, 2012.
4. Louis Cartz, "Nondestructive Testing", ASM International, USA, 1995.
PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 2 2 1.8 2 1.3
232
OMR351 MECHATRONICS LTP C
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Selecting sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
 Explaining the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also interpret and
develop programs.
 Designing appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with microprocessor.
 Applying PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
 Designing and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SENSORS 9
Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Need for Mechatronics – Emerging areas of Mechatronics
– Classification of Mechatronics. Sensors and Transducers: Static and Dynamic Characteristics of
Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance Sensors – Strain Gauges – Eddy Current Sensor –
Hall Effect Sensor –Temperature Sensors – Light Sensors.
UNIT II 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Introduction – Pin Configuration - Architecture of 8085 – Addressing Modes – Instruction set, Timing
diagram of 8085.
UNIT III PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 9
Introduction – Architecture of 8255, Keyboard Interfacing, LED display – Interfacing, ADC and DAC
Interface, Temperature Control – Stepper Motor Control – Traffic Control Interface.
UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9
Introduction – Architecture – Input / Output Processing – Programming with Timers, Counters and
Internal relays – Data Handling – Selection of PLC.
UNIT V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Characteristics, Stages
of Mechatronics Design Process – Comparison of Traditional and Mechatronics Design Concepts
with Examples – Case studies of Mechatronics Systems – Pick and Place Robot – Engine
Management system – Automatic Car Park Barrier.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Select sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
CO2: Explain the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also interpret and develop
programs.
CO3: Design appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with microprocessor.
CO4: Apply PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
CO5: Design and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall, 1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage Learning,
2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”, McGraw
Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”, Oxford
University Press, 2007.
233
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
Average
ORA351 FOUNDATION OF ROBOTICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the kinematics, drive systems and programming of robots.
 To study the basics of robot laws and transmission systems.
 To familiarize students with the concepts and techniques of robot manipulator, its kinematics.
 To familiarize students with the various Programming and Machine Vision application in robots.
 To build confidence among students to evaluate, choose and incorporate robots in engineering
systems.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 9

Robot – Definition – Robot Anatomy – Co-ordinate systems, Work Envelope, types and classification
– specifications – Pitch, yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load – Robot Parts and
their functions – Need for Robots – Different Applications.
UNIT II ROBOT KINEMATICS 9

Forward kinematics, inverse kinematics and the difference: forward kinematics and inverse
Kinematics of Manipulators with two, three degrees of freedom (in 2 dimensional), four degrees of
freedom (in 3 dimensional) – derivations and problems. Homogeneous transformation matrices,
translation and rotation matrices.
UNIT III ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9

Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives – Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives – D.C. Servo Motors,
Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of All These
Drives. End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Grippers,
Magnetic grippers, vacuum grippers, internal grippers and external grippers, selection and design
considerations of a gripper
UNIT IV SENSORS IN ROBOTICS 9

Force sensors, touch and tactile sensors, proximity sensors, non-contact sensors, safety
considerations in robotic cell, proximity sensors, fail safe hazard sensor systems, and compliance
mechanism. Machine vision system - camera, frame grabber, sensing and digitizing image data –
signal conversion, image storage, lighting techniques, image processing and analysis – data
reduction, segmentation, feature extraction, object recognition, other algorithms, applications –
Inspection, identification, visual serving and navigation.
234
UNIT V PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS OF ROBOT 9
Teach pendant programming, lead through programming, robot programming languages – VAL
programming – Motion Commands, Sensors commands, End-Effector Commands, and simple
programs - Role of robots in inspection, assembly, material handling, underwater, space and medical
fields.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the features of robots and technology involved in the control.
CO2: Apply the basic engineering knowledge and laws for the design of robotics.
CO3: Explain the basic concepts like various configurations, classification and parts of end effectors
compare various end effectors and grippers and tools and sensors used in robots.
CO4: Explain the concept of kinematics, degeneracy, dexterity and trajectory planning.
CO5: Demonstrate the image processing and image analysis techniques by machine vision system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ganesh.S.Hedge,”A textbook of Industrial Robotics”, Lakshmi Publications, 2006.
2. Mikell.P.Groover , “Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and applications” McGraw Hill
2ND edition 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Fu K.S. Gonalz R.C. and ice C.S.G.”Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”, McGraw
Hill book co. 2007.
2. YoramKoren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw Hill Book, Co., 2002.
3. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill 2005.
4. John. J.Craig, “Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control” 2nd Edition, 2002.
5. Jazar, “Theory of Applied Robotics: Kinematics, Dynamics and Control”, Springer India reprint,
2010.
COs/POs&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO/PO &
PSO
Average
OAE352 FUNDAMENTALS OF AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire the knowledge on the Historical evaluation of Airplanes
 To learn the different component systems and functions
 To know the concepts of basic properties and principles behind the flight
 To learn the basics of different structures & construction
 To learn the various types of power plants used in aircrafts
235
UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8
Balloon flight-ornithopter-Early Airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes,
Developments in aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.
UNIT II AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS AND ITS CONTROLS 10

Different types of flight vehicles, classifications-Components of an airplane and their functions-
Conventional control, powered control- Basic instruments for flying-Typical systems for control
actuation.
UNIT III BASICS OF AERODYNAMICS 9

Physical Properties and structures of the Atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude
relationships, Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics-Evolution of lift, drag and moment.
Aerofoils, Mach number, Maneuvers.
UNIT IV BASICS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 9

General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, typical
wing and fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials. Use of Aluminium alloy, titanium,
stainless steel and composite materials. Stresses and strains-Hooke’s law- stress-strain diagrams-
elastic constants-Factor of Safety.
UNIT V BASICS OF PROPULSION 9

Basic ideas about piston, turboprop and jet engines – use of propeller and jets for thrust production-
Comparative merits, Principle of operation of rocket, types of rocket and typical
applications, Exploration into space.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Illustrate the history of aircraft & developments over the years
CO2 Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
CO3 Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
CO4 Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
CO5 Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition 2015
2. . E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John Wiley,
NJ, 2021
3. Stephen.A. Brandt, Introduction to aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd edition, AIAA Education
Series, 2004.
REFERENCE
1. SADHU SINGH, “INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINE”-, SS Kataraia &
sons, 2015
2. KERMODE , “FLIGHT WITHOUT FORMULAE”, -, Pitman; 4th Revised edition 1989
OGI351 REMOTE SENSING CONCEPTS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concepts of remote sensing processes and its components.
 To expose the various remote sensing platforms and sensors and to introduce the elements of
data interpretation
UNIT I REMOTE SENSING AND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION 9

Definition – components of RS – History of Remote Sensing – Merits and demerits of data
collation between conventional and remote sensing methods - Electromagnetic Spectrum –
Radiation principles - Wave theory, Planck‘s law, Wien’s Displacement Law, Stefan’s Boltzmann
law, Kirchoff‘s law – Radiation sources: active & passive - Radiation Quantities
236
UNIT II EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH MATERIAL 9
Standard atmospheric profile – main atmospheric regions and its characteristics – interaction of
radiation with atmosphere – Scattering, absorption and refraction – Atmospheric windows - Energy
balance equation – Specular and diffuse reflectors – Spectral reflectance & emittance –
Spectroradiometer – Spectral Signature concepts – Typical spectral reflectance curves for
vegetation, soil and water – solid surface scattering in microwave region.
UNIT III ORBITS AND PLATFORMS 9

Motions of planets and satellites – Newton‘s law of gravitation - Gravitational field and potential -
Escape velocity - Kepler‘s law of planetary motion - Orbit elements and types – Orbital perturbations
and maneuvers – Types of remote sensing platforms - Ground based, Airborne platforms and Space
borne platforms – Classification of satellites – Sun synchronous and Geosynchronous satellites –
Lagrange Orbit.
UNIT IV SENSING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification of remote sensors – Resolution concept : spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal
resolutions - Scanners - Along and across track scanners – Optical-infrared sensors – Thermal
sensors – microwave sensors – Calibration of sensors - High Resolution Sensors - LIDAR , UAV –
Orbital and sensor characteristics of live Indian earth observation satellites
UNIT V DATA PRODUCTS AND INTERPRETATION 9

Photographic and digital products – Types, levels and open source satellite data products –-
selection and procurement of data– Visual interpretation: basic elements and interpretation keys -
Digital interpretation – Concepts of Image rectification, Image enhancement and Image classification
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the concepts and laws related to remote sensing
CO2 Understand the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with atmosphere and earth material
CO3 Acquire knowledge about satellite orbits and different types of satellites
CO4 Understand the different types of remote sensors
CO5 Gain knowledge about the concepts of interpretation of satellite imagery
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas M.Lillesand, Ralph W. Kiefer and Jonathan W. Chipman, Remote Sensing and
Image interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York,2015.
2. George Joseph and C Jeganathan, Fundamentals of Remote Sensing,Third Edition
Universities Press (India) Private limited, Hyderabad, 2018
REFERENCES:
1. Janza, F.Z., Blue H.M. and Johnson,J.E. Manual of Remote Sensing. Vol.1, American Society
of Photogrametry, Virginia, USA, 2002.
2. Verbyla, David, Satellite Remote Sensing of Natural Resources. CRC Press, 1995
3. Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing. Longman, RLBS, 1988.
4. Introduction to Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing , Charles Elachi and Jacob Van
Zyl, 2006 Edition II, Wiley Publication.
5. Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Oxford University Press, 2011

Course Outcome Average
Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3
3 3
Problems
237
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO8 Ethics
PO9 Individual and Team Work
PO10 Communication
PO12 Life-long Learning 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3
Design solutions
OAI351 URBAN AGRICULTURE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students the principles of agricultural crop production and the production
practices of crops in modern ways.
 To delineate the role of agricultural engineers in relation to various crop production practices.
Benefits of urban agriculture- economic benefits, environmental benefits, social and cultural benefits,
educational, skill-building and job training benefits, health, nutrition and food accessibility benefits.
UNIT II VERTICAL FARMING 9
Vertical farming- types, green facade, living/green wall-modular green wall , vegetated mat wall-
Structures and components for green wall system: plant selection, growing media, irrigation and
plant nutrition: Design, light, benefits of vertical gardening. Roof garden and its types. Kitchen
garden, hanging baskets: The house plants/ indoor plants
UNIT III SOIL LESS CULTIVATION 9
Hydroponics, aeroponics, aquaponics: merits and limitations, costs and Challenges, backyard
gardens- tactical gardens- street landscaping- forest gardening, greenhouses, urban beekeeping
UNIT IV MODERN CONCEPTS 9
Growth of plants in vertical pipes in terraces and inside buildings, micro irrigation concepts suitable
for roof top gardening, rain hose system, Green house, polyhouse and shade net system of crop
production on roof tops
UNIT V WASTE MANAGEMENT 9

Concept, scope and maintenance of waste management- recycle of organic waste, garden wastes-
solid waste management-scope, microbiology of waste, other ingredients like insecticide, pesticides
and fungicides residues, waste utilization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Demonstrate the principles behind crop production and various parameters that influences
the crop growth on roof tops
CO2 Explain different methods of crop production on roof tops
CO3 Explain nutrient and pest management for crop production on roof tops
CO4 Illustrate crop water requirement and irrigation water management on roof tops
CO5 Explain the concept of waste management on roof tops
238
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Martellozzo F and J S Landry. 2020. Urban Agriculture. Scitus Academics Llc.
2. Rob Roggema. 2016. Sustainable Urban Agriculture and Food Planning. Routledge Taylor and
Francis Group.
3. Akrong M O. 2012. Urban Agriculture. LAP Lambert Academic Publishing.
REFERENCES:
1. Agha Rokh A. 2008. Evaluation of ornamental flowers and fishes breeding in Bushehr urban
wastewater using a pilot-scale aquaponic system. Water and Wastewater, 19 (65): 47–53.
2. Agrawal M, Singh B, Rajput M, Marshall F and Bell J. N. B. 2003. Effect of air pollution on peri-
urban agriculture: A case study. Environmental Pollution, 126 (3): 323–329.
https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0269749103002458#aep-section-id24.
3. Jac Smit and Joe Nasr. 1992. Urban agriculture for sustainable cities: using wastes and idle land
and water bodies as resources. Environment and Urbanization, 4 (2):141-152.
Overall
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 correlation of
COs with POs
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 2 1 1 3 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex
1 1 2 2 1 1
Problems
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 3 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving
1 2 1 1 2 1
approach in agriculture with proper
knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 2 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity
using modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 2 1 2
linkage.
OEN351 DRINKING WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To equip the students with the principles and design of water treatment units and
distribution system.
UNIT I SOURCES OF WATER 9
Public water supply system – Planning, Objectives, Design period, Population forecasting; Water
demand – Sources of water and their characteristics, Surface and Groundwater – Impounding
Reservoir – Development and selection of source – Source Water quality – Characterization –
Significance – Drinking Water quality standards.
239
UNIT II CONVEYANCE FROM THE SOURCE 9
Water supply – intake structures – Functions; Pipes and conduits for water – Pipe materials –
Hydraulics of flow in pipes – Transmission main design – Laying, jointing and testing of pipes –
appurtenances – Types and capacity of pumps – Selection of pumps and pipe materials.
UNIT III WATER TREATMENT 9

Objectives – Unit operations and processes – Principles, functions, and design of water treatment
plant units, aerators of flash mixers, Coagulation and flocculation –- sand filters - Disinfection -–
Construction, Operation and Maintenance aspects.
UNIT IV ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9

Water softening – Desalination- R.O. Plant – demineralization – Adsorption - Ion exchange–
Membrane Systems - Iron and Manganese removal - Defluoridation - Construction and Operation
and Maintenance aspects
UNIT V WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY 9

Requirements of water distribution – Components – Selection of pipe material – Service reservoirs -
Functions – Network design – Economics - Computer applications – Appurtenances – Leak detection
- Principles of design of water supply in buildings – House service connection – Fixtures and
fittings, systems of plumbing and types of plumbing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: an understanding of water quality criteria and standards, and their relation to public health
CO2: the ability to design the water conveyance system
CO3: the knowledge in various unit operations and processes in water treatment
CO4: an ability to understand the various systems for advanced water treatment
CO5: an insight into the structure of drinking water distribution system
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Garg. S.K., "Water Supply Engineering", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, September 2008.
2. Punmia B.C, Arun K.Jain, Ashok K.Jain, “ Water supply Engineering” Lakshmi publication private
limited, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Rangwala "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", February 2022
4. Birdie.G.S., "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", Dhanpat Rai and sons, 2018.
REFERENCES :
1. Fair. G.M., Geyer.J.C., "Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal", John Wiley and Sons, 1954.
2. Babbit.H.E, and Donald.J.J, "Water Supply Engineering" , McGraw Hill book Co, 1984.
3. Steel. E.W.et al., "Water Supply Engineering" , Mc Graw Hill International book Co, 1984.
4. Duggal. K.N., “Elememts of public Health Engineering”, S.Chand and Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 1998.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3
2 3 2 2 3 3
3 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 1 2 3 1
Avg. 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3

240
OEE352 ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To provide knowledge about electric machines and special machine
 To understand the basics of power converters
 To know the concepts of controlling DC and AC drive systems
 To understand the architecture and power train components.
 To impart knowledge on vehicle control for standard drive cycles of hybrid electrical vehicles
(HEVs)
UNIT I ROTATING POWER CONVERTERS 9

Magnetic circuits- DC machine and AC machine –Working principle of Generator and Motor-DC and
AC - Voltage and torque equations – Characteristics and applications. Working principle of special
machines like: Brushless DC motor, Switched reluctance motor and PMSM.
UNIT II STATIC POWER CONVERTERS 9

Working and Characteristics of Power Diodes, MOSFET and IGBT. Working of uncontrolled
rectifiers, controlled rectifiers (Single phase and Three phase), DC choppers, single and three phase
inverters, Multilevel inverters and Matrix Converters.
UNIT III CONTROL OF DC AND AC MOTOR DRIVES 9

Speed control for constant torque, constant HP operation of all electric motors - DC/DC chopper
based four quadrant operation of DC motor drives, inverter based V/f Operation (motoring and
braking) of induction motor drives, Transformation theory, vector control operation of Induction motor
and PMSM, Brushless DC motor drives, Switched reluctance motor (SRM) drives
UNIT IV HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE ARCHITECTURE AND POWER TRAIN

COMPONENTS 9
History of evolution of Electric Vehicles - Comparison of Electric Vehicles with Internal Combustion
Engines - Architecture of Electric Vehicles (EV) and Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV) – Plug-in Hybrid
Electric Vehicles (PHEV)- Power train components and sizing, Gears, Clutches, Transmission and
Brakes.
UNIT V MECHANICS OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND CONTROL OF

VEHICLES 9
Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics - tractive force, power and energy requirements for standard
drive cycles of HEV's - motor torque and power rating and battery capacity. HEV supervisory control
- Selection of modes - power spilt mode - parallel mode - engine brake mode - regeneration mode -
series parallel mode
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Able to understand the principles of conventional and special electrical machines.
CO2: Acquired the concepts of power devices and power converters
CO3: Able to understand the control for DC and AC drive systems.
CO4: Learned the electric vehicle architecture and power train components.
CO5: Acquired the knowledge of mechanics of electric vehicles and control of electric
vehicles.
REFERENCES:
1 Stephen D. Umans, “Fitzgerald & Kingsley’s Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7th Edition,
2020.
2 Bogdan M. Wilamowski, J. David Irwin, The Industrial Electronics Handbook, Second Edition,
Power Electronics and Motor Drives, CRC Press, 2011
3 Paul C. Krause, Oleg Wasynczuk, Scott D. Sudhoff, Steven D. Pekarek “Analysis of Electric
Machinery and Drive Systems”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2013.
4 Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Pearson, fourth Edition,
10th Impression 2021.
241
5 Iqbal Husain, ‘Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles’, CRC Press, 2021.
6 Wei Liu, ‘Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control’, Second Edition, WILEY, 2017
7 James Larminie and John Lowry, ‘Electric Vehicle Technology Explained’, Second Edition,
Wiley, 2012

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 3
OEI353 INTRODUCTION TO PLC PROGRAMMING LT P C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand basic PLC terminologies digital principles, PLC architecture and operation.
 Familiarize different programming language of PLC.
 Develop PLC logic for simple applications using ladder logic.
 Understand the hardware and software behind PLC and SCADA.
 Exposures about communication architecture of PLC/SCADA.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLC 9

Introduction to PLC: Microprocessor, I/O Ports, Isolation, Filters, Drivers, Microcontrollers/DSP,
PLC/DDC- PLC Construction: What is a PLC, PLC Memories, PLC I/O, , PLC Special I/O, PLC
Types.
UNIT II PLC INSTRUCTIONS 9

PLC Basic Instructions: PLC Ladder Language- Function block Programming- Ladder/Function
Block functions- PLC Basic Instructions, Basic Examples (Start Stop Rung, Entry/Reset Rung)-
Configuration of Sensors, Switches, Solid State Relays-Interlock examples- Timers, Counters,
Examples.
UNIT III PLC PROGRAMMING 9

Different types of PLC program, Basic Ladder logic, logic functions, PLC module addressing,
registers basics, basic relay instructions, Latching Relays, arithmetic functions, comparison
functions, data handling, data move functions, timer-counter instructions, input-output instructions,
sequencer instructions
UNIT IV COMMUNICATION OF PLC AND SCADA 9

Communication Protocol – Modbus, HART, Profibus- Communication facilities SCADA: - Hardware
and software, Remote terminal units, Master Station and Communication architectures

Stepper Motor Control- Elevator Control-CNC Machine Control- conveyor control-Interlocking
Problems
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
242
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Communication Network Used for PLC/SCADA.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Know the basic requirement of a PLC input/output devices and architecture. (L1)
CO2 Ability to apply Basics Instruction Sets used for ladder Logic and Function Block
Programming.(L2)
CO3 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO4 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
CO5 Ability to Understand the Concepts of Communication used for PLC/SCADA.(L1)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Petruzzula, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Edition
2. John W. Webb, Ronald A. Reis, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Applications, PHI
publication
REFERENCES:
1. MadhuchanndMitra and SamerjitSengupta, Programmable Logic Controllers Industrial
Automation an Introduction, Penram International Publishing Pvt. Ltd.
2. J. R. Hackworth and F. D. Hackworth, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles
andApplications, Pearson publication
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
2. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/
3. https://www.etf.ues.rs.ba/~slubura/Procesni%20racunari/Programmable%20Logic%20Controller
s%20Programming%20Methods.pdf

PO,
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PSO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.9 2.25 2.6 1.6 1 1 3 3 2.9
OCH351 NANO TECHNOLOGY LT PC

3 0 03
General definition and size effects–important nano structured materials and nano particles-
importance of nano materials- Size effect on thermal, electrical, electronic, mechanical, optical and
magnetic properties of nanomaterials- surface area - band gap energy and applications.
Photochemistry and Electrochemistry of nanomaterials –Ionic properties of nanomaterials- Nano
catalysis.
243
UNIT II SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 8
Bottom up and Top-down approach for obtaining nano materials - Precipitation methods – sol gel
technique – high energy ball milling, CVD and PVD methods, gas phase condensation, magnetron
sputtering and laser deposition methods – laser ablation, sputtering.
UNIT III NANO COMPOSITES 10

Definition- importance of nanocomposites- nano composite materials-classification of composites-
metal/metal oxides, metal-polymer- thermoplastic based, thermoset based and elastomer based-
influence of size, shape and role of interface in composites applications.
UNIT IV NANO STRUCTURES AND CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 10

Classifications of nanomaterials - Zero dimensional, one-dimensional and two-dimensional
nanostructures- Kinetics in nanostructured materials- multilayer thin films and superlattice- clusters
of metals, semiconductors and nanocomposites. Spectroscopic techniques, Diffraction methods,
thermal analysis method, BET analysis method.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANO MATERIALS 9

Overview of nanomaterials properties and their applications, nano painting, nano coating,
nanomaterials for renewable energy, Molecular Electronics and Nanoelectronics – Nanobots-
Biological Applications. Emerging technologies for environmental applications- Practice of
nanoparticles for environmental remediation and water treatment.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 understand the basic properties such as structural, physical, chemical properties of
nanomaterials and their applications.
CO2 able to acquire knowledge about the different types of nano material synthesis
CO3 describes about the shape, size,structure of composite nano materials and their
interference
CO4 understand the different characterization techniques for nanomaterials
CO5 develop a deeper knowledge in the application of nanomaterials in different fields.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara,Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmom, Burkhard Raguse, “ Nano
Technology: Basic Science & Engineering Technology”, 2005, Overseas Press
2. G. Cao, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties &Applications” Imperial College
Press, 2004
3. William A Goddard “Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology”, 3rd Edition, CRC
Taylor and Francis group 2012.
REFERENCES
1. R.H.J.Hannink & A.J.Hill, Nanostructure Control, Wood Head Publishing Ltd.,Cambridge, 2006.
2. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Applications Vol. I & II, 2nd edition, 2005, Wiley VCH Verlag Gibtl & Co
3. Ivor Brodie and Julius J.Muray,’The physics of Micro/Nano – Fabrication’,Springer International
Edition,2010
Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
understand the basic
properties such as
structural, physical,
CO1 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
chemical properties of
nanomaterials and
their applications
244
acquire knowledge
about the different
CO2 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
types of nano material
synthesis
describes about the
shape, size,structure
CO3 of composite nano 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
materials and their
interference
understand the
different
CO4 characterization 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
techniques for
nanomaterials
develop a deeper
knowledge in the
3
CO5 application of 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1
nanomaterials in
different fields
Overall CO 3 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
OCH352 FUNCTIONAL MATERIALS LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The course emphasis on the molecular safe assembly and materials for polymer electronics
Historical Perspectives, Lessons from the Nature, Engineering the Functions, Tuning the functions,
Multiscale Modeling and Computation, Classification of Functional Materials, Functional Diversity of
Materials, Hybrid Materials, Technological Relevance, Societal Impact.
UNIT II MOLECULAR SELF ASSEMBLY 9

Molecular Organization, Self-Assembly in Biology, Energetics of Self-Organization, A Few Case
Studies, Synthetic Protocols and Challenges, Solvent-assisted Self-Assembly, Directed Assembly-
Langmuir-Blodgett and Langmuir-Schaefer techniques, Technological Applications of SAMs.
UNIT III BIO-INSPIRED MATERIALS 9

Bio-inspired materials, Classification, Biomimicry, Spider Silk, Lotus Leaf, Gecko feet, Synovial fluid,
‘Bionics’-Bio-inspired Information Technologies, Artificial Sensory Organs, Biomineralization- En
route to Nanotechnology.
UNIT IV SMART OR INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 9

Criteria for Smartness, Significance of Smart Materials, Representative Examples like Smart Gels
and Polymers, Electro/Magneto Rheological Fluids, Smart Electroceramics, Technical Limitations
and Challenges, Functional Nanocomposites, Polymer-carbon nanotube composities.
UNIT V MATERIALS FOR POLYMER ELECTRONICS 9

Polymers for Electronics, Organic Light Emitting Diodes, Working Principle of OLEDs, Illustrated
Examples, Organic Field-Effect Transistors Operating Principle, Design Considerations, Polymer
FETs vs Inorganic FETs, Liquid Crystal Displays, Engineering Aspects of Flat Panel Displays,
Intelligent Polymers for Data Storage, Polymer-based Data Storage-Principle, Magnetic Vs.
Polymer-based Data Storage.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
245
COURSE OUTCOME:
 Students will be able to differentiate among various functional properties and select
appropriate material for certain functional applications, analyze the nature and potential of
functional material.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Vijayamohanan K. Pillai and MeeraParthasarathy, “Functional Materials: A chemist’s
perpective”, Universities Press Hyderabad (2012).
REFERENCE:
1. Stephen Manne “Biomimetic Materials Chemistry” Wiley-VCH Newyork, 1966.
OFD352 TRADITIONAL INDIAN FOODS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To help students acquire a sound knowledge on diversities of foods, food habits and patterns
in India with focus on traditional foods.
UNIT I HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES 9
Food production and accessibility - subsistence foraging, horticulture, agriculture and
pastoralization, origin of agriculture, earliest crops grown. Food as source of physical sustenance,
food as religious and cultural symbols; importance of food in understanding human culture -
variability, diversity, from basic ingredients to food preparation; impact of customs and traditions on
food habits, heterogeneity within cultures (social groups) and specific social contexts - festive
occasions, specific religious festivals, mourning etc. Kosher, Halal foods; foods for religious and
other fasts.
UNIT II TRADITIONAL METHODS OF FOOD PROCESSING 9

Traditional methods of milling grains – rice, wheat and corn – equipments and processes as
compared to modern methods. Equipments and processes for edible oil extraction, paneer, butter
and ghee manufacture – comparison of traditional and modern methods. Energy costs, efficiency,
yield, shelf life and nutrient content comparisons. Traditional methods of food preservation –
sundrying, osmotic drying, brining, pickling and smoking.
UNIT III TRADITIONAL FOOD PATTERNS 9
Typical breakfast, meal and snack foods of different regions of India.Regional foods that have gone
Pan Indian / Global. Popular regional foods; Traditional fermented foods,pickles and preserves,
beverages, snacks, desserts and sweets, street foods; IPR issues in traditional foods
UNIT IV COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION OF TRADITIONAL FOODS 9

Commercial production of traditional breads, snacks, ready-to-eat foods and instant mixes, frozen
foods – types marketed, turnover; role of SHGs, SMES industries, national and multinational
companies; commercial production and packaging of traditional beverages such as tender coconut
water, neera, lassi, buttermilk, dahi. Commercial production of intermediate foods – ginger and garlic
pastes, tamarind pastes, masalas (spice mixes), idli and dosa batters.
UNIT V HEALTH ASPECTS OF TRADIONAL FOODS 9
Comparison of traditional foods with typical fast foods / junk foods – cost, food safety, nutrient
composition, bioactive components; energy and environmental costs of traditional foods; traditional
foods used for specific ailments /illnesses.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1To understand the historical and traditional perspective of foods and food habits
CO2 To understand the wide diversity and common features of traditional Indian foods and meal
patterns.
246
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sen, Colleen Taylor “Food Culture in India” Greenwood Press, 2005.
2. Davidar, Ruth N. “Indian Food Science: A Health and Nutrition Guide to Traditional Recipes: East
West Books, 2001.
OFD353 INTRODUCTION TO FOOD PROCESSING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The course aims to introduce the students to the area of Food Processing. This is necessary for
effective understanding of a detailed study of food processing and technology subjects. This course
will enable students to appreciate the importance of food processing with respect to the producer,
manufacturer and consumer.
UNIT I PROCESSING OF FOOD AND ITS IMPORTANCE 9

Source of food - plant, animal and microbial origin; different foods and groups of foods as raw
materials for processing – cereals, pulses, grains, vegetables and fruits, milk and animal foods, sea
weeds, algae, oil seeds & fats, sugars, tea, coffee, cocoa, spices and condiments, additives; need
and significance of processing these foods.
UNIT II METHODS OF FOOD HANDLING AND STORAGE 9

Nature of harvested crop, plant and animal; storage of raw materials and products using low
temperature, refrigerated gas storage of foods, gas packed refrigerated foods, sub atmospheric
storage, Gas atmospheric storage of meat, grains, seeds and flour, roots and tubers; freezing of raw
and processed foods.
UNIT III LARGE-SCALE FOOD PROCESSING 12

Milling of grains and pulses; edible oil extraction; Pasteurisation of milk and yoghurt; canning and
bottling of foods; drying – Traditional and modern methods of drying, Dehydration of fruits,
vegetables, milk, animal products etc; preservation by use of acid, sugar and salt; Pickling and curing
with microorganisms, use of salt, and microbial fermentation; frying, baking, extrusion cooking, snack
foods.
UNIT IV FOOD WASTES IN VARIOUS PROCESSES 6

Waste disposal-solid and liquid waste; rodent and insect control; use of pesticides; ETP; selecting
and installing necessary equipment.
UNIT V FOOD HYGIENE 9

Food related hazards – Biological hazards – physical hazards – microbiological considerations in
foods. Food adulteration – definition, common food adulterants, contamination with toxic metals,
pesticides and insecticides; Safety in food procurement, storage handling and preparation;
Relationship of microbes to sanitation, Public health hazards due to contaminated water and food;
Personnel hygiene; Training& Education for safe methods of handling and processing food;
sterilization and disinfection of manufacturing plant; use of sanitizers, detergents, heat, chemicals,
Cleaning of equipment and premises.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course the students are expected to
CO1 Be aware of the different methods applied to processing foods.
CO2 Be able to understand the significance of food processing and the role of foodand beverage
industries in the supply of foods.
247
TEXT BOOKS/REFERENCES:
1. Karnal, Marcus and D.B. Lund “Physical Principles of Food Preservation”. Rutledge, 2003.
2. VanGarde, S.J. and Woodburn. M “Food Preservation and Safety Principles and Practice”.Surbhi
Publications, 2001.
3. Sivasankar, B. “Food Processing & Preservation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
4. Khetarpaul, Neelam, “Food Processing and Preservation”, Daya Publications, 2005.
OPY352 IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the basic fundamental knowledge of different forms of Intellectual Property
Rights in national and international level.
 To provide the significance of the Intellectual Property Rights about the patents, copyrights,
industrial design, plant and geographical indications.
 This paper is to study significance of the amended patent act on pharma industry.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION- INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 9

Introduction, Types of Intellectual Property Rights -patents, plant varieties protection, geographical
indicators, copyright, trademark, trade secrets.
UNIT II PATENTS 9
Patents-Objective, Introduction, Requirement for patenting- Novelty, Inventive step (Non-
obviousness) and industrial application (utility), Non-patentable inventions, rights of patent owner,
assignment of patent rights, patent specification (provisional and complete), parts of complete
specification, claims, procedure for obtaining patents, compulsory license.
UNIT III PLANT VARIETY-TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE –GEOGRAPHICAL

INDICATIONS 9
Plant variety- Justification, criteria for protection of plant variety and protection in India. Traditional
knowledge- Concept of traditional knowledge, protection of traditional knowledge under Intellectual
Property frame works in national level and Traditional knowledge digital library (TKDL). Geographical
Indications – Justification for protection, National and International position.
UNIT IV ENFORCEMENT AND PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF IPR 9

Introduction – civil remedies – injunction, damage, account of profit – criminal remedies – patent,
trademark. Practical aspects – Introduction, benefits of licensing, licensing of basic types of IPR,
licensing clauses of IPR. Case studies of patent infringement, compulsory licensing, simple patent
license agreements.
UNIT V INTERNATIONAL BACKGROUND OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9

International Background of Intellectual Property- Paris Convention, Berne convention, World Trade
Organization (WTO), World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), Trade Related Aspects of
Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) and Patent Co-operation Treaty (PCT).
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N. Nagpal, M. Arora, M.R.D. Usman, S. Rahar, “Intellectual Property Rights” Edu creation
Publishing, New Delhi, 2017.
2. The Patents Act, 1970 (Bare Act with Short Notes) (New Delhi: Universal Law Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. 2012.
3. B.S. Rao, P.V. Appaji, “Intellectual Property Rights in Pharmaceutical Industry: Theory and
Practice”, 2015.
248
REFERENCES:
1. Patents for Chemicals, Pharmaceuticals, & Biotechnology-Fundamentals of Global Law, Practice
and Strategy. Philip W. Grubb, Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. Basic Principles of patent law – Basics principles and acquisition of IPR. Ramakrishna T. CIPRA,
NLSIU, Bangalore, 2005
3. S. Lakshmana Prabu, TNK. Suriyaprakash, “Intellectual Property Rights”, 1st ed., In Tech open
access, Croatia, 2017.
COURSE OUTCOMES
The student will be able to
CO1 Understand and differentiate the categories of intellectual property rights.
CO2 Describe about patents and procedure for obtaining patents.
CO3 Distinguish plant variety, traditional knowledge and geographical indications under IPR.
CO4 Provide the information about the different enforcements and practical aspects involved in
protection of IPR.
CO5 Provide different organizations role and responsibilities in the protection of IPR in the
international level.
CO6 Understand the interrelationships between different Intellectual Property Rights on
International Society
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
C1 3 3 2 2 2
C2 3 3 2 2
C3 3 3 2 2 1
C4 2 3 3 2 2
C5 3 3 2 1
C6 3 2 2 2 2
OTT351 BASICS OF TEXTILE FINISHING LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics and different types of finishes required for
textile materials and machines used for finishing.
UNIT I RESIN FINISHING 9

Importance of finishing and its classification. Resin finishing: Mechanism of creasing, Types of
Resins .Anti crease, wash and wear, durable press resin finishing. Study about eco friendly method
of anti crease finishing.
UNIT II FLAME PROOF & WATERPROOF 9

Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy. Flame retardant finishes for cotton, Concept of
waterproof and water repellent Finishes, Durable & Semi durable and Temporary finishes, Concept
of Antimicrobial finish.
UNIT III SOIL RELEASE AND ANTISTATIC FINISHES 9

Soil Release Finishing: Mechanism of soil retention & soil release. Anti pilling Finishing: chemical
and mechanical methods to produce anti pilling. Concept of UV Protection finishes- Concept of
antistatic finishes.
249
UNIT IV MECHANICAL FINISHES 9
Mechanical finishing of textile materials - calendaring, compacting, Sanforising, Peach finishing.
Object of Heat setting. Various methods of heat setting and mechanism of heat setting.
UNIT V STIFFENING AND SOFTENING 9

Concept of stiffening and softening of textile materials. Mechanism in the weight reduction of PET
.Concept of Micro encapsulation techniques in finishing process, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment and
Bio finishing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO1 Basics of Resin Finishing Process.
CO2 Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy, waterproof and water repellent, Antimicrobial
finishes.
CO3 Concept of Soil Release, Anti Pilling, UV Protection and Antistatic finishes.
CO4 Concept of Mechanical finishing.
CO5 Basics of Micro encapsulation techniques, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.A.Shennai, "Technology of Finishing", Vol X, Sevak Publications, Mumbai
2. Perkins, W.S., “Textile colouration and finishing”, Carolina Academic Press., U.K, ISBN:
0890898855.2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Microencapsulation in finishing, Review of progress of Colouration, SDC, 2001 62
2. Chakraborty, J.N, Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles, Woodhead Publishing
India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3
3. W. D. Schindler and P. J. Hauser "Chemical finishing of textiles", Woodhead Publishing
Cambridge England,2004.
OTT352 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING FOR GARMENT INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn about basics of industrial engineering and different tools of
industrial engineering and its application in apparel industry
Scope of industrial engineering in apparel Industry, role of industrial engineers.
Productivity: Definition - Productivity, Productivity measures .Reduction of work content due to
the product and process, Reduction of ineffective time due to the management, due to the worker.
Causes for low productivity in apparel industry and measures for improvement.
UNIT II WORK STUDY 9
Definition, Purpose, Basic procedure and techniques of work-study.
Work environment – Lighting, Ventilation, Climatic condition on productivity.
Temperature control, humidity control, noise control measures. Safety and ergonomics on
work station and work environment
Material Handling – Objectives, Classification and characteristics of material handling
equipments, Specialized material handling equipments.
UNIT III METHOD STUDY 9
Definition, Objectives, Procedure, Process charts and symbols. Various charts – Charts
indicating process sequence: Outline process chart, flow process chart (man type, material type
and equipment type); Charts using time scale – multiple activity chart. Diagrams indicating movement
– flow diagram, string diagram, cycle graph, chrono cycle graph, travel chart
250
MOTION STUDY: Principle of motion economy, Two handed process chart, micro motion analysis
– therbligs, SIMO chart.
UNIT IV WORK MEASUREMENT 9
Definition, purpose, procedure, equipments, techniques. Time study - Definition, basics of
time study- equipments. Time study forms, Stop watch procedure. Predetermined motion time
standards (PMTS). Time Study rating, calculation of standard time, Performance rating – relaxation
and other allowances. Calculation of SAM for different garments, GSD.
UNIT V WORK STUDY APPLICATION 9

Application of work study techniques in cutting, stitching and packing in garment industry. Workaids
in sewing, Pitch diagram, Line balancing, Capacity planning, scientific method of training.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course the student shall be able to understand
CO1: Fundamental concepts of industrial Engineering and productivity
CO2: Method study
CO3: Motion analysis
CO4: Work measurement and SAM
CO5: Ergonomics and its application to garment industry
TEXTBOOKS:
1. George Kanwaty, “Introduction to Work Study “, ILO, Geneva, 1996, ISBN: 9221071081 |ISBN-
13: 9789221071082
2. Enrick N. L., “Time study manual for Textile industry”, Wiley Eastern (P) Ltd., 1989, ISBN:
0898740444 | ISBN-13: 9780898740448
3. Khanna O. P., and Sarup A., “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai
Publications, New Delhi, 2010, ISBN: 818992835X / ISBN: 978-8189928353
REFERENCES
1. Norberd Lloyd Enrick., “Industrial Engineering Manual for Textile Industry”, Wiley Eastern (P) Ltd.,
New Delhi, 1988, ISBN: 0882756311 | ISBN-13: 9780882756318
2. Chuter A. J., “Introduction to Clothing Production Management”, Wiley-Black well Science, U.S.
A., 1995, ISBN: 0632039396 | ISBN-13: 9780632039395
3. GordanaColovic., “Ergonomics in the garment industry”, Wood publishing India Pvt. Ltd., India,
2014, ISBN: 0857098225 | ISBN-13: 9780857098221
4. Rajesh Bheda, “Managing Productivity in Apparel Industry “CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2008
Course Program Outcome

Outcom Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO’ PO’ PO PO’ PO PO PO PS PS PS
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9' 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 Fundamental
concepts of
industrial 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
Engineering and
productivity
CO2 Method study 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO3 Motion analysis 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO4 Work
measurement 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
and SAM
CO5 Ergonomics and
itsapplication to 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
garment industry
Overall CO 1.2 2 3 3 2 1 1.2 2 2 1 2.4 2 1 1 -
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial
(High) respectively
251
OTT353 BASICS OF TEXTILE MANUFACTURE LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about the basics of fibre forming, yarn production, fabric
formation, coloration of fabrics and garment manufacturing
UNIT I NATURAL FIBRES 9

Introduction: Definition of staple fibre, filament; Classification of natural and man-made fibres,
essential and desirable properties of fibres. Production and cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cultivation
of cotton, production of silk (sericulture), wool and jute – physical and chemical structure of these
fibres..
UNIT II REGENERATED AND SYNTHETIC FIBRES 9

Production sequence of regenerated and modified cellulosic fibres: viscose rayon, Acetate Rayon,
high wet modulus and high tenacity fibres; synthetic fibres – chemical structure, fibre forming
polymers, production principles.
UNIT III BASICS OF SPINNING 9

Spinning – principle of yarn formation, sequence of machines for yarn production with short staple
fibres and blends, principles of opening and cleaning machines; yarn numbering - calculations
UNIT IV BASICS OF WEAVING 9

Woven fabric – warp, weft, weaving, path of warp; looms – classification, handloom and its parts,
powerloom, automatic looms, shuttleless looms, special type of looms; preparatory machines for
weaving process and their objectives; basic weaving mechanism - primary, secondary and auxiliary
mechanisms,
UNIT V BASICS OF KNITTING AND NONWOVEN 9

Knitting – classification, principle, types of fabrics; nonwoven process –classification, principle, types
of fabrics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students shall have the basic knowledge on
CO1: Classification of fibres and production of natural fibres
CO2: Regenerated and synthetic fibres
CO3: Yarn spinning
CO4: Weaving
CO5: Knitting and nonwoven
TEXTBOOKS
1. Mishra S. P. , “A Text Book of Fibre Science and Technology”, New Age Publishers, 2000, ISBN:
8122412505
2. Marks R., and Robinson. T.C., “Principles of Weaving”, The Textile Institute, Manchester, 1989,
ISBN: 0 900739 258.
3. Spencer D.J., “Knitting Technology”, III Ed., Textile Institute, Manchester, 2001, ISBN: 185573
333 1.
REFERENCES:
1. Hornberer M., Eberle H., Kilgus R., Ring W. and Hermeling H., “Clothing Technology: From Fibre
to Fabric”, Europa LehrmittelVerlag, 2008, ISBN: 3808562250 / ISBN: 978-3808562253.
2. Wynne A., “Motivate Series-Textiles”, Maxmillan Publications, London, 1997.
3. Carr H. and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture” Backwell Science, U.K., 1994,
ISBN: 0632037482 / ISBN:13: 9780632037483.Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.1”,
Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur, 2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-1-4 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-
1-0.
252
4. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.2”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur, 2014,
ISBN 10 3-9523173-2-2 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-2-7.
5. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.1-3”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur, 2014,
ISBN 10 3-9523173-3-0 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-3-4.
6. Talukdar. M.K., Sriramulu. P.K., and Ajgaonkar. D.B., “Weaving: Machines, Mechanisms,
Management”, Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad, 1998, ISBN: 81-85401-16-0.
7. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile Institute,
Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
8. Gohl E. P. G., “Textile Science”, CBS Publishers and distributors, 1987, ISBN 0582685958

Outcom Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO’ PO’ PO PO’ PO PO PO PS PS PS
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O 2 O3
CO1 Classification of fibres - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
and production of
natural fibres
CO2 Regenerated and - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
synthetic fibres
CO3 Yarn spinning - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO4 Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO5 Knitting and nonwoven - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
Overall CO - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial
(High) respectively
OPE351 INTRODUCTION TO PETROLEUM REFINING AND PETROCHEMICALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to
 Gain knowledge about petroleum refining process and production of petrochemical products.
UNIT I ORIGIN, FORMATION AND REFINING OF CRUDE OIL 9

Origin, Formation and Evaluation of Crude Oil. Testing of Petroleum Products. Refining of Petroleum
- Atmospheric and Vacuum Distillation.
UNIT II CRACKING 9
Cracking, Thermal Cracking, Vis-breaking, Catalytic Cracking (FCC), Hydro Cracking, Coking and
Air Blowing of Bitumen
UNIT III REFORMING AND HYDROTREATING 9

Catalytic Reforming of Petroleum Feed Stocks. Lube oil processing- Solvent Treatment Processes,
Dewaxing, Clay Treatment and Hydrofining. Treatment Techniques: Removal of Sulphur
Compounds in all Petroleum Fractions to improve performance.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO PETROCHEMICALS 9

Petrochemicals - Cracking of Naphtha and Feed stock gas for the production of Ethylene, Propylen
e, Isobutylene and Butadiene. Production of Acetylene from Methane, and Extraction of Aromatics.
253
UNIT V PRODUCTION OF PETROCHEMICALS 9
Production of Petrochemicals like Dimethyl Terephathalate(DMT), Ethylene Glycol, Synthetic
glycerine, Linear Alkyl Benzene (LAB), Acrylonitrile, Methyl Methacrylate (MMA), Vinyl Acetate
Monomer, Phthalic Anhydride, Maleic Anhydride, Phenol, Acetone, Methanol, Formaldehyde,
Acetaldehyde, Pentaerythritol and production of Carbon Black.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand the classification, composition and testing methods of crude petroleum and its
products. Learn the mechanism of refining process.
CO2: Understand the insights of primary treatment processes to produce the precursors.
CO3: Study the secondary treatment processes cracking, vis-breaking and coking to produce more
petroleum products.
CO4: Appreciate the need of treatment techniques for the removal of sulphur and other impurities
from petroleum products.
CO5: Understand the societal impact of petrochemicals and learn their manufacturing processes.
CO6: Learn the importance of optimization of process parameters for the high yield of petroleum
products.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Nelson, W. L., “Petroleum Refinery Engineering”, 4th Edition., McGraw Hill, New York,1985.
2. Wiseman. P., "Petrochemicals", UMIST Series in Science and Technology, John Wiley &
Sons,1986.
REFERENCES
1. Bhaskara Rao, B. K., “Modern Petroleum Refining Processes”, 2nd Edition, Oxford and
IBH Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990.
2. Bhaskara Rao, B. K. “A Text on Petrochemicals”, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers
CPE334 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
 understand and analyse the energy data of industries
 carryout energy accounting and balancing
 conduct energy audit and suggest methodologies for energy savings and
 utilise the available resources in optimal ways
Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data –
Environmental aspects associated with energy utilization – Energy Auditing: Need, Types,
Methodology and Barriers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditing.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9

Components of EB billing – HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors,
Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency Computation, Energy
Efficient Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Efficacy, LED Lighting and scope of
Encon in Illumination.
UNIT III THERMAL SYSTEMS 9

Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation and encon
measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam
Utilization, Insulators & Refractories
254
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 9
Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compressed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems –
Cooling Towers – D.G. sets
UNIT V ECONOMICS 9
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present Value,
Life Cycle Costing –ESCO concept
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyze the energy data of industries.
CO1: Remember the knowledge for Basic combustion and furnace design and
selection of thermal and mechanical energy equipment.
CO2: Study the Importance of Stoichiometry relations, Theoretical air required for
complete combustion.
CO3: Skills on combustion thermodynamics and kinetics.
CO4: Apply calculation and design tube still heaters.
CO5: Studied different heat treatment furnace.
CO6: Practical and theoretical knowledge burner design.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at www.energy manager
raining.com. a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory body
under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and
Utilisation” Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.
2. Callaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon
Press, Oxford, 1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Efficient Use of Energy” Butterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand book”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Butterworths, London 1987
OPT351 BASICS OF PLASTICS PROCESSING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the fundamentals of plastics processing, such as the relationships between
material structural properties and required processing parameters, and so on
 To gain practical knowledge on the polymer selection and its processing
 Understanding the major plastic material processing techniques (Extrusion, Injection
molding, Compression and Transfer molding, Blow molding, Thermoforming and casting)
 To understand suitable additives for plastics compounding
 To Propose troubleshooting mechanisms for defects found in plastics products manufactured
by various processing techniques
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICS PROCESSING 9

Introduction to plastic processing – Principles of plastic processing: processing of plastics vs. metals
and ceramics. Factors influencing the efficiency of plastics processing: molecular weight, viscosity
and rheology. Difference in approach for thermoplastic and thermoset processing. Additives for
plastics compounding and processing: antioxidants, light stabilizers, UV stabilizers, lubricants,
impact modifiers, flame retardants, antistatic agents, stabilizers and plasticizers. Compounding:
plastic compounding techniques, plasticization, pelletization.
255
UNIT II EXTRUSION 9
Extrusion – Principles of extrusion. Features of extruder: barrel, screw, types of screws, drive
mechanism, specifications, heating & cooling systems, types of extruders. Flow mechanism: process
variables, die entry effects and exit instabilities. Die swell, Defects: melt fracture, shark skin,
bambooing. Factors determining efficiency of an extruder. Extrusion of films: blown and cast films.
Tube/pipe extrusion. Extrusion coating: wire & cable. Twin screw extruder and its applications.
Applications of extrusion and new developments.
UNIT III INJECTION MOLDING 9

Injection molding – Principles and processing outline, machinery, accessories and functions,
specifications, process variables, mould cycle. Types of clamping: hydraulic and toggle mechanisms.
Start-up and shut down procedures-Cylinder nozzles- Press capacity projected area -Shot weight
Basic theoretical concepts and their relationship to processing - Interaction of moulding process
aspect effects in quoted variables. Basic mould types. Reciprocating vs. plunger type injection
moulding. Thermoplastic vs. thermosetting injection moulding. Injection moulding vs. other plastic
processing techniques. State-of-the art injection moulding techniques - Introduction to trouble
shooting
UNIT IV COMPRESSION AND TRANSFER MOLDING 9

Compression moulding – Basic principles of compression and transfer moulding-Meaning of terms-
Bulk factor and flow properties, moulding materials, process variables and process cycle, Inter
relation between flow properties-Curing time-Mould temperature and Pressure requirements.
Preforms and preheating- Techniques of preheating. Machines used-Types of compression mould-
positive, semi-positive and flash. Common moulding faults and their correction- Finishing of
mouldings. Transfer moulding: working principle, equipment, Press capacity-Integral moulds and
auxiliary ram moulds, moulding cycle, moulding tolerances, pot transfer, plunger transfer and screw
transfer moulding techniques, advantages over compression moulding
UNIT V BLOW MOLDING, THERMOFORMING AND CASTING 9

Blow moulding: principles and terminologies. Injection blow moulding. Extrusion blow moulding.
Design guidelines for optimum product performance and appearance. Thermoforming: principle,
vacuum forming, pressure forming mechanical forming. Casting: working principle, types and
applications.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Ability to find out the correlation between various processing techniques with product
properties.
CO2 Understand the major plastics processing techniques used in moulding (injection, blow,
compression, and transfer), extrusion, thermoforming, and casting.
CO3 Acquire knowledge on additives for plastic compounding and methods employed for the same
CO4 Familiarize with the machinery and ancillary equipment associated with various plastic
processing techniques.
CO5 Select an appropriate processing technique for the production of a plastic product
REFERENCES
1. S. S. Schwart, S. H. Goodman, Plastics Materials and Processes, Van Nostrad Reinhold
Company Inc. (1982).
2. F. Hensen (Ed.), Plastic Extrusion Technology, Hanser Gardner (1997).
3. W. S. Allen and P. N. Baker, Hand Book of Plastic Technology, Volume-1, Plastic Processing
Operations [Injection, Compression, Transfer, Blow Molding], CBS Publishers and
Distributors (2004).
4. M. Chanda, S. K. Roy, Plastic Technology handbook, 4th Edn., CRC Press (2007).
5. I. I. Rubin, Injection Molding Theory & Practice, Society of Plastic Engineers, Wiley (1973).
256
6. D.V. Rosato, M. G. Rosato, Injection Molding Hand Book, Springer (2012).
7. M. L. Berins (Ed.), SPI Plastic Engineering Hand Book of Society of Plastic Industry Inc.,
Springer (2012).
8. B. Strong, Plastics: Material & Processing, A, Pearson Prentice hall (2005).
9. D.V Rosato, Blow Molding Hand Book, Carl HanserVerlag GmbH & Co (2003).
OEC351 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● To understand the basic properties of signal & systems
● To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time domain
● To analyze continuous time signals and system in the Fourier and Laplace domain
● To analyze discrete time signals and system in the Fourier and Z transform domain
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials and
Sinusoids_Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals, Periodic
& Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy & Power signals -Classification of
systems- CT systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant& Time-invariant,Causal
& Non-causal, Stable & Unstable.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9
Fourier series for periodic signals - Fourier Transform – properties- Laplace Transforms and
Properties
UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9
Impulse response - convolution integrals- Differential Equation- Fourier and Laplace transforms in
Analysis of CT systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.
UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9
Baseband signal Sampling–Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT)– Properties of DTFT
- Z Transform & Properties
UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9
Impulse response–Difference equations-Convolution sum- Discrete Fourier Transform and Z
Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-DT systems connected in series and
parallel.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1: determine if a given system is linear/causal/stable
CO2: determine the frequency components present in a deterministic signal
CO3: characterize continuous LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO4: characterize discrete LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO5: compute the output of an LTI system in the time and frequency domains
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Oppenheim, Willsky and Hamid, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2015.(Units I - V)
2. Simon Haykin, Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2002
REFERENCES :
1. B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford, 2009.
2. M. J. Roberts, “Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform methods and MATLAB”,
McGraw- Hill Education, 2018.
3. John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007.
257
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - 3 - - 1
2 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3 -
3 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 2 - -
4 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
5 3 3 - 3 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 2 3 1
g
OEC352 FUNDAMENTALS Of ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● To give a comprehensive exposure to all types of devices and circuits constructed with
discrete components. This helps to develop a strong basis for building linear and digital
integrated circuits
● To analyze the frequency response of small signal amplifiers
● To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits
 To study about feedback amplifiers and oscillators principles
 To understand the analysis and design of multi vibrators
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

PN junction diode, Zener diode, BJT, MOSFET, UJT –structure, operation and V-I characteristics,
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier, Zener as regulator
UNIT II AMPLIFIERS 9
Load line, operating point, biasing methods for BJT and MOSFET, BJT small signal model – Analysis
of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –Analysis of CS and Source follower – Gain
and frequency response- High frequency analysis.
UNIT III MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9

Cascode amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – Tuned
amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods.
UNIT IV FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9

Advantages of negative feedback – Analysis of Voltage / Current, Series , Shunt feedback Amplifiers
– positive feedback–Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley, Colpitts and
Crystal oscillators.
UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS AND DC/DC CONVERTERS 9

Power amplifiers- class A-Class B-Class AB-Class C-Temperature Effect- Class AB Power amplifier
using MOSFET –DC/DC convertors – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost analysis and design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1: Explain the structure and working operation of basic electronic devices.
CO2: Design and analyze amplifiers.
CO3: Analyze frequency response of BJT and MOSFET amplifiers
CO4: Design and analyze feedback amplifiers and oscillator principles.
CO5: Design and analyze power amplifiers and supply circuits
258
TEXT BOOKS :
1. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Oxford Higher Education press, 5 th Edition,
2010.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 10th
Edition, Pearson Education / PHI, 2008.
3. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, "Micro Electronic Circuits", Oxford University Press, 7 th
Edition, 2014.
REFERENCES :
1. Donald.A. Neamen, "Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition,
2010.
2. D.Schilling and C.Belove, "Electronic Circuits", McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition, 1989
3. Muhammad H.Rashid, "Power Electronics", Pearson Education / PHI , 2004.
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
2 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
4 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
5 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CBM348 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of products
and services
• To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product based on
the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the hardware, software,
controls, electronics and mechanical systems
• To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
• To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive at the
optimum system specification and characteristics
• To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to validate and
sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering customer
UNIT I BASICS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends- Economical Trends
- Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product Development
Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types of Product
Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle – Product
Development Planning and Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering - traceability Matrix
and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction to System
Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design - Interface Design.
259
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9
Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept generation
Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept Screening & Evaluation
- Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification – Mechanical, Electronics and Software
Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W
Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping -
Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing,
Certification and Documentation
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation -
Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence Management
– Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus Academia –
The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development processes -
Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical, Embedded and
Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property Rights and
Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Define, formulate, and analyze a problem
CO2 Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
CO3 Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business Context
CO4 Work independently as well as in teams
CO5 Manage a project from start to finish
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill, Eleventh
Edition, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning – Concepts”,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 1
2 3 2 3 1 1 1
3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg.
260
CBM333 ASSISTIVE TECHNOLOGY LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement various assistive devices
 To understand the prosthetic and orthotic devices
 To know the developments in assistive technology
UNIT I CARDIAC ASSIST DEVICES 9

Cardiac functions and parameters, principle of External counter pulsation techniques, intra aortic
balloon pump, Auxillary ventricle and schematic for temporary bypass of left ventricle, prosthetic
heart valves, cardiac pacemaker.
UNIT II HEMODIALYSERS 9
Physiology of kidney, Artificial kidney, Dialysis action, hemodialyser unit, membrane dialysis,
portable dialyser monitoring and functional parameters.
UNIT III HEARING AIDS 9
Anatomy of ear, Common tests – audiograms, air conduction, bone conduction, masking techniques,
SISI, Hearing aids – principles, drawbacks in the conventional unit, DSP based hearing aids.
UNIT IV PROSTHETIC AND ORTHODIC DEVICES 9

Hand and arm replacement – different types of models, externally powered limb prosthesis, feedback
in orthotic system, functional electrical stimulation, sensory assist devices.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9

Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulator, bio-feedback, assistive devices in drug delivery
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Interpret the various mechanical techniques that will help in assisting the heart functions.
CO2: Describe the underlying principles of hemodialyzer machine.
CO3: Indicate the methodologies to assess the hearing loss.
CO4: Evaluate the types of assistive devices for mobilization.
CO5: Explain about TENS and biofeedback system.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph D. Bronzino, The Biomedical Engineering Handbook, Third Edition: Three Volume
Set, CRC Press,2006
2. Marion. A. Hersh, Michael A. Johnson,Assistive Technology for visually impaired and
blind,Springer Science & Business Media, 1st edition, 12-May-2010
3. Yadin David, Wolf W. von Maltzahn, Michael R. Neuman, Joseph.D, Bronzino, Clinical
Engineering, CRC Press, 1st edition,2010.
REFERENCES
1. Kenneth J. Turner Advances in Home Care Technologies: Results of the match Project,
Springer, 1stedition, 2011.
2. Gerr M. Craddock Assistive Technology-Shaping the future, IOS Press, 1st edition, 2003.
3. 3D Printing in Orthopaedic Surgery, Matthew Dipaola , Elsevier 2019 ISBN 978 -0-323-
662116
4. Cardiac Assist Devices, Daniel Goldstein (Editor), Mehmet Oz (Editor), Wiley-Blackwell April
2000 ISBN: 978-0-879-93449-1
261
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 1 1 1
4 3 1 1 1 1
5 3 1 1 1 1
AVg.
OMA352 OPERATIONS RESEARCH LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This course will help the students to
 determine the optimum solution for Linear programming problems.
 study the Transportation and assignment models and various techniques to solve them.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of integer programming
problems.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of dynamic programming
problems.
 determine the optimum solution for non-linear programming problems.
UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Formulation of linear programming models – Graphical solution – Simplex method - Big M Method
– Two phase simplex method - Duality - Dual simplex method.
UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS 9

Matrix form of Transportation problems – Loops in T.P – Initial basic feasible solution –
Transportation algorithm – Assignment problem – Unbalanced assignment problems .
UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction – All and mixed I.P.P – Gomory’s method – Cutting plane algorithm – Branch and
bound algorithm – Zero – one programming.
UNIT IV DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Recursive nature of computation – Forward and backward recursion – Resource Allocation model
– Cargo – loading model – Work – force size model - Investment model – Solution of L.P.P by
dynamic programming .
UNIT V NON - LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Lagrange multipliers – Equality constraints – Inequality constraints – Kuhn – Tucker Conditions –
Quadratic programming.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1 Could develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to develop a
linear programming model from problem description, apply the simplex method for solving
linear programming problems.
CO2 analyze the concept of developing, formulating, modeling and solving transportation and
assignment problems.
CO3 solve the integer programming problems using various methods.
CO4 conceptualize the principle of optimality and sub-optimization, formulation and computational
procedure of dynamic programming.
CO5 determine the optimum solution for non linear programming problems.
262
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kanti Swarup, P.K.Gupta and Man Mohan, " Operations Research " , Sultan Chand & Sons,
New Delhi, Fifth Edition , 1990.
2. Taha. H.A, " Operations Research – An Introduction , Pearson Education, Ninth Edition ,
New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCES :
1. J.K.Sharma , " Operations Research - Theory and Applications " Mac Millan India Ltd ,
Second Edition , New Delhi , 2003.
2. Richard Bronson & Govindasami Naadimuthu , " Operations Research " ( Schaum’s Outlines
– TMH Edition) Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Pradeep Prabhakar Pai , " Operations Research and Practice", Oxford University Press,
New Delhi , 2012.
4. J.P.Singh and N.P.Singh , " Operations Research , Ane Books Pvt.L.td, New Delhi , 2014.
5. F.S.Hillier and G.J. Lieberman, " Introduction to Operations Research " , Tata McGraw
Hill, Eighth Edition , New Delhi, 2005.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
OMA353 ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY LT P C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve related
problems.
 To examine the key questions in the Theory of Numbers.
 To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm basis
for further reading and study in the subject.
UNIT I GROUPS AND RINGS 9

Groups: Definition - Properties - Homomorphism - Isomorphism - Cyclic groups - Cosets - Lagrange's
theorem.
Rings: Definition - Sub rings - Integral domain - Field - Integer modulo n - Ring homomorphism.
UNIT II FINITE FIELDS AND POLYNOMIALS 9

Rings - Polynomial rings - Irreducible polynomials over finite fields - Factorization of polynomials
over finite fields.
UNIT III DIVISIBILITY THEORY AND CANONICAL DECOMPOSITIONS 9

Division algorithm- Base-b representations – Number patterns – Prime and composite numbers –
GCD – Euclidean algorithm – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – LCM.
UNIT IV DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS AND CONGRUENCES 9

Linear Diophantine equations – Congruence’s – Linear Congruence’s - Applications : Divisibility tests
- Modular exponentiation - Chinese remainder theorem – 2x2 linear systems.
263
UNIT V CLASSICAL THEOREMS AND MULTIPLICATIVE FUNCTIONS 9
Wilson’s theorem – Fermat’s Little theorem – Euler’s theorem – Euler’s Phi functions – Tau and
Sigma functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1 Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
CO2 Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
CO3 The students should be able to demonstrate their mastery by solving non-trivial problems
related to the concepts, and by proving simple theorems about the, statements proven by the
text
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V., "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics", Pearson
Education, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Thomas Koshy, “Elementary Number Theory with Applications”, Elsevier Publications , New
Delhi , 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, “Coding Theory – A first Course”, Cambridge Publications,
Cambridge, 2004.
2. Niven.I, Zuckerman.H.S., and Montgomery, H.L., “An Introduction to Theory of Numbers” , John
Wiley and Sons , Singapore, 2004.
3. Lidl.R., and Pitz. G, "Applied Abstract Algebra", Springer Verlag, New Delhi, 2nd Edition ,2006.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 1 2 - - - 2 1 - 1 2 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO5 2 2 1 - 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 - - -
Avg 2.8 2.4 1.6 0.8 2.4 1 2.2 1 0.8 1 2.2 2.6 - - -
OMA354 LINEAR ALGEBRA LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
 To find the basis and dimension of vector space.
 To obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
 To find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
 To find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.
UNIT I MATRICES AND SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS 9

Matrices - Row echelon form - Rank - System of linear equations - Consistency - Gauss elimination
method - Gauss Jordan method.
UNIT II VECTOR SPACES 9

Vector spaces over Real and Complex fields - Subspace – Linear space - Linear independence and
dependence - Basis and dimension.
264
UNIT III LINEAR TRANSFORMATION 9
Linear transformation - Rank space and null space - Rank and nullity - Dimension theorem– Matrix
representation of linear transformation - Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of linear transformation –
Diagonalization.
UNIT IV INNER PRODUCT SPACES 9

Inner product and norms - Properties - Orthogonal, Orthonormal vectors - Gram Schmidt
orthonormalization process - Least square approximation.
UNIT V EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS AND MATRIX DECOMPOSITION 9

Eigen value Problems : Power method, Jacobi rotation method - Singular value decomposition – QR
decomposition.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
CO2 Find the basis and dimension of vector space.
CO3 Obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
CO4 Find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
CO5 Find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Faires J.D. and Burden R., Numerical Methods, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Publications), New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Friedberg A.H, Insel A.J. and Spence L, Linear Algebra, Pearson Education, 5th Edition,2019.
REFERENCES
1. Bernard Kolman, David R. Hill, Introductory Linear Algebra, Pearson Educations, New Delhi,
8th Edition, 2009.
2. Gerald C.F. and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Educations, New Delhi,
7th Edition, 2007.
3. Kumaresan S, Linear Algebra - A geometric approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
Reprint, 2010.
4. Richard Branson, Matrix Operations, Schaum's outline series, 1989.
5. Strang G, Linear Algebra and its applications, Thomson (Brooks / Cole) New Delhi,
4th Edition, 2005.
6. Sundarapandian V, Numerical Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 2.8 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
OBT352 BASICS OF MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Enable the Non-biological student’s to understand about the basics of life science and their
pro and cons for living organisms.
265
UNIT I BASICS OF MICROBES AND ITS TYPES 9
Introduction to microbes, existence of microbes, inventions of great scientist and history, types of
microorganisms – Bacteria, Virus, Fungi.
UNIT II MICROBIAL TECHNIQUES 9
Sterilization – types – physical and chemical sterilization, Decontamination, Preservation methods,
fermentation, Cultivation and growth of microbes, Diagnostic methods.
UNIT III PATHOGENIC MICROBES 9
Infectious Disease – Awareness, Causative agent, Prevention and control - Cholera, Dengu, Malaria,
Diarrhea, Tuberculosis, Typhoid, Covid, HIV.
UNIT IV BENEFICIAL MICROBES 9
Applications of microbes – Clinical microbiology, agricultural microbiology, Food Microbiology,
Environmental Microbiology, Animal Microbiology, Marine Microbiology.
UNIT V PRODUCTS FROM MICROBES 9
Fermentedproducts – Fermented Beverages, Curd, Cheese, Mushroom, Agricultural products –
Biopesticide, Biofertilizers, Vermi compost, Pharmaceutical products - Antibiotics, Vaccines
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1 Microbes and their types
CO2 Cultivation of microbes
CO3 Pathogens and control measures for safety
CO4 Microbes in different industry for economy.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Talaron K, Talaron A, Casita, Pelczar and Reid. Foundations in Microbiology, W.C. Brown
Publishers, 1993.
2. Pelczar MJ, Chan ECS and Krein NR, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, India.
3. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein DA, Microbiology, 3rd Edition, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 1996.
OBT353 BASICS OF BIOMOLECULES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective is to offer basic concepts of biochemistry to students with diverse background
in life sciences including but not limited to the structure and function of various
biomolecules and their metabolism.
UNIT I CARBOHYDRATES 9
Introduction to carbohydrate, classification, properties of monosaccharide, structural aspects of
monosaccharides. Introduction to disaccharide (lactose, maltose, sucrose) and polysaccharide
(Heparin, starch, and glycogen) biological function of carbohydrate.
UNIT II LIPID AND FATTY ACIDS 9

Introduction to lipid, occurrence, properties, classification of lipid. Importance of phospholipids,
sphingolipid and glycerolipid. Biological function of lipid. Fatty acid, Introduction, Nomenclature and
classification of fatty acid Essential and non essential fatty acids.
UNIT III AMINO ACIDS AND PROTEIN. 9

Introduction to amino acid, structure, classification of protein based on polarity. Introduction to
protein, classification of protein based on solubility, shape, composition and Function. Peptide bond–
266
Structure of peptide bond. Denauration – renaturation of protein, properties of protein. Introduction
to lipoprotein, glycoprotein and nucleoprotein.Biological function of protein.
UNIT IV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9

Introduction to nucleic acid, Difference between nucleotide and nucleoside, composition of DNA &
amp; RNA Structure of Nitrogen bases in DNA and RNA along with the nomenclature· DNA double
helix (Watson and crick) model, types of DNA, RNA.
UNIT V VITAMINS AND HORMONES 9

Different types of vitamins, their diverse biochemical functions and deficiency related diseases.
Overview of hormones. Hormone mediated signaling. Mechanism of action of steroid hormones,
epinephrine, glucagons and insulin.Role of vitamins and hormones in metabolism; Hormonal
disorders; Therapeutic uses ofvitamins and hormones.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Students will learn about various kinds of biomolecules and their physiological role.
CO2 Students will gain knowledge about various metabolic disorders and will help them to know
the importance of various biomolecules in terms of disease correlation.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry 6th Edition by David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox
W.H.Freeman and Company 2017
2. Satyanarayana, U. and U. Chakerapani, “Biochemistry” 3rd Rev. Edition, Books & Allied (P)
Ltd., 2006. 3. Rastogi, S.C. “Biochemistry” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
3. Conn, E.E., etal., “Outlines of Biochemistry” 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1987.
4. Outlines of Biochemistry, 5th Edition: By E E Conn, P K Stumpf, G Bruening and R Y Doi.pp
693. John Wiley and Sons, New York. 1987.
REFERENCES
1. Berg, Jeremy M. et al. “Biochemsitry”, 6th Edition, W.H. Freeman & Co., 2006.
2. Murray, R.K., etal “Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry”, 31st Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2018.
3. Voet, D. and Voet, J.G., “Biochemistry”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2010.
OBT354 FUNDAMENTALS OF CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge on the fundamentals of cell biology.
 To understand the signalling mechanisms.
 Understand basic principles of molecular biology at intracellular level to regulate growth,
division and development.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CELL 9

Cell, cell wall and Extracellular Matrix (ECM), composition, cellular dimensions, Evolution,
Organisation, differentiation of prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells, Virus, bacteria,cyanobacteria,
mycoplasma and prions.
UNIT II CELL ORGANELLES 9

Molecular organisation, biogenesis and functin Mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulam, golgi
apparatus, plastids, chloroplast, leucoplast, centrosome, lysosome, ribosome, peroxisome, Nucleus
and nucleolus. Endo membrane system, concept of compartmentalisation.
UNIT III BIO-MEMBRANE TRANSPORT 9

Physiochemical properties of cell membranes. Molecular constitute of membranes, asymmetrical
organisation of lipids and proteins. Solute transport across membrane’s-fick’s law, simple diffusion,
267
passive-facilitated diffusion, active transport- primary and secondary, group translocation, transport
ATPases, membrane transport in bacteria and animals. Transportmechanism- mobile carriers and
pores mechanisms. Transport by vesicle formation, endocytosis, exocytosis, cell respiration.
UNIT IV CELL CYCLE 9

Cell cycle- Cell division by mitosis and meosis, Comparision of meosis and mitosis, regulation of cell
cycle, cell lysis, Cytokinesis, Cell signaling, Cell communication, Cell adhesion and Cell junction, cell
cycle checkpoints.
UNIT V CENTRAL DOGMA 9

Overview of Central dogma DNA replication: Meselson & Stahl experiment, bi–directional DNA
replication, Okazaki fragments. Structure and function of mRNA, rRNA and tRNA. RNA synthesis:
Initiation, elongation and termination of RNA synthesis Introduction to Genetic code- Steps in
translation: Initiation, Elongation and termination of protein synthesis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understanding of cell at structural and functional level.
CO2 Understand the central dogma of life and its significance.
CO3 Comprehend the basic mechanisms of cell division.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Cooper, G.M. and R.E. Hansman “The Cell: A Molecular Approach”, 8th Edition,
Oxford University Press, 2018
2. Friefelder, David. “Molecular Biology.” Narosa Publications, 1999
3. Weaver, Robert F. “Molecular Biology” IInd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Lodish H, Berk A, MatsudairaP,Kaiser CA, Krieger M, Schot MP, Zipursky L, Darnell J. Molecular
Cell Biology, 6th Edition, 2007.
2. Becker, W.M. etal., “The World of the Cell”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Campbell, N.A., J.B. Recee and E.J. Simon “Essential Biology”, VIIrd Edition, Pearson
International, 2007.
4. Alberts, Bruce etal., “Essential Cell Biology”, 4th Edition, W.W. Norton, 2013.
OPEN ELECTIVE IV
OHS352 PROJECT REPORT WRITING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course will enable Learners to,
 Understand the essentials of project writing.
 Perceive the difference between general writing and technical writing
 Assimilate the fundamental features of report writing.
 Understand the essential differences that exist between general and technical writing.
 Learn the structure of a technical and project report.
UNIT I 9
Writing Skills – Essential Grammar and Vocabulary – Passive Voice, Reported Speech, Concord,
Signpost words, Cohesive Devices – Paragraph writing - Technical Writing vs. General Writing.
UNIT II 9
Project Report – Definition, Structure, Types of Reports, Purpose – Intended Audience – Plagiarism
– Report Writing in STEM fields – Experiment – Statistical Analysis.
268
UNIT III 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 1) Framing a Title – Content – Acknowledgement – Funding
Details -Abstract – Introduction – Aim of the Study – Background - Writing the research question -
Need of the Study/Project Significance, Relevance – Determining the feasibility – Theoretical
Framework.
UNIT IV 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 2) – Literature Review, Research Design, Methods of Data
Collection - Tools and Procedures - Data Analysis - Interpretation - Findings –Limitations -
Recommendations – Conclusion – Bibliography.
UNIT V 9
Proof reading a report – Avoiding Typographical Errors – Bibliography in required Format – Font –
Spacing – Checking Tables and Illustrations – Presenting a Report Orally – Techniques.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
By the end of the course, learners will be able to
CO1 Write effective project reports.
CO2 Use statistical tools with confidence.
CO3 Explain the purpose and intension of the proposed project coherently and with clarity.
CO4 Create writing texts to suit achieve the intended purpose.
CO5 Master the art of writing winning proposals and projects.
REFERENCES
1. Gerson and Gerson - Technical Communication: Process and Product, 7th Edition, Prentice
Hall(2012)
2. Virendra K. Pamecha - Guide to Project Reports, Project Appraisals and Project Finance (2012)
3. Daniel Riordan - Technical Report Writing Today (1998)
Darla-Jean Weatherford - Technical Writing for Engineering Professionals (2016) Penwell
Publishers.
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.2 2.4 2.2 2 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.6 3 2.6 3 - - -
OMA355 ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge on numerical methods that will come in handy to solve numerically the
problems that arise in engineering and technology. This will also serve as a precursor for
future research.
269
UNIT I ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEM 9
System of nonlinear equations : Fixed point iteration method - Newton's method; System of linear
equations: Thomas algorithm for tri diagonal system - SOR iteration methods ; Eigen value
problems: Given's method - Householder's method.
UNIT II INTERPOLATION 9
Central difference: Stirling and Bessel's interpolation formulae ; Piecewise spline interpolation:
Piecewise linear, piecewise quadratic and cubic spline ; Least square approximation for continuous
data (upto 3rd degree).
UNIT III NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9

Explicit Adams - Bashforth Techniques - Implicit Adams - Moulton Techniques, Predictor -Corrector
Techniques - Finite difference methods for solving two - point linear boundary value problems -
Orthogonal Collocation method.
UNIT IV FINITE DIFFERENCE METHODS FOR ELLIPTIC EQUATIONS 9

Laplace and Poisson’s equations in a rectangular region : Five point finite difference schemes -
Leibmann’s iterative methods - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – Laplace equation in polar
coordinates : Finite difference schemes .
UNIT V FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD FOR TIME DEPENDENT PARTIAL

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9
Parabolic equations : Explicit and implicit finite difference methods – Weighted average
approximation - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – First order hyperbolic equations - Method of
characteristics - Different explicit and implicit methods; Wave equation : Explicit scheme – Stability
of above schemes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for nonlinear equations,
system of linear equations and eigenvalue problems;
CO2: understand the interpolation theory;
CO3: understand the concepts of numerical methods for ordinary differential equations;
CO4: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for elliptic equations;
CO5: understand the concepts of numerical methods for time dependent partial differential equations
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal, B.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering & Science ", Khanna Publications, Delhi, 2013.
2. Gupta, S.K., "Numerical Methods for Engineers", (Third Edition), New Age Publishers, 2015.
3. Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K. and Jain, R.K., "Computational Methods for Partial Differential
Equations", New Age Publishers, 1994.
REFERENCES:
1. Saumyen Guha and Rajesh Srivastava, "Numerical methods for Engineering and Science",
Oxford Higher Education, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Burden, R.L., and Faires, J.D., “Numerical Analysis – Theory and Applications”, 9 th Edition,
Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Gupta S.K., “Numerical Methods for Engineers”,4th Edition, New Age Publishers, 2019.
4. Sastry, S.S., “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, 5th Edition, PHI Learning, 2015.
5. Morton, K.W. and Mayers D.F., "Numerical solution of Partial Differential equations",
Cambridge University press, Cambridge, 2002.
270
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
OMA356 RANDOM PROCESSES LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random variables with
applications to engineering which can describe real life phenomenon.
 To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in
communication networks.
 To acquaint with specialized random processes which are apt for modelling the real time
scenario.
 To understand the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
 To understand the significance of linear systems with random inputs.
UNIT I RANDOM VARIABLES 9

Discrete and continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Joint
Distribution- Covariance and Correlation – Transformation of a random variable.
UNIT II RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Characterization – Cross correlation and Cross covariance functions - Stationary
Random Processes – Markov process - Markov chain.
UNIT III SPECIAL RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Bernoulli Process – Gaussian Process - Poisson process – Random telegraph process.
UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 9

Auto correlation functions – Cross correlation functions – Properties – Power spectral density –
Cross spectral density – Properties.
UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 9

Linear time invariant system – System transfer function – Linear systems with random inputs – Auto
correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
CO2 Apply the concept random processes in engineering disciplines.
CO3 Understand and apply the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
CO4 Get an exposure of various distribution functions and help in acquiring skills in handling
situations involving more than one variable.
CO5 Analyze the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems.
271
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ibe, O.C.," Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes ", 1st Indian Reprint,
Elsevier, 2007.
2. Peebles, P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles ", Tata McGraw
Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. Cooper. G.R., McGillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis", Oxford
University Press, New Delhi, 3rd Indian Edition, 2012.
2. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random
Variables and Random Processes ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing and Communications ", Academic Press, 2004.
4. Stark. H. and Woods. J.W., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing ", Pearson Education, Asia, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Yates. R.D. and Goodman. D.J., “Probability and Stochastic Processes", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
Bangalore, 2nd Edition, 2012.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
OMA357 QUEUEING AND RELIABILITY MODELLING LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications such
as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
 To understand the concept of queueing models and apply in engineering.
 To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop probabilistic
models which can be used in several areas of science and engineering.
 To study the system reliability and hazard function for series and parallel systems.
 To implement Markovian Techniques for availability and maintainability which opens up new
avenues for research.
UNIT I RANDOM PROCESSES 9
Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete parameter
Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.
UNIT II MARKOVIAN QUEUEING MODELS 9

Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing models –
Little’s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms.
UNIT III ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 9

M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special cases – Series queues
– Open Jackson networks.
272
UNIT IV SYSTEM RELIABILITY 9
Reliability and hazard functions- Exponential, Normal, Weibull and Gamma failure distribution – Time
- dependent hazard models – Reliability of Series and Parallel Systems.
UNIT V MAINTAINABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 9

Maintainability and Availability functions – Frequency of failures – Two Unit parallel system with
repair – k out of m systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Enable the students to apply the concept of random processes in engineering disciplines.
CO2 Students acquire skills in analyzing various queueing models.
CO3 Students can understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to time in
a probabilistic manner.
CO4 Students can analyze reliability of the systems for various probability distributions.
CO5 Students can be able to formulate problems using the maintainability and availability analyses
by using theoretical approach.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Shortle J.F, Gross D, Thompson J.M,Harris C.M., “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York,2018.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,2010.
REFERENCES
1. Medhi J, ”Stochastic models of Queueing Theory”, Academic Press, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2003.
2. Taha, H.A., "Operations Research", 9th Edition, Pearson India Education Services, Delhi, 2016.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Govil A.K., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,1983.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1.4 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
OMG354 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basic concept and function of Production and Operation Management for
entrepreneurship.
 To understand the Production process and planning.
 To understand the Production and Operations Management Control for business owners.
273
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANGEMENT 9
Functions of Production Management - Relationship between production and other functions –
Production management and operations management, Characteristics of modern production and
operation management, organisation of production function, recent trends in production /operations
management - production as an organisational function, decision making in production Operations
research
UNIT II PRODUCTION & OPERATION SYSTEMS 9

Production Systems- principles – Models - CAD and CAM- Automation in Production - Functions and
significance- Capacity and Facility Planning: Importance of capacity planning- Capacity
measurement – Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP) process for manufacturing and service
industry
UNIT III PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS PLANNING 9

Facility Planning – Location of facilities – Location flexibility – Facility design process and techniques
– Location break even analysis-Production Process Planning: Characteristic of production process
systems – Steps for production process- Production Planning Control Functions – Planning phase-
Action phase- Control phase - Aggregate production planning
UNIT IV PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT PROCESS 9

Process selection with PLC phases- Process simulation tools- Work Study – Significance – Methods,
evolution of normal/ standard time – Job design and rating - Value Analysis - Plant Layout: meaning
– characters –- Plant location techniques - Types- MRP and Layout Design - Optimisation and
Theory of Constraints (TOC)– Critical Chain Project Management (CCPM)- REL (Relationship) Chart
– Assembly line balancing- – Plant design optimisation -Forecasting methods.
UNIT V CONTROLING PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Material requirement planning (MRP)- Concept- Process and control - Inventory control systems and
techniques – JIT and Lean manufacturing - Network techniques - Quality Management: Preventive
Vs Breakdown maintenance for Quality – Techniques for measuring quality - Control Chart (X , R ,
p , np and C chart ) - Cost of Quality, Continuous improvement (Kaizen) - Quality awards - Supply
Chain Management - Total Quality Management - 6 Sigma approach and Zero Defect
Manufacturing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able :
CO1 To understand the basics and functions of Production and Operation Management for business
owners.
CO2 To learn about the Production & Operation Systems.
CO3 To acquaint on the Production & Operations Planning Techniques followed by entrepreneurs
in Industries.
CO4 To known about the Production & Operations Management Processes in organisations.
CO5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling , Production and Operations in industries.
REFERENCES
1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing,
Pearson, 2007.
2. Amitabh Raturi, Production and Inventory Management, , 2008.
3. Adam Jr. Ebert, Production and Operations Management, PHI Publication, 1992.
4. Muhlemann, Okland and Lockyer, Production and Operation Management, Macmillan India,1992.
6. Chary S.N, Production and Operations Management, TMH Publications, 2010.
7. Terry Hill ,Operation Management. Pal Grave McMillan (Case Study).2005.
274
OMG355 MULTIVARIATE DATA ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To know various multivariate data analysis techniques for business research.
Uni-variate, Bi-variate and Multi-variate techniques – Classification of multivariate techniques –
Guidelines for multivariate analysis and interpretation.
UNIT II PREPARING FOR MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS 9
Conceptualization of research model with variables, collection of data –-Approaches for dealing with
missing data – Testing the assumptions of multivariate analysis.
UNIT III MULTIPLE LINEAR REGRESSION ANALYSIS, FACTOR ANALYSIS 9
Multiple Linear Regression Analysis – Inferences from the estimated regression function – Validation
of the model. -Approaches to factor analysis – interpretation of results.
UNIT IV LATENT VARIABLE TECHNIQUES 9
Confirmatory Factor Analysis, Structural equation modelling, Mediation models, Moderation models,
Longitudinal studies.
UNIT V ADVANCED MULTIVARIATE TECHNIQUES 9

Multiple Discriminant Analysis, Logistic Regression, Cluster Analysis, Conjoint Analysis,
multidimensional scaling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
CO1 Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the concepts and methods; know the exact
scopes and possible limitations of each method; and show capability of using multivariate
techniques to provide constructive guidance in decision making.
CO2 Use advanced techniques to conduct thorough and insightful analysis, and interpret the results
correctly with detailed and useful information.
CO3 Show substantial understanding of the real problems; conduct deep analysis using correct
methods; and draw reasonable conclusions with sufficient explanation and elaboration.
CO4 Write an insightful and well-organized report for a real-world case study, including thoughtful
and convincing details.
CO5 Make better business decisions by using advanced techniques in data analytics. ‘
REFERENCES:
1. Joseph F Hair, Rolph E Anderson, Ronald L. Tatham & William C. Black, Multivariate Data
Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Barbara G. Tabachnick, Linda S.Fidell, Using Multivariate Statistics, 6th Edition, Pearson, 2012.
3. Richard A Johnson and Dean W.Wichern, Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis, Prentice Hall,
New Delhi, 2005.
4. David R Anderson, Dennis J Seveency, and Thomas A Williams, Statistics for Business and
Economics, Thompson, Singapore, 2002
OME352 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the development, capabilities, applications, of Additive Manufacturing (AM), and
its business opportunities.
 To be acquainted with vat polymerization and material extrusion processes
 To be familiar with powder bed fusion and binder jetting processes.
 To gain knowledge on applications of direct energy deposition, and material jetting
processes.
 To impart knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technologies.
275
Overview - Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing (AM) Technology: Rapid Prototyping-
Rapid Tooling - Rapid Manufacturing - Additive Manufacturing. AM Process Chain - ASTM/ISO
52900 Classification - Benefits - AM Unique Capabilities - AM File formats: STL, AMF Applications:
Building Printing, Bio Printing, Food Printing, Electronics Printing, Automobile, Aerospace,
Healthcare. Business Opportunities in AM.
UNIT II VAT POLYMERIZATION AND MATERIAL EXTRUSION 9

Photo polymerization: Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA)- Materials -Process - top down and bottom
up approach - Advantages - Limitations - Applications. Digital Light Processing (DLP) - Process -
Advantages - Applications.
Material Extrusion: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) - Process-Materials -Applications and
Limitations.
UNIT III POWDER BED FUSION AND BINDER JETTING 9

Powder Bed Fusion: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Process - Powder Fusion Mechanism -
Materials and Application. Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM): Materials -
Process - Advantages and Applications.
Binder Jetting: Three-Dimensional Printing - Materials - Process - Benefits - Limitations -
Applications.
UNIT IV MATERIAL JETTING AND DIRECTED ENERGY DEPOSITION 9

Material Jetting: Multijet Modeling- Materials - Process - Benefits - Applications.
Directed Energy Deposition: Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS) - Process - Material Delivery -
Materials -Benefits -Applications.
UNIT V SHEET LAMINATION AND DIRECT WRITE TECHNOLOGY 9

Sheet Lamination: Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM)- Basic Principle- Mechanism: Gluing or
Adhesive Bonding - Thermal Bonding - Materials - Application and Limitation.
Ink-Based Direct Writing (DW): Nozzle Dispensing Processes, Inkjet Printing Processes, Aerosol
DW - Applications of DW.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students shall be able to:
CO1: Recognize the development of AM technology and how AM technology propagated into various
businesses and developing opportunities.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on process vat polymerization and material extrusion processes and its
applications.
CO3: Elaborate the process and applications of powder bed fusion and binder jetting.
CO4: Evaluate the advantages, limitations, applications of material jetting and directed energy
deposition processes.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technology.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, Mahyar Khorasani “Additive manufacturing
technologies”. 3rd edition Springer Cham, Switzerland. (2021). ISBN: 978-3-030-56126-0
2. Andreas Gebhardt and Jan-Steffen Hötter “Additive Manufacturing: 3D Printing for
Prototyping and Manufacturing”, Hanser publications, United States, 2015, ISBN: 978-1-
56990-582-1.
REFERENCES:
1. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing”, Hanser Gardner Publication, Cincinnati., Ohio, 2011, ISBN
:9783446425521.
276
2. Milan Brandt, “Laser Additive Manufacturing: Materials, Design, Technologies, and
Applications”, Woodhead Publishing., United Kingdom, 2016, ISBN: 9780081004333.
3. Amit Bandyopadhyay and Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing”, 1st Edition, CRC Press.,
United States, 2015, ISBN-13: 978-1482223590.
4. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer., United
States ,2006, ISBN: 978-1-4614-9842-1.
5. Liou, L.W. and Liou, F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press., United States, 2011, ISBN: 9780849334092.
CME343 NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the fundamental concepts of the new product development
 To develop material specifications, analysis and process.
 To Learn the Feasibility Studies & reporting of new product development.
 To study the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new
product development
 To learn Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF NPD 9

Introduction – Reading of Drawing – Grid reading, Revisions, ECN (Engg. Change Note),
Component material grade, Specifications, customer specific requirements – Basics of monitoring of
NPD applying Gantt chart, Critical path analysis – Fundamentals of BOM (Bill of Materials), Engg.
BOM & Manufacturing BOM. Basics of MIS software and their application in industries like SAP, MS
Dynamics, Oracle ERP Cloud – QFD.
UNIT II MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS, ANALYSIS & PROCESS 9

Material specification standards – ISO, DIN, JIS, ASTM, EN, etc. – Awareness on various
manufacturing process like Metal castings & Forming, Machining (Conventional, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, 5
Axis, ), Fabrications, Welding process. Qualifications of parts mechanical, physical & Chemical
properties and their test report preparation and submission. Fundamentals of DFMEA & PFMEA,
Fundamentals of FEA, Bend Analysis, Hot Distortion, Metal and Material Flow, Fill and Solidification
analysis.
UNIT III ESSENTIALS OF NPD 9

RFQ (Request of Quotation) Processing – Feasibility Studies & reporting – CFT (Cross Function
Team) discussion on new product and reporting – Concept design, Machine selection for tool
making, Machining – Manufacturing Process selection, Machining Planning, cutting tool selection –
Various Inspection methods – Manual measuring, CMM – GOM (Geometric Optical Measuring), Lay
out marking and Cut section analysis. Tool Design and Detail drawings preparation, release of details
to machine shop and CAM programing. Tool assembly and shop floor trials. Initial sample
submission with PPAP documents.
UNIT IV CRITERIONS OF NPD 9

New product qualification for Dimensions, Mechanical & Physical Properties, Internal Soundness
proving through X-Ray, Radiography, Ultrasonic Testing, MPT, etc. Agreement with customer for
testing frequencies. Market Survey on similar products, Risk analysis, validating samples with
simulation results, Lesson Learned & Horizontal deployment in NPD.
UNIT V REPORTING & FORWARD-THINKING OF NPD 9

Detailed study on PPAP with 18 elements reporting, APQP and its 5 Sections, APQP vs PPAP,
Importance of SOP (Standard Operating Procedure) – Purpose & documents, deployment in shop
floor. Prototyping & RPT - Concepts, Application and its advantages, 3D Printing – resin models,
Sand cores for foundries; Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to
3D model – Advantages & Limitation of RE, CE (Concurrent Engineering) – Basics, Application and
277
its advantages in NPD (to reduce development lead time, time to Market, Improve productivity and
product cost.)
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Discuss fundamental concepts and customer specific requirements of the New Product
development
CO2 Discuss the Material specification standards, analysis and fabrication, manufacturing process
Develop Feasibility Studies & reporting of New Product development
CO3 Analyzing the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new
product development
CO4 Develop Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model
TEXT BOOKS:
Product Development – Sten Jonsson
Product Design & Development – Karl T. Ulrich, Maria C. Young, Steven D. Eppinger
REFERENCES:
Revolutionizing Product Development – Steven C Wheelwright & Kim B. Clark
Change by Design
Toyota Product Development System – James Morgan & Jeffrey K. Liker
Winning at New Products – Robert Brands 3rd Edition
Product Design & Value Engineering – Dr. M.A. Bulsara &Dr. H.R. Thakkar
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
4 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
5 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
OME355 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN & RAPID PROTOTYPING TECHNIQUES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Outline Fundamental concepts in UI & UX
 Introduce the principles of Design and Building an mobile app
 Illustrate the use of CAD in product design
 Outline the choice and use of prototyping tools
 Understanding design of electronic circuits and fabrication of electronic devices
UNIT I UI/UX 9
Fundamental concepts in UI & UX - Tools - Fundamentals of design principles - Psychology and
Human Factors for User Interface Design - Layout and composition for Web, Mobile and
Devices - Typography - Information architecture - Color theory - Design process flow, wireframes,
best practices in the industry -User engagement ethics - Design alternatives
UNIT II APP DEVELOPMENT 9

SDLC - Introduction to App Development - Types of Apps - web Development - understanding
Stack - Frontend - backend - Working with Databases - Introduction to API - Introduction to Cloud
services - Cloud environment Setup- Reading and writing data to cloud - Embedding ML
models to Apps - Deploying application.
278
UNIT III INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9
Introduction to Industrial Design - Points, lines, and planes - Sketching and concept generation
- Sketch to CAD - Introduction to CAD tools - Types of 3D modeling - Basic 3D Modeling Tools -
Part creation – Assembly - Product design and rendering basics - Dimensioning & Tolerancing
UNIT IV MECHANICAL RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Need for prototyping - Domains in prototyping - Difference between actual manufacturing and
prototyping - Rapid prototyping methods - Tools used in different domains - Mechanical Prototyping;
3D Printing and classification - Laser Cutting and engraving - RD Works - Additive manufacturing
UNIT V ELECTRONIC RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Basics of electronic circuit design - lumped circuits - Electronic Prototyping - Working with simulation
tool - simple PCB design with EDA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
CO1 Create quick UI/UX prototypes for customer needs
CO2 Develop web application to test product traction / product feature
CO3 Develop 3D models for prototyping various product ideas
CO4 Built prototypes using Tools and Techniques in a quick iterative methodology
TEXT BOOKS
1. Peter Fiell, Charlotte Fiell, Industrial Design A-Z, TASCHEN America Llc(2003)
2. Samar Malik, Autodesk Fusion 360 - The Master Guide.
3. Steve Krug, Don't Make Me Think, Revisited: A Common Sense Approach to Web Usability,
Pearson,3rd edition(2014)
REFERENCES
1. https://www.adobe.com/products/xd/learn/get-star ted.html
2. https://developer.android.com/guide
3. https://help.autodesk.com/view/fusion360/ENU/courses/
4. https://help.prusa3d.com/en/categor y/prusaslicer_204
MF3010 MICRO AND PRECISION ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of this course the student should be able to
 Learn about the precision machine tools
 Learn about the macro and micro components.
 Understand handling and operating of the precision machine tools.
 Learn to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other instruments.
 Learn metrology for micro system
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEMS 9

Design, and material selection, micro-actuators: hydraulic, pneumatic, electrostatic/ magnetic etc.
for medical to general purpose applications. Micro-sensors based on Thermal, mechanical, electrical
properties; micro-sensors for measurement of pressure, flow, temperature, inertia, force,
acceleration, torque, vibration, and monitoring of manufacturing systems.
UNIT II FABRICATION PROCESSES FOR MICRO-SYSTEMS: 9

Additive, subtractive, forming process, microsystems-Micro-pumps, micro- turbines, micro engines,
micro-robot, and miniature biomedical devices
279
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO PRECISION ENGINEERING 9
Machine tools, holding and handling devices, positioning fixtures for fabrication/ assembly of
microsystems. Precision drives: inch worm motors, ultrasonic motors, stick- slip mechanism and
other piezo-based devices.
UNIT IV PRECISION MACHINING PROCESSES 9

Precision machining processes for macro components - Diamond turning, fixed and free abrasive
processes, finishing processes.
UNIT V METROLOGY FOR MICRO SYSTEMS 9

Metrology for micro systems - Surface integrity and its characterization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Select suitable precision machine tools and operate
CO2 Apply the macro and micro components for fabrication of micro systems.
CO3 Apply suitable machining process
CO4 Able to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other instruments.
CO5 Apply metrology for micro system
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Davim, J. Paulo, ed. Microfabrication and Precision Engineering: Research and
Development. Woodhead Publishing, 2017
2. Gupta K, editor. Micro and Precision Manufacturing. Springer; 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Dornfeld, D., and Lee, D. E., Precision Manufacturing, 2008, Springer.
2. H. Nakazawa, Principles of Precision Engineering, 1994, Oxford University Press.
3. Whitehouse, D. J., Handbook of Surface Metrology, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Philadelphia PA, 1994.
4. Murthy.R.L, ―Precision Engineering in Manufacturing‖, New Age International, New Delhi,
2005
OMF354 COST MANAGEMENT OF ENGINEERING PROJECTS LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Summarize the costing concepts and their role in decision making
Infer the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection
Interpret costing concepts with project execution
Develop knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques
Illustrate with quantitative techniques in cost management
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Objectives of a Costing System; Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential cost,
Incremental cost and Opportunity cost; Creation of a Database for operational control.’
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of project
execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and
nontechnical activities, Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution main clearances and
280
documents, Project team: Role of each member, Importance Project site: Data required with
significance, Project contracts
UNIT III PROJECT EXECUTION AND COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project commissioning:
mechanical and process, Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing; Distinction between
Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing; Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis,
Various decision-making problems, Pricing strategies: Pareto Analysis, Target costing, Life Cycle
Costing
UNIT IV COSTING OF SERVICE SECTOR AND BUDGETERY CONTROL 9

Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Activity
Based Cost Management, Bench Marking; Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis,
Budgetary Control: Flexible Budgets; Performance budgets; Zero-based budgets.
UNIT V QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR COST MANAGEMENT 9

Linear Programming, PERT/CPM, Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Learning Curve
Theory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Understand the costing concepts and their role in decision making.
CO2: Understand the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection.
CO3: Interpret costing concepts with project execution.
CO4: Gain knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques.
CO5: Become familiar with quantitative techniques in cost management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John M. Nicholas, Herman Steyn Project Management for Engineering, Business and
Technology, Taylor & Francis, 2 August 2020, ISBN: 9781000092561.
2. Albert Lester ,Project Management, Planning and Control, Elsevier/Butterworth-Heinemann,
2007, ISBN: 9780750669566, 075066956X.
REFERENCES:
1. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler publisher,
1991.
2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting, 1988.
3. Charles T. Horngren et al Cost Accounting a Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2011.
4. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting, 2003.
5. Vohra N.D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd,
2007.
AU3002 BATTERIES AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LTPC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to make the students
 To understand the working and characteristics of different types of batteries and their
management .
281
UNIT I ADVANCED BATTERIES 9
Li-ion Batteries-different formats, chemistry, safe operating area, efficiency, aging. Characteristics-
SOC,DOD, SOH. Balancing-Passive Balancing Vs Active Balancing. Other Batteries-NCM and NCA
Batteries. NCR18650B specifications.
UNIT II BATTERY PACK 9

Battery Pack- design, sizing, calculations, flow chart, real and simulation Model.Peak power –
definition, testing methods-relationships with Power, Temperature and ohmic Internal Resistance.
Cloud based and Local Smart charging.
UNITIII BATTERY MODELLING 9

Battery Modelling Methods-Equivalent Circuit Models, Electrochemical Model, Neural Network
Model. ECM Comparisons- Rint model, Thevenin model, PNGV model. State space Models-
Introduction. Battery Modelling software/simulation frameworks
UNIT IV BATTERY STATE ESTIMATION 9

SOC Estimation- Definition, importance, single cell Vs series batteries SOC. Estimation Methods-
Load voltage, Electromotive force, AC impedance, Ah counting, Neural networks, Neuro-fuzzy
forecast method, Kalman filter. Estimation Algorithms.
UNIT V BMS ARCHITECTURE AND REAL TIME COMPONENTS 9

Battery Management System- need, operation, classification. BMS ASIC-bq76PL536A-Q1 Battery
Monitor IC- CC2662R-Q1 Wireless BMS MCU. Communication Modules- CAN Open-Flex Ray-
CANedge1 package.ARBIN Battery Tester. BMS Development with Modeling software and Model-
Based Design.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, students will be able to
CO1 Acquire knowledge of different Li-ion Batteries performance.
CO2 Design a Battery Pack and make related calculations.
CO3 Demonstrate a BatteryModel or Simulation.
CO4 Estimate State-of-Charges in a Battery Pack.
CO5 Approach different BMS architectures during real world usage.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jiuchun Jiang and Caiping Zhang, “Fundamentals and applications of Lithium-Ion batteriesin
Electric Drive Vehicles’’, Wiley, 2015.
2. Davide Andrea ,“Battery Management Systems for Large Lithium-Ion Battery Packs”
ARTECH House, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Developing Battery Management Systems with Simulink and Model-Based Design-whitepaper
2. Panasonic NCR18650B- DataSheet
3. bq76PL536A-Q1- IC DataSheet
4. CC2662R-Q1- IC DataSheet
AU3008 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to make the students to list common types of sensor and
actuators used in automotive vehicles.
282
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENTS AND SENSORS 9
Sensors: Functions- Classifications- Main technical requirement and trends Units and standards-
Calibration methods- Classification of errors- Error analysis- Limiting error- Probable error-
Propagation of error- Odds and uncertainty- principle of transduction-Classification. Static
characteristics- mathematical model of transducers- Zero, First and Second order transducers-
Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for standard test inputs.
UNIT II VARIABLE RESISTANCE AND INDUTANCE SENSORS 9

Principle of operation- Construction details- Characteristics and applications of resistive
potentiometer- Strain gauges- Resistive thermometers- Thermistors- Piezoresistive sensors
Inductive potentiometer- Variable reluctance transducers:- EI pick up and LVDT
UNIT III VARIABLE AND OTHER SPECIAL SENSORS 9

Variable air gap type, variable area type and variable permittivity type- capacitor microphone
Piezoelectric, Magnetostrictive, Hall Effect, semiconductor sensor- digital transducers-Humidity
Sensor. Rain sensor, climatic condition sensor, solar, light sensor, antiglare sensor.
UNIT IV AUTOMOTIVE ACTUATORS 9

Electromechanical actuators‐ Fluid‐mechanical actuators‐ Electrical machines‐ Direct‐current
machines‐ Three‐phase machines‐ Single‐phase alternating‐current Machines ‐ Duty‐type ratings
for electrical machines. Working principles, construction and location of actuators viz. Solenoid,
relay, stepper motor etc.
UNIT V AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ACTUATORS 9

Different types of actuators used in automatic temperature control‐ Fixed and variable displacement
temperature control‐ Semi Automatic‐ Controller design for Fixed and variable displacement type air
conditioning system.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1 List common types of sensor and actuators used in vehicles.
CO2 Design measuring equipment’s for the measurement of pressure force, temperature and flow.
CO3 Generate new ideas in designing the sensors and actuators for automotive application
CO4 Understand the operation of thesensors, actuators and electronic control.
CO5 Design temperature control actuators for vehicles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin's Measurement Systems: 7th Edition (SIE),Ernest O. Doebelin DhaneshN.Manik
McGraw Hill Publishers, 2019.
2. Robert Brandy, “ Automotive Electronics and Computer System”, Prentice Hall,2001
3. William Kimberley,” Bosch Automotive Handbook”, 6th Edition, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004.
4. Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics Systems and Components, Networking
and Hybrid Drive, 5th Edition, 2007, ISBN No: 978‐3‐658‐01783‐5.
REFERENCES:
1. James D Halderman, “ Automotive Electrical and Electronics” , Prentice Hall, USA, 2013
2. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electrical and Electronics Systems,” Third Edition, 2004, SAE
International.
3. Patranabis.D, “ Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India Ltd,2003
4. William Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics ‐An Engineering Perspective," 7th
Edition, Elsevier Butterworth‐Heinemann Publishers, 2012.
283
OAS353 SPACE VEHICLES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To interpret the missile space stations, space vs earth environment.
 To explain the life support systems, mission logistics and planning.
 To deploy the skills effectively in the understanding of space vehicle configuration design.
 To explain Engine system and support of space vehicle
 To interpret nose cone configuration of space vehicle
UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS 9
Energy and Efficiencies of power plants for space vehicles – Typical Performance Values – Mission
design – Structural design aspects during launch - role of launch environment on launch vehicle
integrity.
UNIT II SELECTION OF ROCKET PROPULSION SYSTEMS 9
Ascent flight mechanics – Launch vehicle selection process – Criteria for Selection for different
missions – selection of subsystems – types of staging – Interfaces – selection and criteria for stages
and their role in launch vehicle configuration design.
UNIT III ENGINE SYSTEMS, CONTROLS, AND INTEGRATION 9
Propellant Budget – Performance of Complete or Multiple Rocket Propulsion Systems – Engine
Design – Engine Controls – Engine System Calibration – System Integration and Engine
Optimization.
UNIT IV THRUST VECTOR CONTROL 9
TVC Mechanisms with a Single Nozzle – TVC with Multiple Thrust Chambers or Nozzles – Testing
– Integration with Vehicle – SITVC method – other jet control methods - exhaust plume problems in
space environment
UNIT V NOSE CONE CONFIGURATION 9
Aerodynamic aspects on the selection of nose shape of a launch vehicle - design factors in the
finalization of nose configuration with respect to payload - nose cone thermal protection system -
separation of fairings - payload injection mechanism
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain exotic space propulsion concepts, such as nuclear, solar sail, and antimatter.
CO2 Apply knowledge in selecting the appropriate rocket propulsion systems.
CO3 interpret the air-breathing propulsion suitable for initial stages and fly-back boosters.
CO4 Analyze aerodynamics aspect, including boost-phase lift and drag, hypersonic, and re-entry.
CO5 Adapt from aircraft engineers moving into launch vehicle, spacecraft, and hypersonic vehicle
design.
OIM352 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
 To introduce fundamental concepts of management and organization to students.
 Toi mpart knowledge to students on various aspects of marketing, quality control and
marketing strategies.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of human resources management.
 To acquaint students with the concepts of project management and cost analysis.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of planning process and business strategies.
284
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION 9
Concepts of Management and organization- nature, importance and Functions of Management,
Systems Approach to Management - Taylor's Scientific Management Theory- Fayal's Principles of
Management- Maslow's theory of Hierarchy of Human Needs- Douglas McGregor's TheoryX and
TheoryY-HertzbergTwoFactorTheoryofMotivation-LeadershipStyles,Social responsibilities of
Management, Designing Organisational Structures: Basic concepts related to Organisation -
Departmentation and Decentralisation.
UNIT II OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9
Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of Production(Job, batch and Mass Production),Work
Study - Basic procedure involved in Method Study and Work Measurement – Business Process
Reengineering (BPR)-Statistical Quality Control:control charts for Variables and Attributes (simple
Problems) and Acceptance Sampling, Objectives of Inventory control, EOQ,ABC Analysis, Purchase
Procedure, Stores Management and Store Records - JIT System,Supply Chain Management,
Functions of Marketing, Marketing Mix, and Marketing Strategies based on ProductLifeCycle.
UNIT III HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9
Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel Management and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM vs
PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager:Manpower planning, Recruitment, Selection,
TrainingandDevelopment,WageandSalaryAdministration,Promotion,Transfer,PerformanceAppraisa
l, Grievance Handling and Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating –Capability
Maturity Model (CMM)Levels.
UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Critical Path
Method(CPM), identifying critical path, Probability of Completing the project within given time, Project
Cost Analysis,Project Crashing (simple problems).
UNITV STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY STRATEGIC ISSUES 9
Mission, Goals, Objectives, Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning Process,
Environmental Scanning, Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy Formulation and
Implementation, Generic Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced Score Cardas
Contemporary Business Strategies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1:`Plan an organizational structure for a given context in the organization to carryout production
operations through Work-study.
CO2: Survey the markets, customers and competition better and price the given products
appropriatey
CO3:Ensure quality for a given product or service.
CO4:Plan, schedule and control projects through PERTandCPM.
CO5:Evaluate strategyforabusiness orserviceorganisation.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. KanishkaBedi, Production and Operations Management,Oxford University Press,2007.
2. Stoner,Freeman, Gilbert, Management,6th Ed, PearsonEducation,NewDelhi,2004.
3. ThomasN.Duening & John M.Ivancevich Management Principles and Guidelines, Biztantra,
2007.
4. P.VijayKumar,N.Appa Rao and Ashnab, Chnalill, CengageLearning India,2012.
REFERECES:
1. KotlerPhilip and KellerKevinLane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.
2. KoontzandWeihrich: Essentials of Management, McGrawHill, 2012.
3. Lawrence RJauch,R.Guptaand William F. Glueck: Business Policy and Strategic Management
Science,McGrawHill,2012.
4. SamuelC.Certo:Modern Management,2012.
285

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2.8 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.4 2 2 2.5
OIM353 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of production planning and control act work study,
 To apply the concept of product planning,
 To analyze the production scheduling,
 To apply the Inventory Control concepts.
 To prepare the manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP).
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of production-
job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect - Functional aspects-
Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect. Profit consideration-
Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis-Economics of a new design.
UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data -
Predetermined motion time standards.
UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9

Product planning-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of
product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process
planning- Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch production-Machine capacity,
balancing- Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product system.
UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9

Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gantt
charts-Perpetual loading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production scheduling-
Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems- Periodic batch
control-Material requirement planning kanban – Dispatching-Progress reporting and expediting-
Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.
UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9

Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures.
Two bin system - Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantity and economic
lot size- ABC analysis - Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production planning
systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
286
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
CO1:The students can able to prepare production planning and control act work study,
CO2:The students can able to prepare product planning,
CO3:The students can able to prepare production scheduling,
CO4:The students can able to prepare Inventory Control.
CO5:They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. James. B. Dilworth, ”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for manufacturing
and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition 1992.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edition, S. Chand
and Company, 2000.
REFERENCES
1. Chary. S.N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw Hill,
1995.
2. Elwood S.Buffa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th Edition
John Wiley and Sons, 2000
3. Jain. K.C. & Aggarwal. L.N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”, Khanna
Publishers, 1990
4. Kanishka Bedi, “Production and Operations management”, 2nd Edition, Oxford university press,
2007.
5. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin Mcgraw hill.
6. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management” 9th Edition, Thomson learning IE, 2007
7. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Universal Book Corpn.1984
8. Upendra Kachru, “ Production and Operations Management – Text and cases” 1st Edition, Excel
books 2007

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 1 1 3
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 2
5 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2 3 1 1 3 1.8
OIE353 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Recognize and appreciate the concept of Production and Operations Management in creating
and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages.
 Describe the concept and contribution of various constituents of Production and Operations
Management (both manufacturing and service).
 Relate the interdependence of the operations function with the other key functional areas of a
firm.
 Teach analytical skills and problem-solving tools to the analysis of the operations problems.
 Apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System Performance.
287
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9
Operations Management – Nature, Importance, historical development, transformation processes,
differences between services and goods, a system perspective, functions, challenges, current
priorities, recent trends; Operations Strategy - Strategic fit , framework; Supply Chain
Management
UNIT II FORECASTING, CAPACITY AND FACILITY DESIGN 9
Demand Forecasting - Need, Types, COURSE OBJECTIVES and Steps. Overview of
Qualitative andQuantitative methods. Capacity Planning - Long range, Types, Developing capacity
alternatives. Overview of sales and operations planning. Overview of MRP, MRP II and ERP.
Facility Location – Theories, Steps in Selection, Location Models. Facility Layout – Principles,
Types, Planning tools and techniques.
UNIT III DESIGN OF PRODUCT, PROCESS AND WORK SYSTEMS 9
Product Design – Influencing factors, Approaches, Legal, Ethical and Environmental issues.
Process – Planning, Selection, Strategy, Major Decisions. Work Study – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Procedure. Method Study and Motion Study. Work Measurement and
Productivity – Measuring Productivityand Methods to improve productivity.
UNIT IV MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 9
Materials Management – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Planning, Budgeting and Control. Purchasing
– COURSE OBJECTIVES, Functions, Policies, Vendor rating and Value Analysis. Stores
Management – Nature, Layout, Classification and Coding. Inventory – COURSE OBJECTIVES,
Costs and control techniques. Overview of JIT.
UNIT V SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Project Management – Scheduling Techniques, PERT, CPM; Scheduling - work centers – nature,
importance; Priority rules and techniques, shopfloor control; Flow shop scheduling – Johnson‟s
Algorithm – Gantt charts; personnel scheduling in services.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: The students will appreciate the role of Production and Operations management in enabling
and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages in the dynamic business environment.
CO2: The students will obtain sufficient knowledge and skills to forecast demand for Production and
Service Systems.
CO3: The students will able to Formulate and Assess Aggregate Planning strategies and
Material Requirement Plan.
CO4: The students will be able to develop analytical skills to calculate capacity requirements and
developing capacity alternatives.
CO5: The students will be able to apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System
Performance.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano, Operations
and Supply Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2010.
2. Norman Gaither and Gregory Frazier, Operations Management, South Western Cengage
Learning, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. William J Stevenson, Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 9th Edition, 2009.
2. Russel and Taylor, Operations Management, Wiley, Fifth Edition, 2006.
3. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press, 2004.
4. Chary S. N, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2008.
5. Aswathappa K and Shridhara Bhat K, Production and Operations Management,
Himalaya Publishing House, Revised Second Edition, 2008.
6. Mahadevan B, Operations Management Theory and practice, Pearson Education, 2007.
7. Pannerselvam R, Production and Operations Management, Prentice Hall India, Second
Edition, 2008.
288
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2
2 3 3 3 3
3 2 3 3 2 3
4 3 3 3 2 3
5 3 2
AVg. 3 2.6 3 2.6 2 2 3 3
OSF352 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Demonstrate an understanding of how occupational hygiene standards are set and used in work
health and safety.
 Compare and contrast the roles of environmental and biological monitoring in work health and
safety
 Outline strategies for identifying, assessing and controlling risks associated with airborne gases,
vapours and particulates
 Discuss how personal protective equipment can be used to reduce risks associated with
workplace exposures
 Provide high-level advice on managing and controlling noise and noise-related hazards
UNIT I : INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE 9

Occupational Health and Environmental Safety Management - Principles practices. Comm on
Occupational diseases: Occupational Health Management Services at the work place. Pre-
employment, periodic medical examination of workers, medical surveillance for control of
occupational diseases and health records.
UNIT II : MONITORING FOR SAFETY, HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT 9

Occupational Health and Environment Safety Management System, ILO and EPA Standards
Industrial Hygiene: Definition of Industrial Hygiene, Industrial Hygiene: Control Methods,
Substitution, Changing the process, Local Exhaust Ventilation, Isolation, Wet method, Personal
hygiene, housekeeping and maintenance, waste disposal, special control measures.
UNIT III : OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY EDUCATION 9

Element of training cycle, Assessment of needs.Techniques of training, design and development of
training programs.Training methods and strategies types of training.Evaluation and review of training
programs. Occupational Health Hazards, Promoting Safety, Safety and Health training, Stress and
Safety, Exposure Limit .
UNIT IV : OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT 9

Bureau of Indian standards on safety and health 14489 - 1998 and 15001 – 2000, OSHA, Process
Safety Management (PSM) as per OSHA, PSM principles, OHSAS – 18001, EPA Standards,
Performance measurements to determine effectiveness of PSM. Importance of Industrial safety, role
of safety department,
UNIT V : INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS 9

i. Radiation: Types and effects of radiation on human body, Measurement and detection of radiation
intensity. Effects of radiation on human body, Measurement – disposal of radioactive waste, Control
of radiation ii. Noise and Vibration: Sources, and its control, Effects of noise on the auditory system
and health, Measurement of noise , Different air pollutants in industries, Effect of different gases and
particulate matter ,acid fumes ,smoke, fog on human health, Vibration: effects.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
289
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1: Explain and apply human factors engineering concepts in both evaluation of existing systems
and design of new systems
CO2: Specify designs that avoid occupation related injuries
CO3: Define and apply the principles of work design, motion economy, and work environment
design.
CO4: Identify the basic human sensory, cognitive, and physical capabilities and limitations with
respect to human-machine system performance.
CO5: Acknowledge the impact of workplace design and environment on productivity
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao , Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems,
Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006)
2. Slote. L, Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, John Willey and Sons, New York .
REFERENCES:
1. Jeanne MagerStellman, Encyclopedia of Occupational Health and Safety (ILO) Ms. Irma
Jourdan publication
2. Frank P Lees - Loss of prevention in Process Industries, Vol. 1 and 2,
3. ButterworthHeinemann Ltd., London (1991). 2. Industrial Safety - National Safety Council of
India
4. Frank P Lees – Loss of prevention in Process Industries , Vol. 1 and 2, Butterworth- Heinemann
Ltd., London
5. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao, Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems,
Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006).
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
2 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 - - - -
3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
4 - - - - - - 2 - 3 - - - -
5 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - -
AVg. 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 2 - 2 - - -
OSF353 CHEMICAL PROCESS SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Teach the principles of safety applicable to the design, and operation of chemical process
plants.
 Ensure that potential hazards are identified and mitigation measures are in place to prevent
unwanted release of energy.
 Learn about the hazardous chemicals into locations that could expose employees and others
to serious harm.
 Focuses on preventing incidents and accidents during large scale manufacturing of chemicals
and pharmaceuticals.
 Ensure that the general design of the plant is capable of complying with the dose limits in force
and with the radioactive releases.
UNIT I SAFETY IN THE STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CHEMICALS AND GASES 9

Types of storage-general considerations for storage layouts- atmospheric venting, pressure and
temperature relief - relief valve sizing calculations - storage and handling of hazardous chemicals
and industrial gases, safe disposal methods, reaction with other chemicals, hazards during
transportation - pipe line transport - safety in chemical laboratories.
290
UNIT II CHEMICAL REACTION HAZARDS 9
Hazardous inorganic and organic reactions and processes, Reactivity as a process hazard,
Detonations, Deflagrations, and Runaways, Assessment and Testing strategies, Self - heating
hazards of solids, Explosive potential of chemicals, Structural groups and instability of chemicals,
Thermochemical screening,
UNIT III SAFETY IN THE DESIGN OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Design principles -Process design development -types of designs, feasibility survey, preliminary
design, Flow diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagram, batch versus continuous operation,
factors in equipment scale up and design, equipment specifications - reliability and safety in
designing - inherent safety - engineered safety - safety during startup and shutdown - non
destructive testing methods - pressure and leak testing - emergency safety devices - scrubbers
and flares- new concepts in safety design and operation- Pressure vessel testing standards-
Inspection techniques for boilers and reaction vessels.
UNIT IV SAFETY IN THE OPERATION OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Properties of chemicals - Material Safety Data Sheets - the various properties and formats used -
methods available for property determination. Operational activities and hazards -standards
operating procedures - safe operation of pumps, compressors, heaters, column, reactors,
pressure vessels, storage vessels, piping systems - effects of pressure, temperature, Flow rate
and humidity on operations - corrosion and control measures- condition monitoring - control valves
- safety valves - pressure reducing valves, drains, bypass valves, inert gases. Chemical splashes,
eye irrigation and automatic showers.
UNIT V SAFETY AND ANALYSIS 9

Safety vs reliability- quantification of basic events, system safety quantification, Human error
analysis, Accident investigation and analysis, OSHAS 18001 and OSHMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Differentiate between inherent safety and engineered safety and recognize the
importance of safety in the design of chemical process plants.
CO2 Develop thorough knowledge about safety in the operation of chemical plants.
CO3 Apply the principles of safety in the storage and handling of gases.
CO4 Identify the conditions that lead to reaction hazards and adopt measures to prevent them.
CO5 Develop thorough knowledge about
TEXT BOOK
1 David A Crowl& Joseph F Louvar,”Chemical Process safety”, Pearson publication, 3rd
Edition,2014
2 Maurice Jones .A,”Fire Protection Systems,2nd edition, Jones & Bartlett Publishers,2015
REFERENCES:
1. Ralph King and Ron Hirst,”King´s safety in the process industries”, Arnold, London, 1998.
2. Industrial Environment and its Evolution and Control, NIOSH Publication, 1973.
3. National Safety Council,” Accident prevention manual for industrial operations”. Chicago,
1982.
4. Lewis, Richard. J., Sr,“Sax´s dangerous properties of materials”. (Ninth edition). Van
Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1996.
5. Roy E Sanders, ”Chemical Process Safety”,3rd Edition, Gulf professional publishing, 2006
291
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - 2 - -
2 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 -
3 - 3 1 - - - 2 - - 1 - - - -
4 - 2 - - 1 - - 1 - - - - 2
5 - 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - -
AVg. 2 2.5 3 1.5 - 1 - 1.5 1 - 1 2 2 2
OML352 ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the importance of various materials used in electrical, electronics and
 magnetic applications
 Acquiring knowledge on the properties of electrical, electronics and magnetic materials.
 Gaining knowledge on the selection of suitable materials for the given application
 Knowing the fundamental concepts in Semiconducting materials
 Getting equipped with the materials used in optical and optoelectronic applications.
UNIT I DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9

Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss, dielectric strength, breakdown
voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid dielectrics, electric conductivity in solid, liquid
and gaseous dielectrics, Ferromagnetic materials, properties of ferromagnetic materials in static
fields, spontaneous, polarization, curie point, anti-ferromagnetic materials, piezoelectric materials,
pyroelectric materials.
UNIT II MAGNETIC MATERIALS 9

Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in ferromagnetic materials,
magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically soft and hard materials, special
purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials, Ferrites, cast and cermet permanent magnets, ageing
of magnets. Factors effecting permeability and Hysteresis
UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIALS 9

Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration techniques, Large and very large scale
Integration techniques. Concept of superconductivity; theories and examples for high temperature
superconductivity; discussion on specific superconducting materials; comments on fabrication and
engineering applications.
UNIT IV MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters, transmission line structures, stranded conductors,
bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric contact materials, electric carbon materials,
thermocouple materials. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous insulating materials, Effect of moisture on
insulation.
UNIT V OPTICAL AND OPTOELECTRONIC MATERIALS 9

Principles of photoconductivity - effect of impurities - principles of luminescence-laser principles -
He-Ne, injection lasers, LED materials - binary, ternary photoelectronic materials - LCD materials -
photo detectors - applications of optoelectronic materials - optical fibres and materials - electro optic
modulators - Kerr effect - Pockels effect.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
292
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand various types of dielectric materials, their properties in various conditions.
CO2 Evaluate magnetic materials and their behavior.
CO3 Evaluate semiconductor materials and technologies.
CO4 Select suitable materials for electrical engineering applications.
CO5 Identify right material for optical and optoelectronic applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradeep Fulay, “Electronic, Magnetic and Optical materials”, CRC Press, taylor and Francis, 2
nd illustrated edition, 2017.
2. “R K Rajput”, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Laxmi Publications, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. T K Basak, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, New Age Science Publications, 2009
2. TTTI Madras, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 2004.
3. Adrianus J. Dekker, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, PHI Publication, 2006.
4. S. P. Seth, P. V. Gupta “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Dhanpat Rai & amp; Sons,
2011.
5. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 7th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,Singapore,
(2006).
PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3
C01 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 3 1.8 1.6 2.2 2 2 2 1.2
OML353 NANOMATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the evolution of nanomaterials in the scientific era and make them to
understand different types of nanomaterials for the future engineering applications
 Gaining knowledge on dimensionality effects on different properties of nanomaterials
 Getting acquainted with the different processing techniques employed for fabricating
nanomaterials
 Having knowledge on the different characterisation techniques employed to characterise the
nanomaterials
 Acquiring knowledge on different applications of nanomaterials in different disciplines of
engineering.
UNIT I NANOMATERIALS 9
Introduction, Classification: 0D, 1D, 2D, 3D nanomaterials and nano-composites, their mechanical,
electrical, optical, magnetic properties; Nanomaterials versus bulk materials.
293
UNIT II THERMODYNAMICS & KINETICS OF NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS 9
Size and interface/interphase effects, interfacial thermodynamics, phase diagrams, diffusivity, grain
growth, and thermal stability of nanomaterials.
UNIT III PROCESSING 9

Bottom-up and top-down approaches for the synthesis of nanomaterials, mechanical alloying,
chemical routes, severe plastic deformation, and electrical wire explosion technique.
UNIT IV STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS 9

Principles of emerging nanoscale X-ray techniques such as small angle X-ray scattering and X-ray
absorption fine structure (XAFS), electron and neutron diffraction techniques and their application to
nanomaterials; SPM, Nanoindentation, Grain size, phase formation, texture, stress analysis
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of nanoparticles, quantum dots, nanotubes, nanowires, nanocoatings; applications in
electronic, electrical and medical industries
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Evaluate nanomaterials and understand the different types of nanomaterials
CO2 Recognise the effects of dimensionality of materials on the properties
CO3 Process different nanomaterials and use them in engineering applications
CO4 Use appropriate techniques for characterising nanomaterials
CO5 Identify and use different nanomaterials for applications in different engineering fields.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhusan, Bharat (Ed), “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, 2nd edition, 2007.
2. Carl C. Koch (ed.), NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS, Processing, Properties and Potential
Applications, NOYES PUBLICATIONS, Norwich, New York, U.S.A.
REFERENCES:
1. Poole C.P, and Owens F.J., Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley 2003
2. Nalwa H.S., Encyclopedia of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, American Scientific Publishers
2004
3. Zehetbauer M.J. and Zhu Y.T., Bulk Nanostructured Materials, Wiley 2008
4. Wang Z.L., Characterization of Nanophase Materials, Wiley 2000
5. Gutkin Y., Ovid’ko I.A. and Gutkin M., Plastic Deformation in Nanocrystalline Materials,
Springer 2004
PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.7 2.2 2 1.8 2 1.3
294
OMR352 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T PC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To knowledge on fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
 To obtain the knowledge in hydraulic actuators and control components
 To understand the basics in hydraulic circuits and systems
 To obtain the knowledge in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
 To apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting
UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINICIPLES AND HYDRAULIC PUMPS 9

Introduction to Fluid power – Advantages and Applications – Fluid power systems – Types of fluids
- Properties of fluids and selection – Basics of Hydraulics – Pascal’s Law – Principles of flow - Friction
loss – Work, Power and Torque Problems, Sources of Hydraulic power : Pumping Theory – Pump
Classification – Construction, Working, Design, Advantages, Disadvantages, Performance,
Selection criteria of Linear and Rotary – Fixed and Variable displacement pumps – Problems.
UNIT II HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND CONTROL COMPONENTS 9

Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Application, Hydraulic cushioning –
Hydraulic motors - Control Components : Direction Control, Flow control and pressure control valves
– Types, Construction and Operation – Servo and Proportional valves – Applications – Accessories
: Reservoirs, Pressure Switches – Applications – Fluid Power ANSI Symbols – Problems.
UNIT III HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS 9

Accumulators, Intensifiers, Industrial hydraulic circuits – Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double
Pump, Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil, Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-Safe,
Speed Control, Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical hydraulic servo
systems.
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRO PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9

Properties of air – Perfect Gas Laws – Compressor – Filters, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air
control Valves, Quick Exhaust Valves, Pneumatic actuators, Design of Pneumatic circuit – Cascade
method – Electro Pneumatic System – Elements – Ladder diagram – Problems, Introduction to
fluidics and pneumatic logic circuits
UNIT V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND APPLICATIONS 9

Installation, Selection, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting and Remedies in Hydraulic and Pneumatic
systems, Design of hydraulic circuits for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Surface grinding, Press and
Forklift applications. Design of Pneumatic circuits for Pick and Place applications and tool handling
in CNC Machine tools – Low cost Automation – Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Analyze the methods in fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
CO2: Recognize the concepts in hydraulic actuators and control components
CO3: Obtain the knowledge in basics of hydraulic circuits and systems
CO4: Know about the basics concept in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
CO5: Apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting hydraulic and pneumatics
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. James A. Sullivan, “Fluid Power Theory and Applications”, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall, 1997.
REFERENCES
1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”. Chand & Co, 2006.
2. Majumdar, S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McG Raw Hill,
2001.
295
3. Majumdar, S.R., “Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGRaw Hill, 2007.
4. Dudley, A. Pease and John J Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987
5. Srinivasan. R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”, Vijay Nicole Imprints, 2008
6. Joshi.P, Pneumatic Control”, Wiley India, 2008.
7. Jagadeesha T, “Pneumatics Concepts, Design and Applications “, Universities Press, 2015.

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO/PO & 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
PSO
Average
OMR353 SENSORS LT P C
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the various types of sensors, transducers, sensor output signal types, calibration
techniques, formulation of system equation and its characteristics.
 To understand basic working principle, construction, Application and characteristics of
displacement, speed and ranging sensors.
 To understand and analyze the working principle, construction, application and characteristics of
force, magnetic and heading sensors.
 To learn and analyze the working principle, construction, application and characteristics of optical,
pressure, temperature and other sensors.
 To familiarize students with different signal conditioning circuits design and data acquisition
system.
UNIT I SENSOR CLASSIFICATION, CHARACTERISTICS AND SIGNAL TYPES 9

Basics of Measurement – Classification of Errors – Error Analysis – Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Transducers – Performance Measures of Sensors – Classification of Sensors –
Sensor Calibration Techniques – Sensor Outputs - Signal Types - Analog and Digital Signals, PWM
and PPM.
UNIT II DISPLACEMENT, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9

Displacement Sensors – Brush Encoders - Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical, Magnetic,
Inductive, Capacitive, LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer – Range Sensors -
Ultrasonic Ranging - Reflective Beacons - Laser Range Sensor (LIDAR) – GPS - RF Beacons.
UNIT III FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 9

Strain Gage – Types, Working, Advantage, Limitation, and Applications: Load Measurement – Force
and Torque Measurement - Magnetic Sensors – Types, Principle, Advantage, Limitation, and
Applications - Magneto Resistive – Hall Effect, Eddy Current Sensor - Heading Sensors – Compass,
Gyroscope and Inclinometers.
296
UNIT IV OPTICAL, PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE AND OTHER SENSORS 9
Photo Conductive Cell, Photo Voltaic, Photo Resistive, LDR – Fiber Optic Sensors – Pressure –
Diaphragm – Bellows - Piezoelectric - Piezo-resistive - Acoustic, Temperature – IC, Thermistor, RTD,
Thermocouple – Non Contact Sensor - Chemical Sensors - MEMS Sensors - Smart Sensors.
UNIT V SIGNAL CONDITIONING 9

Need for Signal Conditioning – Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Bridges for Measurement - DC
and AC Signal Conditioning - Voltage, Current, Power and Instrumentation Amplifiers – Filter and
Isolation Circuits – Fundamentals of Data Acquisition System
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Understand various sensor effects, sensor characteristics, signal types, calibration
methods and obtain transfer function and empirical relation of sensors. They can also
analyze the densor response.
CO2: Analyze and select suitable sensor for displacement, proximity and range measurement.
CO3: Analyze and select suitable sensor for force, magnetic field, speed, position and direction
measurement.
CO4: Analyze and Select suitable sensor for light detection, pressure and temperature
measurement and also familiar with other miniaturized smart sensors.
CO5: Select and design suitable signal conditioning circuit with proper compensation and
linearizing element based on sensor output signal.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage Learning,
2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 3 2 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 2 3 2 1
Average
297
ORA352 CONCEPTS IN MOBILE ROBOTS LTP C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce mobile robotic technology and its types in detail.
 To learn the kinematics of wheeled and legged robot.
 To familiarize the intelligence into the mobile robots using various sensors.
 To acquaint the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
 To aware the collaborative mobile robotics in task planning, navigation and intelligence.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE ROBOTICS 9

Introduction – Locomotion of the Robots – Key Issues on Locomotion – Legged Mobile Roots –
Configurations and Stability – Wheeled Mobile Robots – Design Space and Mobility Issues –
Unmanned Aerial and Underwater Vehicles
UNIT II KINEMATICS 9
Kinematic Models – Representation of Robot – Forward Kinematics – Wheel and Robot Constraints
– Degree of Mobility and Steerability – Manoeuvrability – Workspace – Degrees of Freedom – Path
and Trajectory Considerations – Motion Controls - Holonomic Robots
UNIT III PERCEPTION 9

Sensor for Mobile Robots – Classification and Performance Characterization – Wheel/Motor Sensors
– Heading Sensors - Ground-Based Beacons - Active Ranging - Motion/Speed Sensors – Camera -
Visual Appearance based Feature Extraction.
UNIT IV LOCALIZATION 9
Localization Based Navigation Versus Programmed Solutions - Map Representation - Continuous
Representations - Decomposition Strategies - Probabilistic Map-Based Localization - Landmark-
Based Navigation - Globally Unique Localization - Positioning Beacon Systems - Route-Based
Localization - Autonomous Map Building - Simultaneous Localization and Mapping (SLAM).
UNIT V PLANNING, NAVIGATION AND COLLABORATIVE ROBOTS 9

Introduction - Competences for Navigation: Planning and Reacting - Path Planning - Obstacle
Avoidance - Navigation Architectures - Control Localization - Techniques for Decomposition - Case
Studies – Collaborative Robots – Swarm Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Evaluate the appropriate mobile robots for the desired application.
CO2: Create the kinematics for given wheeled and legged robot.
CO3:Analyse the sensors for the intelligence of mobile robotics.
CO4: Create the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
CO5: Create the collaborative mobile robotics for planning, navigation and intelligence for desired
applications.
TEXTBOOK
1. Roland Siegwart and IllahR.Nourbakish, “Introduction to Autonomous Mobile Robots” MIT
Press, Cambridge, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Dragomir N. Nenchev, Atsushi Konno, TeppeiTsujita, “Humanoid Robots: Modelling and
Control”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2018
2. MohantaJagadish Chandra, “Introduction to Mobile Robots Navigation”, LAP Lambert Academic
Publishing, 2015.
3. Peter Corke, “Robotics, Vision and Control”, Springer, 2017.
4. Ulrich Nehmzow, “Mobile Robotics: A Practical Introduction”, Springer, 2003.
298
5. Xiao Qi Chen, Y.Q. Chen and J.G. Chase, “Mobile Robots - State of the Art in Land, Sea, Air,
and Collaborative Missions”, Intec Press, 2009.
6. Alonzo Kelly, Mobile Robotics: Mathematics, Models, and Methods, Cambridge University
Press, 2013, ISBN: 978-1107031159.
MV3501 MARINE PROPULSION LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
 To educate them on basic layout and propulsion equipment’s
 To impart basic knowledge on performance of the ship
 To impart basic knowledge on Ship propeller and its types
 To impart knowledge on ship rudder and its types
UNIT I BASICS SHIP PROPULSION SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENTS 9

law of floatation - Basics principle of propulsion- Earlier methods of propulsion- ship propulsion
machinery- boiler, Marine steam engine, diesel engine, ship power transmission system, ship
dynamic structure, Marine propulsion equipment - shaft tunnel, Intermediate shaft and bearing, stern
tube, stern tube sealing etc. degree of freedom, Modern propelling methods- water jet propulsion ,
screw propulsion.
UNIT II SHIPS MOVEMENTS AND SHIP STABILIZATION 9

Thrust augmented devices, Ship hull, modern ship propulsion design, bow thruster – Advantages,
various methods to stabilize the ship- passive and active stabilizer, fin stabilizer, bilge keel -
stabilizing and securing ship in port- effect of tides on ship – effect of river water and sea water
sailing vessel, Load line and load line of marking- draught markings.
UNIT III SHIPS SPEED AND ITS PERFORMANCE 9

Ship propulsion factors, factors affecting ships speed, various velocities of ship, hull drag, effects of
fouling on ships hull, ship wake, relation between powers, Fuel consumption of ship, cavitations -
effects of cavitation’s, ship turning radius.
UNIT IV BASICS OF PROPELLER 9

Propeller dimension, Propeller and its types – fixed propeller, control pitch propeller, kort nozzle,
ducted propeller, voith schneider, Parts of propeller, 3 blade - 5 blade - 6 blade propellers and its
advantages, propeller boss hub, crown nut, propeller skew, pitch of propeller - Thrust creation by
propeller. Propeller Material – Propeller balancing- static and dynamic.
UNIT V BASICS OF RUDDER 9

Rudder dimension, Area of rudder and its design, Rudder arrangements, Rudder fittings- Rudder
pintle - Rudder types- Balanced rudder, semi balanced rudder, Spade rudder, merits and demerits
of various types of rudders, Propeller and rudder interaction, Rudder stopper, movement of rudders,
Basic construction of Rudder
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
CO2: Familiarize with various components assisting ship stabilization.
CO3: Demonstrate the performance of the ship.
CO4: Classify the Propeller and its types, Materials etc.
CO5: Categories the Rudder and its types, design criteria of rudder.
299
TEXT BOOKS:
1. GP. Ghose, “Basic Ship propulsion”,2015
2. E.A. Stokoe “Reeds Ship construction for marine engineers”, Vol. 5,2010
3. E.A. Stokoe, “Reeds Naval architecture for the marine engineers”,4th Edition,2009
REFERENCES:
1. DJ Eyers and GJ Bruse, “Ship Construction”, 7th Edition, 2006.
2. KJ Rawson and EC Tupper, “Basic Ship theory I” Vol. 1,5th Edition,2001.
CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO8 PO PO PO PO PS PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3 O4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5= 2/2= 4/4= 4/4= 2/2 1/1 1/1= 2/2 1/1= 1/1=1 5/5 5/5=
1 1 1 1 =1 =1 1 =1 1 =1 1
OMV351 MARINE MERCHANT VESSELS LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to acquire
 Knowledge on basics of Hydrostatics
 Familiarization on types of merchant ships
 Knowledge on Shipbuilding Materials
 Knowledge on marine propeller and rudder
 Awareness on governing bodies in shipping industry
UNIT I INTRODUCTION to HYDROSTATICS 9

Archimedes Principle- Laws of floatation– Meta centre – stability of floating and submerged bodies-
Density, relative density - Displacement –Pressure –centre of pressure.
UNIT II TYPES OF SHIP 10

General cargo ship - Refrigerated cargo ships - Container ships - Roll-on Roll-off ships – Oil tankers-
Bulk carriers - Liquefied Natural Gas carriers - Liquefied Petroleum Gascarriers - Chemical tankers -
Passenger ships
UNIT III SHIPBUILDING MATERIALS 9

Types of Steels used in Shipbuilding - High tensile steels, Corrosion resistant steels, Steel sandwich
panels, Steel castings, Steel forgings - Other shipbuilding materials, Aluminium alloys, Aluminium
alloy sandwich panels, Fire protection especially for Aluminium Alloys, Fiber Reinforced Composites
UNIT IV MARINE PROPELLER AND RUDDER 8

Types of rudder, construction of Rudder-Types of Propeller, Propeller material-Cavitations and its
effects on propeller
300
UNIT V GOVERNING BODIES FOR SHIPPING INDUSTRY 9
Role of IMO (International Maritime Organization), SOLAS (International Convention for the Safety
of Life at Sea), MARPOL (International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships ) ,
MLC (Maritime Labour Convention), STCW 2010 (International Convention on Standards of
Training, Certification and Watch keeping for Seafarers), Classification societies Administration
authorities
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, students would
CO1 Acquire Knowledge on floatation of ships
CO2 Acquire Knowledge on features of various ships
CO3 Acquire Knowledge of Shipbuilding Materials
CO4 Acquire Knowledge to identify the different types of marine propeller
and rudder
CO5 Understand the Roles and responsibilities of governing bodies
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.J.Eyres, “Ship Constructions”, Seventh Edition, Butter Worth Heinemann Publishing,
USA,2015
2. Dr.DA Taylor, “Merchant Ship Naval Architecture” I. Mar EST publications, 2006
3. EA Stokoe, E.A, “Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers”, Vol.4, Reeds Publications,2000
REFERENCES:
1. Kemp & Young “Ship Construction Sketches & Notes”, Butter Worth Heinemann
Publishing,USA, 2011
2. MARPOL Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2018
3. SOLAS Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2016
OMV352 ELEMENTS OF MARINE ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to
 Understand the role of Marine machinery systems
 Be familiar with Marine propulsion machinery system
 Acquaint with Marine Auxiliary machinery system
 Have acquired basics of Marine Auxiliary boiler system
 Be aware of ship propellers and steering system
UNIT I ELEMENTARY KNOWLEDGE ON MARINE MACHINERY SYSTEMS 9

Marine Engineering Terminologies, Parts of Ship, Introduction to Machinery systems on board ships
– Propulsion Machinery system, Electricity Generator system, Steering gear system, Air
compressors & Air reservoirs, Fuel oil and Lubricating Oil Purifiers, Marine Boiler systems
UNIT II MARINE PROPULSION MACHINERY SYSTEM 9

Two stroke Large Marine slow speed Diesel Engine – General Construction, Basic knowledge of Air
starting and reversing mechanism, Cylinder lubrication oil system, Main lubricating oil system and
cooling water system
301
UNIT III MARINE AUXILIARY MACHINERY SYSTEM 9
Four stroke medium speed Diesel engine – General Construction, Inline, V-type arrangement of
engine, Difference between slow speed and medium speed engines – advantages, limitations and
applications
UNIT IV MARINE BOILER SYSTEM 9

Types of Boiler – Difference between Water tube boiler and Fire tube boiler, Need for boiler on board
ships, Uses of steam, Advantages of using steam as working medium, Boiler mountings and
accessories – importance of mountings, need for accessories
UNIT V SHIP PROPELLERS AND STEERING MECHANISM 9

Importance of Propellor and Steering gear, Types of propellers - Fixed pitch propellers, Controllable
pitch propellers, Water jet propellers, Steering gear systems - 2-Ram and 4 Ram steering gear,
Electric steering gear
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should able to,
CO1 Distinguish the role of various marine machinery systems
CO2 Relate the components of marine propulsion machinery system
CO3 Explain the importance of marine auxiliary machinery system
CO4 Acquire knowledge of marine boiler system
CO5 Understand the importance of ship propellors and steering system
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Taylor, “Introduction to Marine engineering”, Revised Second Edition, Butterworth Heinemann,
London, 2011
2. J.K.Dhar, “Basic Marine Engineering”, Tenth Edition, G-Maritime Publications, Mumbai, 2011
3. K.Ramaraj, “ Text book on Marine Engineering”, Eswar Press, Chennai, 2018
REFERENCES:
1. Alan L.Rowen, “Introduction to Practical Marine Engineering, Volume 1&2, The Institute of
Marine Engineers (India), Mumbai, 2006
2. A.S.Tambwekar, “Naval Architecture and Ship Construction”, The Institute of Marine Engineers
(India), Mumbai, 2015
CRA332 DRONE TECHNOLOGIES LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of drone concepts
 To learn and understand the fundaments of design, fabrication and programming of drone
 To impart the knowledge of an flying and operation of drone
 To know about the various applications of drone
 To understand the safety risks and guidelines of fly safely
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DRONE TECHNOLOGY 9

Drone Concept - Vocabulary Terminology- History of drone - Types of current generation of drones
based on their method of propulsion- Drone technology impact on the businesses- Drone business
through entrepreneurship- Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and employability
UNIT II DRONE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND PROGRAMMING 9

Classifications of the UAV -Overview of the main drone parts- Technical characteristics of the parts
-Function of the component parts -Assembling a drone- The energy sources- Level of autonomy-
302
Drones configurations -The methods of programming drone- Download program -Install program
on computer- Running Programs- Multi rotor stabilization- Flight modes -Wi-Fi connection.
UNIT III DRONE FLYING AND OPERATION 9

Concept of operation for drone -Flight modes- Operate a small drone in a controlled environment-
Drone controls Flight operations –management tool –Sensors-Onboard storage capacity -
Removable storage devices- Linked mobile devices and applications
UNIT IV DRONE COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Choosing a drone based on the application -Drones in the insurance sector- Drones in delivering
mail, parcels and other cargo- Drones in agriculture- Drones in inspection of transmission lines and
power distribution -Drones in filming and panoramic picturing
UNIT V FUTURE DRONES AND SAFETY 9

The safety risks- Guidelines to fly safely -Specific aviation regulation and standardization- Drone
license- Miniaturization of drones- Increasing autonomy of drones -The use of drones in swarms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Know about a various type of drone technology, drone fabrication and programming.
CO2: Execute the suitable operating procedures for functioning a drone
CO3: Select appropriate sensors and actuators for Drones
CO4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications
CO5: Createthe programs for various drones
TEXT BOOKS
1. Daniel Tal and John Altschuld, “Drone Technology in Architecture, Engineering and
Construction: A Strategic Guide to Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Operation and Implementation”,
2021 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc, 2016
REFERENCES
1. John Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and ROVs”,
Que Publishing, 2016
2. Zavrsnik, “Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for Security and
Surveillance”, Springer, 2018.

COs/Pos&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
303
OGI352 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart the knowledge on basic components, data preparation and implementation of
Geographical Information System.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9

Introduction to GIS - Basic spatial concepts - Coordinate Systems - GIS and Information
Systems – Definitions – History of GIS - Components of a GIS – Hardware, Software, Data,
People, Methods – Proprietary and open source Software - Types of data – Spatial, Attribute
data- types of attributes – scales/ levels of measurements.
UNIT II SPATIAL DATA MODELS 9

Database Structures – Relational, Object Oriented – Entities – ER diagram - data models -
conceptual, logical and physical models - spatial data models – Raster Data Structures – Raster
Data Compression - Vector Data Structures - Raster vs Vector Models- TIN and GRID data models.
UNIT III DATA INPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9

Scanner - Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Georeferencing – Vector Data Input –
Digitizer – Datum Projection and reprojection -Coordinate Transformation – Topology - Adjacency,
connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency – Non topological file formats - Attribute
Data linking – Linking External Databases – GPS Data Integration
UNIT IV DATA QUALITY AND STANDARDS 9
Data quality - Basic aspects - completeness, logical consistency, positional accuracy, temporal
accuracy, thematic accuracy and lineage – Metadata – GIS Standards –Interoperability - OGC -
Spatial Data Infrastructure
UNIT V DATA MANAGEMENT AND OUTPUT 9
Import/Export – Data Management functions- Raster to Vector and Vector to Raster Conversion -
Data Output - Map Compilation – Chart/Graphs – Multimedia – Enterprise Vs. Desktop GIS-
distributed GIS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Have basic idea about the fundamentals of GIS.
CO2 Understand the types of data models.
CO3 Get knowledge about data input and topology
CO4 Gain knowledge on data quality and standards
CO5 Understand data management functions and data output
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kang - Tsung Chang, Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, McGraw Hill Publishing,
2nd Edition, 2011.
2. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction Geographical
Information Systems, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,2007.
REFERENCE:
1. Lo. C. P., Albert K.W. Yeung, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems,
Prentice-Hall India Publishers, 2006

PO Graduate Attribute Course Outcome Average
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3 3
304
3 3 3
Problems
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO10 Communication
PO12 Life-long Learning
PSO1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
discipline
Engineering problems and 3 3 3 3 3
innovations
Design solutions 3 3 3 3 3
OAI352 AGRICULTURE ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the importance of Agri-business management, its characteristics and principles
 To impart knowledge on the functional areas of Agri-business like Marketing management,
Product pricing methods and Market potential assessment.
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURIAL ENVIRONMENT IN INDIAN CONTEXT 9

Entrepreneur Development(ED): Concept of entrepreneur and entrepreneurship assessing overall
business environment in Indian economy- Entrepreneurial and managerial characteristics-
Entrepreneurship development programmers (EDP)-Generation incubation and commercialization
of ideas and innovations- Motivation and entrepreneurship development- Globalization and the
emerging business entrepreneurial environment.
UNIT II AGRIPRNEURSHIP IN GLOBAL ARENA: LEGAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Importance of agribusiness in Indian economy - International trade-WTO agreements- Provisions
related to agreements in agricultural and food commodities - Agreements on Agriculture (AOA)-
Domestic supply, market access, export subsidies agreements on sanitary and phyto-sanitary (SPS)
measures, Trade related intellectual property rights (TRIPS).
UNIT III ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT: FINANCIAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Entrepreneurship - Essence of managerial Knowledge -Management functions- Planning-
organizing-Directing-Motivation-ordering-leading-supervision- communication and control-
Understanding Financial Aspects of Business - Importance of financial statements-liquidity ratios-
leverage ratios, coverage ratios-turnover ratios-Profitability ratios. Agro-based industries-Project-
Project cycle-Project appraisal and evaluation techniques-undiscounted measures-Payback period-
proceeds per rupee of outlay, Discounted measures-Net Present Value (NPV)-Benefit-Cost
Ratio(BCR)-Internal Rate of Return(IRR)-Net benefit investment ratio(N/K ratio)-sensitivity analysis.
305
UNIT IV ENTREPRENEURIAL OPPORTUNITIES: ECONOMIC GROWTH
PERSPECTIVE 9
Managing an enterprise: Importance of planning, budgeting, monitoring evaluation and follow-up
managing competition. Role of ED in economic development of a country- Overview of Indian social,
political system and their implications for decision making by individual entrepreneurs- Economic
system and its implication for decision making by individual entrepreneurs.
UNIT V ENTREPRENEURIAL PROMOTION MEASURES AND GOVERNMENT

SUPPORT 9
Social responsibility of business. Morals and ethics in enterprise management- SWOT analysis-
Government schemes and incentives for promotions of entrepreneurship. Government policy on
small and medium enterprises (SMEs)/SSIs/MSME sectors- Venture capital (VC), contract framing
(CF) and Joint Venture (JV), public-private
partnerships (PPP) - overview of agricultural engineering industry, characteristics of Indian farm
machinery industry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Judge about agricultural finance, banking and cooperation
CO2 Evaluate basic concepts, principles and functions of financial management
CO3 Improve the skills on basic banking and insurance schemes available to customers
CO4 Analyze various financial data for efficient farm management
CO5 Identify the financial institutions
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph L. Massie, 1995, “Essentials of Management”, prentice Hall of India Pvt limited, New
Delhi
2. Khanka S, 1999, Entrepreneurial Development, S, Chand and Co, New Delhi
3. Mohanty S K, 2007, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi.
REFERENCES
1. Harih S B, Conner U J and Schwab G D, 1981, Management of the Farm Business, Prentice
Hall Inc, New Jersey
2. Omri Ralins, N.1980, Introduction to Agricultural: Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey
3. Gittenger Price, 1989, Economic Analysis of Agricultural project, John Hopkins University, Press,
London.
4. Thomas W Zimmer and Norman M Scarborough, 1996, Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey.
5. Mar J Dollinger, 1999, Entrepreneurship strategies and resources, Prentice –Hall, Upper Saddal
Rover, New Jersey.

correlation of
COs with POs
PO3 Design/ Development of
1 1 1 2 1 2
Solutions
PO4 Conduct Investigations of
1 1 2 1 1 1
Complex Problems
PO8 Ethics 1 2 1 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 1 2 1 1
306
PO11 Project management and
1 1 2 1 1 1
finance
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 1 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving
1 2 1 1 1 1
approach in agriculture with
proper knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to
1 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural
productivity using modern
technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial
skills through strong Industry- 1 2 1 1 2 1
Institution linkage.
OEN352 BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 The identification of different aspects of biological diversity and conservation techniques.
Concept of Species, Variation; Introduction to Major Plant Groups; Evolutionary relationships
between Plant Groups; Nomenclature and History of plant taxonomy; Systems of Classification and
their Application; Study of Plant Groups; Study of Identification Characters; Study of important
families of Angiosperms; Plant Diversity Application.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL DIVERSITY AND TAXONOMY 9
Principles and Rules of Taxonomy; ICZN Rules, Animal Study Techniques; Concepts of Taxon,
Categories, Holotype, Paratype, Topotype etc; Classification of Animal kingdom, Invertebrates,
Vertebrates, Evolutionary relationships between Animal Groups.
UNIT III MICROBIAL DIVERSITY 9

Microbes and Earth History, Magnitude, Occurrence and Distribution. Concept of Species, Criteria
for Classification, Outline Classification of Microorganisms (Bacteria, Viruses and Protozoa); Criteria
for Classification and Identification of Fungi; Chemical and Biochemical Methods of Microbial
Diversity Analysis
UNIT IV MEGA DIVERSITY 9

Biodiversity Hot-spots, Floristic and Faunal Regions in India and World; IUCN Red List; Factors
affecting Diversity, Impact of Exotic Species and Human Disturbance on Diversity, Dispersal,
Diversity-Stability Relationship; Socio- economic Issues of Biodiversity; Sustainable Utilization of
Bioresources; National Movements and International Convention/Treaties on Biodiversity.
UNIT V CONSERVATIONS OF BIODIVERSITY 9

In-Situ Conservation- National parks, Wildlife sanctuaries, Biosphere reserves; Ex-situ
conservation- Gene bank, Cryopreservation, Tissue culture bank; Long term captive breeding,
Botanical gardens, Animal Translocation, Zoological Gardens; Concept of Keystone Species,
Endangered Species, Threatened Species, Rare Species, Extinct Species
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
307
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A textbook of Botany: Angiosperms- Taxonomy, Anatomy, Economic Botany & Embryology. S.
Chand, Limited, Pandey, B. P. January 2001
2. Principles of Systematic Zoology, Mcgraw-Hill College, Ashlock, P.D., Latest Edition.
3. Microbiology, MacGraw Hill Companies Inc, Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P., and Klein D.A. (2022).
4. Microbiology, Pearson Publisher, Gerard J. Tortora, Berdell R. Funke, Christine L.Case, 13th
Edition 2019
REFERENCES:
1. Ecological Census Technique: A Handbook, Cambridge University Press, Sutherland, W.
2. Encyclopedia of Biodiversity, Academic Press, Simonson Asher Levin.
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of this course, students will:
CO1: An insight into the structure and function of diversity for ecosystem stability.
CO2: Understand the concept of animal diversity and taxonomy
CO3: Understand socio-economic issues pertaining to biodiversity
CO4: An understanding of biodiversity in community resource management.
CO5: Student can apply fundamental knowledge of biodiversity conservation to solve problems
associated with infrastructure development.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
OEE353 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS LTPC

30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To impart knowledge on various representations of systems.
 To familiarize time response analysis of LTI systems and steady state error.
 To analyze the frequency responses and stability of the systems
 To analyze the stability of linear systems in frequency domain and time domain
 To develop linear models mainly state variable model and transfer function model
UNIT I MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICALSYSTEMS 9

Definition & classification of system – terminology & structure of feedback control theory –
Analogous systems - Physical system representation by Differential equations – Block diagram
reduction–Signal flow graphs.
UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS & ROOTLOCUSTECHNIQUE 9

Standard test signals – Steady state error & error constants – Time Response of I and II order
system–Root locus–Rules for sketching root loci.
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Correlation between Time & Frequency response – Polar plots – Bode Plots – Determination of
Transfer Function from Bode plot.
308
UNIT IV STABILITY CONCEPTS & ANALYSIS 9
Concept of stability – Necessary condition – RH criterion – Relative stability – Nyquist stability
criterion – Stability from Bode plot – Relative stability from Nyquist & Bode – Closed loop
frequency response.
UNITV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9

Concept of state – State Variable & State Model – State models for linear & continuous time
systems–Solution of state & output equation–controllability & observability.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Ability to
CO1: Design the basic mathematical model of physical System.
CO2: Analyze the time response analysis and techniques.
CO3: Analyze the transfer function from different plots.
CO4: Apply the stability concept in various criterion.
CO5: Assess the state models for linear and continuous Systems.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Farid Golnarghi , Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems Paper back McGraw Hill
Education, 2018.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, Pearson, 5th Edition2015.
3. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering (Multi Colour Edition), New Age
International, 2018.
REFERENCES
1. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. Control System Dynamics" by Robert Clark, Cambridge University Press, 1996 USA.
3. John J. D’Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis and Stuart N. Sheldon, Linear Control System
AnalysisandDesign, 5th Edition, CRC PRESS, 2003.
4. S. Palani, Control System Engineering, McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited, 2009.
5. Yaduvir Singh and S.Janardhanan, Modern Control, Cengage Learning, First Impression2010.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3
3 3 3
OEI354 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS LT P C

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To educate on design of signal conditioning circuits for various applications.
 To Introduce signal transmission techniques and their design.
 Study of components used in data acquisition systems interface techniques
 To educate on the components used in distributed control systems
 To introduce the communication buses used in automation industries.
309
Automation overview, Requirement of automation systems, Architecture of Industrial Automation
system, Introduction of PLC and supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA). Industrial bus
systems : Modbus & Profibus
UNIT II AUTOMATION COMPONENTS 9

Sensors for temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level, humidity and pH
measurement. Actuators, process control valves, power electronics devices DIAC, TRIAC, power
MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction of DC and AC servo drives for motion control.
UNIT III COMPUTER AIDED MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Role of computers in measurement and control, Elements of computer aided measurement and
control, man-machine interface, computer aided process control hardware, process related
interfaces, Communication and networking, Industrial communication systems, Data transfer
techniques, Computer aided process control software, Computer based data acquisition system,
Internet of things (IoT) for plant automation.
UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9

Programmable controllers, Programmable logic controllers, Analog digital input and output
modules, PLC programming, Ladder diagram, Sequential flow chart, PLC Communication and
networking, PLC selection, PLC Installation, Advantage of using PLC for Industrial automation,
Application of PLC to process control industries.
UNIT V DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9

Overview of DCS, DCS software configuration, DCS communication, DCS Supervisory Computer
Tasks, DCS integration with PLC and Computers, Features of DCS, Advantages of DCS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content

Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function Chart/
Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Industrial Data Networks.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Design a signal conditioning circuits for various application (L3).
CO2 Acquire a detail knowledge on data acquisition system interface and DCS system (L2).
CO3 Understand the basics and Importance of communication buses in applied automation
Engineering (L2).
CO4 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO5 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.K.Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2nd edition companies, 2003.
2. C D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall India, 8th Edition,
2006.
3. E.A.Parr, Newnes ,NewDelhi,“Industrial Control Handbook”,3rd Edition, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and
Applications”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
310
2. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill, New York,
2016.
3. Krishna Kant, “Computer - Based Industrial Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi,
2011.
4. Gary Dunning, Thomson Delmar,“Programmable Logic Controller”, CeneageLearning, 3 rd
Edition,2005.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105062/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
4. https://realpars.com/what-is-industrial-automation/
5. https://automationforum.co/what-is-industrial-automation-2/
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 1 - 1
CO2 3 `1 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO3 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2.25 2 2.6 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
OCH353 ENERGY TECHNOLOGY LTPC

30 0 3
Units of energy, conversion factors, general classification of energy, world energy resources and
energy consumption, Indian energy resources and energy consumption, energy crisis, energy
alternatives, Renewable and non-renewable energy sources and their availability. Prospects of
Renewable energy sources
UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 8
Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, thermal, hydel and nuclear
power plants, efficiency, merits and demerits of the above power plants, combustion processes,
fluidized bed combustion.
UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 10
Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating,
solar cooling, solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power
generation, solar energy application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills,
types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Gravian rotor, wind electric power generation, wind power in
India, economics of wind farm, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean thermal energy conversion,
tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.
UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 10
Biomass energy resources, thermo-chemical and biochemical methods of biomass conversion,
combustion, gasification, pyrolysis, biogas production, ethanol, fuel cells, alkaline fuel cell,
phosphoric acid fuel cell, molten carbonate fuel cell, solid oxide fuel cell, solid polymer electrolyte
fuel cell, magneto hydrodynamic power generation, energy storage routes like thermal energy
storage, chemical, mechanical storage and electrical storage.
311
UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9
Energy conservation in chemical process plants, energy audit, energy saving in heat exchangers,
distillation columns, dryers, ovens and furnaces and boilers, steam economy in chemical plants,
energy conservation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Students will be able to describe the fundamentals and main characteristics of
renewable energy sources and their differences compared to fossil fuels.
CO2: Students will excel as professionals in the various fields of energy engineering
CO3: Compare different renewable energy technologies and choose the most appropriate based on
local conditions.
CO4: Explain the technological basis for harnessing renewable energy sources.
CO5: Identify and critically evaluate current developments and emerging trends within the
field of renewable energy technologies and to develop in-depth technical
understanding of energy problems at an advanced level.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1984.
3. Bansal, N.K., Kleeman, M. and Meliss, M., Renewable Energy Sources and Conversion
Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990.
4. Nagpal, G.R., Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
REFERENCES
1. Nejat Vezirog, Alternate Energy Sources, IT, McGraw Hill, New York.
2. El. Wakil, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, New York, 2002.
3. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Enery - Thermal Collection and Storage, Tata McGraw hill, New Delhi,
1981.
Course Program Outcomes

Outcomes Statements PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 Students will be able 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
to describe the
fundamentals and
main characteristics of
renewable energy
sources and their
differences compared
to fossil fuels.
CO2 Students will excel as 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
professionals in the
various fields of
energy engineering
CO3 Compare different 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
renewable energy
technologies and
choose the most
appropriate based on
local conditions.
CO4 Explain the 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
technological basis for
harnessing renewable
energy sources.
CO5 Identify and critically 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
evaluate current
developments and
312
emerging trends within
the field of renewable
energy technologies
and to develop in-
depth technical
understanding of
energy problems at an
advanced level
OVERALL CO 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 3
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively
OCH354 SURFACE SCIENCE LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to analyze properties of a surfaces and correlate them to structure,
chemistry, and physics and surface modification technique.
UNIT I SURFACE STRUCTURE AND EXPERIMENTAL PROBES 9

Relevance of surface science to Chemical and Electrochemical Engineering, Heterogeneous
Catalysis and Nanoscience; Surface structure and reconstructions, absorbate structure, Band and
Vibrational structure, Importance of UHV techniques, Electronic probes and molecular beams,
Scanning probes and diffraction, Qualitative introduction to electronic and vibrational spectroscopy
UNIT II ADSORPTION, DYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS AT

SURFACES 9
Interactions at the surface, Physisorption, Chemisorption, Diffusion, dynamics and reactions of
atoms/molecules on surfaces, Generic reaction mechanism on surfaces, Adsorption isotherms,
Kinetics of adsorption, Use of temperature desorption methods
UNIT III LIQUID INTERFACES 9
Structure and Thermodynamics of liquid-solid interface, Self-assembled monolayers, Electrified
interfaces, Charge transfer at the liquid-solid interfaces, Photoelectrochemical processes, Gratzel
cells
UNIT IV HETEROGENEOUS CATALYSIS 9
Characterization of heterogeneous catalytic processes, Microscopic kinetics to catalysis, Overview
of important heterogeneous catalytic processes: Haber-Bosch, Fishcher-Tropsch and Automotive
catalysis, Role of promoters and poisons, Bimetallic surfaces, surface functionalization and clusters
in catalysis, Role of Sabatier principle in catalyst design, Rate oscillations and spatiotemporal pattern
formation
UNIT V EPITAXIAL GROWTH AND NANO SURFACE-STRUCTURES 9
Origin of surface forces, Role of stress and strain in epitaxial growth, Energetic and growth modes,
Nucleation theory, Nonequilibrium growth modes, MBE, CVD and ablation techniques, Catalytic
growth of nanotubes, Etching of surfaces, Formation of nanopillars and nanorods and its application
in photoelectrochemical processes, Polymer surfaces and biointerfaces.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
 Upon completion of this course, the students can understand, predict and design surface
properties based on surface structure. Students would understand the physics and chemistry
behind surface phenomena
TEXT BOOK:
1. K. W. Kolasinski, “Surface Science: Foundations of catalysis and nanoscience” II Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008.
313
REFERENCE:
1. Gabor A. Somorjai and Yimin Li “Introduction to Surface Chemistry and catalysis”, II Edition John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 2010.
OFD354 FUNDAMENTALS OF FOOD ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to
 acquaint and equip the students with different techniques of measurement of engineering
properties.
 make the students understand the nature of food constituents in the design of processing
equipment
UNIT I 9
Engineering properties of food materials: physical, thermal, aerodynamic, mechanical, optical and
electromagnetic properties.
UNIT II 9
Drying and dehydration: Basic drying theory, heat and mass transfer in drying, drying rate curves,
calculation of drying times, dryer efficiencies; classification and selection of dryers; tray, vacuum,
osmotic, fluidized bed, pneumatic, rotary, tunnel, trough, bin, belt, microwave, IR, heat pump and
freeze dryers; dryers for liquid: Drum or roller dryer, spray dryer and foammat dryers
UNIT III 9
Size reduction: Benefits, classification, determination and designation of the fineness of ground
material, sieve/screen analysis, principle and mechanisms of comminution of food, Rittinger’s, Kick’s
and Bond’s equations, work index, energy utilization; Size reduction equipment: Principal types,
crushers (jaw crushers, gyratory, smooth roll), hammer mills and impactors, attrition mills, buhr mill,
tumbling mills, tumbling mills, ultra fine grinders, fluid jet pulverizer, colloid mill, cutting machines
(slicing, dicing, shredding, pulping)
UNIT IV 9
Mixing: theory of solids mixing, criteria of mixer effectiveness and mixing indices, rate of mixing,
theory of liquid mixing, power requirement for liquids mixing; Mixing equipment: Mixers for lo.w- or
medium-viscosity liquids (paddle agitators, impeller agitators, powder-liquid contacting devices,
other mixers), mixers for high viscosity liquids and pastes, mixers for dry powders and particulate
solids.
UNIT V 9
Mechanical Separations: Theory, centrifugation, liquid-liquid centrifugation, liquid-solid
centrifugation, clarifiers, desludging and decanting machine, Filtration: Theory of filtration, rate of
filtration, pressure drop during filtration, applications, constant-rate filtration and constant-pressure
filtration, derivation of equation; Filtration equipment; plate and frame filter press, rotary filters,
centrifugal filters and air filters, filter aids, Membrane separation: General considerations, materials
for membrane construction, ultra-filtration, microfiltration, concentration, polarization, processing
variables, membrane fouling, applications of ultra-filtration in food processing, reverse osmosis,
mode of operation, and applications; Membrane separation methods, demineralization by electro-
dialysis, gel filtration, ion exchange, per-evaporation and osmotic dehydration.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 understand the importance of food polymers
CO2 understand the effect of various methods of processing on the structure and texture of food
materials
314
CO3 understand the interaction of food constituents with respect to thermal, electrical properties to
develop new technologies for processing and preservation.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.L. Earle. 2004. Unit Operations in Food Processing. The New Zealand Intitute of Food Science
& Technology, Nz. Warren L. McCabe, Julian Smith, Peter Harriott. 2004.
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, 7th Ed. McGraw-Hill, Inc., NY, USA. Christie John
Geankoplis. 2003.
3. Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit Operations), 4th Ed.
Prentice-Hall, NY, USA.
4. George D. Saravacos and Athanasios E. Kostaropoulos. 2002. Handbook of Food Processing
Equipment. Springer Science+Business Media, New York, USA.
5. J. F. Richardson, J. H. Harker and J. R. Backhurst. 2002. Coulson & Richardson's Chemical
Engineering, Vol. 2, Particle Technology and Separation Processes, 5th Ed.
OFD355 FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY REGULATIONS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To characterize different type of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the industry
and food service establishments
• To help become skilled in systems for food safety surveillance
• To be aware of the regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
• To ensure processed food meets global standards
UNIT I 10
Introduction to food safety and security: Hygienic design of food plants and equipments, Food
Contaminants (Microbial, Chemical, Physical), Food Adulteration (Common adulterants), Food
Additives (functional role, safety issues), Food Packaging & labeling. Sanitation in warehousing,
storage, shipping, receiving, containers and packaging materials. Control of rats, rodents, mice,
birds, insects and microbes. Cleaning and Disinfection, ISO 22000 – Importance and Implementation
UNIT II 8
Food quality: Various Quality attributes of food, Instrumental, chemical and microbial Quality control.
Sensory evaluation of food and statistical analysis. Water quality and other utilities.
UNIT III 9
Critical Quality control point in different stages of production including raw materials and processing
materials. Food Quality and Quality control including the HACCP system. Food inspection and Food
Law, Risk assessment – microbial risk assessment, dose response and exposure response
modelling, risk management, implementation of food surveillance system to monitor food safety, risk
communication
UNIT IV 9
Indian and global regulations: FAO in India, Technical Cooperation programmes, Bio-security in
Food and Agriculture, World Health Organization (WHO), World Animal Health Organization (OIE),
International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC)
UNIT V 9
Codex Alimentarius Commission - Codex India – Role of Codex Contact point, National Codex
contact point (NCCP), National Codex Committee of India – ToR, Functions, Shadow Committees
etc.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
315
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Thorough Knowledge of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the industry and
food service establishments
CO2 Awareness on regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
REFERENCES:
1. Handbook of food toxicology by S. S. Deshpande, 2002
2. The food safety information handbook by Cynthia A. Robert, 2009
3. Nutritional and safety aspects of food processing by Tannenbaum SR, Marcel Dekker Inc., New
York 1979
4. Microbiological safety of Food by Hobbs BC, 1973
5. Food Safety Handbook by Ronald H. Schmidt, Gary E. Rodrick, A John Wiley & Sons Publication,
2003
OPY353 NUTRACEUTICALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of Nutraceuticals and functional food, their chemical nature
and methods of extraction.
 To understand the role of Nutraceuticals and functional food in health and disease.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SIGNIFICANCE 6

Introduction to Nutraceuticals and functional foods; importance, history, definition, classification, list
of functional foods and their benefits, Phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food, plants,
animals and microbes.
UNIT II PHYTOCHEMICALS AS NUTRACEUTICALS 11

Phytoestrogens in plants; isoflavones; flavonols, polyphenols, tannins, saponins, lignans, lycopene,
chitin, caratenoids. Manufacturing practice of selected nutraceuticals such as lycopene,
isoflavonoids, glucosamine, phytosterols. Formulation of functional foods containing nutraceuticals -
stability, analytical and labelling issues.
UNIT III ASSESSMENT OF ANTIOXIDANT ACTIVITY 11

In vitro and in vivo methods for the assessment of antioxidant activity, Comparison of different in
vitro methods to evaluate the antioxidant, antioxidant mechanism, Prediction of the antioxidant
activity of natural phenolics from electrotopological state indices, Optimising phytochemical release
by process technology; Variation of Antioxidant Activity during technological treatments, new food
grade peptidases from plant sources.
UNIT IV ROLE IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 11

The health benefit of - Soy protein, Spirulina, Tea, Olive oil, plant sterols, Broccoli, omega3 fatty acid
and eicosanoids. Nutraceuticals and Functional foods in Gastrointestinal disorder, Cancer, CVD,
Diabetic Mellitus, HIV and Dental disease; Importance and function of probiotic, prebiotic and
synbiotic and their applications, Functional foods and immune competence; role and use in obesity
and nervous system disorders.
UNIT V SAFETY ISSUES 6

Health Claims, Adverse effects and toxicity of nutraceuticals, regulations and safety issues
International and national.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bisset, Normal Grainger and Max Wich H “Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals”, 2nd Edition,
CRC, 2001.
2. Handbook of Nutraceuticals and Functional Foods: Robert Wildman, CRC, Publications. 2006
316
3. WEBB, PP, Dietary Supplements and Functional Foods Blackwell Publishing Ltd (United
Kingdom), 2006
4. Ikan, Raphael “Natural Products: A Laboratory Guide”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press /Elsevier,
2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Asian Functional Foods (Nutraceutical Science and Technology) by John Shi (Editor), Fereidoon
Shahidi (Editor), Chi-Tang Ho (Editor), CRC Publications, Taylor & Francis, 2007
2. Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals in Cancer Prevention by Ronald Ross Watson (Author),
Blackwell Publishing, 2007
3. Marketing Nutrition: Soy, Functional Foods, Biotechnology, and Obesity by Brian Wansink.
4. Functional foods: Concept to Product: Edited by G R Gibson and C M Williams, Wood head
Publ., 2000
5. Hanson, James R. “Natural Products: The Secondary Metabolites”, Royal Society of Chemistry,
2003.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 acquire knowledge about the Nutraceuticals and functional foods, their classification and
benefits.
CO2 acquire knowledge of phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food, plants, animals
and microbes
CO3 attain the knowledge of the manufacturing practices of selected nutraceutical components and
formulation considerations of functional foods.
CO4 distinguish the various In vitro and In vivo assessment of Antioxidant activity of compounds
from plant sources.
CO5 gain information about the health benefits of various functional foods and nutraceuticals in the
prevention and treatment of various lifestyle diseases.
CO6 Attain the knowledge of the regulatory and safety issues of nutraceuticals at national and
international level.
Course PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
outcome 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1
OTT354 BASICS OF DYEING AND PRINTING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn about the basics of Pretreatment, dyeing, printing and
machinery in textile processing.
Impurities present in different fibres, Inspection of grey goods and lot preparation. Shearing,
317
UNIT II PRE TREATMENT 9
Desizing-Objective of Desizing- types of Desizing- Objective of Scouring- Mechanism of Scouring–
Degumming of Silk, Scouring of wool - Bio Scouring. Bleaching -Objective of Bleaching: Bleaching
mechanism of Hydrogen Peroxide, Hypo chlorites. Objective of Mercerizing - Physical and Chemical
changes of Mercerizing.
UNIT III DYEING 9

Dye - Affinity, Substantively, Reactivity, Exhaustion and Fixation. Classification of dyes. Direct dyes:
General properties, principles and method of application on cellulosic materials. Reactive dyes –
principles and method of application on cellulosic materials hot brand, cold brand.
UNIT IV PRINTING 9
Definition of printing – Difference between printing and dying- Classification thickeners –
Requirements to be good thickener, printing paste Preparation - different styles of printing.
UNIT V MACHINERIES 9
Fabric Processing - winch, jigger and soft flow machines. Beam dyeing machines: Printing -flat
bed screen - Rotary screen. Thermo transfer printing machinery. Garment dyeing machines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO1: Basics of grey fabric
CO2: Basics of pre treatment
CO3: Concept of Dyeing
CO4: Concept of Printing
CO5: Machinery in processing industry
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Trotman, E.R., Textile Scouring and Bleaching, Charless Griffins, Com. Ltd., London 1990.
2. Shenai V.A. “Technology of Textile Processing Vol. IV” 1998, Sevak Publications, Mumbai.
REFERENCES:
1. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, Charles Griffin & Co. Ltd.,
U.K., 1984, ISBN : 0 85264 165 6.
2. Dr. N N Mahapatra., “Textile dyeing”, Wood head publishing India, 2018
3. Mathews Kolanjikombil., ”Dyeing of Textile substrates III –Fibres, Yarns and Knitted fabrics”,
Wood head publishing India , 2021
4. Bleaching & Mercerizing – BTRA Silver Jubilee Monograph series
5. Chakraborty, J.N, "Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles", Wood head
Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3.

Outcom Statemen PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
es t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 Classifica - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
tion of
fibres and
productio
n of
natural
fibres
CO2 Regenera - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ted and
synthetic
fibres
318
CO3 Yarn - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
spinning
CO4 Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO5 Knitting - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
and
nonwove
n
Overall CO - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and
Substantial (High) respectively
FT3201 FIBRE SCIENCE LTPC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To enable the students to learn about the types of fibre and its properties
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO TEXTILE FIBRES 9
Definition of various forms of textile fibres - staple fibre, filament, bicomponent fibres. Classification
of Natural and Man-made fibres, essential and desirable properties of Fibres. Production and
cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cotton, Silk, Wool -Physical and chemical structure of the above fibres.
UNIT II REGENERATED FIBRES 9
Production Sequence of Regenerated Cellulosic fibres: Viscose Rayon, Acetate rayon – High wet
modulus fibres: Modal and Lyocel ,Tencel
UNIT III SYNTHEITC FIBRES 9

Production Sequence of Synthetic Fibers: polymer-Polyester, Nylon, Acrylic and polypropylene.
Mineral fibres: fibre glass ,carbon .Introduction to spin finishes and texturization
UNIT IV SPECIALITY FIBRES 9

Properties and end uses of high tenacity and high modulus fibres, high temperature and flame
retardant fibres, Chemical resistant fibres
UNIT V FUNCTIONAL SPECIALITY FIBRES 9

Properties and end uses : Fibres for medical application – Biodegradable fibres based on PLA
,Super absorbent fibres elastomeric fibres, ultra-fine fibres, electrospun nano fibres, metallic fibres
– Gold and Silver coated.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student would be able to
CO1 Understand the process sequence of various fibres
CO2 Understand the properties of various fibres
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile Institute,
Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
2. Meredith R., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Methods of Investigation of Textiles”, Wiley
Publication, New York, 1989, ISBN: B00JCV6ZWU | ISBN-13:
3. Mukhopadhyay S. K., “Advances in Fibre Science”, The Textile Institute,1992, ISBN: 1870812379
319
REFERENCES:
1. Meredith R., “Mechanical Properties of Textile Fibres”, North Holland, Amsterdam, 1986,
ISBN: 1114790699, ISBN-13: 9781114790698
2. Hearle J. W. S., Lomas B., and Cooke W. D., “Atlas of Fibre Fracture and Damage to
Textiles”, The Textile Institute, 2nd Edition, 1998, ISBN: 1855733196.
3. Raheel M. (ed.)., “Modern Textile Characterization Methods”, Marcel Dekker, 1995,
ISBN:0824794737
4. Mukhopadhyay. S. K., “The Structure and Properties of Typical Melt Spun Fibres”, Textile
Progress, Vol. 18, No. 4, Textile Institute, 1989, ISBN: 1870812115
5. Hearle J.W.S., “Polymers and Their Properties: Fundamentals of Structures and Mechanics
Vol 1”, Ellis Horwood, England, 1982, ISBN: 047027302X | ISBN-13: 9780470273029 36
OTT355 GARMENT MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LT PC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics of pattern making, cutting and sewing.
 To expose the students to various problems & remedies during garment manufacturing
UNIT I PATTERN MAKING, MARKER PLANNING, CUTTING 9

Anthropometry, specification sheet, pattern making – principles, basic pattern set drafting, grading,
marker planning, spreading & cutting
UNIT II TYPES OF SEAMS, STITCHES AND FUNCTIONS OF NEEDLES 9

Different types of seams and stitches; single needle lock stitch machine – mechanism and
accessories; needle – functions, special needles, needlepoint
UNIT III COMPONENTS AND TRIMS USED IN GARMENT 9

Sewing thread-construction, material, thread size, packages, accessories – labels, linings,
interlinings, wadding, lace, braid, elastic, hook and loop fastening, shoulder pads, eyelets and laces,
zip fasteners, buttons
UNIT IV GARMENT INSPECTION AND DIMENSIONAL CHANGES 9

Raw material, in process and final inspection; needle cutting; sewability of fabrics; strength properties
of apparel; dimensional changes in apparel due to laundering, dry-cleaning, steaming and pressing.
UNIT V GARMENT PRESSING, PACKING AND CARE LABELING 9

Garment pressing – categories and equipment, packing; care 320abelling of apparels
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand
CO1: Pattern making, marker planning, cutting
CO2: Types of seams, stitches and functions of needles
CO3: Components and trims used in garment
CO4: Garment inspection and dimensional changes
CO5: Garment pressing, packing and careabelling
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Carr H., and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture”, Blackwell Science Ltd.,
Oxford, 1994.
2. Gerry Cooklin, “Introduction to Clothing Manufacture” Blackwell Science Ltd., 1995. 64
3. Harrison.P.W Garment Dyeing, The Textile Institute Publication, Textile Progress, Vol .19
No.2,1988.
320
REFERENCES:
1. Winifred Aldrich., “Metric Pattern Cutting”, Blackwell Science Ltd., Oxford, 1994
2. Peggal H., “The Complete Dress Maker”, Marshall Caverdish, London, 1985
3. Jai Prakash and Gaur R.K., “Sewing Thread”, NITRA, 1994
4. Ruth Glock, Grace I. Kunz, “Apparel Manufacturing”, Dorling Kindersley Publishing Inc., New
Jersey, 1995.
5. Pradip V.Mehta, “An Introduction to Quality Control for the Apparel Industry”, J.S.N.
Internationals, 1992.
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 - 2 - 1 1 - 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
2 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
4 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
5 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
Avg 1.6 1.2 1 0.8 1.4 0.8 1.4 1 0.2 1.8 2.4 1 1.8 2.6 1 2.6
OPE353 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To educate about the health hazards and the safety measures to be followed in the industrial
environment.
 Describe industrial legislations (Factories Acts, Workmen's Compensation and other laws)
enacted for the protection of employees health at work settings
 Describe methods of prevention and control of Occupational Health diseases, accidents /
emergencies and other hazards
Need for developing Environment, Health and Safety systems in work places - Accident Case
Studies - Status and relationship of Acts - Regulations and Codes of Practice - Role of trade union
safety representatives. International initiatives - Ergonomics and work place.
UNIT II OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE 9

Definition of the term occupational health and hygiene - Categories of health hazards - Exposure
pathways and human responses to hazardous and toxic substances - Advantages and limitations of
environmental monitoring and occupational exposure limits - Hierarchy of control measures for
occupational health risks - Role of personal protective equipment and the selection criteria - Effects
on humans - control methods and reduction strategies for noise, radiation and excessive stress.
UNIT III WORKPLACE SAFETY AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 9

Features of Satisfactory and Safe design of work premises – good housekeeping - lighting and
colour, Ventilation and Heat Control – Electrical Safety – Fire Safety – Safe Systems of work for
321
manual handling operations – Machine guarding – Working at different levels – Process and System
Safety.
UNIT IV HAZARDS AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Safety appraisal - analysis and control techniques – plant safety inspection – Accident investigation
- Analysis and Reporting – Hazard and Risk Management Techniques – major accident hazard
control – Onsite and Offsite emergency Plans.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9

Concept of Environmental Health and Safety Management – Elements of Environmental Health and
Safety Management Policy and methods of its effective implementation and review – Elements of
Management Principles – Education and Training – Employee Participation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to:
CO1 Describe, with example, the common work-related diseases and accidents in occupational
setting
CO2 Name essential members of the Occupational Health team
CO3 What roles can a community health practitioners play in an Occupational setting to ensure the
protection, promotion and maintenance of the health of the employee
OPE354 UNIT OPERATIONS IN PETRO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart to the student basic knowledge on fluid mechanics, mechanical operations, heat
transfer operations and mass transfer operations.
UNIT I FLUID MECHANICS CONCEPTS 9
Fluid definition and classification of fluids, types of fluids, Rheological behaviour of fluids & Newton’s
Law of viscosity. Fluid statics-Pascal's law, Hydrostatic equilibrium, Barometric equation and
pressure measurement(problems),Basic equations of fluid flow - Continuity equation, Euler’s
equation and Bernoulli equation; Types of flow - laminar and turbulent; Reynolds experiment; Flow
through circular and non-circular conduits - Hagen Poiseuille equation (no derivation). Flow through
stagnant fluids – theory of Settling and Sedimentation – Equipment (cyclones, thickeners)
Conceptual numericals.
UNIT II FLOW MEASUREMENTS & MECHANICAL OPERATIONS 9

Different types of flow measuring devices (Orifice meter, Venturimeter, Rotameter) with derivations,
flow measurements –. Pumps – types of pumps (Centrifugal & Reciprocating pumps), Energy
calculations and characteristics of pumps. Size reduction–characteristics of comminute products,
sieve analysis, Properties and handling of particulate solids – characterization of solid particles,
average particle size, screen analysis- Conceptual numerical of differential and cumulative analysis.
Size reduction, crushing laws, working principle of ball mill. Filtration & types, filtration equipments
(plate and frame, rotary drum). Conceptual numericals.
UNIT III CONDUCTIVE & CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 9

Modes of heat transfer; Conduction – steady state heat conduction through unilayer and multilayer
walls, cylinders; Insulation, critical thickness of insulation. Convection- Forced and Natural
convection, principles of heat transfer co-efficient, log mean temperature difference, individual and
overall heat transfer co-efficient, fouling factor; Condensation – film wise and drop wise (no
derivation). Heat transfer equipments – double pipe heat exchanger, shell and tube heat exchanger
(with working principle and construction with applications).
322
UNIT IV BASICS OF MASS TRANSFER 9
Diffusion-Fick’s law of diffusion. Types of diffusion. Steady state molecular diffusion in fluids at rest
and laminar flow (stagnant / unidirection and bi direction). Measurement of diffusivity, Mass transfer
coefficients and their correlations. Conceptual numerical.
UNIT V MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONS 9

Basic concepts of Liquid-liquid extraction – equilibrium, stage type extractors (belt extraction and
basket extraction).Distillation – Methods of distillation, distillation of binary mixtures using McCabe
Thiele method.Drying- drying operations, batch and continuous drying. Conceptual numerical.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 State and describe the nature and properties of the fluids.
CO2 Study the different flow measuring instruments, the principles of various size reductions,
conveying equipment’s, sedimentation and mixing tanks.
CO3 Comprehend the laws governing the heat and mass transfer operations to solve the problems.
CO4 Design the heat transfer equipment suitable for specific requirement.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Unit operations in Chemical Engineering Warren L. McCabe, Julian C. Smith & Peter Harriot
McGraw-Hill Education (India) Edition 2014
2. Fluid Mechanics K L Kumar S Chand & Company Ltd 2008
3. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Badger W.I. and Banchero, J.T., Tata McGraw Hill New
York 1997
REFERENCES
1. Principles of Unit Operations Alan S Foust, L.A. Wenzel, C.W. Clump, L. Maus, and L.B.
Anderson John Wiley & Sons 2nd edition 2008
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, Vol I &II Chattopadhyaya Khanna Publishers,
Delhi-6 1996
3. Heat Transfer J P Holman McGraw Hill International Ed
OPT352 PLASTIC MATERIALS FOR ENGINEERS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the advantages, disadvantages and general classification of plastic materials
 To know the manufacturing, sources, and applications of engineering thermoplastics
 Understand the basics as well as the advanced applications of various plastic materials in
the industry
 To understand the preparation methods of thermosetting materials
 Select suitable specialty plastics for different end applications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTIC MATERIALS 9

Introduction to Plastics – Brief history of plastics, advantages and disadvantages, thermoplastic and
thermosetting behavior, amorphous polymers, crystalline polymers and cross-linked structures.
General purpose thermoplastics/ Commodity plastics: manufacture, structure, properties and
applications of polyethylene (PE), cross-linked PE, chlorinated PE, polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride-
compounding, formulation, polypropylene (PP)
UNIT II ENGINEERING THERMOPLASTICS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Engineering thermoplastics – Aliphatic polyamides: structure, properties, manufacture and
applications of Nylon 6, Nylon 66. Polyesters: manufacture, structure, properties and uses of PET,
PBT. Manufacture, structure, properties and uses of Polycarbonates, acetal resins, polyimides,
PMMA, polyphenylene oxide, thermoplastic polyurethane (PU)
323
UNIT III THERMOSETTING PLASTICS 9
Thermosetting Plastics – Manufacture, curing, moulding powder, laminates, properties and uses of
phenol formaldehyde resins, urea formaldehyde, melamine formaldehyde, unsaturated polyester
resin, epoxy resin, silicone resins, polyurethane resins.
UNIT IV MISCELLANEOUS PLASTICS FOR END APPLICATIONS 9

Miscellaneous plastics- Manufacture, properties and uses of polystyrene, HIPS, ABS, SAN,
poly(tetrafluoroethylene) (PTFE), TFE and copolymers, PVDF, PVA, poly (vinyl acetate), poly (vinyl
carbazole), cellulose acetate, PEEK, High energy absorbing polymers, super absorbent polymers-
their synthesis, properties and applications
UNIT V PLASTICS MATERIALS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Sources, raw materials, methods of manufacturing, properties and applications of bio-based
polymers- poly lactic acid (PLA), poly hydroxy alkanoates (PHA), PBAT, bioplastics- bio-PE, bio-PP,
bio-PET, polymers for biomedical applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 To study the importance, advantages and classification of plastic materials
CO2 Summarize the raw materials, sources, production, properties and applications of various
engineering thermoplastics
CO3 To understand the application of polyamides, polyesters and other engineering thermoplastics,
thermosetting resins
CO4 Know the manufacture, properties and uses of thermosetting resins based on polyester,
epoxy, silicone and PU
CO5 To understand the engineering applications of various polymers in miscellaneous areas and
applications of different biopolymers
REFERENCES
1. Marianne Gilbert (Ed.), Brydson’s Plastics Materials, 8th Edn., Elsevier (2017).
2. J.A.Brydson, Plastics Materials, 7th Edn., Butterworth Heinemann (1999).
3. Manas Chanda, Salil K. Roy, Plastics Technology Handbook, 4th Edn., CRC press (2006).
4. A. Brent Strong, Plastics: Materials and Processing, 3rd Edn., Pearson Prentice Hall (2006).
5. Olagoke Olabisi, Kolapo Adewale (Eds.), Handbook of Thermoplastics 2nd Edn., CRC press
(2016).
6. Charles A. Harper, Modern Plastics Handbook, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
7. H. Dominighaus, Plastics for Engineers, Hanser Publishers, Munich, 1988.
OPT353 PROPERTIES AND TESTING OF PLASTICS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand the relevance of standards and specifications as well as the specimen
preparation for polymer testing.
 To study the mechanical properties and testing of polymer materials and their structural
property relationships.
 To understand the thermal properties of polymers and their testing methods.
 To gain knowledge on the electrical and optical properties of polymers and their testing
methods.
 To study about the environmental effects and prevent polymer degradation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CHARACTERIZATION AND TESTING OF POLYMERS 9

Introduction- Standard organizations: BIS, ASTM, ISO, BS, DIN etc. Standards and specifications.
Importance of standards in the quality control of polymers and polymer products. Preparation of test
pieces, conditioning and test atmospheres. Tests on elastomers: processability parameters of
324
rubbers – plasticity, Mooney viscosity, scorch time, cure time, cure rate index, Processability tests
carried out on thermoplastics and thermosets: MFI, cup flow index, gel time, bulk density, bulk factor.
UNIT II MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Mechanical properties: Tensile, compression, flexural, shear, tear strength, hardness, impact
strength, resilience, abrasion resistance, creep and stress relaxation, compression set, dynamic
fatigue, ageing properties, Basic concepts of stress and strain, short term tests: Viscoelastic behavior
(simple models: Kelvin model for creep and stress relaxation, Maxwell-Voigt model, strain recovery
and dynamic response), Effect of structure and composition on mechanical properties, Behavior of
reinforced polymers
UNIT III THERMAL RHEOLOGICAL PROPERTIES 9

Thermal properties: Transition temperatures, specific heat, thermal conductivity, co-efficient of
thermal expansion, heat deflection temperature, Vicat softening point, shrinkage, brittleness
temperature, thermal stability and flammability. Product testing: Plastic films, sheeting, pipes,
laminates, foams, containers, cables and tubes.
UNIT IV ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PROPERTIES 9

Electrical properties: volume and surface resistivity, dielectric strength, dielectric constant and power
factor, arc resistance, tracking resistance, dielectric behavior of polymers (dielectric co-efficient,
dielectric polarization), dissipation factor and its importance. Optical properties: transparency,
refractive index, haze, gloss, clarity, birefringence.
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL AND CHEMICAL RESISTANCE 9

Environmental stress crack resistance (ESCR), water absorption, weathering, aging, ozone
resistance, permeability and adhesion. Tests for chemical resistance. Acids, alkalies, Flammability
tests- oxygen index test.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Understand the relevance of standards and specifications.
CO2 Summarize the various test methods for evaluating the mechanical properties of the polymers.
CO3 To know the thermal, electrical & optical properties of polymers.
CO4 Identify various techniques used for characterizing polymers.
CO5 Distinguish the processability tests used for thermoplastics, thermosets and elastomers.
REFERENCES
1. F.Majewska, H.Zowall, Handbook of analysis of synthetic polymers and plastics, Ellis
Horwood Limited Publisher 1977.
2. J.F.Rabek, Experimental Methods in Polymer Chemistry, John Wiley and Sons 1980.
3. R.P.Brown, Plastic test methods, 2nd Edn., Harlond, Longman Scientific, 1981.
4. A. B. Mathur, I. S. Bharadwaj, Testing and Evaluation of Plastcis, Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2003.
5. Vishu Shah, Handbook of Plastic Testing Technology, 3rd Edn., John Wiley & Sons 2007.
6. S. K. Nayak, S. N. Yadav, S. Mohanty, Fundamentals of Plastic Testing, Springer, 2010.
OEC353 VLSI DESIGN LTPC

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● Understand the fundamentals of IC technology components and their characteristics.
● Understand combinational logic circuits and design principles.
● Understand sequential logic circuits and clocking strategies.
● Understand Interconnects and Memory Architecture.
● Understand the design of arithmetic building blocks
325
UNIT I MOS TRANSISTOR PRINCIPLES 9
MOS logic families (NMOS and CMOS), Ideal and Non Ideal IV Characteristics, CMOS devices.
MOS(FET) Transistor DC transfer Characteristics ,small signal analysis of MOSFET.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Propagation Delays, stick diagram, Layout diagrams, Examples of combinational logic design,
Elmore’s constant, Static Logic Gates, Dynamic Logic Gates, Pass Transistor Logic, Power
Dissipation.
UNIT III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS AND CLOCKING STRATEGIES 9

Static Latches and Registers, Dynamic Latches and Registers, Pipelines, Timing classification of
Digital Systems, Synchronous Design, Self-Timed Circuit Design .
UNIT IV INTERCONNECT, MEMORY ARCHITECTURE 9

Interconnect Parameters – Capacitance, Resistance, and Inductance, Logic Implementation using
Programmable Devices (ROM, PLA, FPGA), Memory Architecture and Building Blocks.
UNIT V DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders-Ripple Carry Adder, Carry-Bypass Adder, Carry
Select Adder, Carry-Look Ahead Adder, Multipliers, Barrel Shifter, power and speed tradeoffs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the working principle and characteristics of MOSFET
CO2: Design Combinational Logic Circuits
CO3: Design Sequential Logic Circuits and Clocking systems
CO4: Understand Memory architecture and interconnects
CO5: Design of arithmetic building blocks.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Jan D Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”, PHI,
2016.(Units II, III IV and V).
2. Neil H E Weste, Kamran Eshranghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System
Perspective,” Addison Wesley, 2009.( Units - I).
REFERENCES
1. D.A. Hodges and H.G. Jackson, Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits, International
Student Edition, McGraw Hill 1983
2. P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, "System-on-a-Chip Verification-Methodology and
Techniques", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
3. Samiha Mourad and Yervant Zorian, “Principles of Testing Electronic Systems”, Wiley 2000
4. M. Bushnell and V. D. Agarwal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed-
Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2000

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 3 2 2 1 3 - - - - 2 3 3 3 3
2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
3 3 - 3 2 1 2 - - - - 3 2 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 3 2
5 2 - 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2 2
Avg 3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3
O
326
CBM370 WEARABLE DEVICES LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement of wearable systems
 To understand the communication and security aspects in the wearable devices
 To know the applications of wearable devices in the field of medicine
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WEARABLE SYSTEMS AND SENSORS 9

Wearable Systems- Introduction, Need for Wearable Systems, Drawbacks of Conventional Systems
for Wearable Monitoring, Applications of Wearable Systems, Types of Wearable Systems,
Components of wearable Systems. Sensors for wearable systems-Inertia movement sensors,
Respiration activity sensor, Impedance plethysmography, Wearable ground reaction force sensor.
UNIT II SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ENERGY HARVESTING FOR WEARABLE

DEVICES 9
Wearability issues -physical shape and placement of sensor, Technical challenges - sensor design,
signal acquisition, sampling frequency for reduced energy consumption, Rejection of irrelevant
information. Power Requirements- Solar cell, Vibration based, Thermal based, Human body as a
heat source for power generation, Hybrid thermoelectric photovoltaic energy harvests, Thermopiles.
UNIT III WIRELESS HEALTH SYSTEMS 9

Need for wireless monitoring, Definition of Body area network, BAN and Healthcare, Technical
Challenges- System security and reliability, BAN Architecture – Introduction, Wireless
communication Techniques.
UNIT IV SMART TEXTILE 9

Introduction to smart textile- Passive smart textile, active smart textile. Fabrication Techniques-
Conductive Fibres, Treated Conductive Fibres, Conductive Fabrics, Conductive Inks.Case study-
smart fabric for monitoring biological parameters - ECG, respiration.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF WEARABLE SYSTEMS 9

Medical Diagnostics, Medical Monitoring-Patients with chronic disease, Hospital patients, Elderly
patients, neural recording, Gait analysis, Sports Medicine.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the concepts of wearable system.
CO2: Explain the energy harvestings in wearable device.
CO3: Use the concepts of BAN in health care.
CO4: Illustrate the concept of smart textile
CO5: Compare the various wearable devices in healthcare system
TEXT BOOKS
1. Annalisa Bonfiglo and Danilo De Rossi, Wearable Monitoring Systems, Springer, 2011
2. Zhang and Yuan-Ting, Wearable Medical Sensors and Systems,Springer, 2013
3. Edward Sazonov and Micheal R Neuman, Wearable Sensors: Fundamentals,
Implementation and Applications, Elsevier, 2014
4. Mehmet R. Yuce and JamilY.Khan, Wireless Body Area Networks Technology,
Implementation applications,Pan Stanford Publishing Pte.Ltd, Singapore, 2012
REFERENCES
1. Sandeep K.S, Gupta, Tridib Mukherjee and Krishna Kumar Venkatasubramanian, Body
Area Networks Safety, Security, and Sustainability, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
2. Guang-Zhong Yang, Body Sensor Networks, Springer, 2006.
327
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
AVg.
CBM356 MEDICAL INFORMATICS LTPC

30 03
Preamble:
1. To study the applications of information technology in health care management.
2. This course provides knowledge on resources, devices, and methods required to optimize the
acquisition, storage, retrieval, and use of information in health and biomedicine.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Introduction - Structure of Medical Informatics –Internet and Medicine -Security issues , Computer
based medical information retrieval, Hospital management and information
system, Functional capabilities of a computerized HIS, Health Informatics – Medical Informatics,
Bioinformatics
UNIT II COMPUTERS IN CLINICAL LABORATORY AND MEDICAL IMAGING 9

Automated clinical laboratories-Automated methods in hematology, cytology and histology,
Intelligent Laboratory Information System - Computer assisted medical imaging- nuclear
medicine, ultrasound imaging, computed X-ray tomography, Radiation therapy and planning,
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance.
UNIT III COMPUTERISED PATIENT RECORD 9

Introduction - conventional patient record, Components and functionality of CPR, Development
tools, Intranet, CPR in Radiology- Application server provider, Clinical information system,
Computerized prescriptions for patients.
UNIT IV COMPUTER ASSISTED MEDICAL DECISION-MAKING 9

Neuro computers and Artificial Neural Networks application, Expert system-General model of CMD,
Computer–assisted decision support system-production rule system cognitive model, semantic
networks, decisions analysis inclinical medicine-computers in the care of critically ill patients,
Computer aids for the handicapped.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Virtual reality applications in medicine, Virtual endoscopy, Computer assisted surgery, Surgical
simulation, Telemedicine - Tele surgery, Computer assisted patient education and health- Medical
education and healthcare information, computer assisted instruction in medicine.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1 Explain the structure and functional capabilities of Hospital Information System.
CO2 Describe the need of computers in medical imaging and automated clinical laboratory.
CO3 Articulate the functioning of information storage and retrieval in computerized patient record
system.
CO4 Apply the suitable decision support system for automated clinical diagnosis.
CO5 Discuss the application of virtual reality and telehealth technology in medical industry.
328
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd, 2003.
2. R.D.Lele, “Computers in medicine progress in medical informatics”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2005
REFERENCE:
1. Kathryn J. Hannah, Marion J Ball, “Health Informatics”, 3rd Edition, Springer, 2006.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
AVg.
OBT355 BIOTECHNOLOGY FOR WASTE MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
UNIT I BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT PROCESS 9

Fundamentals of biological process - Anaerobic process – Pretreatment methods in anaerobic
process – Aerobic process, Anoxic process, Aerobic and anaerobic digestion of organic wastes -
Factors affecting process efficiency - Solid state fermentation – Submerged fermentation – Batch
and continous fermentation
UNIT II WASTE BIOMASS AND ITS VALUE ADDITION 9

Types of waste biomass – Solid waste management - Nature of biomass feedstock – Biobased
economy/process – Value addition of waste biomass – Biotransformation of biomass –
Biotransformation of marine processing wastes – Direct extraction of biochemicals from biomass –
Plant biomass for industrial application
UNIT III BIOCONVERSION OF WASTES TO ENERGY 9

Perspective of biofuels from wastes - Bioethanol production – Biohydrogen Production – dark and
photofermentative process - Biobutanol production – Biogas and Biomethane production - Single
stage anaerobic digestion, Two stage anaerobic digestion - Biodiesel production - Enzymatic
hydrolysis technologies
UNIT IV CHEMICALS AND ENZYME PRODUCTION FROM WASTES 9

Production of lactic acid, succinic acid, citric acid – Biopolymer synthesis – Production of Amylases
- Lignocellulolytic enzymes - Pectinolytic enzymes - Proteases – Lipases
UNIT V BIOCOMPOSTING OF ORGANIC WASTES 9

Overview of composting process - Benefitis of composting, Role of microorganisms in composting -
Factors affecting the composting process - Waste Materials for Composting, Fundamentals of
composting process - Composting technologies, Composting systems – Nonreactor Composting,
Reactor composting - Compost Quality
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
329
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able
CO1 To learn the various methods biological treatment
CO2 To know the details of waste biomass and its value addition
CO3 To develop the bioconversion processes to convert wastes to energy
CO4 To synthesize the chemicals and enzyme from wastes
CO5 To produce the biocompost from wastes
CO6 To apply the theoretical knowledge for the development of value added products
TEXT BOOKS
1. Antoine P. T., (2017) “Biofuels from Food Waste Applications of Saccharification Using Fungal
Solid State Fermentation”, CRC press
2. Joseph C A., (2019)“Anaerobic Waste-Wastewater Treatment and Biogas Plants-A Practical
Handbook”, CRC Press,
REFERENCES
1. Palmiro P. and Oscar F.D’Urso, (2016) ‘Biotransformation of Agricultural Waste and By-
Products’,The Food, Feed, Fibre, Fuel (4F) Economy, Elsevier
2. Kaur Brar S., Gurpreet Singh D. and Carlos R.S., (Eds), (2014)‘Biotransformation of Waste
Biomass into High Value Biochemicals’, Springer.
3. Keikhosro K, Editor, (2015) ‘Lignocellulose-Based Bioproducts’, Springer.
4. John P, (2014) ‘Waste Management Practices-Municipal, Hazardous, and Industrial’, Second
Edition, CRC Press, 2014
OBT356 LIFESTYLE DISEASES LTPC

3 003
Lifestyle diseases – Definition ; Risk factors – Eating, smoking, drinking, stress, physical activity,
illicit drug use ; Obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases, cancer; Prevention
– Diet and exercise.
UNIT II CANCER 9
Types - Lung cancer, Mouth cancer, Skin cancer, Cervical cancer, Carcinoma oesophagus; Causes
Tobacco usage, Diagnosis – Biomarkers, Treatment
UNIT III CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASES 9

Coronoary atherosclerosis – Coronary artery disease; Causes -Fat and lipids, Alcohol abuse -–
Diagnosis - Electrocardiograph, echocardiograph, Treatment, Exercise and Cardiac rehabilitation
UNIT IV DIABETES AND OBESITY 9

Types of Diabetes mellitus; Blood glucose regulation; Complications of diabetes – Paediatric and
adolescent obesity – Weight control and BMI
UNIT V RESPIRATORY DISEASES 9

Chronic lung disease, Asthma, COPD; Causes - Breathing pattern (Nasal vs mouth), Smoking –
Diagnosis - Pulmonary function testing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Kumar&Meenal Kumar, “Guide to Prevention of Lifestyle Diseases”, Deep & Deep Publications,
2003
2. Gary Eggar et al, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2017
330
REFERENCES:
1. James M.R, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2013
2. Akira Miyazaki et al, “New Frontiers in Lifestyle-Related Disease”, Springer, 2008
OBT357 BIOTECHNOLOGY IN HEALTH CARE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this course is to
 Create higher standard of knowledge on healthcare system and services
 Prioritize advanced technologies for the diagnosis and treatment of various diseases
UNIT I PUBLIC HEALTH 9

Definition and Concept of Public Health, Historical aspects of Public Health, Changing Concepts of
Public Health, Public Health versus Medical Care, Unique Features of Public Health, Determinants
of Health (Social, Economic, Cultural, Environmental, Education, Genetics, Food and Nutrition).
Indicators of health, Burden of disease, Role of different disciplines in Public Health.
UNIT II CLINICAL DISEASES 9

Communicable diseases: Chickenpox / Shingles, COVID-19, Tuberculosis, Hepatitis B, Hepatitis C,
HIV / AIDS, Influenza, Swine flu. Non Communicable diseases: Diabetes mellitus, atherosclerosis,
fatty liver, Obesity, Cancer
UNIT III VACCINOLOGY 9

History of Vaccinology, conventional approaches to vaccine development, live attenuated and killed
vaccines, adjuvants, quality control, preservation and monitoring of microorganisms in seed lot
systems. Instruments related to monitoring of temperature, sterilization, environment.
UNIT IV OUTPATIENT & IN PATIENT SERVICES 9

Radiotherapy, Nuclear medicine, surgical units, OT Medical units, G & Obs. units Pediatric, neonatal
units, Critical care units, Physical medicine & Rehabilitation, Neurology, Gastroenterology,
Endoscopy, Pulmonology, Cardiology.
UNIT V BASICS OF IMAGING MODALITIES 9

Diagnostic X-rays - Computer tomography – MRI – Ultrasonography – Endoscopy – Thermography
– Different types of biotelemetry systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph J.carr and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, John Wiley
and sons, New York, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas M. Devlin.Textbook of Biochemistry with clinical correlations. Wiley Liss
Publishers
3. The Vaccine Book (2nd Ed.), Rafi Ahmed, Roy M. Anderson et. al.Editor(s): Barry R.
Bloom, PaulHenri Lambert, Academic Press, 2016, Pages xxi-xxiv.
REFERENCES
1. Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., Health Care Systems, Technology and
Techniques, Springer, 1st Edition, 2011
2. Burtis & Ashwood W.B. Tietz Textbook of Clinical chemistry. Saunders Company
3. Levine, M. M. (2004). New Generation Vaccines. New York: M. Dekker
331
VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN
CMG331 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To acquire the knowledge of the decision areas in finance.
 To learn the various sources of Finance
 To describe about capital budgeting and cost of capital.
 To discuss on how to construct a robust capital structure and dividend policy
 To develop an understanding of tools on Working Capital Management.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANGEMENT 9
Definition and Scope of Finance Functions - Objectives of Financial Management - Profit
Maximization and Wealth Maximization- Time Value of money- Risk and return concepts.
UNIT II . SOURCES OF FINANCE 9

Long term sources of Finance -Equity Shares – Debentures - Preferred Stock – Features – Merits
and Demerits. Short term sources - Bank Sources, Trade Credit, Overdrafts, Commercial Papers,
Certificate of Deposits, Money market mutual funds etc
UNIT III INVESTMENT DECISIONS: 9

Investment Decisions: capital budgeting – Need and Importance – Techniques of Capital Budgeting
-– Payback -ARR – NPV – IRR –Profitability Index.
Cost of Capital - Cost of Specific Sources of Capital - Equity -Preferred Stock- Debt - Reserves -
Concept and measurement of cost of capital - Weighted Average Cost of Capital.
UNIT IV FINANCING AND DIVIDEND DECISION 9
Operating Leverage and Financial Leverage- EBIT-EPS analysis. Capital Structure – determinants
of Capital structure- Designing an Optimum capital structure .
Dividend policy - Aspects of dividend policy - practical consideration - forms of dividend policy - -
Determinants of Dividend Policy
UNIT V WORKING CAPITAL DECISION 9

Working Capital Management: Working Capital Management - concepts - importance -Determinants
of Working capital. Cash Management: Motives for holding cash – Objectives and Strategies of Cash
Management. Receivables Management: Objectives - Credit policies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. M.Y. Khan and P.K.Jain Financial management, Text, Tata McGraw Hill
2. M. Pandey Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd
REFERENCES .
1. James C. Vanhorne –Fundamentals of Financial Management– PHI Learning,.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management,
3. Srivatsava, Mishra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press, 2011
CMG332 FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENT LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Describe the investment environment in which investment decisions are taken.
 Explain how to Value bonds and equities
 Explain the various approaches to value securities
 Describe how to create efficient portfolios through diversification
 Discuss the mechanism of investor protection in India.
332
UNIT I THE INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT 9
The investment decision process, Types of Investments – Commodities, Real Estate and
FinancialAssets, the Indian securities market, the market participants and trading of securities,
securitymarket indices, sources of financial information, Concept of return and risk, Impact of Taxes
andInflationonreturn.
UNIT II FIXED INCOME SECURITIES 9

Bond features, types of bonds, estimating bond yields, Bond Valuation types of bond risks,
defaultrisk andcreditrating.
UNIT III APPROACHES TOEQUITYANALYSIS 9

Introduction to Fundamental Analysis, Technical Analysis and Efficient Market Hypothesis, dividend
capitalisation models, and price-earnings multiple approach to equity valuation.
UNIT IV PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES 9

Portfolio and Diversification, Portfolio Risk and Return; Mutual Funds; Introduction to Financial
Derivatives; Financial Derivatives Markets in India
UNIT V INVESTOR PROTECTION 9

Role of SEBI and stock exchanges in investor protection; Investor grievances and their redressal
system, insider trading, investors’ awareness andactivism
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Charles P. Jones, Gerald R. Jensen. Investments: analysis and management. Wiley, 14TH
Edition, 2019.
2. Chandra, Prasanna. Investment analysis and portfolio management. McGraw-hill education, 5th,
Edition, 2017.
3. Rustagi, R. P. Investment Management Theory and Practice. Sultan Chand & Sons, 2021.
4. ZviBodie, Alex Kane, Alan J Marcus, PitabusMohanty, Investments, McGraw Hill Education
(India), 11 Edition(SIE), 2019
CMG333 BANKING, FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSURANCE LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the Banking system in India
 Grasp how banks raise their sources and how they deploy it
 Understand the development in banking technology
 Understand the financial services in India
 Understand the insurance Industry in India
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN BANKING SYSTEM 9

Overview of Banking system – Structure – Functions –Banking system in India - Key Regulations in
Indian Banking sector –RBI. Relationship between Banker and Customer - Retail & Wholesale
Banking – types of Accounts - Opening and operation of Accounts.
UNIT II MANAGING BANK FUNDS/ PRODUCTS 9

Liquid Assets - Investment in securities - Advances - Loans.Negotiable Instruments – Cheques, Bills
of Exchange & Promissory Notes.Designing deposit schemes– Asset and Liability Management –
NPA’s – Current issues on NPA’s – M&A’s of banks into securities market
333
UNIT III DEVELOPMENT IN BANKING TECHNOLOGY 9
Payment system in India – paper based – e payment –electronic banking –plastic money – e-money
–forecasting of cash demand at ATM’s –The Information Technology Act, 2000 in India – RBI’s
Financial Sector Technology vision document – security threats in e-banking & RBI’s Initiative.
UNIT IV FINANCIAL SERVICES 9

Introduction – Need for Financial Services – Financial Services Market in India – NBFC –– Leasing
and Hire Purchase –– mutual funds. Venture Capital Financing –Bill discounting –factoring –
Merchant Banking
UNIT V INSURANCE 9
Insurance –Concept - Need - History of Insurance industry in India. Insurance Act, 1938 –IRDA –
Regulations – Life Insurance - Annuities and Unit Linked Policies - Lapse of the Policy – revival –
settlement of claim
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES :
1. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, “Management of Banking and Financial Services, Pearson,
Delhi, 2017.
2. Meera Sharma, “Management of Financial Institutions – with emphasis on Bank and Risk
Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010
3. Peter S. Rose and Sylvia C. and Hudgins, “Bank Management and Financial Services”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017
CMG334 INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN AND ITS APPLICATIONS LT P C

3003
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN 9

Blockchain: The growth of blockchain technology - Distributed systems - The history of blockchain
and Bitcoin - Features of a blockchain - Types of blockchain, Consensus: Consensus mechanism -
Types of consensus mechanisms - Consensus in blockchain. Decentralization: Decentralization
using blockchain - Methods of decentralization - Routes to decentralization- Blockchain and full
ecosystem decentralization - Smart contracts - Decentralized Organizations- Platforms for
decentralization.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO CRYPTOCURRENCY 9

Bitcoin – Digital Keys and Addresses – Transactions – Mining – Bitcoin Networks and Payments –
Wallets – Alternative Coins – Theoretical Limitations – Bitcoin limitations – Name coin – Prime coin
– Zcash – Smart Contracts – Ricardian Contracts- Deploying smart contracts on a blockchain
UNIT III ETHEREUM 9

Introduction - The Ethereum network - Components of the Ethereum ecosystem - Transactions and
messages - Ether cryptocurrency / tokens (ETC and ETH) - The Ethereum Virtual Machine (EVM),
Ethereum Development Environment: Test networks - Setting up a private net - Starting up the
private network
UNIT IV WEB3 AND HYPERLEDGE ` 9

Introduction to Web3 – Contract Deployment – POST Requests – Development Frameworks –
Hyperledger as a Protocol – The Reference Architecture – Hyperledger Fabric – Distributed Ledger
– Corda.
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS 9

Kadena – Ripple – Rootstock – Quorum – Tendermint – Scalability – Privacy – Other Challenges –
Blockchain Research – Notable Projects – Miscellaneous Tools.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
334
REFERENCE
1. Imran. Bashir. Mastering block chain: Distributed Ledger Technology, Decentralization, and
Smart Contracts Explained. Packt Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2018
2. Peter Borovykh , Blockchain Application in Finance, Blockchain Driven, 2nd Edition, 2018
3. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Blockchain Applications: A Hands On Approach”, VPT,
2017.
CMG335 FINTECH PERSONAL FINANCE AND PAYMENTS LT P C

3003
UNIT I CURRENCY EXCHANGE AND PAYMENT 9

Understand the concept of Crypto currency- Bitcoin and Applications -Cryptocurrencies and Digital
Crypto Wallets -Types of Cryptocurrencies - Cryptocurrencies and Applications, block chain, Artificial
Intelligence, machine learning. Fintech users, Individual Payments, RTGS Systems, Immediate
Page 54 of 90 Payment Service (IMPS), Unified Payments Interface (UPI).Legal and Regulatory
Implications of Crypto currencies, Payment systems and their regulations.Digital Payments Smart
Cards, Stored-Value Cards, EC Micropayments, Payment Gateways, Mobile Payments, Digital and
Virtual Currencies, Security, Ethical, Legal, Privacy, and Technology Issues
UNIT II DIGITAL FINANCE AND ALTERNATIVE FINANCE 9

A Brief History of Financial Innovation, Digitization of Financial Services, Crowd funding, Charity and
Equity,. Introduction to the concept of Initial Coin Offering
UNIT III INSURETECH 9

InsurTech Introduction , Business model disruption AI/ML in InsurTech ● IoT and InsurTech ,Risk
Modeling ,Fraud Detection Processing claims and Underwriting Innovations in Insurance Services
UNIT IV PEER TO PEER LENDING 9

P2P and Marketplace Lending, New Models and New Products in market place lending P2P
Infrastructure and technologies , Concept of Crowdfunding Crowdfunding Architecture and
Technology ,P2P and Crowdfunding unicorns and business models , SME/MSME Lending: Unique
opportunities and Challenges, Solutions and Innovations
UNIT V REGULATORY ISSUES 9

FinTech Regulations: Global Regulations and Domestic Regulations, Evolution of RegTech,
RegTech Ecosystem: Financial Institutions, RegTech Ecosystem: StartupsRegTech, Startups:
Challenges, RegTech Ecosystem: Regulators, Use of AI in regulation and Fraud detection
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Swanson Seth, Fintech for Beginners: Understanding and Utilizing the power of technology,
Createspace Independent Publishing Platform,2016.
2. Models AuTanda, Fintech Bigtech And Banks Digitalization and Its Impact On Banking
Business, Springer, 2019
3. Henning Diedrich, Ethereum: Blockchains, Digital Assets, Smart Contracts, Decentralized
Autonomous Organizations, Wildfire Publishing, 2016
4. Jacob William, FinTech:TheBeginner’s Guide to Financial Technology, Createspace
Independent Publishing Platform, 2016
5. IIBF, Digital Banking, Taxmann Publication, 2016
6. Jacob William, Financial Technology, Create space Independent Pub, 2016
7. Luke Sutton, Financial Technology: Bitcoin & Blockchain, Createspace Independent Pub,
2016
335
CMG336 INTRODUCTION TO FINTECH LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about history, importance and evolution of Fintech
 To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in payment industry
 To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in insurance industry
 To learn the Fintech developments around the world
 To know about the future of Fintech
Fintech - Definition, History, concept, meaning, architecture, significance, Goals, key areas in
Fintech, Importance of Fintech, role of Fintech in economic development, opportunities and
challenges in Fintech, Evolution of Fintech in different sectors of the industry - Infrastructure, Banking
Industry, Startups and Emerging Markets, recent developments in FinTech, future prospects and
potential issues with Fintech.
UNIT II PAYMENT INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Payment Industry-Multichannel digital wallets, applications supporting wallets,
onboarding and KYC application, FinTech in Lending Industry- Formal lending, Informal lending, P2P
lending, POS lending, Online lending, Payday lending, Microfinance, Crowdfunding.
UNIT III INSURANCE INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Wealth Management Industry-Financial Advice, Automated investing, Socially
responsible investing, Fractional Investing, Social Investing. FinTech in Insurance Industry- P2P
insurance, On-Demand Insurance, On-Demand Consultation, Customer engagement through Quote
to sell, policy servicing, Claims Management, Investment linked health insurance.
UNIT IV FINTECH AROUND THE GLOBE 9

FinTech developments - US, Europe and UK, Germany, Sweden, France, China, India, Africa,
Australia, New Zealand, Brazil and Middle East, Regulatory and Policy Assessment for Growth of
FinTech. FinTech as disruptors, Financial institutions collaborating with FinTech companies, The
new financial world.
UNIT V FUTURE OF FINTECH 9

How emerging technologies will change financial services, the future of financial services, banking
on innovation through data, why FinTech banks will rule the world, The FinTech Supermarket, Banks
partnering with FinTech start-ups, The rise of BankTech, Fintech impact on Retail Banking, A future
without money, Ethics in Fintech.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Arner D., Barbers J., Buckley R, The evolution of FinTech: a new post crisis paradigm,
University of New South Wales Research Series, 2015
2. Susanne Chishti, Janos Barberis, The FINTECH Book: The Financial Technology Handbook
for Investors, Entrepreneurs and Visionaries, Wiley Publications, 2016
3. Richard Hayen, FinTech: The Impact and Influence of Financial Technology on Banking and
the Finance Industry, 2016
4. Parag Y Arjunwadkar, FinTech: The Technology Driving Disruption in the financial service
industry CRC Press, 2018
5. Sanjay Phadke, Fintech Future : The Digital DNA of Finance Paperback .Sage Publications,
2020
6. Pranay Gupta, T. Mandy Tham, Fintech: The New DNA of Financial Services Paperback,
2018
336
VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP
CMG337 FOUNDATIONS OF ENTREPRENERUSHIP L TP C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop and strengthen the entrepreneurial quality and motivation of learners.
 To impart the entrepreneurial skills and traits essential to become successful entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of entrepreneurship and management in Technology
oriented businessess.
 To empower the learners to run a Technology driven business efficiently and effectively
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Entrepreneurship- Definition, Need, Scope - Entrepreneurial Skill & Traits - Entrepreneur vs.
Intrapreneur; Classification of entrepreneurs, Types of entrepreneurs -Factors affecting
entrepreneurial development – Achievement Motivation – Contributions of Entreprenrship to
Economic Development.
UNIT II BUSINESS OWNERSHIP & ENVRIONMENT 9
Types of Business Ownership – Buiness Envrionemental Factors – Political-Economic-Sociological-
Technological-Environmental-Legal aspects – Human Reosurces Mobilisation-Basics of Managing
Finance- Esentials of Marketing Management - Production and Operations Planning – Systems
Management and Administration
UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Introduction to Technopreneurship - Definition, Need, Scope- Emerging Concepts- Principles -
Characterisitcis of a technopreneur - Impacts of Technopreneurship on Society – Economy- Job
Opportuinites in Technopreneurship - Recent trends
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Technology Entrepreneurship - Local, National and Global practices - Intrapreneurship and
Technology interactions, Networking of entrepreneurial activities – Launching - Managing
Technology based Product / Service entrepreneurship -– Success Stories of Technopreneurs - Case
Studies
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS IN ENTREPRENERUSHIP 9

Effective Business Management Strategies For Franchising - Sub-Contracting- Leasing-
Technopreneurs – Agripreneurs - Netpreneurs- Portfolio entrepreneruship - NGO Entrepreneurship
– Recent Entrperneruial Develoments - Local – National – Global perspectives.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO1 Learn the basics of Entrepreneurship
CO2 Understand the business ownership patterns and evnironment
CO3 Understand the Job opportunites in Industries relating to Technopreneurship
CO4 Learn about applications of tehnopreneurship and successful technopreneurs
CO5 Acquaint with the recent and emerging trends in entrepreneruship
TEXT BOOKS:
1) S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd. Ram Nagar New Delhi, 2021.
2) Donal F Kuratko Entrepreneurship (11th Edition) Theory, Process, Practice by Published 2019
by Cengage Learning,
REFERENCES :
1) Daniel Mankani. 2003. Technopreneurship: The successful Entrepreneur in the new
Economy. Prentice Hall
337
2) Edward Elgar. 2007. Entrepreneurship, Cooperation and the Firm: The Emergence and Survival
of High-Technology Ventures in Europe. Edi: Jan Ulijn, Dominique Drillon, and Frank Lasch.
Wiley Pub.
3) Lang, J. 2002, The High Tech Entrepreneur's Handbook, Ft.com.
4) David Sheff 2002, China Dawn: The Story of a Technology and Business Revolution,
5) HarperBusiness,https://fanny.staff.uns.ac.id/files/2013/12/Technopreneur-BASED
EDUCATION-REVOLUTION.pdf
6) JumpStart: A Technoprenuership Fable, Dennis Posadas, (Singapore: Pearson Prentice Hall,
2009
7) Basics of Technoprenuership: Module 1.1-1.2, Frederico Gonzales, President-PESO Inc; M.
Barcelon, UP
8) Journal articles pertaining to Entrepreneurship
CMG338 TEAM BUILDING & LEADERSHIP MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop and strengthen the Leadership qualities and motivation of learners.
 To impart the Leadership skills and traits essential to become successful entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of Team Building in managing Technology oriented
businessess.
 To empower the learners to build robust teams for running and leading a business efficiently
and effectively
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGING TEAMS 9

Introduction to Team - Team Dynamics - Team Formation – Stages of Team Devlopment -
Enhancing teamwork within a group - Team Coaching - Team Decision Making - Virtual Teams - Self
Directed Work Teams (SDWTs) -Multicultural Teams.
UNIT II MANAGING AND DEVELOPING EFFECTIVE TEAMS 9

Team-based Organisations- Leadershp roles in team-based organisations - Offsite training and
team development - Experiential Learning - Coaching and Mentoring in team building - Building High-
Performance Teams - Building Credibility and Trust - Skills for Developing Others - Team Building
at the Top - Leadership in Teamwork Effectiveness.
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO LEADERSHIP 9

Introduction to Leadership - Leadership Myths – Characteristics of Leader, Follower and Situation -
Leadership Attributes - Personality Traits and Leadership- Intelligence Types and Leadership -
Power and Leadership - Delegation and Empowerment .
UNIT IV LEADERSHIP IN ORGANISATIONS 9

Leadership Styles – LMX Theory- Leadership Theory and Normative Decision Model - Situational
Leadership Model - Contingency Model and Path Goal Theory – Transactional and Transformational
Leadership - Charismatic Leadership - Role of Ethics and Values in Organisational Leadership.
UNIT V LEADERSHIP EFFECTIVENESS 9

Leadership Behaviour - Assessment of Leadership Behaviors - Destructive Leadership - Motivation
and Leadership - Managerial Incompetence and Derailment Conflict Management - Negotiation and
Leadership - Culture and Leadership - Global Leadership – Recent Trends in Leadership.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Learn the basics of managing teams for business.
CO2 Understand developing effective teams for business management.
CO3 Understand the fundamentals of leadership for running a business.
338
CO4 Learn about the importance of leadership for business development.
CO5 Acquaint with emerging trends in leadership effectiveness for entreprenerus.’’
REFERENCES :
1. Hughes, R.L., Ginnett, R.C., & Curphy, G.J., Leadership: Enhancing the lessons of experience
,9th Ed, McGraw Hill Education, Chennai, India. (2019).
2. Katzenback, J.R., Smith, D.K., The Wisdom of Teams: Creating the High Performance
Organisations, Harvard Business Review Press, (2015).
3. Haldar, U.K., Leadership and Team Building, Oxford University Press, (2010).
4. Daft, R.L., The Leadership Experience, Cengage, (2015).
5. Daniel Levi, Group Dynamics for Teams ,4th Ed, (2014), Sage Publications.
6. Dyer, W. G., Dyer, W. G., Jr., & Dyer, J. H..Team building: Proven strategies for improving
team performance, 5thed, Jossey-Bass, (2013).
CMG339 CREATIVITY & INNOVATION IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop the creativity skills among the learners
 To impart the knowledge of creative intelligence essential for entrepreneurs
 To know the applications of innovation in entprerenship.
 To develeop innovative business models for business.
UNIT I CREATIVITY 9
Creativity: Definition- Forms of Creativity-Essence, Elaborative and Expressive Creativities- Quality
of Creativity-Existential, Entrepreneurial and Empowerment Creativities – Creative Environment-
Creative Technology- - Creative Personality and Motivation.
UNIT II CREATIVE INTELLIGENCE 9

Creative Intelligence: Convergent thinking ability – Traits Congenial to creativity – Creativity Training-
-Criteria for evaluating Creativity-Credible Evaluation- Improving the quality of our creativity –
Creative Tools and Techniques - Blocks to creativity- fears and Disabilities- Strategies for
Unblocking- Designing Creativity Enabling Environment.
UNIT III INNOVATION 9

Innovation: Definition- Levels of Innovation- Incremental Vs Radical Innovation-Product Innovation
and Process- Technological, Organizational Innovation – Indicators- Characteristics of Innovation in
Different Sectors. Theories in Innovation and Creativity- Design Thinking and Innovation- Innovation
as Collective Change-Innovation as a system
UNIT IV INNOVATION AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Innovation and Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneurial Mindset , Motivations and Behaviours-
Opportunity Analysis and Decision Making- Industry Understanding - Entrepreneurial Opportunities-
Entrepreneurial Strategies – Technology Pull/Market Push – Product -Market fit
UNIT V INNOVATIVE BUSINESS MODELS 9

Innovative Business Models: Customer Discovery-Customer Segments-Prospect Theory and
Developing Value Propositions- Developing Business Models: Elements of Business Models –
Innovative Business Models: Elements, Designing Innovative Business Models- Responsible
Innovation and Creativity.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Learn the basics of creativity for developing Entrepreneurship
339
CO2 Understand the importance of creative inteligence for business growth
CO3 Understand the advances through Innovation in Industries
CO4 Learn about applications of innovation in building successful ventures
CO5 Acquaint with developing innovative business models to run the business effecientlty and
effectively
Suggested Readings:
Creativity and Inovation in Entrepreneurship, Kankha, Sultan Chand
Pradip N Khandwalla, Lifelong Creativity, An Unending Quest, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, 4e, Pearson, 2018.
Vinnie Jauhari, Sudanshu Bhushan, Innovation Management, Oxford Higher Education, 2014.
Innovation Management, C.S.G. Krishnamacharyulu, R. Lalitha, Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.
A. Dale Timpe, Creativity, Jaico Publishing House, 2003.
Brian Clegg, Paul Birch, Creativity, Kogan Page, 2009.
Strategic Innovation: Building and Sustaining Innovative Organizations- Course Era, Raj Echambadi.
CMG340 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide basic knowledge of concepts, principles, tools and techniques of marketing for
entrepreneurs
 To provide an exposure to the students pertaining to the nature and Scope of marketing,
which they are expected to possess when they enter the industry as practitioners.
 To give them an understanding of fundamental premise underlying market driven strategies
and the basic philosophies and tools of marketing management for business owners.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction - Market and Marketing – Concepts- Functions of Marketing - Importance of Marketing
- Marketing Orientations - Marketing Mix-The Traditional 4Ps - The Modern Components of the Mix
- The Additional 3Ps - Developing an Effective Marketing Mix.
UNIT II MARKETING ENVIRONMENT 9
Introduction - Environmental Scanning - Analysing the Organisation’s Micro Environment and Macro
Environment - Differences between Micro and Macro Environment – Techniques of Environment
Scanning - Marketing organization - Marketing Research and the Marketing Information System,
Types and Components.
UNIT III PRODUCT AND PRICING MANAGEMENT 9
Product- Meaning, Classification, Levels of Products – Product Life Cycle (PLC) - Product Strategies
- Product Mix - Packaging and Labelling - New Product Development - Brand and Branding -
Advantages and disadvantages of branding Pricing - Factors Affecting Price Decisions - Cost Based
Pricing - Value Based and Competition Based Pricing - Pricing Strategies - National and Global
Pricing.
UNIT IV PROMOTION AND DISTRIBTUION MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction to Promotion – Marketing Channels- Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) -
Introduction to Advertising and Sales Promotion – Basics of Public Relations and Publicity - Personal
Selling - Process - Direct Marketing - Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning (STP)-Logistics
Management- Introduction to Retailing and Wholesaling.
UNIT V CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction - Relationship Marketing Vs. Relationship Management - Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) - Forms of Relationship Management - CRM practices - Managing Customer
340
Loyalty and Development – Buyer-Seller Relationships- Buying Situations in Industrial / Business
Market - Buying Roles in Industrial Marketing - Factors that Influence Business - Services Marketing
- E-Marketing or Online Marketing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to :
CO1 Have the awareness of marketing management process
CO2 Understand the marketing environment
CO3 Acquaint about product and pricing strategies
CO4 Knowledge of promotion and distribution in marketing management.
CO5 Comprehend the contemporary marketing scenairos and offer solutions to marketing
issues.
REFERENCES:
1. Marketing Management, Sherlekar S.A, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
2. Marketing Management , Philip Kortler and Kevin Lane Keller, PHI 15th Ed, 2015.
3 Marketing Management- An Indian perspective, Vijay Prakash Anand, Biztantra, Second edition,
2016.
4. Marketing Management Global Perspective, Indian Context, V.S.Ramaswamy & S.Namakumari,
Macmillan Publishers India,5th edition, 2015.
5. Marketing Management, S.H.H. Kazmi, 2013, Excel Books India.
6. Marketing Management- text and Cases, Dr. C.B.Gupta & Dr. N.Rajan Nair, 17th edition, 2016.
CMG341 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts, structure and functions of human resource management for
entrepreneurs.
 To create an awareness of the roles, functions and functioning of human resource
department.
 To understand the methods and techniques followed by Human Resource Management
practitioners.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HRM 9
Concept, Definition, Objectives- Nature and Scope of HRM - Evolution of HRM - HR Manager Roles-
Skills - Personnel Management Vs. HRM - Human Resource Policies - HR Accounting - HR Audit -
Challenges in HRM.
UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9
HR Planning - Definition - Factors- Tools - Methods and Techniques - Job analysis- Job rotation-
Job Description - Career Planning - Succession Planning - HRIS - Computer Applications in HR -
Recent Trends
UNIT III RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION 9
Sources of recruitment- Internal Vs. External - Domestic Vs. Global Sources -eRecruitment -
Selection Process- Selection techniques -eSelection- Interview Types- Employee Engagement.
UNIT IV TRAINING AND EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT 9
Types of Training - On-The-Job, Off-The-Job - Training Needs Analysis – Induction and
Socialisation Process - Employee Compensation - Wages and Salary Administration – Health and
Social Security Measures- Green HRM Practices
UNIT V CONTROLLING HUMAN RESOURCES 9
Performance Appraisal – Types - Methods - Collective Bargaining - Grievances Redressal Methods
– Employee Discipline – Promotion – Demotion - Transfer – Dismissal - Retrenchment - Union
Management Relationship - Recent Trends
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
341
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able:
CO1 To understand the Evolution of HRM and Challenges faced by HR Managers
CO2 To learn about the HR Planning Methods and practices.
CO3 To acquaint about the Recruitment and Selection Techniques followed in Industries.
CO4 To known about the methods of Training and Employee Development.
CO5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling human resources in organisations.
REFERENCES
1) Gary Dessler and Biju Varkkey, Human Resource Management, 14e , Pearson, 2015.
2) Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management, Cengage Learning 15e, 2017.
3) David A. Decenzo, Stephen.P.Robbins, and Susan L. Verhulst, Human Resource
Management, Wiley, International Student Edition, 11th Edition, 2014
4) R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management, Pearson , 2015.
5) Luis R.Gomez-Mejia, David B.Balkin, Robert L Cardy. Managing Human Resource. PHI
Learning. 2012
6) John M. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management,12e, McGraw Hill Irwin,2013.
7) K. Aswathappa, Sadhna Dash , Human Resource Management - Text and Cases ,9th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2021.
8) Uday Kumar Haldar, Juthika Sarkar. Human Resource management. Oxford. 2012
CMG342 FINANCING NEW BUSINESS VENTURES LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop the basics of business venture financing.
 To impart the knowledge essential for entrepreneurs for financing new ventures.
 To acquaint the learners with the sources of debt and quity financing.
 To empower the learners towards fund rasiing for new ventures effectively.
UNIT I ESSENTIALS OF NEW BUSINES VENTURE 9
Setting up new Business Ventures – Need - Scope - Franchising - Location Strategy, Registration
Process - State Directorate of Industries- Financing for New Ventures - Central and State
Government Agencies - Types of loans – Financial Institutions - SFC, IDBI, NSIC and SIDCO.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO VENTURE FINANCING 9
Venture Finance – Definition – Historic Background - Funding New Ventures- Need – Scope – Types
- Cost of Project - Means of Financing - Estimation of Working Capital - Requirement of funds – Mix
of Dent and Equity - Challenges and Opportunities.
UNIT III SOURCES OF DEBT FINANCING 9
Fund for Capital Assets - Term Loans - Leasing and Hire-Purchase - Money Market instruments –
Bonds, Corporate Papers – Preference Capital- Working Capital Management- Fund based Credit
Facilities - Cash Credit - Over Draft.
UNIT IV SOURCES OF EQUITY FINANCING 9
Own Capital, Unsecured Loan - Government Subsidies , Margin Money- Equity Funding - Private
Equity Fund- Schemes of Commercial banks - Angel Funding – Crowdfunding- Venture Capital.
UNIT V METHODS OF FUND RAISING FOR NEW VENTURES 9
Investor Decision Process - Identifying the appropriate investors- Targeting investors- Developing
Relationships with investors - Investor Selection Criteria- Company Creation- Raising Funds - Seed
Funding- VC Selection Criteria – Process- Methods- Recent Trends
TOTAL : 45PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
CO1 Learn the basics of starting a new business venture.
CO2 Understand the basics of venture financing.
342
CO3 Understand the sources of debt financing.
CO4 Understanf the sources of equity financing.
CO5 Acquaint with the methods of fund raising for new business ventures.
REFERENCES :
1) Principles of Corporate Finance by Brealey and Myers et al.,12TH ed, McGraw Hill Education
(India) Private Limited, 2018
2) Prasanna Chandra, Projects : Planning ,Analysis,Selection ,Financing,Implementation and
Review, McGraw Hilld Education India Pvt Ltd ,New Delhi , 2019.
3) Introduction to Project Finance. Andrew Fight,Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006.
4) Metrick, Andrew; Yasuda, Ayako. Venture Capital And The Finance Of Innovation. Venture
Capital And The Finance Of Innovation, 2nd Edition, Andrew Metrick And Ayako Yasuda, Eds.,
John Wiley And Sons, Inc, 2010.
5) Feld, Brad; Mendelson, Jason. Venture Deals. Wiley, 2011.
6) May, John; Simons, Cal. Every Business Needs An Angel: Getting The Money You Need To
Make Your Business Grow. Crown Business, 2001.
7) Gompers, Paul Alan; Lerner, Joshua. The Money Of Invention: How Venture Capital Creates
New Wealth. Harvard Business Press, 2001.
8) Camp, Justin J. Venture Capital Due Diligence: A Guide To Making Smart Investment Choices
And Increasing Your Portfolio Returns. John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
9) Byers, Thomas. Technology Ventures: From Idea To Enterprise. Mcgraw-Hill Higher Education,
2014.
10) Lerner, Josh; Leamon, Ann; Hardymon, Felda. Venture Capital, Private Equity, And The
Financing Of Entrepreneurship. 2012.
VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
CMG343 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3 003
UNIT I (9)
1. Meaning, Nature and Scope of Public Administration
2. Importance of Public Administration
3. Evolution of Public Administration
UNIT II (9)
1. New Public Administration
2. New Public Management
3. Public and Private Administration
UNIT III (9)

1. Relationships with Political Science, History and Sociology
2. Classical Approach
3. Scientific Management Approach
UNIT IV (9)
1. Bureaucratic Approach: Max Weber
2. Human Relations Approach : Elton Mayo
3. Ecological Approach : Riggs
UNIT V (9)
1. Leadership: Leadership - Styles - Approaches
2. Communication: Communication Types - Process - Barriers
3. Decision Making: Decision Making - Types, Techniques and Processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
343
REFERENCEs:
1. Avasthi and Maheswari: Public Administration in India, Agra:Lakshmi Narain Agarwal,2013.
2. Ramesh K Arora: Indian Public Administration, New Delhi: Wishwa Prakashan, 2012.
3. R.B. Jain: Public Administration in India,21st Century Challenges for Good Governance, New
Delhi: Deep and Deep, 2002.
4. Rumki Basu: Public Administration:Concept and Theories, New Delhi:Sterling, 2013.
5. R. Tyagi, Public Administration, Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi, 1983.
CMG344 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA LTPC

3 003
UNIT I (9)
1. Constitutional Development Since 1909 to 1947
2. Making of the Constitution.
3. Constituent Assembly
UNIT II (9)
1. Fundamental Rights
2. Fundamental Duties
3. Directive Principles of State Policy
UNIT III (9)

1. President
2. Parliament
3. Supreme Court
UNIT IV (9)
1. Governor
2. State Legislature
3. High Court
UNIT V (9)
1. Secularism
2. Social Justice
3. Minority Safeguards
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Basu. D.D.: Introduction to Indian Constitution ; Prentice Hall; New Delhi.
2. Kapur. A.C: Indian Government and Political System; S.Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Johari J.C.: Indian Politics, Vishal Publications Ltd, New Delhi
4. Agarwal R.C: Indian Political System; S.Chand & Co., New Delhi
CMG345 PUBLIC PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003
UNIT I (9)
1. Meaning, Scope and Importance of Personnel Administration
2. Types of Personnel Systems: Bureaucratic, Democratic and Representative systems
UNIT II (9)
1. Generalist Vs Specialist
2. Civil Servants’ Relationship with Political Executive
3. Integrity in Administration.
344
UNIT III (9)
1. Recruitment: Direct Recruitment and Recruitment from Within
2. Training: Kinds of Training
3. Promotion
UNIT IV (9)
1. All India Services
2. Service Conditions
3. State Public Service Commission
UNIT V (9)
1. Employer Employee Relations
2. Wage and Salary Administration
3. Allowances and Benefits
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Stahl Glean O: Public Personnel Administration
2. Parnandikar Pai V.A: Personnel System for Development Administration.
3. Bhambhiru . P: Bureaucracy and Policy in India.
4. Dwivedi O.P and Jain R.B: India’s Administrative state.
5. Muttalis M.A: Union Public Service Commission.
6. Bhakara Rao .V: Employer Employee Relations in India.
7. Davar R.S. Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
CMG346 ADMINISTRATIVE THEORIES LTPC

3 003
UNIT I (9)
Meaning, Scope and significance of Public Administration, Evolution of Public Administration as a
discipline and Identity of Public Administration
UNIT II (9)
Theories of Organization: Scientific Management Theory, Classical Model,
Human Relations Theory
UNIT III (9)

Organization goals and Behaviour, Groups in organization and group dynamics, Organizational
Design.
UNIT IV (9)
Motivation Theories, content, process and contemporary; Theories of Leadership: Traditional and
Modern: Process and techniques of decision-making
UNIT V (9)
Administrative thinkers: Kautilya, Woodrow Willson, C.I. Barnard . Peter Drucker
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Crozior M : The Bureaucratic phenomenon (Chand)
2. Blau. P.M and Scott. W : Formal Organizations (RKP)
3. Presthus. R : The Organizational Society (MAC)
4. Alvi, Shum Sun Nisa : Eminent Administrative Thinkers.
5. Keith Davis : Organization Theory (MAC)
345
CMG347 INDIAN ADMINISTRATIVE SYSTEM LTPC
3003
UNIT I (9)
Evolution and Constitutional Context of Indian Administration, Constitutional Authorities: Finance
Commission, Union Public Services Commission, Election Commission, Comptroller and Auditor
General of India, Attorney General of India
UNIT II (9)
Role & Functions of the District Collector, Relationship between the District
Collector and Superintendent of Police, Role of Block Development Officer in development
programmes, Local Government
UNIT III (9)

Main Features of 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act 1992, Salient Features of 74th Constitutional
Amendment Act 1992
UNIT IV (9)
Coalition politics in India, Integrity and Vigilance in Indian Administration
UNIT V (9)
Corruption – Ombudsman, Lok Pal & Lok Ayuktha
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. S.R. Maheswari : Indian Administration
2. Khera. S.S : Administration in India
3. Ramesh K. Arora : Indian Public Administration
4. T.N. Chaturvedi : State administration in India
5. Basu, D.D : Introduction to the Constitution of India
CMG348 PUBLIC POLICY ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003
UNIT I (9)
Meaning and Definition of Public Policy - Nature, Scope and Importance of public policy – Public
policy relationship with social sciences especially with political science and Public Administration.
UNIT II (9)
Approaches in Policy Analysis - Institutional Approach – Incremental Approach and System’s
Approach – Dror’s Optimal Model
UNIT III (9)

Major stages involved in Policy making Process – Policy Formulation – Policy Implementation –
Policy Evaluation.
UNIT IV (9)
Institutional Framework of Policy making – Role of Bureaucracy – Role of Interest Groups and Role
of Political Parties.
UNIT V (9)
Introduction to the following Public Policies – New Economic Policy – Population Policy – Agriculture
policy - Information Technology Policy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
346
REFERENCES:
1. Rajesh Chakrabarti & Kaushik Sanyal : Public Policy in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
2. Kuldeep Mathur : Public Policy and Politics in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
3. Bidyutv Chakrabarty: Public Policy: Concept, Theory and Practice, 2015.
4. Pradeep Saxena : Public Policy Administration and Development
5. Sapru R.K. : Public Policy: Formulation, Implementation and Evaluation, Sterling Publishers,
2016.
VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS
CMG349 STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the applications of statistics in business decision making.
Basic definitions and rules for probability, Baye‘s theorem and random variables, Probability
distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Uniform and Normal distributions.
UNIT II SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION AND ESTIMATION 9

Introduction to sampling distributions, Central limit theorem and applications, sampling techniques,
Point and Interval estimates of population parameters.
UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS - PARAMETIRC TESTS 9

Hypothesis testing: one sample and two sample tests for means of large samples (z-test), one
sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test), ANOVA one way.
UNIT IV NON-PARAMETRIC TESTS 9

Chi-square tests for independence of attributes and goodness of fit, Kolmogorov-Smirnov – test for
goodness of fit, Mann – Whitney U test and Kruskal Wallis test.
UNIT V CORRELATION AND REGRESSION 9

Correlation –Rank Correlation – Regression – Estimation of Regression line – Method of Least
Squares – Standard Error of estimate.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 To facilitate objective solutions in business decision making.
CO2 understand and solve business problems
CO3 To apply statistical techniques to data sets, and correctly interpret the results.
CO4 To develop skill-set that is in demand in both the research and business environments
CO5 To enable the students to apply the statistical techniques in a work setting.
REFERENCES:
1. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Masood H.Siddiqui, Sanjay Rastogi, Statistics for Management,
Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2017.
2. Prem. S. Mann, Introductory Statistics, Wiley Publications, 9th Edition, 2015.
3. T N Srivastava and Shailaja Rego, Statistics for Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition 2017.
4. Ken Black, Applied Business Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2012.
5. David R. Anderson, Dennis J. Sweeney, Thomas A.Williams, Jeffrey D.Camm, James J.Cochran,
Statistics for business and economics, 13th edition, Thomson (South – Western) Asia, Singapore,
2016.
6. N. D. Vohra, Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
347
CMG350 DATAMINING FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To know how to derive meaning form huge volume of data and information.
 To understand how knowledge discovering process is used in business decision making.
Data mining, Text mining, Web mining, Data ware house.
UNIT II DATA MINING PROCESS 9

Datamining process – KDD, CRISP-DM, SEMMA
Prediction performance measures
UNIT III PREDICTION TECHNIQUES 9

Data visualization, Time series – ARIMA, Winter Holts,
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification, Association, Clustering.
UNIT V MACHINE LEARNING AND AI 9

Genetic algorithms, Neural network, Fuzzy logic, Ant Colony optimization, Particle Swarm
optimization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Learn to apply various data mining techniques into various areas of different domains.
CO2 Be able to interact competently on the topic of data mining for business intelligence.
CO3 Apply various prediction techniques.
CO4 Learn about supervised and unsupervised learning technique.
CO5 Develop and implement machine learning algorithms
REFERENCES :
1. Jaiwei Ham and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining concepts and techniques, Kauffmann Publishers
2006
2. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Jay E. Aronson and David King, Business Intelligence, Prentice
Hall, 2008.
3. W.H.Inmon, Building the Data Warehouse, fourth edition Wiley India pvt. Ltd. 2005.
4. Ralph Kimball and Richard Merz, The data warehouse toolkit, John Wiley, 3rd edition,2013.
5. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Mastering Data mining, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2nd Edition,
2011
6. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Data mining techniques for Marketing, Sales and Customer
support, John Wiley, 2011
7. G. K. Gupta, Ïntroduction to Data mining with Case Studies, Prentice hall of India, 2011
8. Giudici, Applied Data mining – Statistical Methods for Business and Industry, John Wiley. 2009
9. Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich Stacia Misner, Business Intelligence, Microsoft, 2011
10. Michalewicz Z., Schmidt M. Michalewicz M and Chiriac C, Adaptive Business Intelligence, Springer
– Verlag, 2007
11. GalitShmueli, Nitin R. Patel and Peter C. Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence – Concepts,
Techniques and Applications Wiley, India, 2010.
348
CMG351 HUMAN RESOURCE ANALYTICS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the ability of the learners to define and implement HR metrics that are aligned with
the overall business strategy.
 To know the different types of HR metrics and understand their respective impact and
application.
 To understand the impact and use of HR metrics and their connection with HR analytics.
 To understand common workforce issues and resolving them using people analytics.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HR ANALYTICS 9

People Analytics - stages of maturity - Human Capital in the Value Chain : impact on business – HR
metrics and KPIs.
UNIT II HR ANLYTICS I: RECRUITMENT 9

Recruitment Metrics : Fill-up ratio - Time to hire - Cost per hire - Early turnover - Employee referral
hires - Agency hires - Lateral hires - Fulfillment ratio- Quality of hire.
UNIT III HR ANALYTICS - TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Training & Development Metrics : Percentage of employees trained- Internally and externally trained
-Training hours and cost per employee - ROI.
UNIT IV HR ANALYTICS EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT AND CAREER

PROGRESSION 9
Employee Engagement Metrics :Talent Retention index - Voluntary and involuntary turnover- grades,
performance, and service tenure - Internal hired index Career Progression Metrics: Promotion index
- Rotation index - Career path index.
UNIT V HR ANALYTICS IV: WORKFORCE DIVERSITY AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Workforce Diversity and Development Metrics : Employees per manager – Workforce age profiling -
Workforce service profiling - Churnover index - Workforce diversity
index - Gender mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 The learners will be conversant about HR metrics and ready to apply at work settings.
CO2 The learners will be able to resolve HR issues using people analytics.
REFERENCES:
1. JacFitzenz , The New HR Analytics, AMACOM , 2010.
2. Edwards M. R., & Edwards K, Predictive HR Analytics: Mastering the HR Metric.London: Kogan
Page.2016.
3. Human Resources kit for Dummies – 3 rd edition – Max Messmer, 2003
4. Dipak Kumar Bhattacharyya, HR Analytics ,Understanding Theories and Applications, SAGE
Publications India ,2017.
5. Sesil, J. C. , Applying advanced analytics to HR management decisions: Methods fo selection,
developing incentives, and improving collaboration. Upper Saddle River,New Jersey: Pearson
Education,2014.
6. Pease, G., & Beresford, B, Developing Human Capital: Using Analytics to Plan and Optimize Your
Learning and Development Investments. Wiley ,2014.
7. Phillips, J., & Phillips, P.P, Making Human Capital Analytics Work: Measuring the ROI of Human
Capital Processes and OUTCOME. McGraw-Hill,2014.
8. HR Scorecard and Metrices, HBR, 2001.
349
CMG352 MARKETING AND SOCIAL MEDIA WEB ANALYTICS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To showcase the opportunities that exist today to leverage the power of the web and social
media
UNIT I MARKETING ANALYTICS 9

Marketing Budget and Marketing Performance Measure, Marketing - Geographical Mapping, Data
Exploration, Market Basket Analysis
UNIT II COMMUNITY BUILDING AND MANAGEMENT 9

History and Evolution of Social Media-Understanding Science of Social Media –Goals for using Social
Media- Social Media Audience and Influencers - Digital PR- Promoting Social Media Pages- Linking
Social Media Accounts-The Viral Impact of Social Media.
UNIT III SOCIAL MEDIA POLICIES AND MEASUREMENTS 9

Social Media Policies-Etiquette, Privacy- ethical problems posed by emerging social media
technologies - The Basics of Tracking Social Media.
UNIT IV WEB ANALYTICS 9

Data Collection, Overview of Qualitative Analysis, Business Analysis, KPI and Planning, Critical
Components of a Successful Web Analytics Strategy, Proposals & Reports, Web Data Analysis.
UNIT V SEARCH ANALYTICS 9

Search engine optimization (SEO), user engagement, user-generated content, web traffic analysis,
online security, online ethics, data visualization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
 The Learners will understand social media, web and social media analytics and their potential
impact.
REFERENCES:
1. K. M. Shrivastava, Social Media in Business and Governance, Sterling Publishers Private Limited,
2013
2. Christian Fuchs, Social Media a critical introduction, SAGE Publications Ltd, 2014
3. Bittu Kumar, Social Networking, V & S Publishers, 2013
4. Avinash Kaushik, Web Analytics - An Hour a Day, Wiley Publishing, 2007
5. Ric T. Peterson, Web Analytics Demystified, Celilo Group Media and CafePress 2004
6. Takeshi Moriguchi, Web Analytics Consultant Official Textbook, 7th Edition, 2016
CMG353 OPERATION AND SUPPLY CHAIN ANALYTICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To treat the subject in depth by emphasizing on the advanced quantitative models and
methods in operations and supply chain management and its practical aspects and the latest
developments in the field.
Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive analytics, Data Driven Supply Chains – Basics, transforming
supply chains.
UNIT II WAREHOUSING DECISIONS 9

P-Median Methods - Guided LP Approach, Greedy Drop Heuristics, Dynamic Location Models,
Space Determination and Layout Methods.
350
UNIT III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9
Dynamic Lot sizing Methods, Multi-Echelon Inventory models, Aggregate Inventory system and
LIMIT, Risk Analysis in Supply Chain, Risk pooling strategies.
UNIT IV TRANSPORTATION NETWORK MODELS 9

Minimal Spanning Tree, Shortest Path Algorithms, Maximal Flow Problems, Transportation
Problems, Set covering and Set Partitioning Problems, Travelling Salesman Problem, Scheduling
Algorithms.
UNIT V MCDM MODELS 9

Analytic Hierarchy Process(AHP), Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA), Fuzzy Logic an Techniques,
the analytical network process (ANP), TOPSIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1 To enable quantitative solutions in business decision making under conditions of certainty, risk
and uncertainty.
REFERENCES:
1. Nada R. Sanders, Big data driven supply chain management: A framework for implementing
analytics and turning information into intelligence, Pearson Education, 2014.
2. Michael Watson, Sara Lewis, Peter Cacioppi, Jay Jayaraman, Supply Chain Network Design:
Applying Optimization and Analytics to the Global Supply Chain, Pearson Education, 2013.
3. Anna Nagurney, Min Yu, Amir H. Masoumi, Ladimer S. Nagurney, Networks Against Time: Supply
Chain Analytics for Perishable Products, Springer, 2013.
4. Muthu Mathirajan, Chandrasekharan Rajendran, Sowmyanarayanan Sadagopan, Arunachalam
Ravindran, Parasuram Balasubramanian, Analytics in Operations/Supply Chain Management ,
I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Gerhard J. Plenert, Supply Chain Optimization through Segmentation and Analytics, CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis Group, 2014.
CMG354 FINANCIAL ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 This course introduces a core set of modern analytical tools that specifically target finance
applications.
UNIT I CORPORATE FINANCE ANALYSIS 9

Basic corporate financial predictive modelling- Project analysis- cash flow analysis- cost of capital,
Financial Break even modelling, Capital Budget model-Payback, NPV, IRR.
UNIT II FINANCIAL MARKET ANALYSIS 9

Estimation and prediction of risk and return ( bond investment and stock investment) –Time series-
examining nature of data, Value at risk, ARMA, ARCH and GARCH.
UNIT III PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS 9

Portfolio Analysis – capital asset pricing model, Sharpe ratio, Option pricing models- binomial model
for options, Black Scholes model and Option implied volatility.
UNIT IV TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 9

Prediction using charts and fundamentals – RSI, ROC, MACD, moving average and candle charts,
simulating trading strategies. Prediction of share prices.
351
UNIT V CREDIT RISK ANALYSIS 9
Credit Risk analysis- Data processing, Decision trees, logistic regression and evaluating credit risk
model.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
CO1 The learners should be able to perform financial analysis for decision making using excel,
Python and R.
REFERENCES:
1. Financial analytics with R by Mark J. Bennett, Dirk L. Hugen, Cambridge university press.
2. Haskell Financial Data Modeling and Predictive Analytics Paperback – Import, 25 Oct 2013 by
Pavel Ryzhov.
3. Quantitative Financial Analytics: The Path To Investment Profits Paperback – Import, 11 Sep 2017
by Edward E Williams (Author), John A Dobelman.
4. Python for Finance - Paperback – Import, 30 Jun 2017 by Yuxing Yan (Author).
5. Mastering Python for Finance Paperback – Import, 29 Apr 2015 by James Ma Weiming.
VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY
CES331 SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about sustainable Infrastructure development goals, practices and to
understand the concepts of sustainable planning, design, construction, maintenance and
decommissioning of infrastructure projects.
UNIT I SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS 9

Definitions, principles and history of Sustainable Development - Sustainable development goals
(SDG): global and Indian – Infrastructure Demand and Supply - Environment and Development
linkages - societal and cultural demands – Sustainability indicators - Performance indicators of
sustainability and Assessment mechanism - Policy frameworks and practices: global and Indian –
Infrastructure Project finance – Infrastructure project life cycle - Constraints and barriers for
sustainable development - future directions.
UNIT II SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING 9

Overview of Infrastructure projects: Housing sector, Power sector, Water supply, road, rail and port
transportation sector, rural and urban infrastructure. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), Land
acquisition -Legal aspects, Resettlement &Rehabilitation and Development - Cost effectiveness
Analysis - Risk Management Framework for Infrastructure Projects, Economic, demand, political,
socio-environmental and cultural risks. Shaping the Planning Phase of Infrastructure Projects to
mitigate risks, Designing Sustainable Contracts, Negotiating with multiple Stakeholders on
Infrastructure Projects. Use of ICT tools in planning – Integrated planning - Clash detection in
construction - BIM (Building Information Modelling).
UNIT III SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND TECHNIQUES 9

Sustainability through lean construction approach - Enabling lean through information technology –
Lean in planning and design - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) - Location Based Management
System - Geospatial Technologies for machine control, site management, precision control and real
time progress monitoring - Role of logistics in achieving sustainable construction – Data
management for integrated supply chains in construction - Resource efficiency benefits of effective
logistics - Sustainability in geotechnical practice – Design considerations, Design Parameters and
Procedures – Quality control and Assurance - Use of sustainable construction techniques: Precast
concrete technology, Pre-engineered buildings.
352
UNIT IV SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS 9
Construction materials: Concrete, steel, glass, aluminium, timber and FRP - No/Low cement
concrete - Recycled and manufactured aggregate - Role of QC and durability - Sustainable
consumption – Eco-efficiency - green consumerism - product stewardship and green engineering -
Extended producer responsibility – Design for Environment Strategies, Practices, Guidelines,
Methods, And Tools. Eco-design strategies –Design for Disassembly - Dematerialization,
rematerialization, transmaterialization – Green procurement and green distribution - Analysis
framework for reuse and recycling – Typical constraints on reuse and recycling - Communication of
Life Cycle Information - Indian Eco mark scheme - Environmental product declarations –
Environmental marketing- Life cycle Analysis (LCA), Advances in LCA: Hybrid LCA, Thermodynamic
LCA - Extending LCA - economic dimension, social dimension - Life cycle costing (LCC) - Combining
LCA and LCC – Case studies
UNIT V SUSTAINABLE MAINTENANCE OF INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9

Case Studies - Sustainable projects in developed countries and developing nations - An Integrated
Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning and Management - Information Technology and
Systems for Successful Infrastructure Management, - Structural Health Monitoring for Infrastructure
projects - Innovative Design and Maintenance of Infrastructure Facilities - Capacity Building and
Improving the Governments Role in Infrastructure Implementation, Infrastructure Management
Systems and Future Directions. – Use of Emerging Technologies – IoT, Big Data Analytics and Cloud
Computing, Artificial Intelligences, Machine and Deep Learning, Fifth Generation (5G) Network
services for maintenance .
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1 Understand the environment sustainability goals at global and Indian scenario.
CO2 Understand risks in development of projects and suggest mitigation measures.
CO3 Apply lean techniques, LBMS and new construction techniques to achieve sustainability in
infrastructure construction projects.
CO4 Explain Life Cycle Analysis and life cycle cost of construction materials.
CO5 Explain the new technologies for maintenance of infrastructure projects.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles J Kibert, Sustainable Construction : Green Building Design & Delivery, 4th Edition ,
Wiley Publishers 2016.
2. Steve Goodhew, Sustainable Construction Process, Wiley Blackwell,UK, 2016.
3. Craig A. Langston & Grace K.C. Ding, Sustainable Practices in the Built Environment,
Butterworth Heinemann Publishers, 2011.
4. William P Spence, Construction Materials, Methods & Techniques (3e), Yesdee Publication
Pvt. Ltd, 2016.
5. New Building Materials and Construction World magazine
6. Kerry Turner. R, "Sustainable Environmental Management", Principles and Practice
Publisher:Belhaven Press,ISBN:1852930039.
7. Munier N, "Introduction to Sustainability”, Springer2005
8. Sharma, “Sustainable Smart Cities In India: Challenges And Future Perspectives”,
SPRINGER, 2022.
9. Ralph Horne, Tim Grant, KarliVerghese, Life Cycle Assessment: Principles, Practice and
Prospects, Csiro Publishing,2009
10. European Commission - Joint Research Centre - Institute for Environment and Sustainability:
International Reference Life Cycle Data System (ILCD) Handbook - General guide for Life
Cycle Assessment - Detailed guidance. Luxembourg. European Union;2010
11. Hudson, Haas, Uddin, Infrastructure management: integrating design, construction,
maintenance, rehabilitation, and renovation, McGraw Hill, (1997).
12. GregerLundesjö, Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction: Delivering
Tomorrow's Built Environment, Kogan Page Publishers, 2015.
353
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
2 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
4 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
Avg. 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
CES332 SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To educate the students about the issues of sustainability in agroecosystems, introduce the
concepts and principles of agroecology as applied to the design and management of sustainable
agricultural systems for a changing world.
UNIT I AGROECOLOGY, AGROECOSYSTEM AND SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE

CONCEPTS 9
Ecosystem definition - Biotic Vs. abiotic factors in an ecosystem - Ecosystem processes - Ecological
services and agriculture - Problems associated with industrial agriculture/food systems - Defining
sustainability - Characteristics of sustainable agriculture - Difference between regenerative and
sustainable agriculture systems
UNIT II SOIL HEALTH, NUTRIENT AND PEST MANAGEMENT 9

Soil health definition - Factors to consider (physical, chemical and biological) - Composition of
healthy soils - Soil erosion and possible control measures - Techniques to build healthy soil -
Management practices for improving soil nutrient - Ecologically sustainable strategies for pest and
disease control
UNIT III WATER MANAGEMENT 9

Soil water storage and availability - Plant yield response to water - Reducing evaporation in
agriculture - Earthworks and tanks for rainwater harvesting - Options for improving the productivity
of water - Localized irrigation - Irrigation scheduling - Fertigation - Advanced irrigation systems and
agricultural practices for sustainable water use
UNIT IV ENERGY AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 9

Types and sources of agricultural wastes - Composition of agricultural wastes - Sustainable
technologies for the management of agricultural wastes - Useful and high value materials produced
using different processes from agricultural wastes - Renewable energy for sustainable agriculture
UNIT V EVALUATING SUSTAINABILITY IN AGROECOSYSTEMS 9

Indicators of sustainability in agriculture - On-farm evaluation of agroecosystem sustainability -
Alternative agriculture approaches/ farming techniques for sustainable food production - Goals and
components of a community food system - Case studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
CO1 Have an in-depth knowledge about the concepts, principles and advantages of sustainable
agriculture
CO2 Discuss the sustainable ways in managing soil health, nutrients, pests and diseases
CO3 Suggest the ways to optimize the use of water in agriculture to promote an ecological use of
resources
354
CO4 Develop energy and waste management plans for promoting sustainable agriculture in non-
sustainable farming areas
CO5 Assess an ecosystem for its level of sustainability and prescribe ways of converting to a
sustainable system through the redesign of a conventional agroecosystem
REFERENCES:
1. Approaches to Sustainable Agriculture – Exploring the Pathways Towards the Future of
Farming, Oberc, B.P. & Arroyo Schnell, A., IUCN, Belgium, 2020
2. Natural bioactive products in sustainable agriculture, Singh, J. & Yadav, A.N., Springer, 2020
3. Organic Farming for Sustainable Agriculture, Nandwani, D., Springer, 2016
4. Principles of Agronomy for Sustainable Agriculture, Villalobos, F.J. & Fereres, E., Springer,
2016
5. Sustainable Agriculture for Food Security: A Global Perspective, Balkrishna, A., CRC Press,
2021
6. Sustainable Energy Solutions in Agriculture, Bundschuh, J. & Chen, G., CRC Press, 2014

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation
CES333 SUSTAINABLE BIOMATERIALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To Impart knowledge of biomaterials and their properties
 To learn about Fundamentals aspects of Biopolymers and their applications
 To learn about bioceramics and biopolymers
 To introduce the students about metals as biomaterials and their usage as implants
 To make the students understand the significance of bionanomaterials and its applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMATERIALS 9
Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements & classification of biomaterials- Types of
Biomaterials- Degradable and resorbable biomaterials- engineered natural materials-
Biocompatibility-Hydrogels-pyrolitic carbon for long term medical implants-textured and porous
materials-Bonding types- crystal structure-imperfection in crystalline structure-surface properties
and adhesion of materials –strength of biological tissues-performance of implants-tissue response
to implants- Impact and Future of Biomaterials
UNIT II BIO POLYMERS 9

Molecular structure of polymers -Molecular weight - Types of polymerization techniques–Types of
polymerization reactions- Physical states of polymers- Common polymeric biomaterials -
Polyethylene -Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA-Polylactic acid (PLA) and polyglycolic acid (PGA) -
Polycaprolactone (PCL) - Other biodegradable polymers –Polyurethan- reactions polymers for
medical purposes - Collagens- Elastin- Cellulose and derivatives-Synthetic polymeric membranes
and their biological applications
355
UNIT III BIO CERAMICS AND BIOCOMPOSITES 9
General properties- Bio ceramics -Silicate glass - Alumina (Al2O3) -Zirconia (ZrO2)-Carbon- Calcium
phosphates (CaP)- Resorbable Ceramics- surface reactive ceramics- Biomedical Composites-
Polymer Matrix Compsite(PMC)-Ceramic Matrix Composite(CMC)-Metal Matrix Composite (MMC)–
glass ceramics - Orthopedic implants-Tissue engineering scaffolds
UNIT IV METALS AS BIOMATERIALS 9

Biomedical metals-types and properties-stainless steel-Cobalt chromium alloys-Titanium alloys-
Tantalum-Nickel titanium alloy (Nitinol)- magnesium-based biodegradable alloys-surface properties
of metal implants for osteointegration-medical application-corrosion of metallic implants – biological
tolerance of implant metals
UNIT V NANOBIOMATERIALS 9
Meatllicnanobiomaterials–Nanopolymers-Nanoceramics- Nanocomposites -Carbon based
nanobiomaterials - transport of nanoparticles- release rate-positive and negative effect of nanosize-
nanofibres-Nano and micro features and their importance in implant performance-Nanosurface and
coats-Applications nanoantibiotics-Nanomedicines- Biochips – Biomimetics- BioNEMs -Biosensor-
Bioimaging/Molecular Imaging- challenges and future perspective.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Students will gain familiarity with Biomaterials and they will understand their importance.
CO2 Students will get an overview of different biopolymers and their properties
CO3 Students gain knowledge on some of the important Bioceramics and Biocomposite materials
CO4 Students gain knowledge on metals as biomaterials
CO5 Student gains knowledge on the importance of nanobiomaterials in biomedical applications.
REFERENCES
1. C. Mauli Agrawal, Joo L. Ong, Mark R. Appleford, Gopinath Mani “Introduction to Biomaterials
Basic Theory with Engineering Applications” Cambridge University Press, 2014.
2. Donglu shi “Introduction to Biomaterials” Tsinghua University press, 2006.
3. Joon Park, R.S.Lakes “Biomaterials An Introduction” third edition, Springer 2007.
4. M.Jaffe,W.Hammond, P.Tolias and T.Arinzeh “Characterization of Biomaterials” Wood head
publishing, 2013.
5. Buddy D.Ratner and Allan S.Hoffman Biomaterials Science “An Introduction to Material in
Medicine” Third Edition, 2013.
6. VasifHasirci, NesrinHasirci “Fundamentals of Biomaterials” Springer, 2018
7. Leopoido Javier Rios Gonzalez. “Handbook of Research on Bioenergy and Biomaterials:
Consolidated and green process” Apple academic press, 2021.
8. Devarajan Thangadurai, Jeyabalan Sangeetha, Ram Prasad “Functional Bionanomaterials”
springer, 2020.
9. Sujata.V.Bhat Biomaterials; Narosa Publishing house, 2002.
CES334 MATERIALS FOR ENERGY SUSTAINABILITY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To familiarize the students about the challenges and demands of energy sustainability
 To provide fundamental knowledge about electrochemical devices and the materials used.
 To introduce the students to various types of fuel cell
 To enable students to appreciate novel materials and their usage in photovoltaic application
 To introduce students to the basic principles of various types Supercapacitors and the
materials used.
356
UNIT I SUSTAINABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Introduction to energy demand and challenges ahead – sustainable source of energy (wind, solar
etc.) – electrochemical energy systems for energy harvesting and storage – materials for sustainable
electrochemical systems building – India centric solutions based on locally available materials –
Economics of wind and solar power generators vs. conventional coal plants – Nuclear energy
UNIT II ELECTROCHEMICAL DEVICES 9

Electrochemical Energy – Difference between primary and secondary batteries – Secondary battery
(Li-ion battery, Sodium-ion battery, Li-S battery, Li-O2 battery, Nickel Cadmium, Nickel Metal
Hydride) – Primary battery (Alkaline battery, Zinc-Carbon battery) – Materials for battery (Anode
materials – Lithiated graphite, Sodiated hard carbon, Silicon doped graphene, Lithium Titanate)
(Cathode Materials – S, LiCoO2, LiFePO4, LiMn2O4) – Electrolytes for Lithium-ion battery (ethylene
carbonate and propylene carbonate based)
UNIT III FUEL CELLS 9

Principle of operation of fuel cells – types of fuel cells (Proton exchange membrane fuel cells, alkaline
fuel cell, direct methanol fuel cells, direct borohydride fuel cells, phosphoric acid fuel cells, solid oxide
fuel cells, and molten carbonate fuel cells) – Thermodynamics of fuel cell – Fuel utilization –
electrolyte membrane ( proton conducting and anion conducting) – Catalysts ( Platinum, Platinum
alloys, carbon supported platinum systems and metal oxide supported platinum catalysts) – Anatomy
of fuel cells (gas diffusion layer, catalyst layer, flow field plate, current conductors, bipolar plates and
monopolar plates).
UNIT IV PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Physics of the solar cell – Theoretical limits of photovoltaic conversion – bulk crystal growth of Si
and wafering for photovoltaic application - Crystalline silicon solar cells – thin film silicon solar cells
– multijunction solar cells – amorphous silicon based solar cells – photovoltaic concentrators –
Cu(InGa)Se2 solar cells – Cadium Telluride solar cells – dye sensitized solar cells – Perovskite solar
cells – Measurement and characterization of solar cells - Materials used in solar cells ( metallic
oxides, CNT films, graphene, OD fullerenes, single-multi walled carbon nanotubes, two-dimensional
Graphene, organic or Small molecule-based solar cells materials - copper-phthalocyanine and
perylenetetracarboxylicbis - benzine – fullerenes - boron subphthalocyanine- tin (II) phthalocyanine)
UNIT V SUPERCAPACITORS 9
Supercapacitor –types of supercapacitors (electrostatic double-layer capacitors, pseudo capacitors
and hybrid capacitors) - design of supercapacitor-three and two electrode cell-parameters of
supercapacitor- Faradaic and non - Faradaic capacitance – electrode materials (transition metal
oxides (MO), mixed metal oxides, conducting polymers (CP), Mxenes, nanocarbons, non-noble
metal, chalcogenides, hydroxides and 1D-3D metal-organic frame work (MOF), activated carbon
fibres (ACF)- Hydroxides-Based Materials - Polyaniline (PANI), a ternary hybrid composite-
conductive polypyrrole hydrogels – Different types of nanocomposites for the SC electrodes
(carbon–carbon composites, carbon-MOs composites, carbon-CPs composites and MOs-CPs
composites) - Two-Dimensional (2D) Electrode Materials - 2D transition metal carbides,
carbonitrides, and nitrides.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 Students will acquire knowledge about energy sustainability.
CO2 Students understand the principles of different electrochemical devices.
CO3 Students learn about the working of fuel cells and their application.
CO4 Students will learn about various Photovoltaic applications and the materials used.
CO5 The students gain knowledge on different types of supercapacitors and the performance of
various materials
REFERENCES
1. Functional materials for sustainable energy applications; John A. Kilner, Stephen J. Skinner,
Stuart J. C. Irvine and Peter P. Edwards.
2. Hand Book of Fuel Cells: Fuel Cell Technology and Applications, Wolf Vielstich, Arnold
Lamm, Hubert Andreas Gasteiger, Harumi Yokokawa, Wiley, London 2003.
357
3. B.E. Conway, Electrochemical supercapacitors: scientific fundamentals and technological
applications, Kluwer Academic / Plenum publishers, New York, 1999.
4. T.R. Crompton, Batteries reference book, Newners, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Materials for Supercapacitor applications; B.Viswanathan. M.Aulice Scibioh
6. Electrode Materials for Supercapacitors: A Review of Recent Advances, Parnia
Forouzandeh, Vignesh Kumaravel and Suresh C. Pillai, catalysts 2020.
7. Recent advances, practical challenges, and perspectives of intermediate temperature solid
oxide fuel cell cathodes Amanda Ndubuisi, Sara Abouali, Kalpana Singh and
VenkataramanThangadurai, J. Mater. Chem. A, 2022.
8. Review of next generation photovoltaic solar cell technology and comparative materialistic
development Neeraj Kant, Pushpendra Singh, Materials Today: Proceedings, 2022.
CES335 GREEN TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To acquire knowledge on green systems and the environment, energy technology and
efficiency, and sustainability.
 To provide green engineering solutions to energy demand, reduced energy footprint.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF GREEN CHEMISTRY 9

Historical Perspectives and Basic Concepts. The twelve Principles of Green Chemistry and green
engineering. Green chemistry metrics- atom economy, E factor, reaction mass efficiency, and other
green chemistry metrics, application of green metrics analysis to synthetic plans.
UNIT II POLLUTION TYPES 9

Pollution – types, causes, effects, and abatement. Waste – sources of waste, different types of
waste, chemical, physical and biochemical methods of waste minimization and recycling.
UNIT III GREEN REAGENTS AND GREEN SYNTHESIS 9

Environmentally benign processes- alternate solvents- supercritical solvents, ionic liquids, water as
a reaction medium, energy-efficient design of processes- photo, electro and sono chemical methods,
microwave-assisted reactions
UNIT IV DESIGNING GREEN PROCESSES 9

Safe design, process intensification, in process monitoring. Safe product and process design –
Design for degradation, Real-time Analysis for pollution prevention, inherently safer chemistry for
accident prevention
UNIT V GREEN NANOTECHNOLOGY 9

Nanomaterials for water treatment, nanotechnology for renewable energy, nanotechnology for
environmental remediation and waste management, nanotechnology products as potential
substitutes for harmful chemicals, environmental concerns with nanotechnology
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: To understand the principles of green engineering and technology
CO2: To learn about pollution using hazardous chemicals and solvents
CO3: To modify processes and products to make them green and safe.
CO4: To design processes and products using green technology
CO5: To understand advanced technology in green synthesis
358
TEXT BOOKS
1. Green technology and design for the environment, Samir B. Billatos, Nadia A. Basaly, Taylor &
Francis, Washington, DC, ©1997
2. Green Chemistry – An introductory text - M. Lancaster, RSC, 2016.
3. Green chemistry metrics - Alexi Lapkin and david Constable (Eds) ,Wiley publications,2008
REFERENCE
1. Environmental chemistry, Stanley E Manahan, Taylor and Francis, 2017
CES336 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MONITORING AND ANALYSIS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand and study the complexity of the environment in relation to pollutants generated
due to industrial activity.
 To analyze the quality of the environmental parameters and monitor the same for the purpose
of environmental risk assessment.
UNIT I: ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND STANDARDS 9

Introduction- Environmental Standards- Classification of Environmental Standards- Global
Environmental Standards- Environmental Standards in India- Ambient air quality standards- water
quality standard- Environmental Monitoring-Need for environmental monitoring- Concepts of
environmental monitoring- Techniques of Environmental Monitoring.
UNIT II: MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS 9

Current Environmental Issues- Global Environmental monitoring programme-International
conventions- Application of Environmental Monitoring- Atmospheric Monitoring - screening
parameters – Significance of environmental sampling- sampling methods – water sampling -
sampling of ambient air-sampling of flue gas.
UNIT III: ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 9

Classification of Instrumental Method- Analysis of Organic Pollutants by Spectrophotometric
methods -Determination of nitrogen, phosphorus and, chemical oxygen demand (COD) in sewage;
Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD)- Sampling techniques for air pollution measurements; analysis
of particulates and air pollutants like oxides of nitrogen, oxides of sulfur, carbon monoxide,
hydrocarbon; Introduction to advanced instruments for environmental analysis
UNIT IV : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME (EMP) & RISKASSESSMENT 9

Water quality monitoring programme- national water quality monitoring- Parameters for National
Water Quality Monitoring- monitoring protocol; Process of risk assessment- hazard identification-
exposure assessment- dose-response assessment; risk characterization.
UNIT V: AUTOMATED DATA ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING 9

Data Acquisition for Process Monitoring and Control - The Data Acquisition System - Online Data
Acquisition, Monitoring, and Control - Implementation of a Data Management System - Review of
Observational Networks -Sensors and transducers- classification of transducers- data acquisition
system- types of data acquisition systems- data management and quality control; regulatory
overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students will know
CO1 Basic concepts of environmental standards and monitoring.
CO2 the ambient air quality and water quality standards;
CO3 the various instrumental methods and their principles for environmental monitoring
CO4 The significance of environmental standards in monitoring quality and sustainability of the
environment.
359
CO5 the various ways of raising environmental awareness among the people.
CO6 Know the standard research methods that are used worldwide for monitoring the environment.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Environmental monitoring Handbook, Frank R. Burden, © 2002 by The McGraw-Hill
Companies, Inc.
2. Handbook of environmental analysis: chemical pollutants in the air, water, soil, and soild
wastes / Pradyot Patnaik, © 1997 by CRC Press, Inc
REFERENCES
1. Environmental monitoring / edited by G. Bruce Wiersma, © 2004 by CRC Press LLC.
2. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merit, J. A. Dean and F. A. Settle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis,
CBP Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 1988.
3. Heaslip, G. (1975) Environmental Data Handling. John Wiley & Sons. New York.
Course Program Outcomes

Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 - 1 1 1 - -
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 - - - 2 - 3 3 1 - -
CO5 1 1 3 2 1 - - - 3 - 3 1 2 - -
CO6 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
Over all 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
CES337 INTEGRATED ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To create awareness on the energy scenario of India with respect to world
 To understand the fundamentals of energy sources, energy efficiency and resulting
environmental implications of energy utilisation
 Familiarisation on the concept of sustainable development and its benefits
 Recognize the potential of renewable energy sources and its conversion technologies for
attaining sustainable development
 Acquainting with energy policies and energy planning for sustainable development
UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Comparison of energy scenario – India and World (energy sources, generation mix, consumption
pattern, T&D losses, energy demand, per capita energy consumption) – energy pricing – Energy
security
UNIT II ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Conventional Energy Sources - Emissions from fuels – Air, Water and Land pollution –
Environmental standards - measurement and controls
UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) -
Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty. Globalization
and Economic growth - Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and growth.
360
UNIT IV RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGY 9
Renewable Energy – Sources and Potential – Technologies for harnessing from Solar, Wind, Hydro,
Biomass and Oceans – Principle of operation, relative merits and demerits
UNIT V ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

National & State Energy Policy - National solar mission - Framework of Central Electricity Authority
- National Hydrogen Mission - Energy and climate policy - State Energy Action Plan, RE integration,
Road map for ethanol blending, Energy Efficiency and Energy Mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1 Understand the world and Indian energy scenario
CO2 Analyse energy projects, its impact on environment and suggest control strategies
CO3 Recognise the need of Sustainable development and its impact on human resource
development
CO4 Apply renewable energy technologies for sustainable development
CO5 Fathom Energy policies and planning for sustainable development.
REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory
body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Robert Ristirer and Jack P. Kraushaar, “Energy and the environment”, Willey, 2005.
3. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University
Press, U.K., 2012
4. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.
5. Dhandapani Alagiri, Energy Security in India Current Scenario, The ICFAI University Press,
2006.
6. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
7. https://www.niti.gov.in/verticals/energy
CES338 ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the types of energy sources, energy efficiency and environmental implications
of energy utilisation
 To create awareness on energy audit and its impacts
 To acquaint the techniques adopted for performance evaluation of thermal utilities
 To familiarise on the procedures adopted for performance evaluation of electrical utilities
 To learn the concept of sustainable development and the implication of energy usage
UNIT I ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9
Primary energy sources - Coal, Oil, Gas – India Vs World with respect to energy production and
consumption, Climate Change, Global Warming, Ozone Depletion, UNFCCC, COP
UNIT II ENERGY AUDITING 9

Need and types of energy audit. Energy management (audit) approach-understanding energy costs,
bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing system
efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements, fuel & energy substitution, energy audit
instruments
361
UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES 9
Energy conservation avenues in steam generation and utilisation, furnaces, Thermic Fluid Heaters.
Insulation and Refractories - Commercial waste heat recovery devices: recuperator, regenerator,
heat pipe, heat exchangers (Plate, Shell & Tube), heat pumps, and thermocompression
UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVTION IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES 9

Demand side management - Power factor improvement – Energy efficient transformers - Energy
conservation avenues in Motors, HVAC, fans, blowers, pumps, air compressors, illumination
systems and cooling towers
UNIT V SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG).
Globalization and Economic growth. Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and
growth. Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty,
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1 Understand the prevailing energy scenario
CO2 Familiarise on energy audits and its relevance
CO3 Apply the concept of energy audit on thermal utilities
CO4 Employ relevant techniques for energy improvement in electrical utilities
CO5 Understand Sustainable development and its impact on human resource development
REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a statutory
body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Eastop.T.D& Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”, Logman
Scientific & Technical, ISBN-0-582-03184, 1990
3. W.R. Murphy and G. McKay “Energy Management” Butterworths, London 1987
4. Pratap Bhattacharyya, “Climate Change and Greenhouse Gas Emission”, New India
Publishing Agency- Nipa,2020
5. Matthew John Franchetti , Defne Apul “Carbon Footprint Analysis: Concepts, Methods,
Implementation, and Case Studies” CRC Press,2012
6. Robert A. Ristinen, Jack J. Kraushaar, Jeffrey T. Brack, “Energy and the Environment”, 4th
Edition,Wiley,2022
7. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
8. Sustainable development in India: Stocktaking in the run up to Rio+20: Report prepared by
TERI for MoEF, 2011.
362

BE Civil

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BE Civil

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BE Civil

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

NON AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES

Graduates of the programme B E Civil Engineering will

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

PO# Graduate Attribute

1 Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

PSO1 Knowledge of Civil Engineering discipline

PSO2 Critical analysis ofCivil Engineering problems andinnovation

PSO3 Conceptualizationand evaluation of engineering solutions to Civil Engineering

Engineering Physics 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -

Basic Electrical, Electronics and Instrumentation

Water Supply and Waste Water Engineering 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2

Highway and Railway Engineering 1

1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation

Registration of Professional Elective Courses from Verticals:

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

VERTICAL II: CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES AND PRACTICES

VERTICAL III: GEOTECHNICAL

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

VERTICAL V: TRANSPORTATION INFRASTRUCTURE

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

VERTICAL VI: ENVIRONMENT

VERTICAL VIII: OCEAN ENGINEERING

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

VERTICAL IX: DIVERSIFIED COURSES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

OPEN ELECTIVES – III

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

CREDITS PER SEMESTER

Complete details are available in clause 4.10 (Amendments) of Regulations 2021.

VERTICAL I VERTICAL II VERTICAL III VERTICAL IV VERTICAL V

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

“Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of

(i) Physical Activity

(ii) Creative Arts

(iii) Universal Human Values

(iv) Literary Activity

(vi) Lectures by Eminent People

(vii) Visits to Local Area

(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations

(ix) Department Specific Activities

HS3152 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH I LTPC

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 1

INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 8

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 9

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 9

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 9

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

MA3151 MATRICES AND CALCULUS L T P C

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3

UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING